Preface Contents SIPROTEC Introduction Functions High Voltage Bay Control Unit 6MD66x Mounting and Commissioning Technical Data Appendix V 4.82 Literature Manual Glossary Index C53000-G1876-C102-7 1 2 3 4 A Note For safety purposes, please note instructions and warnings in the Preface. Disclaimer of liability Copyright We have checked the text of this manual against the hardware and software described. However, deviations from the description cannot be completely ruled out, so that no liability can be accepted for any errors or omissions contained in the information given. Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2011. All rights reserved. The information given in this document is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections will be included in subsequent editions. We appreciate any suggestions for improvement. We reserve the right to make technical improvements without notice. Document Version 4.71.01 Release date 08.2011 Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Dissemination or reproduction of this document, or evaluation and communication of its contents, is not authorized except where expressly permitted. Violations are liable for damages. All rights reserved, particularly for the purposes of patent application or trademark registration. Registered Trademarks SIPROTEC, SINAUT, SICAM and DIGSI are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. Other designations in this manual might be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes would infringe the rights of the owner. Order no.: C53000-G1876-C102-7 Preface Purpose of this Manual This manual describes the functions, operation, installation and start-up of the High Voltage Bay Control Unit 6MD66x. In particular it contains: * Information regarding the configuration of the device extent and descriptions of device functions and settings Chapter 2; * Instructions for mounting and commissioning Chapter 3; * Compilation of technical data Chapter 4; * As well as a compilation of the most significant data for experienced users in Appendix A. For general information on how to operate and configure SIPROTEC 4 device, please refer to the SIPROTEC System Description /1/. Target Audience Protection engineers, commissioning engineers, personnel concerned with adjustment, checking, and service of selective protection equipment, automatic and control facilities, and personnel of electrical facilities and power plants. Scope of validity of the manual This manual is valid for SIPROTEC 4 High Voltage Bay Control Unit 6MD66x; Firmware version V 4.82. Indication of Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility (EMC Council Directive 2004/108/EC) and concerning electrical equipment for use within specified voltage limits (Low-voltage directive 2006/95 EC). This conformity is proved by tests conducted by Siemens AG in accordance with the Council Directives in agreement with the generic standards EN61000-6-2 and EN 61000-6-4 for the EMC directive, and with the standard EN 60255-27 for the low-voltage directive. The device has been designed and produced for industrial use. The product conforms with the international standard of the series IEC 60255 and the German standard VDE 0435. Additional Standards IEEE Std C37.90 (see Chapter 4, Technical Data") SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 3 Preface Additional Support Should further information on the System SIPROTEC 4 be desired or should particular problems arise which are not covered sufficiently for the purchaser's purpose, the matter should be referred to the local Siemens representative. Our Customer Support Center provides a 24-hour service. Phone: +49 (180) 524-7000 Fax: +49 (180) 524-2471 E-mail: support.energy@siemens.com Training Courses Enquiries regarding individual training courses should be addressed to our Training Center: Siemens AG Siemens Power Academy TD Humboldt Street 59 90459 Nuremberg Phone: +49 (911) 433-7005 Fax: +49 (911) 433-7929 Internet: www.siemens.com/power-academy-td 4 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Preface Safety Information This manual does not constitute a complete index of all required safety measures for operation of the equipment (module, device), as special operational conditions may require additional measures. However, it comprises important information that should be noted for purposes of personal safety as well as avoiding material damage. Information that is highlighted by means of a warning triangle and according to the degree of danger, is illustrated as follows. DANGER! Danger indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial material damage will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING! indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage may result if proper precautions are not taken. Caution! indicates that minor personal injury or property damage may result if proper precautions are not taken. This particularly applies to damage to or within the device itself and consequential damage thereof. Note indicates information on the device, handling of the device, or the respective part of the instruction manual which is important to be noted. SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 5 Preface WARNING! Qualified Personnel Commissioning and operation of the equipment (module, device) as set out in this manual may only be carried out by qualified personnel. Qualified personnel in terms of the technical safety information as set out in this manual are persons who are authorized to commission, activate, to ground and to designate devices, systems and electrical circuits in accordance with the safety standards. Use as prescribed The operational equipment (device, module) may only be used for such applications as set out in the catalogue and the technical description, and only in combination with third-party equipment recommended or approved by Siemens. The successful and safe operation of the device is dependent on proper handling, storage, installation, operation, and maintenance. When operating an electrical equipment, certain parts of the device are inevitably subject to dangerous voltage. Severe personal injury or property damage may result if the device is not handled properly. Before any connections are made, the device must be grounded to the ground terminal. All circuit components connected to the voltage supply may be subject to dangerous voltage. Dangerous voltage may be present in the device even after the power supply voltage has been removed (capacitors can still be charged). Operational equipment with open circuited current transformer circuits may not be operated. The limit values as specified in this manual or in the operating instructions may not be exceeded. This aspect must also be observed during testing and commissioning. 6 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Preface Typographic and Symbol Conventions To designate terms which refer in the text to information of the device or for the device, the following fonts are used: Parameter Names Names of configuration and function parameters that actually appear on the device display or on the computer screen (using the DIGSI software) are written in bold and monospaced font (fixed width). The same applies to headings and menus. 1234A Parameter addresses are written in the same character style as parameter names. In the overview lists the suffix Ais added to the parameter addresses if the parameter is only accessible in DIGSI via the option Display Additional Settings. Parameter States Possible settings of text parameters that actually appear on the device display or on the computer screen (using the DIGSI software) are additionally written in italics. The same applies to menu options. Indications" Designators for information, which may be output by the device or required from other devices or from the switch gear, are marked in a monospace type style in quotation marks. Deviations may be permitted in drawings and tables when the type of designator can be obviously derived from the illustration. The following symbols are used in drawings: Device-internal logical input signal Device-internal (logical) output signal Internal input signal of an analog quantity External binary input signal with number (binary input, input indication) External binary output signal with number (device indication) External binary output signal with number (device indication) used as input signal Example of a parameter switch designated FUNCTION with address 1234 and the possible settings ON and OFF SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 7 Preface Besides these, graphical symbols are used according to IEC 60617-12 and IEC 60617-13 or symbols derived from these standards. The most frequent symbols are the following: Input signal of an analog quantity OR gate AND gate Exclusive OR (antivalence): output is active if only one of the inputs is active XNOR gate: Output active if both inputs are simultaneously active or inactive. Dynamic input signals (edge-triggered) above with positive, below with negative edge One analog output signal is created from multiple analog input signals. Limit value stage with parameter address and parameter name Timer (pickup delay T adjustable) with parameter address and parameter name Time stage (reset delay T, nonadjustable) Edge-controlled time stage with effective time T Static memory (RS flipflop) wit setting input (S), resetting input (R), output (Q) and inverted output (Q) 8 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Contents 1 2 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 1.1 Overall Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 1.2 Application Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 1.3 Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 2.1 General Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 2.1.1 2.1.1.1 2.1.1.2 2.1.1.3 Functional scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Configuring the Functional Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 2.1.2 2.1.2.1 2.1.2.2 Power System Data 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 2.1.3 2.1.3.1 2.1.3.2 2.1.3.3 2.1.3.4 2.1.3.5 Device, General Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Function Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Indications of the device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Information List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 2.1.4 2.1.4.1 2.1.4.2 2.1.4.3 2.1.4.4 Oscillographic Fault Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Information List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 2.1.5 2.1.5.1 Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Information List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 2.2 Command Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 2.2.1 2.2.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 Function Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 2.2.2 2.2.2.1 2.2.2.2 Control Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 Function Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 Information List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 2.2.3 2.2.3.1 2.2.3.2 Control Authorization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Information List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 2.2.4 2.2.4.1 Process Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 2.3 2.3.1 Indication Processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 9 Contents 2.4 2.4.1 2.4.1.1 2.4.1.2 Measurement, Transducer Inputs 20 mA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Information List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 2.4.2 2.4.2.1 General Information on Transducer Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 2.4.3 2.4.3.1 2.4.3.2 Parameterizing Transducer Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Configuring the Measuring Transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Allocating a Measuring Transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 2.4.4 2.4.4.1 2.4.4.2 2.4.4.3 2.4.4.4 Measurement U. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Information List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 2.4.5 2.4.5.1 2.4.5.2 2.4.5.3 2.4.5.4 Measurement I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Information List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 2.4.6 2.4.6.1 2.4.6.2 2.4.6.3 2.4.6.4 Measurement 1phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Information List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 2.4.7 2.4.7.1 2.4.7.2 2.4.7.3 2.4.7.4 Measurement 3phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Information List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 2.4.8 2.4.8.1 2.4.8.2 2.4.8.3 2.4.8.4 Measurement Aron . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Information List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 2.5 Metered Value Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 2.5.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 2.5.2 Using the Pulse Metered Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 2.5.3 Use Measured Value / Metered Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 2.6 10 Measured value processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Threshold-Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 2.6.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 2.6.2 Information List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Contents 2.7 Circuit breaker synchronisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68 2.7.1 2.7.1.1 2.7.1.2 2.7.1.3 2.7.1.4 Function Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68 Functioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68 Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85 Information List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86 2.7.2 2.7.2.1 SYNC function groups 6 - 8, special features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87 2.7.3 2.7.3.1 2.7.3.2 Parameterizing the SYNC function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88 Inserting the Synchronisation Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88 Configuring Synchronisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89 2.8 Switchgear Interlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92 2.8.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92 2.8.2 Information overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 2.9 Circuit breaker failure protection (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102 2.9.1 Function Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102 2.9.2 Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 2.9.3 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120 2.9.4 Information List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121 2.10 Automatic reclosure function (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 2.10.1 Function Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 2.10.2 Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138 2.10.3 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145 2.10.4 Information List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 2.11 Function control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 2.11.1 Line Energization Recognition 2.11.2 Detection of the circuit breaker position 2.11.3 Open-pole Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153 2.11.4 Voltage Supervision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154 2.11.5 Pickup Logic for the Entire Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155 2.11.6 Tripping Logic of the Entire Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156 2.11.7 Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158 2.12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151 Inter-relay communication through port C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159 2.12.1 Function Principle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160 2.12.2 Configuring Inter-relay Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162 2.12.3 Correlation between Number of Nodes and Transmission Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166 2.12.4 Selecting a Combination Node. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167 2.12.5 Allocating Information of the Individual Devices Involved . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169 2.12.6 Routing Information between the Devices Involved . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171 2.12.7 Setting Communication Parameters for Individual Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173 2.12.8 Setting communication parameters for a combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175 2.12.9 Checking and Updating Parameter Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177 2.12.10 Printing Combination Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178 2.12.11 Time Synchronisation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 11 Contents 2.13 2.13.1 Function Principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 2.13.2 Parameterizing the GOOSE Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 2.13.3 Communication connection status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 2.13.4 Selecting the GOOSE Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 2.13.5 Creating an IP Network with the System Configurator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 2.13.6 Routing Information between Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 2.13.7 Update Parameter Sets and Print Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 2.13.8 Time Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 2.13.9 Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 2.14 Function Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 2.14.2 Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Web Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 2.15.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 2.15.2 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 2.15.3 Operating Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Mounting and Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 3.1 Mounting and Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 3.1.1 Configuration Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 3.1.2 3.1.2.1 3.1.2.2 3.1.2.3 3.1.2.4 3.1.2.5 Hardware Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Switching Elements on Printed Circuit Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Interface Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 3.1.3 3.1.3.1 3.1.3.2 3.1.3.3 3.1.3.4 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Panel Flush Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Installation in a Rack or Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Mounting with detached operator panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Mounting without operator panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 3.2 3.2.1 12 Connecting external instrument transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 2.14.1 2.15 3 Inter relay communication with GOOSE through Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Checking Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Checking the Data Connections of the Serial Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 3.2.2 Operator interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 3.2.3 Service / function interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 3.2.4 System interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 3.2.5 Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 3.2.6 Time Synchronization Interface 3.2.7 Optical Fibres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 3.2.8 Measurement Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 3.2.9 Checking the System Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Contents 3.3 3.3.1 Test Mode / Transmission Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238 3.3.2 Testing System Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238 3.3.3 Checking the Binary Inputs and Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240 3.3.4 Checking for Breaker Failure Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243 3.3.5 Triggering Oscillographic Recording for Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245 3.3.6 Testing User-defined Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246 3.3.7 Trip/Close Test for the Configured Resource . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246 3.4 4 Final Preparation of the Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247 Technical Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249 4.1 A Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250 4.1.1 Analog Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250 4.1.2 Auxiliary voltage 4.1.3 Binary inputs and outputs 4.1.4 Communications interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253 4.1.5 Electrical Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257 4.1.6 Mechanical Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259 4.1.7 Climatic stress 4.1.8 Deployment Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260 4.1.9 Construction designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261 4.2 Switching device control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262 4.3 Circuit Breaker Synchronisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263 4.4 User defined functions (CFC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265 4.5 Operational measured values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270 4.6 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272 4.7 Automatic Reclosure (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274 4.8 Inter-relay communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275 4.9 External instrument transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276 4.10 Additional functions 4.11 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277 4.11.1 Panel flush mounting and cabinet flush mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278 4.11.2 Surface mounting with detached operation panel or without operation panel . . . . . . . . . . . . .279 4.11.3 Detached Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280 4.11.4 D-subminiature Connector of Dongle Cable (Panel or Cubicle Door Cutout) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281 Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283 A.1 Ordering Information and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284 A.1.1 A.1.1.1 Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284 6MD66x V 4.82 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284 A.1.2 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286 A.2 Terminal Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288 A.2.1 Panel Flush Mounting or Cabinet Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288 A.2.2 Housing with Detached Operator Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294 A.2.3 Housing for installation without operator panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 13 Contents A.3 Connection Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 A.3.1 Connection Examples for Measured Values and Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 A.3.2 Configuration Examples for Breaker Failure Protection and Automatic Reclosure . . . . . . . . . . . 308 A.3.3 Connection Examples for Measurement Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 A.4 Default Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 A.4.1 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 A.4.2 Binary Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 A.4.3 Binary Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 A.4.4 Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 A.4.5 Default Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 A.4.6 Pre-defined CFC Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 A.5 Protocol-dependent Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 A.6 Functional Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 A.7 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 A.8 Information List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 A.9 Group Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 A.10 Measured Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 Literature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 14 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Introduction 1 The SIPROTEC 6MD66x devices are introduced in this section. An overview of the devices is presented in their application, characteristics, and scope of functions. 1.1 Overall Operation 16 1.2 Application Scope 19 1.3 Characteristics 21 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 15 Introduction 1.1 Overall Operation 1.1 Overall Operation The digital, high-voltage SIPROTEC 6MD66x bay controllers are equipped with a powerful microprocessor system. All tasks, from issuing commands to circuit breakers to the acquisition of measured quantities are processed in a completely digital way. Figure 1-1 16 Hardware structure of the High Voltage Bay Control Unit 6MD66x SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Introduction 1.1 Overall Operation Analog Inputs The measuring inputs (ILx, Ux) convert the currents and voltages coming from the transformers and adapt them to the level appropriate for the internal processing of the device. The device has three current inputs, four voltage inputs and two transducer inputs (20 mA). The current and voltage inputs can be used separately for measured value acquisition. Within the scope of configuration, 1- or 3-phase evaluation functions are available for evaluation of the analog inputs and evaluation of measured quantities connected in an Aron connection. With voltage inputs, both phase-earth and phase-phase voltages can be applied. In addition to a 3-phase system, another reference voltage for synchronisation tasks or a displacement voltage Vn can be measured via the fourth voltage input. Furthermore, two measuring transducer inputs are available. The analogue values are transferred further to the IA input amplifier group. The input amplification IA stage provides high-resistance terminations for the analogue input quantities. It consists of filters that are optimised with regard to bandwidth and processing speed. The analogue-to-digital (AD) stage consists of a multiplexor, an analogue-to-digital (A/D) converter and memory components for the transmission of digital signals to the microcomputer system. Microcomputer system The control functions and the measurement quantities are processed in the microcomputer system C. They especially consist of: * Control of command outputs, * Processing of indication inputs, * Recording of indications, * Control of signals for logical functions, * Filtering and conditioning of the measured signals, * Continuous monitoring of the measured quantities * Monitoring the communication with other devices, * Querying of limit values and time sequences, * Management of the operating system and the associated functions such as data recording, real-time clock, communication, interfaces, etc. Binary Inputs and Outputs Binary inputs and outputs from and to the bay controller are routed via the I/O modules (inputs and outputs). The computer system obtains the information from the system (e.g remote resetting) or the external equipment (e.g. blocking commands). Outputs are, in particular, commands to the switchgear units and indications for remote signalling of important events and statuses. SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 17 Introduction 1.1 Overall Operation Front Elements With devices with integrated or detached operator panel, information such as messages related to events, states, measured values and the functional status of the device are provided via light-emitting diodes (LEDs) and a display screen (LCD) on the front panel. Integrated control and numerical keys combined with the LC display allow local operator communication" between the operating staff and the device. Via these elements all information of the device such as configuration and setting parameters, operational indications and measured values can be accessed. Another central function is the control of system equipment via the operator interface of the device. Moreover, a front panel has a 9-pin D-subminiature connector for local communication with a personal computer using DIGSI. Serial Interfaces Via the serial operator interface in the front panel, communication with a personal computer using the operating program DIGSI is possible. This facilitates a comfortable handling of all device functions. A serial service interface can likewise make communication via PC with the device possible by using DIGSI. This port is especially well suited for the fixed wiring of the devices to the PC or operation via a modem. The service interface can be used alternatively to connect two 7XV5662 measurement boxes. This enables up to 16 external temperature, pressure or any 20-mA measured values to be detected. Via the serial systeminterface all device data can be transferred to a central evaluation unit or to a control centre. Depending on the application, this interface, just like the service interface, can be equipped with varying physical transmission modes and different protocols. The serial interface for inter-device communication (optional) on the device back enables the communication with other SIPROTEC 4 device which also support inter-device communication. The communication becomes thus independent of the connection to the central controller (SICAM Station Controller). A further interface is provided for the time synchronization of the internal clock via external synchronization sources. Power Supply These described functional units are supplied by a power supply PS with the necessary power in the different voltage levels. Transient dips of the supply voltage, which may occur during short-circuits or interruptions in the power supply system, are bridged by a capacitor (see also Technical Data). 18 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Introduction 1.2 Application Scope 1.2 Application Scope The SIPROTEC 6MD66x High Voltage Bay Control Units are integrated components of the SICAM energy automation system. Command outputs and indication inputs are especially adapted to the requirements of highvoltage technology. When connecting the circuit breaker, the High Voltage Bay Control Unit can check if the synchronization conditions of the two subnetworks to be combined are met (synchrocheck). This makes the use of an additional external synchronization device unnecessary. The synchronization conditions can be configured conveniently with the DIGSI operating program. The device distinguishes between synchronous and asynchronous networks and reacts differently in cicuit breaker close decision. Interlocking, breaker failure protection and automatic reclosure function ensure a high switchgear availability. Control Functions The device is equipped with control functions which operate, close and open, switchgear via the integrated operator panel, the system interface, binary inputs, and using a personal computer with DIGSI software. The status of the primary equipment can be transmitted to the device via auxiliary contacts connected to binary inputs. The present status (or position) of the primary equipment can be displayed on the device, and used for interlocking or plausibility monitoring. The number of the operating equipment to be switched is limited by the binary inputs and outputs available in the device or the binary inputs and outputs allocated for the switch position indications. Depending on the primary equipment being controlled, one binary input (single point indication) or two binary inputs (double point indication) may be used for this process. The capability of switching primary equipment can be restricted by a setting associated with switching authority (Remote or Local), and by the operating mode (interlocked/non-interlocked, with or without password request). Processing of interlocking conditions for switching (e.g. system interlocking) can be established with the aid of integrated, user-configurable logic functions. Inter-relay communication through port C, abbreviated IRC, is a feature that allows the direct exchange of information, such as interlocking conditions, between SIPROTEC 4 devices. Indications and Measured Values The indication list provides information about conditions in the power system and the device. Measurement quantities and values that are calculated can be displayed locally and communicated via the serial interfaces. Device indications can be assigned to LEDs, externally processed via output contacts, linked with user-definable logic functions and/or issued via serial interfaces. SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 19 Introduction 1.2 Application Scope Communication For communication with external operator and control systems and Inter-relay communication through port C, serial interfaces are available. Please note that the following interfaces are optional or only available on certain device variants: * Operator interface Service interface * System interface A 9-pin DSUB socket on the front panel is used for local communication with a PC. By means of the SIPROTEC 4 operating software DIGSI, all operational and evaluation tasks can be executed via this user interface, such as specifying and modifying configuration parameters and settings, configuring user-specific logic functions, retrieving operational messages and measured values, inquiring device conditions and measured variables, issuing control commands. Depending on the individual ordering variant, additional interfaces are located on the rear side of the device. They serve to establish an extensive communication with other digital operating, control and memory components. As an extension to the universal operator program DIGSI, a Web-Monitor is provided in the 6MD66x which can be activated by a long-distance transmission link and a browser (e.g. Internet Explorer). The WEB-Monitor is intended to be a commissioning aid and can display, for instance, parameters and measured values. Refer also to Section 2.15. The service interface can be operated via electrical or optical data lines (fibre optics cables) and also allows communication via modem. For this reason, remote operation is possible via a personal computer and the DIGSI operator software, e.g. to operate several devices via a central PC. The system interface ensures the central communication between the device and the substation controller. The service interface can be operated through electrical or optical data cables. The device may have a field bus coupling with PROFIBUS FMS. The PROFIBUS FMS according to DIN 19 245 is an open communication standard with particularly wide acceptance in process control and automation engineering, with especially high performance. A profile has been defined for the PROFIBUS communication that covers all of the information types required for process control engineering. The integration of the devices into the power automation system SICAM can also take place with this profile. Alternatively, the device can be operated via PROFIBUS DP. In addition, standardized protocols in accordance with IEC 60 870-5-103 are available for data transmission. The integration of the devices into automation systems from other manufacturers can also take place with this profile. An EN-100 module allows to integrate the devices into 100 Mbit Ethernet communication networks used by process control and automation systems and running IEC 61850 protocols. In parallel to the process control integration of the device, this interface can also be used for communication with DIGSI and for inter-relay communication via GOOSE. Optionally, you can use an additional serial interface for Inter-relay communication through port C. It takes over communication with other SIPROTEC 4 devices, regardless if the device is connected to the control center. Note The Appendix contains a list of the functions which can be handled via the respective interfaces. 20 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Introduction 1.3 Characteristics 1.3 Characteristics General Features * Powerful 32-bit microprocessor system. * Complete digital measured value processing and control, from the sampling and digitalization of the analogue input quantities to the initiation of outputs for tripping or closing circuit breakers. * Complete galvanic and reliable separation between the internal processing circuits of the device and the external measurement, control, and power supply circuits because of the design of the analog input transducers, binary input and output modules, and the DC/DC or AC/DC converters. * Extensive communication possibilities with external devices using different interfaces and protocols (as described above under "Communication"). * Complete set of functions necessary for the proper control of feeders or busbars. * Easy device operation through an integrated operator panel or by means of a connected personal computer running DIGSI. * Continuous calculation and display of measured and metered values on the front of the device * Constant monitoring of the measurement quantities, as well as continuous self-diagnostics covering the hardware and software. * Communication with central control equipment via serial interfaces is possible through the choice of data cable, modem, or fibre optic cable, as an option. * Optional Inter-relay communication through port C for direct communication between the devices, regardless of their connection to the control centre. * Internal clock which can be synchronized via a synchronization signal (DCF 77, IRIG B via satellite receiver), binary input or system interface. * Storage of fault indications and instantaneous values for fault recording * Commissioning aids such as connection check, status indication of all binary inputs and outputs, easy check of system interface and influencing of information of the system interface during test operation Synchronization Function (optional) * Checking of the synchronisation conditions of both subnetworks. * Differentiation between synchronous and asynchronous networks. * Consideration of the circuit breaker operating times with asynchronous networks. * Saving of up to eight parameter sets for synchronization to be able to consider the differing properties of circuit breakers and network conditions. Switchgear Interlocking * Switchgear interlocking with bay or system interlocking * Communication using inter-relay communication (IRC) * Easy configuration of interlocking conditions SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 21 Introduction 1.3 Characteristics Circuit Breaker Failure Protection (optional) * With definite time current stages for monitoring the current flow through every pole of the circuit breaker * Start by a trip command from the internal breaker failure protection function; * Start by external trip functions possible * Single-stage or two-stage * Short dropout and overshoot times Automatic Reclosure Function (optional) * For reclosure after 1-pole, 3-pole or 1-pole and 3-pole tripping * Single or multiple reclosure (up to eight reclosure attempts) * With separate action time setting for the first 4 reclose attempts, optionally without action times * With separate dead times after 1-pole and 3-pole tripping, separate for the first four reclosure attempts * Controlled optionally by protection pickup with separate dead times after 1-pole , 2-pole or 3-pole pickup * Optionally with adaptive dead time, reduced dead time and dead line check Control * High security against incorrect switchings via system and bay related interlocking checks, including the information of neighbouring bays via inter relay communication. * High variance with regard to switchgear types and operating modes. Switching authority and switching mode * Keylock switches for defining the control authority and the control mode. * Logging keylock-switch positions. Measured values * Connection of measured values in accordance with 1- or 3-phase system or Aron connection. * Flexible measured value processing with configurable measuring packets. Metered values * Formation of metered values from measured values * Acquisition of pulse metered values via the binary inputs User-defined functions * Freely programmable links between internal and external signals for the implementation of user-defined logic functions (e.g. interlocking). * Logic functions for Boolean and mathematical equations. * Switching sequences and interlocks. * Time delays and measured value set point interrogation. 22 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Introduction 1.3 Characteristics Monitoring functions * Increased reliability thanks to monitoring of internal measuring circuits, auxiliary power supply, hardware and software. * Monitoring of communication including the evaluation of the number of faulty transmission messages. Inter relay communication * Direct exchange of information between the SIPROTEC 4 devices, even without a connection to the SICAM control centre. * A stationwide interlocked control is also possible if the connection to the control centre or the control centre itself is disturbed. Web Monitor * The Web-Monitor allows to display parameters, data and measured values for SIPROTEC 4 devices and a quick view of an IRC combination. The combination data, device data, master data, combination structure and indications of each user are visualised. Web-Monitor also allows to display synchronisation ranges, a synchronoscope and synchronous networks. For this it uses Internet technology. The display is made by a Web browser. A special operator program (e.g. DIGSI 4) is not necessary. Measurement box * The connection of two 7XV5662-7AD10 measurement boxes allows up to 16 external temperature, pressure or any 20-mA measured values to be measured. The measurement box 7XV5662-2AD10 or 7XV56625AD10 (RTD box) each provide 6 temperature measuring inputs. Further functions * Indication storage for the last 200 operational indications with real-time assignment. * Fault recording and data transfer for fault recording for a maximum time range of 30 seconds SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 23 Introduction 1.3 Characteristics 24 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 2 Functions This chapter describes the individual functions of the SIPROTEC 4 device 6MD66x. It shows the setting possibilities for each function in maximum configuration. Guidelines for establishing setting values and, where required, formulae are given. Based on the following information, it can also be determined which of the provided functions should be used. 2.1 General Settings 26 2.2 Command Processing 37 2.3 Indication Processing 44 2.4 Measured value processing 45 2.5 Metered Value Processing 60 2.6 Threshold-Switch 66 2.7 Circuit breaker synchronisation 68 2.8 Switchgear Interlocking 92 2.9 Circuit breaker failure protection (optional) 102 2.10 Automatic reclosure function (optional) 122 2.11 Function control 150 2.12 Inter-relay communication through port C 159 2.13 Inter relay communication with GOOSE through Ethernet 181 2.14 Connecting external instrument transformers 196 2.15 Web Monitor 202 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 25 Functions 2.1 General Settings 2.1 General Settings The function parameters can be modified using the operating or service interface with a personal computer using DIGSI. The procedure is described in detail in the SIPROTEC System Description /1/. 2.1.1 Functional scope The High Voltage Bay Control Unit 6MD66x features functions which are adaptable in their scope to the prevailing system conditions. Some functions (e.g. switching authority and switching mode) are available by default, other functions have to be added during configuration. You define yourself during the configuration which functional scope the device will have. 2.1.1.1 Configuring the Functional Scope In DIGSI, dialog box Functional scope, the functions Measuring transducer (various types) and Synchronization (1 to 8) are configured as Enabled or Disabled. Functions that are configured as Disabled are not processed by the 6MD66x: There are no indications, and corresponding settings (functions, limit values) are not displayed. Functions that are not needed can be hidden. 2.1.1.2 Setting Notes Loading the Configuration Settings Configuration settings can be loaded using a PC and the operating program DIGSI and transferred via the operator interface on the front panel or via the rear service interface. Operation via DIGSI is described in the SIPROTEC System Description/1/. For changing configuration parameters in the device, password no.7 is required (for parameter set). Without the password, the settings may be read, but cannot be modified and transmitted to the device. Special settings In order to detect the measured values for temperature, pressure or other 20-mA measured values, specify the interface to which the measurement box is connected at address 190 MEASUREMENT BOX. In the 6MD66x this is port C (service interface). You can specify the measurement box in use, the number and type of transmission of the measurement points (RTD = Resistance Temperature Detector) at address 191 MB CONNECTION. 6 RTD simplex / 6 RTD HDX when using one 7XV5662-2/5x measurement box or 8 MBS simplex / 8 MBS HalfDplx when using one 7XV5662-7x measurement box or 12 RTD HDX / 16 MBS HalfDplx (with two measurement boxes). Design examples are shown in the appendix (in the section "Connection Examples"). The information entered at address 191 must correspond to the settings at the measurement box (see section 2.14.2, side title Measurement box settings"). 26 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.1 General Settings 2.1.1.3 Settings Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments 0 MU V_1 Disabled Enabled Disabled Measurement V 0 MU I_1 Disabled Enabled Disabled Measurement I 0 MU1P_1 Disabled Enabled Enabled Measurement 1phase 1.packet 0 MU1P_2 Disabled Enabled Disabled Measurement 1phase 2.packet 0 MU1P_3 Disabled Enabled Disabled Measurement 1phase 3.packet 0 MU3P_1 Disabled Enabled Enabled Measurement 3phase 1.packet 0 MUAron_1 Disabled Enabled Disabled Measurement Aron 1.packet 0 Synchronizing 1 Disabled Enabled Disabled Synchronizing Function 1 0 Synchronizing 2 Disabled Enabled Disabled Synchronizing Function 2 0 Synchronizing 3 Disabled Enabled Disabled Synchronizing Function 3 0 Synchronizing 4 Disabled Enabled Disabled Synchronizing Function 4 0 Synchronizing 5 Disabled Enabled Disabled Synchronizing Function 5 0 Synchronizing 6 Disabled Enabled Disabled Synchronizing Function 6 0 Synchronizing 7 Disabled Enabled Disabled Synchronizing Function 7 0 Synchronizing 8 Disabled Enabled Disabled Synchronizing Function 8 103 Grp Chge OPTION Disabled Enabled Disabled Setting Group Change Option 110 Trip 1pole 3pole only 1-/3pole 3pole only 1pole trip permitted 133 Auto Reclose 1 AR-cycle 2 AR-cycles 3 AR-cycles 4 AR-cycles 5 AR-cycles 6 AR-cycles 7 AR-cycles 8 AR-cycles ADT Disabled Disabled Auto-Reclose Function 134 AR control mode Pickup w/ Tact Pickup w/o Tact Trip w/ Tact Trip w/o Tact Trip w/ Tact AR control mode 139 BREAKER FAILURE Disabled Enabled Disabled Breaker Failure Protection SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 27 Functions 2.1 General Settings Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments 190 MEASUREMENT BOX Disabled Port C Port D Port E Disabled Measurement box 191 MB CONNECTION 6 RTD simplex Measurement box Connection Type 2.1.2 6 RTD simplex 6 RTD HDX 12 RTD HDX 8 MBS simplex 8 MBS HalfDplx 16 MBS HalfDplx Power System Data 1 To function, the device requires the Rated Frequency of the network. The default preset value must only be changed if the network of the application field has a different Rated Frequency. 2.1.2.1 Setting Notes Rated Frequency The Rated Frequency of the network in which the device is operating is set under the address 214. A default value is set. Unom SECONDARY Unom SECONDARY TMax CLOSE CMD The other parameters, Unom SECONDARY, TMin TRIP CMD and TMax CLOSE CMD, are only used for the automatic reclosure and the breaker failure protection function. Temperature unit (power system data) When using the 7XV5662-2/5x measurement box, you can set address 276 TEMP. UNIT to display either degree Celsius or degree Fahrenheit. 28 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.1 General Settings 2.1.2.2 Settings Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments 203 Unom PRIMARY 1.0 .. 1200.0 kV 110.0 kV Rated Primary Voltage 204 Unom SECONDARY 80 .. 125 V 100 V Rated Secondary Voltage (Ph-Ph) 205 CT PRIMARY 10 .. 5000 A 100 A CT Rated Primary Current 206 CT SECONDARY 1A 5A 1A CT Rated Secondary Current 214 Rated Frequency 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz Rated Frequency 240 TMin TRIP CMD 0.02 .. 30.00 sec 0.10 sec Minimum TRIP Command Duration 241 TMax CLOSE CMD 0.01 .. 30.00 sec 0.10 sec Maximum Close Command Duration 276 TEMP. UNIT Celsius Fahrenheit Celsius Unit of temperature measurement 2.1.3 Device, General Settings The behaviour of 6MD66x devices can be set individually with various settings. 2.1.3.1 Function Description The devices are equipped with an illuminated LC display for displaying process and device information. The light for the display is normally off. Illumination is controlled: * via an operator action, - ON, on actuating any key on the operator control panel or - OFF, after 10 minutes if no further operator input follows. * via the binary input >Light on" (if configured correspondingly), - ON, if >Light on" ON or, - OFF, after the time set under T Backlight on. The lighting can also be switched on and off with DIGSI via the operator interface or the service interface. SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 29 Functions 2.1 General Settings 2.1.3.2 Indications of the device Device OK" Indication: The device is ready for operation. The life contact is switched ON and the error LED is switched OFF with this message. Value: On Reset Device" Indication: The device has performed a startup. Special communication indication: It is announced on the PROFIBUS that the SIPROTEC-VD has started the PD service (only the logged on partner). Value: On Initial Start" Indication: The device has performed an initial restart. All buffers were cleared (additional information for start-up indication). Value: On Resume" Indication: The device has performed a restart. All buffers remained intact (additional information for start-up indication). Value: On Tagging command for acknowledging the LEDs of SICAM or DIGSI. Value: On >Light on" Display on/off via binary input. Value: ON/OFF Chatter ON" Central chatter suppression message. This message indicates if the chatter suppression responded during a binary message subject to the chatter processing. Value: ON, the chatter suppression responded for at least one binary message. Value: OFF, chatter suppression did not respond for any binary message. Error PwrSupply" Indication: The power supply unit is faulty. Value: On 30 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.1 General Settings Fail Battery" Indication: The battery is faulty. Value: On DataStop" Data transmission blockage for indications, metered and measured values. With data transmission blockage on, all information in the monitoring direction --of the device to the higher control centre-- is marked with the transmission blockage bit. The actual transmission blockage is performed in the control center. Value: ON/OFF >DataStop" Predefined binary input for tagging and delete DataStop" Value: ON/OFF Test mode" This operating mode is used for device tests during commissioning or maintenance. In test mode, all information in monitoring direction is marked with UBF test bit. This procedure serves to avoid that events caused by the test mode initiate unwanted reactions (horn, derived commands and indications, etc.) in higher-level system components (DIGSI or SICAM). This operating mode can be activated and deactivated by a tagging command in DIGSI. Value: ON/OFF HWTestMod" Hardware test mode: DIGSI switches ON this operating mode if the user activates the functions Set binary input, Set output relay, Set messages, for example, in start-up mode. DIGSI switches OFF the hardware test mode when leaving the start-up area. After the switch-off command, the "Hardware test mode OFF" message is output and an initial device start-up is initiated after a period of 5 seconds. Value: ON/OFF >Time Synch" Input for the external minute pulse. Value (fleeting): On SynchClock" Acknowledgement of a clock synchronization. Value (fleeting): On Clock SyncError" Indication: Clock synchronisation error. Value: ON, the synchronizing event is missing after the parametrized tolerance time. Value: OFF, a synchronizing event has again arrived. SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 31 Functions 2.1 General Settings DayLightSavTime" Indication: Daylight saving time switchover. Value: ON, a time synchronisation job with summertime was detected by the date-clocktime processing. Value: OFF, a time synchronisation job without daylight saving time was detected. Settings Calc." Annunciation that a parametrization is current. Value: ON, the function is reserved for parametrization. Value: OFF, the function has been enabled again. Settings Check" Message that the device operates with new parameters which are not yet continuously saved (on-line parameterization). Value: ON, the test has begun. Value: OFF, the test is ended, i.e. the device is either operative again, or the new parameters have been saved permanently, or no parameter check is current. Level-2 change" The message is transmitted as ON as soon as the parameter set loaded via DIGSI was changed via an on-line parameterization and the device operates with these new settings. This indication is OFF as long as the parameter set loaded via DIGSI is not changed or is again issued as OFF, if a parameter set was completely newly loaded and the device operates with these parameters. The information value of the message (ON/OFF) is preserved during an initial and a resume. Value: ON, parameter changes online at the unit or via parametrisation command. Value: OFF, parameter set completely reloaded. Local change" Indication that the local operation setting was cancelled. This message is reserved for DIGSI. Error Board 1" Indication: The BG1 module either does not exist or is defective. The same applies to further modules BG2 to BGn. Value: On Event Lost" Fleeting indication Indication lost Error FMS1" Fault in the PROFIBUS FMS connection, fibre optic cable 1 with double ring connection 32 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.1 General Settings Error FMS2" Fault in the PROFIBUS FMS connection, fibre optic cable 2 with double ring connection IRC fault" Fault in inter relay communication as a group indication Bay Bus D n" Bay bus disturbance with device 1 to n SysIntErr." Fault at system interface 2.1.3.3 Setting Notes T Backlight on The hold time of the display lighting can be set. After the set time has expired, the lighting is automatically switched off. DIGSI backplane The setting is automatically derived from the MLFB number set (item 12, functional interface). The interface should be bypassed only in exceptional cases. 2.1.3.4 Settings Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments 401 T Backlight on 1 .. 60 min 10 min Time Backlight on 402 DIGSI backplane Disabled Port C Port D Disabled Serviceport for DIGSI 407 FltDisp.LED/LCD Target on PU Target on TRIP Target on PU Fault Display on LED / LCD 408 Spont. FltDisp. NO YES NO Spontaneous display of flt.annunciations 2.1.3.5 Information List No. Information - Distur.CFC - Type of Information Comments OUT Disturbance CFC Reset LED IntSP Reset LED >Light on SP >Back Light on - DataStop IntSP Stop data transmission - Test mode IntSP Test mode SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 33 Functions 2.1 General Settings No. Information Type of Information Comments - HWTestMod IntSP Hardware Test Mode - SynchClock IntSP_Ev Clock Synchronization - Error FMS1 OUT Error FMS FO 1 - Error FMS2 OUT Error FMS FO 2 1 Not configured OUT No Function configured 2 Non Existent OUT Function Not Available 3 >Time Synch SP_Ev >Synchronize Internal Real Time Clock 5 >Reset LED SP >Reset LED 15 >Test mode SP >Test mode 16 >DataStop SP >Stop data transmission 51 Device OK OUT Device is Operational and Protecting 52 ProtActive IntSP At Least 1 Protection Funct. is Active 55 Reset Device OUT Reset Device 56 Initial Start OUT Initial Start of Device 67 Resume OUT Resume 68 Clock SyncError IntSP Clock Synchronization Error 69 DayLightSavTime OUT Daylight Saving Time 70 Settings Calc. OUT Setting calculation is running 71 Settings Check OUT Settings Check 72 Level-2 change OUT Level-2 change 73 Local change OUT Local setting change 110 Event Lost OUT_Ev Event lost 113 Flag Lost OUT Flag Lost 125 Chatter ON OUT Chatter ON 126 ProtON/OFF IntSP Protection ON/OFF (via system port) 127 AR ON/OFF IntSP Auto Reclose ON/OFF (via system port) 140 Error Sum Alarm OUT Error with a summary alarm 147 Error PwrSupply OUT Error Power Supply 177 Fail Battery OUT Failure: Battery empty 183 Error Board 1 OUT Error Board 1 184 Error Board 2 OUT Error Board 2 185 Error Board 3 OUT Error Board 3 186 Error Board 4 OUT Error Board 4 187 Error Board 5 OUT Error Board 5 188 Error Board 6 OUT Error Board 6 189 Error Board 7 OUT Error Board 7 301 Pow.Sys.Flt. OUT Power System fault 302 Fault Event OUT Fault Event 320 Warn Mem. Data OUT Warn: Limit of Memory Data exceeded 321 Warn Mem. Para. OUT Warn: Limit of Memory Parameter exceeded 322 Warn Mem. Oper. OUT Warn: Limit of Memory Operation exceeded 323 Warn Mem. New OUT Warn: Limit of Memory New exceeded 34 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.1 General Settings 2.1.4 Oscillographic Fault Records 2.1.4.1 Description The device 6MD66x has a fault recording function. The instantaneous values of measured values iL1, iL2, iL3 and uL1, uL2, uL3, (voltages depending on the connection) are sampled at intervals of 1 ms (for 50 Hz) and stored in a circulating buffer (20 samples per cycle). For a fault, the data are stored for an adjustable period of time, but no more than 5 seconds per fault. A total of 8 faults can be saved spanning a total time of 15 s maximum. The fault record memory is automatically updated with every new fault, so that no acknowledgment is required. The storage of fault values can be started by pickup of a protection function, as well as via binary input and via the serial interface. The data can be retrieved via the serial interfaces by means of a personal computer and evaluated with the operating software DIGSI and the graphic analysis software SIGRA 4. The latter graphically represents the data recorded during the system fault and calculates additional information such as the impedance or r.m.s. values from the measured values. A selection may be made as to whether the currents and voltages are represented as primary or secondary values. Binary signal traces (marks) of particular events, e.g. fault detection", tripping" are also represented. Unlike in protective devices, in the case of the 6MD66x, only secondary values are correctly represented in the fault records. The primary values should first be determined through the transformation ratio. If the device has a serial system interface, the fault recording data can be passed on to a central device via this interface. Data are evaluated by appropriate programs in the central device. Currents and voltages are referred to their maximum values, scaled to their rated values and prepared for graphic presentation. Binary signal traces (marks) of particular events e.g. fault detection", tripping" are also represented. In the event of transfer to a central device, the request for data transfer can be executed automatically and can be selected to take place after each fault detection by the protection, or only after a trip. 2.1.4.2 Setting Notes General Other settings pertaining to fault recording (waveform capture) are found in the submenu Fault recording of the PARAMETER menu. Waveform capture makes a distinction between the trigger instant for an oscillographic record and the criterion to save the record. Normally the trigger instant is the device pickup, i.e. the pickup of an arbitrary protective function is assigned the time. The criterion for saving may be both the device pickup (Save w. Pickup) or the device trip (Save w. TRIP). A trip command issued by the device can also be used as trigger instant (Start w. TRIP); in this case it is also the saving criterion. Recording of an oscillographic fault record starts with the pickup by a protective function and ends with the dropout of the last pickup of a protective function. Usually this is also the extent of a fault recording (WAVEFORM DATA = Fault event). If automatic reclosure is implemented, the entire system disturbance -- possibly with several reclose attempts -- up to the ultimate fault clearance can be stored (WAVEFORM DATA = Pow.Sys.Flt.). This facilitates the representation of the entire system fault history, but also consumes storage capacity during the auto-reclosure dead time(s). This setting can only be altered with DIGSI under Additional Settings. The actual storage time begins at the pre-fault time PRE. TRIG. TIME ahead of the trigger instant, and ends at the post-fault time POST REC. TIME) after the storage criterion has reset. The maximum recording duration to each fault is entered in MAX. LENGTH. SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 35 Functions 2.1 General Settings The fault recording can also be triggered via a binary input, via the keypad on the front of the device or with a PC via the operator or service interface. The storage is then dynamically triggered. The length of a record for these special triggers is determined by parameter BinIn CAPT.TIME (upper bound is MAX. LENGTH). Prefault and post-fault times will be included. If the binary input time is set for , then the length of the record equals the time that the binary input is activated (static), or tMAX. LENGTH, whichever is shorter. 2.1.4.3 Settings Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments 901 WAVEFORMTRIGGE R Save w. Pickup Save w. TRIP Start w. TRIP Save w. Pickup Waveform Capture 902 WAVEFORM DATA Fault event Pow.Sys.Flt. Fault event Scope of Waveform Data 903 MAX. LENGTH 0.30 .. 5.00 sec 2.00 sec Max. length of a Waveform Capture Record 904 PRE. TRIG. TIME 0.05 .. 0.50 sec 0.25 sec Captured Waveform Prior to Trigger 905 POST REC. TIME 0.05 .. 0.50 sec 0.10 sec Captured Waveform after Event 906 BinIn CAPT.TIME 0.10 .. 5.00 sec; 0.50 sec Capture Time via Binary Input 2.1.4.4 Information List No. Information - FltRecSta 4 30053 2.1.5 Type of Information Comments IntSP Fault Recording Start >Trig.Wave.Cap. SP >Trigger Waveform Capture Fault rec. run. OUT Fault recording is running Protocol When detecting an interruption in communication between a SIPROTEC 4 device and the Substation Controller, marking SysIntErr." (fault at system interface) is set to ON in the SIPROTEC 4 device. The message is registered in the event buffer. Following, it can be processed in CFC and allocated to LEDs and output relays. The state of the outputs or switching elements has not changed compared to the state before interruption of the communication. Local switching operations, however, are still possible. After communication has been reestablished the message is set to OFF and data are taken from the telegrams again received by the PROFIBUS-DP Master. 2.1.5.1 Information List No. - 36 Information SysIntErr. Type of Information IntSP Comments Error Systeminterface SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.2 Command Processing 2.2 Command Processing The SIPROTEC 6MD66x includes a command processing function for initiating switching operations in the system. Control action can originate from four command sources: * Local operation using the keypad on the local user interface of the device * Operation using DIGSI (also possible through a WEB Server via a long-distance data transmission link) * Remote operation via network control centre or substation controller (e.g. SICAM), * Automatic functions (e.g., using binary inputs or CFC) Switchgear with single and multiple busbars are supported. The number of switchgear devices to be controlled is limited only by the number of binary inputs and outputs present. An additional feature is the exchange of information (e.g. bay interlocking) through IRC. High security against inadvertent device operations can be ensured if interlocking checks are enabled. A standard set of optional interlocking checks is provided for each command issued to circuit breakers / switchgear. 2.2.1 General The source of command are recorded in the event log at the moment of the command output. 2.2.1.1 Function Description The following source of command are possible: Cause text Command source SC = Local Local control using the keypad on the local user interface of the device SC = SICAM Local control of central device (e.g. SICAM) SC = Remote Remote control of central device SC = Auto Automatic command of central device (e.g. SICAM CFC) SC = Auto device Automatic command of device SC = DIGSI Control using DIGSI SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 37 Functions 2.2 Command Processing 2.2.2 Control Device Devices with integrated or detached operator panel can control switchgear via the operator panel of the device. Switchgear can be controlled via the PC operator interface and via the serial port with a link to the substation control equipment. Prerequisites The number of switchgear devices to be controlled is limited by the - Binary inputs present - Binary outputs present 2.2.2.1 Function Description Operation using the SIPROTEC 4 Device Commands can be initiated using the keypad on the local user interface of the relay. For this purpose, there are three independent keys located below the graphic display. The key CTRL causes the control display to appear in the LCD. Control of switching devices is possible within this display, or from the Control context menu, since the two control keys OPEN and CLOSE only become active as long as the control display is present. The LCD must be changed back to the default display for other, non-control, operational modes. The navigation keys , , W, X are used to select the desired device in the Control Display. The I key or the O key is then pressed to convey the intended control command. The switch icon in the control picture will then flash in the specified position. You are prompted to confirm the switching action by pressing the ENTER key in the lower section of the display. A safety promps follows. The actual switching operation is initiated after you have confirmed the prompt by pressing the ENTER button. If the confirmation does not occur within one minute, the flashing of the target position will return to the actual status. You can cancel the process at anytime either before the command release or during switch selection by pressing the ESC button. During normal processing, the control display indicates the new actual status after the control command was executed and the message command end" at the lower display edge. The indication FB reached" is displayed briefly before the final indication in the case of switching commands with a feedback. If the selected control command is not accepted, because an interlocking condition is not met, then an error message appears in the display. The message indicates why the command was not accepted (see also SIPROTEC 4 System Description /1/). This message must be acknowledged with Enter before any further control commands can be issued. Operation using the DIGSI Control devices can be controlled via the operator control interface by means of the DIGSI operating program installed on a PC. The procedure to do so is described in the SIPROTEC System Description /1/ (Control of Switchgear). Operation using the System Interface Control of switching devices can be performed via the serial system interface and a connection to the substation control and protection system. For this the required peripherals (connection...) must physically exist both in the device and in the system. Also, specific settings to the serial interface must be made in the device (see SIPROTEC System Description /1/). 38 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.2 Command Processing Note The switching commands (indications) listed in the following Information List are default examples. As they are only examples they may be deleted or overwritten by the user. 2.2.2.2 Information List No. Information Type of Information Comments - Q0 CF_D2 circuit breaker Q0 - Q0 DP circuit breaker Q0 - Q1 CF_D2 bus disconnector Q1 - Q1 DP bus disconnector Q1 - Q2 CF_D2 bus disconnector Q2 - Q2 DP bus disconnector Q2 - Q8 CF_D2 earthing isolator Q8 - Q8 DP earthing isolator Q8 - Q9 CF_D2 feeder disconnector Q9 - Q9 DP feeder disconnector Q9 - ReleaseQ0 IntSP Release circuit breaker Q0 - ReleaseQ1 IntSP Release bus disconnector Q1 - ReleaseQ2 IntSP Release bus disconnector Q2 - ReleaseQ8 IntSP Release earthing isolator Q8 - ReleaseQ9 IntSP Release feeder disconnector Q9 31000 Q0 OpCnt= VI Q0 operationcounter= 31001 Q1 OpCnt= VI Q1 operationcounter= 31002 Q2 OpCnt= VI Q2 operationcounter= 31008 Q8 OpCnt= VI Q8 operationcounter= 31009 Q9 OpCnt= VI Q9 operationcounter= SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 39 Functions 2.2 Command Processing 2.2.3 Control Authorization In conjunction with the power system control there are several command types that must be considered. Applications * Operation of circuit breakers, disconnectors and ground electrodes * Raising and lowering transformer LTCs * Control of Petersen coils * Manually overriding/updating" information of process-dependent objects * Setting" information of internal objects * Setting and resetting internal buffers or data stocks * Adding/removing additional information Prerequisites For more detailed information, please refer to the SIPROTEC System Description /1/. 2.2.3.1 Description Commands to the System These are all commands that are directly output to the switchgear to change their process state: * Switching commands for the control of circuit breakers (asynchronous), disconnectors and ground electrodes, * Step Commands, e.g. raising and lowering transformer LTCs * Setpoint commands with configurable time settings, e.g. to control Petersen coils Device-internal Commands These commands do not directly operate command outputs. They serve for initiating internal functions, communicating the detection of status changes to the device or for acknowledging them. * Manual override commands for manual update" of information on process-dependent objects such as indications and switching states, e.g. if the communication with the process is interrupted. Manually overridden objects are flagged as such in the information status and can be displayed accordingly. * Tagging commands (for setting") the information value of internal objects, such as switching authority (remote/local), parameter changeovers, data transmission blocks and counter value deletion/presetting. * Acknowledgment and resetting commands for setting and resetting internal buffers or data stocks. * Information status command to set/delete the additional information information status" to an information value of a process object such as - Acquisition blocking - Output blocking. Sequence in the command path Security mechanisms in the command path ensure that a switch command can be carried out only if the test of previously established criteria has been successfully completed. In addition to general fixed prescribed tests, for each resource separately further interlocks can be configured. The actual execution of the command job also is then monitored. The entire sequence of a command is described briefly in the following. 40 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.2 Command Processing Checking a Command Job Please observe the following: * Command entry, e.g. using the keypad on the local user interface of the device - Check password access rights - Check switching mode (interlocking activated/deactivated) selection of deactivated interlocking status. * User configurable command checks - Switching authority - Device position check (set vs. actual comparison) - Interlocking, Zone Controlled (logic using CFC or IRC) - Interlocking, System Interlocking (centrally, using SICAM or IRC) - Double Operation Locking (interlocking against parallel switching operations) - Protection blocking (blocking of switching operations by protective functions in SIPROTEC4 protection devices) * Fixed command checks - Internal process time (software watch dog which checks the time for processing the control action between initiation of the control and final close of the relay contact) - Configuration in Process (if configuration is in process, commands are denied or delayed) - Equipment enabled as output (if an piece of equipment was configured, but not configured to a binary input, the command is denied) - Output Blocking (if output blocking has been programmed for the circuit breaker, and is active at the moment the command is processed, then the command is denied) - Module hardware malfunction - Command in Progress (only one command can be processed at a time for one piece of equipment, object-related Double Operation Block) - 1-of-n check (for multiple allocations such as common contact relays it is checked if a command procedure was already initiated for the output relays concerned). Command Execution Monitoring The following is monitored: * Interruption of a command because of a Cancel Command * Running Time Monitor (feedback monitoring time) Additional Information Refer to Section 2.8 Switchgear Interlocking for additional information on command processing and for an information overview. SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 41 Functions 2.2 Command Processing 2.2.3.2 Information List No. Information Type of Information Comments - KeySwitch1 DP Key Switch 1 (Local/Remote) - Cntrl Auth IntSP Control Authority - KeySwitch2 DP Key Switch 2 (Interlocking OFF/ON) - ModeLOCAL IntSP Controlmode LOCAL - ModeREMOTE IntSP Controlmode REMOTE 2.2.4 Process Data During the processing of the commands, independent of the further message routing and processing, command and process feedback information are sent to the message processing centre. These messages contain information on the cause. With the corresponding allocation (configuration) these messages are entered in the event list, thus serving as a report. The SIPROTEC 4 System Description /1/ contains a list of possible operator responses and their meaning as well as the command types required to trip and close switching devices or to raise and lower transformer taps. Applications * Indications and operator responses related to switching operations Prerequisites The SIPROTEC System Description /1/ contains a list of possible operator responses and their meaning as well as the command types required to trip and close switching devices or to raise and lower transformer taps. 2.2.4.1 Description Acknowledging commands to the integrated control All indications with the source of command LOCAL are converted into a corresponding response and shown in the display of the device. Acknowledging commands to local / remote / DIGSI The acknowledgement of messages with source of command Local/ Remote/DIGSI are sent back to the initiating point independent of the routing (configuration on the serial digital interface). Hence, the command is not acknowledged by an operator response as for the local command but via the normal command and feedback logging. 42 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.2 Command Processing Feedback monitoring The command processing performs a time monitoring for all command processes with feedback. A monitoring time is started parallel to the command (monitoring of the command execution time) to verify whether the switching device reaches the desired end position during this time. The monitoring time is stopped upon reception of the feedback indication. If there is no feedback indication, the message "Timeout command monitoring time" is displayed and the process is terminated. In the operational log, the commands and their feedback are also logged. Normally the execution of a command is terminated as soon as the feedback information (FB+) of the relevant switchgear arrives or, in case of commands without process feedback information, the command output resets and a message is output. The "plus" sign appearing in a feedback information confirms that the command was successful. The command was as expected, in other words positive. The "minus" is a negative confirmation and means that the command was not executed as expected. SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 43 Functions 2.3 Indication Processing 2.3 Indication Processing Indication processing in High Voltage Bay Control Unit 6MD66x is provided to assure a save and instantaneous transmission of information to the control centre. This is done by giving priority to feedback information from commands before measured values and other indications. Thus the user quickly gets an overview on the current status of the station even when data exchange is very high. 2.3.1 Description Indication processing comprises the following * Communication with the Substation Controller Utilizing the Priorization Principle * Transmission of data to the bay devices connected via inter-relay communication * Creation of group alarms in accordance with the configuration in CFC * Display of the event list of the device, memorization of 200 indications * Display of the signalizing LEDs (in accordance with the configuration carried out) LED Display and Binary Outputs (output relays) Important events and conditions are displayed, using LEDs on the front panel of the relay. The device furthermore has output relays for remote indication. All LEDs and binary outputs indicating specific indications can be freely configured. The relay is delivered with a default setting. The Appendix of this manual deals in detail with the delivery status and the allocation options. The output relays and the LEDs may be operated in a latched or unlatched mode (each may be individually set). The latched conditions are protected against loss of the auxiliary voltage. They are reset * on site by pressing the LED key on the relay, * Remotely using a binary input configured for that purpose, * Using one of the serial interfaces. Condition indications should not be latched. Also, they cannot be reset until the criterion to be reported is remedied. This applies to indications from monitoring functions or similar. A green LED displays operational readiness ("RUN"), and cannot be reset. It goes out if the self-check feature of the microprocessor recognizes an abnormal occurrence, or if the auxiliary voltage fails. When auxiliary voltage is present, but the relay has an internal malfunction, then the red LED ("ERROR") lights up and the processor blocks the relay. Further information on the functionality, allocation of indications, on how to read out information via DIGSI and the operator panel of the device etc. can be found in the SIPROTEC System description /1/. 44 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.4 Measured value processing 2.4 Measured value processing Measured value processing of the SIPROTEC device 6MD66x provides functions for recording, calculating and displaying varying measurement quantities. For further information please also refer to the SIPROTEC System Description /1/. In addition, the device contains the so-called measuring transducer blocks, which form various operands from the current and voltage input quantities. 2.4.1 Measurement, Transducer Inputs 20 mA The user-defined measured values are compiled in a parameter group. These measured values are created via DIGSI CFC or arrive as r.m.s. values via inter-relay communication. Applications * Limit values are used to indicate when a measured value recorded as the operational measured value has exceeded the upper or lower limits. 2.4.1.1 Description The two measuring transducer inputs (20 mA) contained in the device are already specified in the default setting. These measuring transducer inputs supply non-linearized values which can be converted via DIGSI CFC to measured values such as pressure or temperature. Derived measured values are inserted from the information catalog. Information on configuration of the user-defined measured values can be found in SIPROTEC System Description /1/. 2.4.1.2 Information List No. Information Type of Information Comments 996 Td1= MV Transducer 1 997 Td2= MV Transducer 2 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 45 Functions 2.4 Measured value processing 2.4.2 General Information on Transducer Blocks The measuring transducer blocks form various operands from the voltage and current inputs. 2.4.2.1 Functional Description The measuring transducer function is explained via the following function blocks: * Measuring transducer U (MU U) * Measuring transducer I (MU I) * 1-phase measuring transducer (MT1P) * 3-phase measuring transducer (MT3P) * Measuring transducer Aron (MUAron) The individual measuring transducer blocks must be activated in the functional scope of the device. They will then appear in the DIGSI routing matrix with their input channels and output quantities. They are routed to current and voltage channels of the device. You can route the output quantities on different targets, e.g. system interface, CFC or display. A functional description of the individual measuring transducer blocks and a list of the accompanying parameters and information can be found in the following chapters. Table 2-1 Connection variants Connection examples for a rated transformer voltage Vn secondary from 100 V Input voltages Functions Secondary Star connection Parameter Transformer Vn sec 3 x VfeederPh-N = 57.7 V Measuring transducer 100 V 1 x VPh-N = 57.7 V 3-phase Measuring transducer 100 V 1-phase SYNC function 1 to SYNC function 5 100 V1) Ufeeder delta connec- 3 x VfeederPh-N = 57.7 Measuring transducer 100 V tion V 3-phase Uref delta connection 1 x VPh-Ph = 100 V Aron connection 46 Comments for feeder operational measurements (see Figure A-9) for reference operational measurements (see Figure A-8) for synchronization function (see Figure A-11) for feeder operational measurements (see Figure A-9) Measuring transducer 173.2 V2) 1-phase for reference operational measurements (see Figure A-8) SYNC function 6 to SYNC function 8 for synchronization function (see Figure A-12) 100 V 2 x VfeederPh-Ph = 100 V Measuring transducer 173.2 V2) Aron 1 x VPh-Ph = 100 V for feeder operational measurements (see Figure A-10) Measuring transducer 173.2 V2) 1-phase for reference operational measurements (see Figure A-8) SYNC function 6 to SYNC function 8 for synchronization function (see Figure A-10) 100 V SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.4 Measured value processing Connection variants Input voltages Functions Secondary Parameter Comments Transformer Vn sec Star connection, 3 x VfeederPh-N = 100 V Measuring transducer 173.2 V2) neutral earthed power 1 x VPh-N = 100 V 3-phase supply for feeder operational measurements (see Figure A-9) Measuring transducer 173.2 V2) 1-phase for reference operational measurements (see Figure A-8) SYNC function 1 to SYNC function 5 for synchronization function (see Figure A-11) 100 V 1) In the SYNC function the parameter Transformer Unom secondary is equivalent to the secondary input voltage. 2) Inside the measuring transducer packages, the parameter Transformer Unom secondary is equivalent to 3 times the secondary input voltage. The secondary transformer voltages specified in the above table must be parameterized if the conversion factor set for the phase-to-phase voltages is the nominal system voltage UN, and the conversion factor for the individual phase voltages is the voltage UN/3. The conversion factor can be set in the DIGSI matrix under Object properties - Measured value description of a measured value. The parameter settings for the secondary transformer voltages and the conversion factors are mutually dependent. This will be briefly exemplified by a wye connection: The rated voltage of the system is 110 kV; 110 kV/100 V transformers are used. In the measuring transducer packages, the secondary voltage is set to 100 V. And for the voltages the conversion factors are set to 110 kV for the phase-to-phase voltages and 63.5085 kV for the phase voltages. In the circuit breaker synchronization function, 100 V can be set for the secondary voltage and 110 kV as conversion factor (both values too large by factor 3) or the phase-element values can be set to 57.735 V for the secondary voltage and 63.5085 kV for the conversion factor. Both versions ensure the correct functioning of the synchronization function. You must observe the definition of the lower and upper voltage threshold that must be based on the actual secondary voltage (57.7 V). SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 47 Functions 2.4 Measured value processing 2.4.3 Parameterizing Transducer Blocks Configuration is to be performed in the High Voltage Bay Control Unit in each individual case. The device contains pre-defined measuring transducer blocks which can be activated individually. 2.4.3.1 Configuring the Measuring Transducer The configuration of measured values is fundamentally different from the configuration of other SIPROTEC 4 devices. It is explained with an example using the function block Measuring transducer 3-phase. Selecting the Functional Scope First select the measuring transducer blocks from the DIGSI Functional scope dialog box which are to be contained in the functional scope of the device. For this purpose, open the device and click Functional scope in the function selection. Select the available entry on the Measurement 3phase 1.packet line in the Scope column and confirm with OK. The measurement transducer block is activated. Figure 2-1 48 Functional scope dialog box SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.4 Measured value processing Parameterising Click the Measuring transducer object under Parameters in the tree view of DIGSI. The available measuring transducer blocks are listed in the list box. Open Measurement 3phase 1.packet via the context menu and set the values of parameters Secondary Voltage Nominal Value (0.00 V to 200.0 V) and Secondary Current Nominal Value (0.00 A to 5.00 A) depending on your requirements. You will find more information on this in the setting hint sections. Figure 2-2 Dialog box for setting the parameters SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 49 Functions 2.4 Measured value processing 2.4.3.2 Allocating a Measuring Transducer Following configuration, the inputs and outputs of the activated measuring transformer block in the allocation matrix of DIGSI are interconnected and the properties of the individual measured values, such as transmission threshold, are configured and interconnection in the CFC is performed. Allocating Measured Value Channels Open the allocation matrix of the device and select Only measured and metered values as the information type. The MU3P_1 group is displayed. Allocate the measured value channels Mvchn to the voltage/current inputs as the source. Allocating Measured Values Allocate the calculated measured values to a destination, e.g. to the system interface, the inter-relay communication, the CFC or the display. Configuring Measured Values Configure the properties of the measured values. In the Information item, No. column of the allocation matrix, right-click the information item whose properties you would like to configure and open the Object properties dialog box via the Properties... context menu. Select the Measured value description tab and make the settings. The Measured value description tab is not relevant for the information items MP1_PHI (phase angle), MP1_WLF (active power factor) and MP1_BLF (reactive power factor) and therefore not available. Figure 2-3 50 Object properties dialog box, Measured value description tab SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.4 Measured value processing Select the Transmission threshold tab and make the settings. * Use central threshold (10%) Select this checkbox to use the factory-preset threshold value of 10%. This de-activates all the other input and output options in this tab. * Parameterized threshold Enter a value between 0 and 2000 in this spin box. The set value multiplied by 0.1% results in the threshold value. This value is used without any further conditions, provided that neither the Central threshold checkbox, nor a defined switching object, has been selected. Figure 2-4 Object properties dialog box, Transmission threshold tab Configure the object properties of the phase angle 3P1_PHI. Figure 2-5 Object properties dialog box, Transmission threshold tab SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 51 Functions 2.4 Measured value processing Allocate the information item 3P1_PHI to C (CFC) as the destination and then link this in the corresponding CFC chart. Figure 2-6 Example, 3P1_PHI link in CFC Configure the object properties of the block (e.g. LOWER_SETPOINT). For this purpose, right-click the Limit input of the block and select Object properties from the context menu. Observe the working range of -180 to +180; the value 100 (%) corresponds to 360. Figure 2-7 Example, properties of the LOWER_SETPOINT block The set value 12.5 corresponds to an angle of 45. 52 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.4 Measured value processing 2.4.4 Measurement U This packet serves to measure an individual voltage. The function provides the r.m.s. value of the fundamental component. 2.4.4.1 Description The frequency of the voltage is determined from the input signal. If the secondary input voltage on the device falls below 10 Veff, the frequency is marked as invalid. The overflow occurs when the secondary input voltage on the device exceeds 120 Veff. The frequency continues being valid. The nominal frequency value is taken from P.System Data 1. Routing of the measurement input to the respective measured value channel Voltage and the routing of the measuring results is performed with DIGSI. Specifications for secondary transformer voltage are made in the properties dialog box of MU U_1. Information on allocation can be obtained from the SIPROTEC System Description/1/. 2.4.4.2 Setting Notes SecVoltgNomVal The secondary factory-preset nominal transformer voltage can be set in the predefined range. 2.4.4.3 Settings Addr. 0 Parameter SecVoltgNomVal Setting Options 0.00 .. 200.00 V; < > 0 Default Setting 100.00 V Comments Secondary Voltage Nominal Value 2.4.4.4 Information List No. Information Type of Information Comments 151.0002 U MV Voltage U 151.0021 f MV frequency 151.0022 Input U/I MC Voltage or Current Input U/I SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 53 Functions 2.4 Measured value processing 2.4.5 Measurement I This packet serves to measure an individual current. The function provides the r.m.s. value of the fundamental component. 2.4.5.1 Functional Description The frequency of the current is determined from the input signal. If it falls below 10% of the rated value, the frequency is marked as invalid. The rated value of the frequency is taken from P.System Data 1. Routing of the measurement input to the respective measured value channel Current and the routing of the measuring results is performed with DIGSI. Specifications for secondary transformer current are made in the properties dialog box of MU I_1. Information on allocation can be obtained from the SIPROTEC System Description /1/. 2.4.5.2 Setting Notes SecCurrNomVal The secondary factory-preset nominal transformer current can be set in the predefined range. 2.4.5.3 Settings Addr. 0 Parameter SecCurrNomVal Setting Options 0.00 .. 5.00 A; < > 0 Default Setting 1.00 A Comments Secondary Current Nominal Value 2.4.5.4 Information List No. Information Type of Information Comments 151.0010 I MV Current I 151.0021 f MV frequency 151.0023 MwCh_I MC Current Input I 54 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.4 Measured value processing 2.4.6 Measurement 1phase This packet serves to perform a monophase measurement (current and voltage). The measuring results of the phase current and the phase voltage are r.m.s. values of the corresponding fundamental component. 2.4.6.1 Description The phase current is set to the current input of the measuring transducer, whereas the phase voltage is set to the voltage input. The r.m.s. values calculated from these two input signals, the active power, the reactive power, the apparent power, the cos , the sin and the linked sizes and frequency calculated from the voltage (see information overview) are then present at the measuring transducer output. The frequency is determined from the applied phase voltage. If the secondary input voltage on the device falls below 10 Veff, the frequency is marked as invalid. The overflow occurs when the secondary input voltage on the device exceeds 120 Veff. The rated value of the frequency is taken from Power System Data 1. Routing of the measurement inputs to the respective measured value channels Phase current and Phase voltage and the routing of the measuring results is performed with DIGSI. Specifications for secondary transformer current and secondary transformer voltage are made in the properties dialog box of MU1P_1. Information on allocation can be obtained from the SIPROTEC System Description /1/. 2.4.6.2 Setting Notes SecVoltgNomVal The secondary factory-preset nominal transformer voltage can be set in the predefined range. SecCurrNomVal The secondary factory-preset nominal transformer current can be set in the predefined range. 2.4.6.3 Settings Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments 0 SecVoltgNomVal 0.00 .. 200.00 V; < > 0 100.00 V Secondary Voltage Nominal Value 0 SecCurrNomVal 0.00 .. 5.00 A; < > 0 1.00 A Secondary Current Nominal Value 2.4.6.4 Information List No. Information 152.0002 1P1_U Type of Information MV Comments 1P1 Voltage U 152.0010 1P1_I MV 1P1 Current I 152.0015 1P1_P MV 1P1 Active Power P SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 55 Functions 2.4 Measured value processing No. Information Type of Information Comments 152.0016 1P1_Q MV 1P1 Reactive Power Q 152.0017 1P1_S MV 1P1 Apparent Power S 152.0018 1P1_ MV 1P1 Phase Angle Phi 152.0019 1P1_cos MV 1P1 Active Power Factor Cosine Phi 152.0020 1P1_sin MV 1P1 Reactive Power Factor Sine Phi 152.0021 1P1_f MV 1P1 Frequency of U 152.0022 1P1Input_U MC 1P1 Voltage Input U 152.0023 1P1Input_I MC 1P1 Current Input I 2.4.7 Measurement 3phase This packet serves to perform a 3-phase measurement (current and voltage). The measuring results of the phase currents, phase voltages, phase-to-phase voltages, zero sequence current and zero sequence voltage are RMS values of the corresponding fundamental compound. 2.4.7.1 Description The following phase currents are applied at the current inputs of the measuring transducer: IL1, IL2 and IL3, as were the voltages UL1, UL2 and UL3. The r.m.s values of phase currents, phase voltages, phase-to-phase voltages, zero sequence current calculated from these six input signals, and the zero sequence voltage, active power, reactive power, apparent power, cos , sin and of the linked magnitudes and frequency calculated from the voltage UL1 (see Information overview table) are then applied at the measuring transducer output. The frequency is determined from the applied phase voltage UL1. If the secondary input voltage on the device falls below 10 Veff, the frequency is determined from the phase voltage UL2 or UL3. If all three voltages are too low, the rated frequency is used as frequency. In this case, the combined variables and the frequency itself are marked invalid. The phase-to-phase voltages and the zero variables start to fluctuate depending on the deviation from the rated frequency. The overflow occurs when the secondary input voltage on the device exceeds 120 Veff. The rated value of the frequency is taken from Power System Data 1. Routing of the measurement inputs to the respective measured value channels Phase currents and Phase voltages and the routing of the measuring results is performed with DIGSI. The direction of rotation can be changed by exchanging the phases. Enter the display factors for the primary values for each required output when routing the results. In this context, it must be observed that the phase-to-phase value is indicated for the phaseearth voltages if the phase-to-phase voltage (nominal voltage) was set as primary value. Specifications for secondary transformer current and secondary transformer voltage are made in the properties dialog box of MU3P_1. The phase-to-phase voltage is used as the value for the secondary transformer voltage. 2.4.7.2 Setting Notes SecVoltgNomVal The secondary factory-preset nominal transformer voltage can be set in the predefined range. SecCurrNomVal The secondary factory-preset nominal transformer current can be set in the predefined range. 56 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.4 Measured value processing 2.4.7.3 Settings Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments 0 SecVoltgNomVal 0.00 .. 200.00 V; < > 0 100.00 V Secondary Voltage Nominal Value 0 SecCurrNomVal 0.00 .. 5.00 A; < > 0 1.00 A Secondary Current Nominal Value 2.4.7.4 Information List No. Information Type of Information Comments 153.0003 3P1_U0 MV 3P1 Zero Sequence Voltage U0 153.0004 3P1_U1 MV 3P1 Phase to Earth Voltage U1 153.0005 3P1_U2 MV 3P1 Phase to Earth Voltage U2 153.0006 3P1_U3 MV 3P1 Phase to Earth Voltage U3 153.0007 3P1_U12 MV 3P1 Phase to Phase Voltage U12 153.0008 3P1_U23 MV 3P1 Phase to Phase Voltage U23 153.0009 3P1_U31 MV 3P1 Phase to Phase Voltage U31 153.0011 3P1_I0 MV 3P1 Zero Sequence Current I0 153.0012 3P1_I1 MV 3P1 Phase Current I1 153.0013 3P1_I2 MV 3P1 Phase Current I2 153.0014 3P1_I3 MV 3P1 Phase Current I3 153.0015 3P1_P MV 3P1 Active Power Three Phase 153.0016 3P1_Q MV 3P1 Reactive Power Three Phase 153.0017 3P1_S MV 3P1 Apparent Power Three Phase 153.0018 3P1_ MV 3P1 Phase Angle Three Phase 153.0019 3P1_cos MV 3P1 Active Power Factor Three Phase 153.0020 3P1_sin MV 3P1 Reactive Power Factor Three Phase 153.0021 3P1_f MV 3P1 Frequency 153.0024 3P1InputU1 MC 3P1 Voltage Input U1 153.0025 3P1InputU2 MC 3P1 Voltage Input U2 153.0026 3P1InputU3 MC 3P1 Voltage Input U3 153.0027 3P1InputI1 MC 3P1 Current Input I1 153.0028 3P1InputI2 MC 3P1 Current Input I2 153.0029 3P1InputI3 MC 3P1 Current Input I3 153.0098 3P1_3U0 MV 3P1 Zero Sequence Voltage 3U0 153.0099 3P1_3I0 MV 3P1 Zero Sequence Current 3I0 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 57 Functions 2.4 Measured value processing 2.4.8 Measurement Aron The ARON measuring circuit enables a complete calculation of a 3-phase system based on merely two voltage transformers and two current transformers. The measurement results of the phase currents, phase voltages, phase-to-phase voltages, zero current and zero values are the rms value of the respective fundamental component (see figure A-10). 2.4.8.1 Description Two phase currents (e.g. IL2 and IL3) and two phase-to-phase voltages (e.g. UL1L2 and UL1L3) are connected to the measuring transducer inputs. Based on these four input signals the measuring transducer output delivers the rms value of the phase currents, phase voltages, phase-to-phase voltages, zero current and zero voltage and the active power, reactive power, apparent power, cos , sin and of the linked quantities and the frequency calculated from the voltage UL1L2 (see the Information List). The frequency is determined from the applied voltage UL1L2. If the secondary input voltage at the device drops below 10 Veff, the frequency will be calculated from the voltage UL1L3. If both voltages are too small, the nominal frequency is used. The linked quantities and the frequency itself are marked as invalid in this case. The phaseto-phase voltages and the zero quantities start to vary depending on the deviation from the nominal frequency. The nominal value of the frequency is taken from the Power System Data 1. Routing of the measurement inputs to the respective measured value channels Currents and Voltages and the routing of the measuring results is performed with DIGSI. Enter the display factors for the primary values for each required output when routing the results. 2.4.8.2 Setting Notes SecVoltgNomVal The secondary factory-preset nominal transformer voltage can be set in the predefined range. SecCurrNomVal The secondary factory-preset nominal transformer current can be set in the predefined range. 2.4.8.3 Settings Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments 0 SecVoltgNomVal 0.00 .. 200.00 V; < > 0 100.00 V Secondary Voltage Nominal Value 0 SecCurrNomVal 0.00 .. 5.00 A; < > 0 1.00 A Secondary Current Nominal Value 58 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.4 Measured value processing 2.4.8.4 Information List No. Information Type of Information Comments 154.0007 A1_U12 MV A1 Phase to Phase Voltage U12 154.0009 A1_U13 MV A1 Phase to Phase Voltage U13 154.0013 A1_I2 MV A1 Phase Current I2 154.0014 A1_I3 MV A1 Phase Current I3 154.0015 A1_P MV A1 Active Power P 154.0016 A1_Q MV A1 Reactive Power Q 154.0017 A1_S MV A1 Apparent Power S 154.0018 A1_ MV A1 Phase Angle Phi 154.0019 A1_cos MV A1 Active Power Factor Cosine Phi 154.0020 A1_sin MV A1 Reactive Power Factor Sine Phi 154.0021 A1_f MV A1 Frequency 154.0024 A1Input_U1 MC A1 Voltage Input U1 154.0025 A1Input_U2 MC A1 Voltage Input U2 154.0027 A1Input_I1 MC A1 Current Input I1 154.0028 A1Input_I2 MC A1 Voltage Input I2 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 59 Functions 2.5 Metered Value Processing 2.5 Metered Value Processing The device can add up counter pulses of an external counter recorded via a binary input. Additionally, the device can calculate energy values from measured values. 2.5.1 Description Operation of pulse metered value The High Voltage Bay Control Unit 6MD66x forms the metered value as a sum of the externally generated counter pulses of a power meter. The pulses are read in via a binary input. The metered value receives a unit based on the following table. It has the same precision as the external counter and can also be an adjusted metered value. Operation of Measured Values Calculated from Metered Values With the measured value calculated from metered values, the High Voltage Bay Control Unit 6MD66x forms the power from the applied current and voltage values or from any desired measured values and integrates this calculated power value over time. The result is a power value with the precision of the device (0.5%), i.e. an operating metered value which cannot be used for adjustment. Table 2-2 Operating metered values Measured values Possible units Wp+ Active power, output kWh, MWh, GWh Wp- Active power, input kWh, MWh, GWh Wq+ Reactive power, output kVARh, MVARh, GVARh Wq- Reactive power, input kVARh, MVARh, GVARh The following types of information can be allocated to a metered value window in the DIGSI configuration matrix. * Metered value calculated from measured values * Pulse metered value The same operations are possible with pulse and measured values calculated from metered values, e.g. reset - to set back to a specified value etc.. 60 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.5 Metered Value Processing 2.5.2 Using the Pulse Metered Value In this example, the active power of a 3-phase system is to be integrated over time and displayed as a metered value. The pulse output of an external device which supplies the active power pulse accordingly, is to be applied to a binary input of the device. The energy corresponding to a pulse must be known. Inserting a pulse metered value Open the configuration matrix of the device and select Only measured and metered values as the information type. Create the group Energy in the configuration matrix. Open the information catalog and select the line Pulse (PMV) under Power Meter Pulse . Figure 2-8 Selecting information type pulse metered value Drag the selected information type with the left mouse button into the Energy group in the configuration matrix. Configuring a Pulse Metered Value Allocate the inserted pulse metered value in the configuration matrix to a binary input as the source. Allocate the inserted pulse metered value in the configuration matrix to the destination Metered value window. Configuring a Pulse Metered Value The properties of the pulse metered values can be configured via a dialog box. Right-click on the information item PulseMV in the Information column, Display text in the configuration matrix. Select Properties... from the context menu. The Object properties dialog box is opened. Select the tab Measured value description and enter the unit kWh and the desired number of decimal places. Enter the value which corresponds to a pulse of the external counter in the unit selected above into the input box Conversion factor. For example, enter 0.1 if a pulse corresponds to the energy 0.1 kWh and the unit kWh was selected above. SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 61 Functions 2.5 Metered Value Processing Figure 2-9 Object properties dialog box, Measured value description tab Select the tab Restore trigger and energy flow direction and enter the restore trigger and energy flow direction. Select the Cyclic option if the metered value is to be transmitted to the control centre at cyclic intervals. Otherwise select the None option. By clicking the Settings button, you end up in the dialog box for setting the corresponding time interval. One minute is preset. Note The settings made in the Cyclical restoring tab apply globally for all metered values. Under Energy flow direction, you define whether the metered value summates the quantity of exported or imported energy by selecting one of the two options. Figure 2-10 Object properties dialog box, Restore trigger and energy flow direction tab Select the tab Pulse type and error input and make your settings there. Select the Wiping pulse / S0 option if the rising edge of a single pulse is to increment the metered value by one. Select the Double current pulse option if the falling edge of a double current pulse is to increment the metered value by one. As soon as you route a pulse metered value to a binary input, the next binary input can be automatically routed as a fault input. A signal to this fault input can mark the count as corrupt. If you use this procedure, select the Use fault input checkbox. If it is not selected, the binary input following the metered pulse input is available to another application. 62 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.5 Metered Value Processing Figure 2-11 Object properties dialog box, Pulse type and error input tab Accept the settings with OK. 2.5.3 Use Measured Value / Metered Value In this example, the active power of a 3-phase system is to be integrated over time and displayed as a metered value. Here, a measuring transducer packet MU3P_1 which must be identified as available in the function scope of the device is used. It is configured with the secondary voltage nominal value 100.00 V and the secondary current nominal value 1 A. The rated data of the network is 110 kV and 20 kA. Inserting a Measured Value / Metered Value Open the configuration matrix of the device and select Only measured and metered values as the information type. Open the information catalog and select the line PowerMeter (MVMV) under PowerMeter PowerMeter . Figure 2-12 Selecting information type measured value metered value Drag the selected information type with the left mouse button into the MU3P_1 group in the configuration matrix. SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 63 Functions 2.5 Metered Value Processing Allocating a Measured Value / Metered Value Allocate the inserted information item to the source Measured value in the configuration matrix and select 3P1_P from the list. Allocate the inserted information item to the Metered value window destination in the configuration matrix. Configuring a Measured Value / Metered Value The properties of the measured value / metered values can be configured via a dialog box. Right-click on the information item MeasVMV in the Information column, Display text in the configuration matrix. Select Properties... from the context menu. The Object properties dialog box is opened. Select the tab Measured value description and enter the unit MWh and 2 as the number of decimal places. Using the conversion factor, you can convert the input signal to match the selected unit and data of the measuring transducer. The conversion always refers to the 100% value of the input signal with measured values. If a measuring transducer packet supplies the currents and voltages as the power 3811 MW at a 100% value, this is the energy value which accumulates in a MWh. 100% power over one hour is equivalent to 60,000 pulses. The conversion factor to be entered is therefore the power divided by 60,000. Enter the calculated value 0.0635 into the Conversion factor input box (3811 MW divided by 60,000). Figure 2-13 Object properties dialog box, Restore trigger and energy flow direction tab Select the tab Restore trigger and energy flow direction and enter the restore trigger and energy flow direction. Select the Cyclic option if the metered value is to be transmitted to the control centre at cyclic intervals. Otherwise select the None option. By clicking the Settings button, you end up in the dialog box for setting the corresponding time interval. One minute is preset. Note The settings made in the Cyclical restoring tab in this dialog box apply globally for all metered values. Under Energy flow direction, you define whether the metered value summates the quantity of exported or imported energy by selecting one of the two options. 64 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.5 Metered Value Processing Figure 2-14 Object properties dialog box, Restore trigger and energy flow direction tab Accept the settings with OK. Predefined Metered Values The figure below shows a list of predefined metered values. Figure 2-15 Default metered values SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 65 Functions 2.6 Threshold-Switch 2.6 Threshold-Switch Using the Threshold switch function, you can set transmission thresholds and allocate the threshold switches to individual or multiple measured values. 2.6.1 Description The threshold value procedure consists of the Transmission threshold configuration dialog and the threshold switch. Transmission threshold The transmission threshold determines the transmission frequency of measured values. It is specified in percentage. If zero is selected as the threshold value for the transmission threshold, each measured value change will be transmitted to the higher-level station. This, however, would overload the communication line within short time. A threshold value not equal to zero results in all changes to new measured values being added compared to the last measured value transmitted. If the sum of the changes reaches the set percentage, a new measured value is transmitted at the next possible point in time. Perform the settings in the DIGSI configuration matrix. You can set the central threshold, configured threshold and switching object in the object properties of the measured value, tab Transmission threshold. * Use central threshold (10%): Select this check box to use the factory-preset threshold value of 10 %. This de-activates all the other input and output options in this tab. * Parameterised threshold: Set the desired value in this rotating box. The set value multiplied by 0.1 % results in the threshold value. * Switching object: A changeover from the central and the parameterised threshold can be initiated by the status of a message. From the drop-down menu, select the indication whose status shall initiate a changeover. The following figure serves as an example of summation formation for a threshold of 10%. Here, the values are summated (in the left example 4.5% / -3% / 3.5% => 11%) and transmitted at the next possible point in time in case the threshold is exceeded. Figure 2-16 66 Summation for threshold value SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.6 Threshold-Switch Threshold switch The group Software switch (in the DIGSI configuration matrix) contains all potential switching objects. Threshold 1 is the preset value. You can add additional thresholds (single point indications) from the information catalog. Assign the threshold value switch to one or several measured values via the Switching object setting in the measured-value object properties. 2.6.2 No. - Information List Information ThreshVal1 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Type of Information IntSP Comments Threshold Value 1 67 Functions 2.7 Circuit breaker synchronisation 2.7 Circuit breaker synchronisation If the synchronization function of the device is active, the device can check whether the synchronization conditions of both subnetworks are fulfilled (synchrocheck) when the circuit breaker is closed. The device distinguishes between synchronous and asynchronous networks and reacts differently on the connection. Systems are called synchronous if their difference frequency is small. The concrete value depends on the parameter settings. In synchronous networks the CB operating time is not considered. In asynchronous networks the difference frequency is greater and the area of the energization window is traversed more quickly. Therefore, the circuit-breaker operating time has to be taken into consideration. The switching command is automatically dated forward by this time so that the CB contacts close exactly at the right moment. The automation function in the device allows using different reference voltages of the active busbar for the synchronization, regardless of the disconnector position. Up to eight different settings groups can be stored for the synchronization function for use during operation. The different properties of several circuitbreakers can thus be accounted for. The synchronization function groups six to eight differ from the groups one to five essentially due to the connection of the voltage transformers. Various connection examples can be found in the Appendix. 2.7.1 Function Description The SIPROTEC 4 device 6MD66x provides parameterization options for eight different synchronization functions. The function and operating principle is described below by means of the SYNC function 1 (valid for all function groups). Specifics of the SYNC functions 6 to 8 are summarized in a separate section (see 2.7.2), 2.7.1.1 Functioning The synchronisation function is used in the control system for connecting two subnetworks during operational switch or for operational switch on or on the protection level after a three-pin short or long interruption. The synchronisation function ensures that the connection is only performed if both subnetworks are synchronous to each other or the deviation is within the defined limits. The connection is performed if the following conditions are met at the moment of establishing the isolated connection: * Voltage magnitudes Umin < | U | < Umax * Difference of voltage magnitudes | U | < Umax * Frequencies fmin f fmax * Difference of frequencies f < fmax * Difference of angles < max * Speed of the frequency difference change (optional) d delta f / dt < d fdiff dt For safety reasons, energization during large frequency differences and large CB operating times is only allowed below the curve shown in the illustration. Bear this in mind during parameterization. 68 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.7 Circuit breaker synchronisation Figure 2-17 Maximum permissible difference in frequency as a function of the circuit-breaker operating time The following illustration depicts the maximum settable limits for f SYNC in dependence on the CB operating time at a maximum allowable displacement angle of 9. Figure 2-18 Maximal limits for f SYNCHRON The Dead bus and Dead line connection are special cases. In this case, connection is made depending on the configuration under the following conditions: * Dead Line | Ubb | > Umin and | Uline | < Udead and fmin fbb fmax * Dead bus | Ubb | < Udead and | Uline | > Umin and fmin fline fmax * Dead line & Dead bus | Ubb | < Udead and | Uline | < Udead SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 69 Functions 2.7 Circuit breaker synchronisation Busbar voltage Ubb and feeder voltage Uline are assigned to voltages U1 and U2 depending on how the device is connected. Connection examples can be found in the Appendix. The connection is performed on an idle busbar, on an idle feeder or on both. A synchronization comparison with the runtime of the synchronization function can be executed by means of definitely applied voltages (normal case) or by means of a voltage application via relay. The synchronisation comparison including an application of the voltage is necessary e.g. for multiple busbars or in case of a failure of the coupling circuit breaker (backup switching). Additional preparatory switching operations as well as the selection of the subsettings group are necessary for applying the voltage at the time of the comparison. The settings must be stored in the control device for each combination of subnetworks. The measuring channels of the reference and feeder voltage must be assigned to each synchronization function group individually. Voltage application If the voltage application is used, the user must set a switching sequence with the following components: * Voltage application * Synchronisation * Voltage deselection The voltage application option ensures that a 250 ms delay is considered in the measuring algorithm after the synchronization start. In this way, the measured values can stabilize. With activated Filter LFO the delay time is extended by 1.25 s. Low-Frequency Oscillations (LFO) Filter (optional) The Filter LFO is a filter for low-frequency oscillations ranging from 0.8 Hz to 1.6 Hz. It is only effective for synchronous networks, not for asynchronous networks. The filter filters out all frequency components inside the frequency range from 0.8 Hz to 1.6 Hz and forms a filtered frequency mean value. A synchronous network is not detected if the filtered average value of the frequencies lies outside the permissible range (parameter f SYNCHRON) or if the unfiltered frequency measured value lies outside the permissible range (parameter f SYNCHRON plus parameter f Deviation). The set release of time delay is automatically extended by 1 sec. if the Filter LFO is activated. This procedure ensures that asynchronous conditions can be correctly detected during low frequency power swing conditions, even if the parameter f Deviation is used for extending the permissible range. The filter also clears up the measured value rate of change of frequency for the synchronous range (parameter d fdiff dt syn) of low frequency components. The filter can be disabled (parameter Filter LFO = No). In the example shown in the next figure, the synchrocheck function would initiate energization, if the allowed frequency difference was set to 10 mHz without Filter LFO as soon as the frequency f2 enters the 10-mHz band. With Filter LFO energization is not initiated, since the mean value of f2 is outside of the band. 70 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.7 Circuit breaker synchronisation Figure 2-19 Example: Frequency difference between the constant frequency f1 and the sinusoidal oscillating frequency f2 Figures 2-21 to 2-23 give an overview of the input and output indications of the synchronization function. Checking the change-of-frequency speed To check the change-of-frequency speed, you can use the parameters d fdiff dt syn (for synchronous networks) and d fdiff dt asyn (for asynchronous networks). It will not switch on if the parameterized threshold value is exceeded. The check is switched off if the threshold value is set to . Field of application internal control, internal synchronisation The synchronization with internal control and internal synchronization is the standard application with 6MD66x. Maximally 8 function groups (SYNC functions group 1 to 8) with different parameter sets are available. The assignment of the synchronisation-requiring control device to the corresponding synchronisation settings group is performed via the SyncSD setting (control device to be synchronised). By the time of the switching operation, the function group selection can be controlled dynamically via the Sync. effective input message. The Sync. effective input indication can be configured to a binary input, CFC or IRC. Unsynchronised switching is performed if no synchronization function is effective (Sync. effective OFF). The contact between the control and the synchronization function is performed internally via indications: * >Sy1 Meas" (Measurement request) * Sync. CloseRel" (Enable switch-on) * Sync. synchron" (in case of an error) SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 71 Functions 2.7 Circuit breaker synchronisation Field of Application External Control, Internal synchronization The 6MD66x also enable the synchronisation via an external control and internal synchronisation. To directly connect an external control, the setting of the control device to be synchronised must be set to none. By the time of the switching operation, the function group selection can be controlled dynamically via the Sync. effective input message. The Sync. effective input indication can be configured to a binary input, CFC or IRC. Unsynchronised switching is performed if no synchronization function is effective (Sync. effective OFF). In this case, the contact between the control and the synchronization function is performed internally via indications: * >Sy1 Meas" (Measurement request), on binary input * Sync. CloseRel", on relay (for outputting the switch-on command) * Sync. synchron", on relay (for signalling the synchronous state) Subfunctions The synchronization check is composed of the two subfunctions control and synchronization. * The control function ensures the coordination of the complete command procedure: - Coordination of the different switching directions - Standard interlockings such as timeout protection - Command connection/disconnection of the command relays - Command logging CO+/-, FB+/- and COE. - Feedback to the operator (operator response). * The Synchronisation function processes the measuring phase of: - >Sy1 Meas" (Measurement request), start of measurement, to - Sync. CloseRel", switching release. Phases of command processing with synchrocheck Depending on the setting and the current process condition, the individual phases of the command processing are executed, skipped or the command processing is aborted. When integrating the synchronization procedure into a switching sequence, the deselection phases must be processed correspondingly also in case of an abortion. * Voltage application: The voltage application (applying measured values at the time of the switching operation) is optional. It is, for example, set via a switching sequence in CFC. The corresponding measured values must be switched to the device analog inputs via relays. * Selection of the SYNC function group(if necessary): The SYNC function group selection (selection of a function group with its settings and indications) is optional. The selection is only required if several SYNC function groups are actually switched active. It is, for example, set via a switching sequence in CFC. The selection is performed by activating the input indication >Sy1 eff." effective. 72 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.7 Circuit breaker synchronisation * Switchgear interlocking: This phase executes the control subfunction. It serves to execute all switchgear interlocking checks and to state if switching is permitted or not. In additon to this, it is checked if maximally one synchronisation function (measuring phase) is active. * Checking start conditions: This phase executes the control subfunction. A check determines whether switching is to occur with or without synchronisation. It serves to execute all switchgear interlocking checks and to state if switching is permitted or not. In additon to this, it is checked if maximally one synchronisation function (measuring phase) is active. - Control direction: Control command = ON: Continue with synchronisation check. Control command = OFF: Continue with control phase (no synchronisation required). - Synchronisation check: Checks whether the control device concerned shall be switched on synchronised or evaluation of the number of input indications >Sy1 eff." = ON. - Analysis of the operating mode Evaluation of the input indications of the selected group. Table 2-3 Start conditions check phase, SYNC function group selection Number of SYNC function groups including the control device to be switched Number of input messages 0 Irrelevant Unsynchronised control device, continue with control phase 1 0 Unsynchronised switching, continue with control phase 1 1 Unambiguous allocation, continue with operating mode analysis and activated group >1 >1 Error, abort with BF (too many groups effective) Table 2-4 Reaction >Sy1 eff." = ON Start conditions check phase, operating mode analysis Sync. Error" Sync. CloseRel" Reaction ON Irrelevant OFF ON Switching enable, continue with control phase OFF OFF Continue with Measuring phase, tripping by: >SyMeasON SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Abort with BF- 73 Functions 2.7 Circuit breaker synchronisation * Measuring: This phase executes the synchronisation subfunction. This phase is coordinated by means of input indications: - >Sy1 Meas", start/stop of measurement - >Sy1 dirCO", bypassing - >Sy1 rlblk", block switching enable The actual measuring procedure with the output messages starts afterwards: - Sync. CloseRel", switching enable (continue with control phase) - Sync. Error", synchronisation failed - Sync. block", switching enable blocked - Sync.MonTimeExc", monitoring time exceeded Figure 2-20 74 Input and output indications of the synchronization function (part 1) SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.7 Circuit breaker synchronisation Figure 2-21 Input and output indications of the synchronization function (part 2) SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 75 Functions 2.7 Circuit breaker synchronisation Figure 2-22 76 Input and output indications of the synchronization function (part 3) SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.7 Circuit breaker synchronisation Figure 2-23 Input and output indications of the synchronization function (part 4) Table 2-5 Controlling the measuring phase Action Measuring >Sy1 Meas". ON and >Sy1 dirCO" = ON and Sync. block" = OFF Reaction Switching enable: Sync. CloseRel" ON >Sy1 Meas" ON and >Sy1 dirCO". = OFF Start >Sy1 Meas". OFF Stop Synchronisation conditions reached, or Stop >Sy1 dirCO". ON and >Sy1 rlblk" = ON and Sync. block" = OFF Switching enable: Sync. CloseRel" ON Synchronisation conditions reached, or Stop >Sy1 dirCO" ON and Sync. block" = ON >Sy1 rlblk" = OFF Irrelevant Switching releases are given: Sync. block" OFF >Sy1 rlblk" = ON Irrelevant Switching enables are blocked: Sync. block" ON >Sy1 Meas" ON and >Sy1 block" ON Stop Aborts the synchronization Monitoring time exceeded T-SYN. DURATION Stop Indication: Sync.MonTimeExc" ON Errors (problems in the synchronisation Stop function) Indication: Sync. Error" ON A measurement request >Sy1 Meas" ON in the state >Sy1 rlblk" ON corresponds to the measurement initiation in the SINAUT LSA. An abort of the measuring phase is initiated via >Sy1 Meas" OFF. SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 77 Functions 2.7 Circuit breaker synchronisation * Control: This phase executes the control subfunction. The command procedure is aborted for: - Abort command with AC+ - Monitoring time exceeded T-SYN. DURATION with CO- Sync. Error" ON, synchronisation failed with CO- The command procedure is started via the following indication: - Sync. CloseRel" ON, switching enable comes with CO+ The normal command sequence runs afterwards. * Deselection of the SYNC function group: The action selection of the SYNC function group must be terminated. This is also true for an abort of the command procedure. * Voltage deselection: The voltage application action must be terminated. This is also true for an abort of the command procedure. Interfaces The following data are relevant for the user as an interface: * Commands, Commands to the circuit breaker/the function from different initiators. * Input indications, Indications for controlling the synchronisation function. * Output indications, Indications on the state of the synchronisation function and indications on switch-impeding criteria. * Measuring channels, Allocation of the logical inputs of the synchronisation function on the voltage transformer (analogue input). * Measured values, calculated measured values of the synchronisation function. * Indications, Indications on the command procedure (such as CO+/CO-). * Settings, Settings for configuring properties. 78 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.7 Circuit breaker synchronisation Commands Table 2-6 Start conditions check phase, operating mode analysis Code Explanation Command ON/OFF to SyncSD Control command from different initiators. ON: Control command for switching the control device on. (with or without synchronisation procedure) OFF: Control command for switching the control device off. (without synchronisation procedure) Command abort - to SyncSD, or - to all Abort command, a running command procedure, the synchronisation or switching procedure must be aborted. Abort of the synchronisation procedure is without conditions. Abort of the synchronisation procedure is only possible for a command with operating mode "impulse, interruptible". Input indications The input indications are enabled once per synchronization settings group. For this reason, they are configured as often as synchronization settings groups are required. Table 2-7 Input indications, SYNC function groups Code >Sy1 eff." Explanation Function effective. Activation and deactivation of a function group. In the "Testing start conditions" phase, the SYNC function group is selected by means of this indication. For selecting a group or for a unique emergency control, a switching sequence must be set via CFC, e.g. for emergency control: - effective OFF - command ON - effective ON An emergency control can also be reached via >Sy1 dirCO" ON, however only if >Sy1 rlblk" OFF. ON: The group is effective. OFF: The group is ineffective (unsynchronised switching). >Sy1 block" Aborts the synchronization >Sy1 rlblk" Block switching enable. The synchronisation functions normally (the measuring function is executed), but a switching enable is prevented. The blocking of the switching enable is signalled via the Sync. block" output indication. ON: switching enables are blocked. OFF: switching enables are provided. >Sy1 dirCO" Bypassing. The measuring function is bridged, i.e. a measurement for >Sy1 rlblk" OFF immediately initiates a switching enable. ON: The measuring function is skipped or stopped with >Sy1 Meas". ON. The switching enable is provided. OFF: The measuring function is started with >Sy1 Meas" ON. >Sy1 Meas" Start/stop of the (measuring) synchronization function. ON: The synchronisation function is started. OFF: The synchronisation function is aborted. >Sy1U1>U2<" Switch test V2 dead on / off. ON: Connection occurs even if voltage V2 is missing. (The threshold value for dead line or busbar can be configured.) SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 79 Functions 2.7 Circuit breaker synchronisation Code Explanation >Sy1U1<U2>" Switch test V1 dead on / off: ON: Connection occurs even if voltage V1 is missing. (The threshold value for dead line or busbar can be configured.) >Sy1U1<U2<" Swtich test V1 & V2 dead on / off. ON: Connection occurs even if voltages U1 and U2 are missing. (The threshold value for dead line or busbar can be configured.) Note The meaning of indication >Sy1 block" has changed from version 4.30 on. Old meaning: Block switching enable Now: Cancel synchronization Reason: standardization with other SIPROTEC4 devices The new indication >Sy1 rlblk" now assumes the old meaning: Block switching enable. Likewise, a compatible firmware extension has been implemented. Measuring channels The input measuring channels describe a measured-value channel and can be configured directly on an analog input in the DIGSI configuration matrix. Table 2-8 Input measuring channels, function group FB_SYNC 1 to 5 Code Explanation Sy1 ChU1" Channel of voltage V1. Sy1 ChU2" Channel of voltage V2. Output indications Status messages are output from the synchronization function. The status messages are output in the context of the active FB_SYNC function module. 80 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.7 Circuit breaker synchronisation Table 2-9 Output messages of the synchronisation function Code Explanation Sync. CloseRel" Synchronisation conditions exist, switching is enabled. ON: This immediately leads to a switching command (triggering of command relays). Sync. Error" Error, problems within the synchronisation function. Sync. block" Aborts the synchronization. Sync. CLOSE BLK" Blocking by external event. Sync.MonTimeExc" Monitoring time exceeded Sync. synchron" The networks meet the synchronisation conditions for asynchronous or synchronous networks. Sync. U1> U2<" Condition V2 dead exists. Sync. U1< U2>" Condition V1 dead exists. Sync. U1< U2<" Condition U1 & U2 dead exists. Sync. Vdiff>" The difference voltage amount is greater than the setting. The corresponding SVK_Udiff measured-value indication is transmitted additionally. Sync. fdiff>" The difference voltage amount is greater than the setting. The corresponding SVK_Fdiff measured-value indication is transmitted additionally. Sync. diff>" The amount of the difference angle is greater than the setting. The corresponding SVK_Fdiff measured-value message is transmitted additionally, provided that the Fdiff < FdiffSyn condition is met. Sync. f1>>" The f1 frequency is greater than the fmax setting. The corresponding SVK_F1 measured-value message is transmitted additionally. Sync. f1<<" The f1 frequency is smaller than the fmin setting. The corresponding SVK_F1 measured-value message is transmitted additionally. Sync. f2>>" The f2 frequency is smaller than the fmax setting. The corresponding SVK_F2 measured-value message is transmitted additionally. Sync. f2<<" The f2 frequency is smaller than the fmin setting. The corresponding SVK_F2 measured-value indication is transmitted additionally. Sync. U1>>" The U1 voltage is greater than the Vmax setting. The corresponding SVK_Usyn1 measured-value indication is transmitted additionally. Sync. U1<<" The U1 voltage is smaller than the Vmin setting. The corresponding SVK_Usyn1 measured value indication is transmitted additionally, provided that Dead Bus is not switched on or that no Dead Bus voltage was set. Sync. U2>>" The U2 voltage is greater than the Vmax setting. The corresponding SVK_Usyn2 measured-value indication is transmitted additionally. Sync. U2<<" The U2 voltage is smaller than the Vmin setting. The corresponding SVK_Usyn2 measured value indication is transmitted additionally, provided that Dead Line is not switched on or that no Dead Line voltage was set. Sync. syn" Synchrocheck detected synchronous network Sync. asyn" Synchrocheck detected asynchronous network Sync.dFdiffdtS>" Magnitude of the speed of difference frequency change > parameter for the synchronous section; this indication is generated when the parameter is exceeded. Sync.dFdiffdtA>" Magnitude of the speed of difference frequency change > parameter for the asynchronous section; this indication is generated when the parameter is exceeded. Sync. fDev>" The permissible deviation of the unfiltered frequency difference at low-frequency oscillations was exceeded SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 81 Functions 2.7 Circuit breaker synchronisation Measured values The measured values are calculated by the measuring function and made available for display or further processing (e.g. for limit-value determination in CFC). The configuration specifies the way in which measured values are displayed, further processed and forwarded to the higher-level control centre. The measured values are calculated for each SYNC function group. The storage is performed independent of the information objects. Table 2-10 Synchronisation measured values Code Explanation Sync. U1" Synchronisation voltage Sync. U1" is generally also the reference voltage. Sync. U2" Synchronization voltage Sync. U2" is generally also the feeder voltage. Sync. Vdiff" Difference of synchronisation voltages Sync. U1" and Sync. U2". Sync. " Angles between the voltages Sync. U1" and Sync. U2". Sync. f1" Frequency of the synchronisation voltage Sync. U1". Sync. f2" Frequency of the synchronisation voltage Sync. U2". Sync. fdiff" Frequency difference between f(Sync. U1") and f(Sync. U2"). Sync. df S" Frequency difference f(U1), f(U2), low-frequency components filtered out (0.8 Hz to 1.6 Hz) (Filter LFO = yes) Sync.ddfdt" Speed of the frequency difference change Sync.ddfdtS" Speed of the frequency difference change, low-frequency components filtered out (0.8 Hz to 1.6 Hz) 2.7.1.2 Setting Notes T-CB close The circuit breaker closing (operating) time indicates the runtime of the circuit breaker including all relay and contactor pickup times. It can be specified in the predefined range. A default value is preset. Balancing U1/U2 Adaptation of the V1 and V2 voltages is possible with the Balancing U1/U2. It can be specified in the predefined range. A default value is preset. Tr. U1-U2 The phase angle offset is set with the angle adaptation initiated by the transformer vector group. The angle faults of imprecise primary transformers can also be corrected. The phase angle can be set in the predefined range. A default value is set. SecTransNomVal1 Here, the secondary rated transformer voltage V1 of the measured-value input for the relevant reference voltage must be set on the input/output modules. In this context, it must be observed that, in case of a measuring voltage application, transformers with the same transformation ratio and the same connection must be used for all connectable voltages. The voltage can be set in the predefined range. A default value is preset. 82 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.7 Circuit breaker synchronisation SecTransNomVal2 Here, the secondary rated transformer voltage V2 of the measured-value input for the relevant reference voltage must be set on the input/output modules. In this context, it must be observed that, in case of a measuring voltage application, transformers with the same transformation ratio and the same connection must be used for all connectable voltages. The voltage can be set in the predefined range. A default value is preset. SyncSD Control device to be synchronized. The synchronization function can be used for controlling an internal or external command procedure. In case of an internal command processing, a connection to the control device to be synchronized is established at the parameter SyncSD. The command is initiated via a control command to the control device, e.g. from the control display. In case of an external command processing, the parameter is "none". Umin The lower voltage limit Umin specifies the minimum voltage which may be connected. It can be specified in the predefined range. A default value is preset. Umax The upper voltage limit Umax specifies the maximum voltage which may be connected. It can be specified in the predefined range. A default value is preset. Udead The voltage threshold indicates the voltage maximum up to which a line or busbar is detected as dead. It can be specified in the predefined range. A default value is preset. Sync.U1>U2< This parameter serves to specify if a connection is to take place in case of a healthy busbar and a dead line or dead generator (Dead Line). The default setting is No. Sync.U1<U2> This parameter serves to specify if a connection is to take place in case of a dead busbar and a healthy line (Dead Bus). The default setting is No. Sync.U1<U2< This parameter serves to specify if a connection is to take place in case of a dead busbar and a dead line (Dead Line and Dead Bus). The default setting is No. T-SYN. DURATION The maximum duration of synchronisation check must be set here. If the connection cannot be established successfully within this period, the synchronization procedure is aborted. It can be specified in the predefined range. A default value is preset. fmin This setting defines the lower limit of the frequency range in which the synchronous connection is permissible. The working range of the measuring procedures is not influenced. The lower limit of the frequency working range must be lower than its upper limit. It can be specified in the predefined range. A default value is set. SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 83 Functions 2.7 Circuit breaker synchronisation fmax This setting defines the upper limit of the frequency working range in which the synchronous connection is permissible. The working range of the measuring procedures is not influenced. The upper limit of the frequency working range must be higher than its lower limit. It can be specified in the predefined range. A default value is set. UdiffAsyn This setting indicates the maximum voltage difference of the amounts of Vsyn1 and Usyn2 for asynchronous conditions. It can be specified in the predefined range. A default value is preset. fdiff This setting indicates the maximum frequency difference up to which a connection is permissible for asynchronous systems. It can be specified in the predefined range. A default value is preset. f SYNCHRON This setting indicates the maximum frequency difference up to which a connection is permissible for synchronous systems. It can be specified in the predefined range. A default value is preset. UdiffSyn This setting indicates the maximum voltage difference of the amounts of Usyn1 and Usyn2 for synchronous conditions. It can be specified in the predefined range. A default value is preset. diff The parameter specifies the maximum allowable angle between the voltages of the subnetworks at which the connection takes place. It is effective when the frequency difference of the subnetworks f FdiffSyn applies, i.e. in the operating state "synchronous networks". But if the device has recognized the two subnetworks to be "asynchronous", a fixed allowed difference angle of + 5 degrees will always be accounted for. The angle can be varied in the preset range. A value is set by default. T SYNCHRON This parameter indicates the switch delay time for synchronous networks. This is the minimum period, the UdiffSyn (maximum permissible voltage difference), f SYNCHRON (maximum permissible frequency difference) and diff (angle difference) which must remain in the parameterised range until the control command is initiated. If a value leaves the parameterised range, the time counter is reset. It can be specified in the predefined range. A default value is set. Note To obtain a stable connection range, the measured values have a hysteresis: 10 % or 1 V for voltages (the respectively lower value is valid). 20 mHz for frequencies. 1 for angles. Filter LFO This parameter specifies whether low-frequency oscillations ranging from 0.8 Hz to 1.6 Hz in the frequency signal are filtered before connecting the subnetworks. The default setting is No. 84 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.7 Circuit breaker synchronisation f Deviation The parameter defines the permissible deviations of unfiltered frequency differences from the frequency threshold f SYNCHRON at low-frequency oscillations. It is only active if Filter LFO is activated. d fdiff dt syn The parameter defines the maximum allowable speed of change of the frequency difference up to which synchronous networks will be connected. d fdiff dt asyn The parameter defines the maximum allowable speed of change of the frequency difference up to which synchronous networks will be energized. 2.7.1.3 Settings Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments 0 T-CB close 0.01 .. 0.60 sec 0.06 sec Closing (operating) time of CB 0 T-SYN. DURATION 1.00 .. 2400.00 sec 30.00 sec Maximum duration of synchronism-check 0 fmin 92 .. 105 % 95 % Minimum frequency 0 fmax 95 .. 108 % 105 % Maximum frequency 0 SyncSD (Setting options depend on configuration) None synchronizable switching device 0 Balancing U1/U2 0.50 .. 2.00 1.00 Balancing Factor U1/U2 0 Tr. U1-U2 0 .. 360 0 Angle adjustment U1-U2 (Trafo) 0 SecTransNomVal1 0.00 .. 170.00 V; < > 0 100.00 V Secondary Transformer Nominal Value 1 0 SecTransNomVal2 0.00 .. 170.00 V; < > 0 100.00 V Secondary Transformer Nominal Value 2 0 Umin 20 .. 125 V 90 V Minimum Voltage for Synchronization 0 Umax 20 .. 140 V 110 V Maximum Voltage for Synchronization 0 Udead 1 .. 60 V 5V Voltage Treshold for Dead Line/Dead Bus 0 Sync.U1>U2< YES NO NO Synchronize to U1> and U2< 0 Sync.U1<U2> YES NO NO Synchronize to U1< and U2> 0 Sync.U1<U2< YES NO NO Synchronize to U1< and U2< 0 UdiffSyn 0.5 .. 50.0 V 2.0 V Maximum voltage difference, synchronous 0 fdiff 0.00 .. 2.00 Hz 0.10 Hz Maximum frequency difference, syn. 0 diff 2 .. 90 10 Maximum angle difference, syn. SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 85 Functions 2.7 Circuit breaker synchronisation Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments 0 UdiffAsyn 0.5 .. 50.0 V 2.0 V Maximum voltage differnece, asynchronous 0 f SYNCHRON 10 .. 100 mHz 10 mHz Frequency diff. treshold Sync/Async. 0 T SYNCHRON 0.00 .. 60.00 sec 0.05 sec Switch Delay for synchronous systems 0 d fdiff dt syn 10 .. 25 mHz/s; mHz/s Maximum difference df/dt syn. 0 d fdiff dt asyn 50 .. 500 mHz/s; mHz/s Maximum difference df/dt asyn. 0 Filter LFO NO YES NO Filter low frequency oscillation 0 f Deviation 0 .. 100 mHz 0 mHz f deviation low frequency oscillations 2.7.1.4 Information List No. Information Type of Information Comments 170.0001 >Sy1 eff. SP >Sync1 effective 170.0024 Sy1 ChU1 MC Sync1, Voltage input U1 170.0025 Sy1 ChU2 MC Sync1, Voltage input U2 170.0041 >Sy1 block SP >Sync1 block 170.0042 >Sy1 dirCO SP >Sync1 direct Command Output 170.0043 >Sy1 Meas SP >Sync1 Measuement only 170.0044 >Sy1U1>U2< SP >Sync1 switch to U1> and U2< 170.0045 >Sy1U1<U2> SP >Sync1 switch to U1< and U2> 170.0046 >Sy1U1<U2< SP >Sync1 switch to U1< and U2< 170.0049 Sync. CloseRel OUT Sync. Release of CLOSE Command 170.0050 Sync. Error OUT Synchronization Error 170.0051 Sync. block OUT Sync. blocked 170.0052 Sync.MonTimeExc OUT Sync. Monitoring Time exceeded 170.0053 Sync. synchron OUT Sync. Synchron 170.0054 Sync. U1> U2< OUT Sync. Condition U1> U2< fulfilled 170.0055 Sync. U1< U2> OUT Sync. Condition U1< U2> fulfilled 170.0056 Sync. U1< U2< OUT Sync. Condition U1< U2< fulfilled 170.0057 Sync. Vdiff> OUT Sync. Voltage difference exceeded 170.0058 Sync. fdiff> OUT Sync. frequency difference exceeded 170.0059 Sync. diff> OUT Sync.angle difference exceeded 170.0060 Sync. f1>> OUT Sync. frequency f1 too high 170.0061 Sync. f1<< OUT Sync. frequency f1 too low 170.0062 Sync. f2>> OUT Sync. frequency f2 too high 170.0063 Sync. f2<< OUT Sync. frequency f2 too low 170.0064 Sync. U1>> OUT Sync. voltage U1 too high 170.0065 Sync. U1<< OUT Sync. voltage U1 too low 170.0066 Sync. U2>> OUT Sync. voltage U2 too high 170.0067 Sync. U2<< OUT Sync. voltage U2 too low 86 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.7 Circuit breaker synchronisation No. Information 170.0070 Sync. U1 Type of Information Comments MV Sync. voltage U1 170.0071 Sync. U2 MV Sync. voltage U2 170.0072 Sync. Vdiff MV Sync. voltage difference U1,U2 170.0073 Sync. MV Sync. angle between U1,U2 170.0074 Sync. f1 MV Sync. frequency f1 170.0075 Sync. f2 MV Sync. frequency f2 170.0076 Sync. fdiff MV Sync. frequency difference f1, f2 170.0080 Sync. Udiffsyn> OUT Sync. volt.-diff. exceeded synch. netw. 170.0081 Sync.Udiffasyn> OUT Sync. volt.-diff. exceeded asynch. netw. 170.0082 Sync. fdiffsyn> OUT Sync. frq.-diff. exceeded synch. netw. 170.0083 Sync.fdiffasyn> OUT Sync. frq.-diff. exceeded asynch. netw. 170.0084 Sync.dFdiffdtS> OUT Sync.dFdiffdtS> 170.0085 Sync.dFdiffdtA> OUT Sync.dFdiffdtA> 170.0086 Sync. syn OUT Sync. syn 170.0087 Sync. asyn OUT Sync. asyn 170.0088 Sync. df S MV Sync. df S 170.0089 Sync.ddfdt MV Sync.ddfdt 170.0090 Sync.ddfdtS MV Sync.ddfdtS 170.0091 Sync. fDev> OUT Sync. fdiff deviation exceeded 170.2102 >Sy1 rlblk SP >Sync1 release blocking 170.2103 Sync. CLOSE BLK OUT Sync. CLOSE command is BLOCKED 2.7.2 SYNC function groups 6 - 8, special features The SYNC function groups 6 to 8 offer other variations for connection of the voltage transformer. Connection examples can be found in the Appendix. 2.7.2.1 Description SYNC function groups 6 to 8 do not differ from SYNC function groups 1 to 5 in terms of function, operation and configuration options. They are described in detail in Chapter 2.7.1. With SYNC function groups 6 to 8, two channels with phase-to-earth voltage (U11 and U12) are to be allocated for voltage U1. The phase-to-phase voltage U1 is to be formed from these voltages. The relevant phase-tophase voltage is to be connected to voltage input U2. SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 87 Functions 2.7 Circuit breaker synchronisation Measuring channels The input measuring channels describe a measured-value channel and can be configured directly on an analogue input with DIGSI. Table 2-11 Input measuring channels, function groups FB_SYNC 6 to 8 Code 2.7.3 Explanation Sy6 ChU11" Channel of phase-to-earth voltage U11LE. This value is required for calculating a phase-phase voltage U1. Sy6 ChU12" Channel of phase-to-earth voltage U12LE. This value is required for calculating a phase-phase voltage U1. Sy6 ChU2" Channel of voltage U2. Parameterizing the SYNC function Synchronisation is a function which must be set as available in the functional scope. 2.7.3.1 Inserting the Synchronisation Function First select the required synchronisation functions as available in the Functional scope dialog box in DIGSI. For this purpose, open the device and click Functional scope in the function selection and confirm with OK. Figure 2-24 88 Specifying functional scope SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.7 Circuit breaker synchronisation 2.7.3.2 Configuring Synchronisation Click Synchronisation in the tree view of DIGSI. The available synchronisation function groups are displayed in the list box under Function selection. Double-click the function group (e.g. SYNC function group 1) which you would like to configure. The dialog box for configuration is opened. It contains the tabs System data, General, Asyn. condition and Syn. Condition. See also Chapter 2.7.1, margin heading Input Indications". Select the tab System data and make your settings. Figure 2-25 Synchronization, System data tab Make additional settings in the tabs General, Asyn. condition and Syn. Condition. SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 89 Functions 2.7 Circuit breaker synchronisation 90 Figure 2-26 Synchronization, General tab Figure 2-27 Synchronization, Asyn. tab Condition SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.7 Circuit breaker synchronisation Figure 2-28 Synchronization, Syn. Conditions tab Exit configuration of synchronisation with OK. SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 91 Functions 2.8 Switchgear Interlocking 2.8 Switchgear Interlocking The so-called CFC (Continuous Function Chart) allows to configure, among other things, the switchgear interlocking conditions in the 6MD66x bay controller in a comfortable graphical HMI. Cross-bay interlocking conditions (system interlocks) can be processed by an exchange of information between bay controllers. The interrelay communication has its own interface for this. In bay controllers equipped with the new IEC61850 communication interface, information can also be exchanged directly through this Ethernet link. This is shown in the two figures below. 2.8.1 General Figure 2-29 Switchgear interlocking system with 6MD66 and inter relay communication (IRC) Figure 2-30 Switchgear interlocking system with 6MD66 and IEC61850--GOOSE If a link to a substation controller exists, depending on the protocol, the system interlocking conditions can also be processed in the substation controller (SICAM PAS). The following table shows the various possibilities at a glance. Table 2-12 Switchgear interlocking with bay and system interlocking 6MD66x Inter- Centrally via nally via CFC IEC60870-5103 Bay interlocking IEC 61850GOOSE Inter-Relay Communication (IRC) X X2 X System interlocking (X)1 X = optimum solution (X) = possible solution 1 with system interlocking via IEC60870-5-103: No check of system interlocking possible with local control from the bay controller. 2 92 Note limited number of devices (32 max.) SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.8 Switchgear Interlocking This means that you have various possibilities with system interlocking: * If the IEC60870-5-103 protocol is selected as the system interface, the system interlocking should be checked using IRC, because in the case of local control from the bay controller (IEC103 slave) no interrogation can be sent to the IEC103 master (this is a feature of the IEC103 protocol). * If communication with IEC61850 via Ethernet is used, information for the system interlocking is exchanged directly from one bay controller to the other (or to any other GOOSE-capable bay controllers). The Ethernet interface used is the same as for communication with the station controller (see Figure 2-30). * Inter-relay communication IRC (see Section 2.12) can also be used for exchanging system interlocking information directly between devices. IRC nodes can only be SIPROTEC 6MD66x bay controllers. IRC is handled through a dedicated communication port (see Figure 2-29). Figure 2-32 below shows a simple example of a circuit breaker interlock on a double busbar feeder (see Figure 2-31). Figure 2-31 Double busbar feeder SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 93 Functions 2.8 Switchgear Interlocking Figure 2-32 CFC interlocking chart To release circuit breaker Q0, the position of the busbar disconnectors Q1 and Q2 and of line disconnector Q9 is interrogated ("0" or "1"), i.e. whether they are in intermediate position or not. The result is ANDed and serves for releasing the circuit breaker. This means that the circuit breaker may be closed or opened, provided that non of the three disconnectors are in intermediate position. It is also possible to release the switching direction (close or open) separately. The checks prior to command output also include the positions of the two key-operated switches: The top keyoperated switch corresponds to the S5 function familiar from the 8TK switchgear interlocking system (remote/local switchover). The bottom key-operated switch switches over to unlocked command output (S1 function, position "interlocking OFF" ). To draw attention to the fact that the configured interlocks are ineffective, the key cannot be removed in "Interlocking Off" position. The key-operated switches are always included in the check prior to command output; they don't have to be configured (but they can be configured if required). Because of the integrated "Interlocking" function, external switchgear interlocking equipment can be dispensed with. Moreover, the following (configurable) checks are performed prior to a command output: * Scheduled = Actual, i.e. is the switching equipment already in the correct position? * Double operation, i.e,. is another command already being processed? * Single commands, e.g. for earth switch control, can be secured by an extra code. This is described in more detail in the following paragraphs. 94 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.8 Switchgear Interlocking Interlocked/Non-interlocked Switching The configurable command checks in the SIPROTEC 4 devices are also called standard interlocking". These checks can be activated via DIGSI (interlocked switching/tagging) or deactivated (non-interlocked). De-interlocked or non-interlocked switching means that the configured interlock conditions are not tested. Interlocked switching means that all configured interlocking conditions are checked within the command processing. If a condition is not fulfilled, the command is rejected, marked with a minus sign (e.g. "CO-"), and a message to that effect is output. The following table shows the possible types of commands in a switching device and the corresponding indications. The indications designated with *) only appear in this form on the device display in the operational logs, whereas in DIGSI they are shown in the spontaneous indications. Type of Command Control Cause Indication Control issued Switching CO CO+/- Manual tagging (positive / negative) Override MT MT+/- Output blocking, Acquisition blocking Acquisition blocking ST ST+/- *) Information status command, Output blocking Output blocking OB OB+/- *) Abort command Abort CA CA+/- The "plus" appearing in the message is a confirmation of the command execution. The command output has a positive result, as expected. The "minus" is a negative confirmation and means that the result was unexpected. The command was rejected. Possible command replies and their causes are dealt with in /1/. Figure 2-33 shows the operational indications relating to command execution and operation response information for a successful operation of the circuit breaker. Interlocking checks can be configured individually for all switching devices and markings. Other internal commands such as overriding or abort are not tested, i.e. are executed independently of the interlockings. Figure 2-33 Example of an operational indication for switching circuit breaker (Q0) Standard Interlocking (fixed-programmed) The standard interlockings contain the following fixed programmed tests for each switching device, which can be individually enabled or disabled using parameters: * Switching direction check (scheduled = actual): The switching command is rejected, and an error indication is displayed if the circuit breaker is already in the set position. If this check is enabled, then it applies whether switch interlocking is activated or deactivated. SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 95 Functions 2.8 Switchgear Interlocking Interlocking (Bay Interlocking) Logic combinations deposited in the device using CFC are scanned and taken into consideration for interlocked switching. Information to other bays can be processed as well (GOOSE or IRC). * Blocked by protection: This interlocking option enabled for devices with integrated protection functions has no significance and no effect on the 6MD66x device version. * Double operation locking: Parallel switchings are mutually interlocked; when a switching is being processed a second one cannot be executed. * LOCAL switching authority: A switching command from the user interface of the device (command with command source LOCAL) is only allowed if the Key Switch (for devices without key switch via configuration) is set to LOCAL. * DIGSI switching authority: Switching commands that are issued locally or remotely via DIGSI (command with command source DIGSI) are only allowed if the Key Switch (for devices without key switch via configuration) is set to REMOTE. If a DIGSI-PC communicates with the device, it deposits here its virtual device number (VD). DIGSI must have the same virtual device number (with REMOTE switching authority). Switch commands of the remote control are rejected. * REMOTE switching authority: A remote control command (command with initiator source REMOTE) is only allowed if the Key Switch (for devices without key switch via configuration) is set to REMOTE. Figure 2-34 Standard interlockings 1) Initiator source REMOTE also includes LOCAL. (LOCAL: Command via control system in the station, REMOTE: Command via telecontrol station to power system management and from power system management to the device) 2) Release from testing of interlocking conditions 3) Not relevant for 6MD66x 96 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.8 Switchgear Interlocking For devices with operator panel the display shows the configured interlocking reasons. They are marked by letters explained in the following table. Table 2-13 Interlocking Commands Interlocking codes Switching authority Command L Display L System interlocking SI A Zone Control Z Z SET = ACTUAL (switch direction check) P P Blocked by protection 1) B 1) B 1) 1) Not relevant for 6MD66x SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 97 Functions 2.8 Switchgear Interlocking The following figure shows all interlocking conditions (which usually appear in the display of the device) for three switchgear items with the relevant abbreviations explained in the previous table. All parameterized interlocking conditions are indicated. Figure 2-35 Example of configured interlocking conditions Switching Authority (for devices with operator panel) For selection of switching permission the interlock condition switching authority" exists for selecting the command source with switching permission. For devices with operator panel, the following switching authority ranges are defined in the following priority sequence: * LOCAL * DIGSI * REMOTE The object Switching Authority" serves to interlock or enable LOCAL control, but not REMOTE or DIGSI commands. The 6MD66x is equipped with two key switches. The top switch is reserved for the switching authority. The setting Local" permits the local operation, the setting Remote" permits the remote operation. The object Switching DIGSI" serves to interlock or enable the operation via DIGSI. Commands are allowed for both remote and a local DIGSI connection. When a (local or remote) DIGSI PC logs on to the device, it leaves its Virtual Device Number (VD). Only commands with this VD (if switching authority = OFF or REMOTE) will be accepted by the device. When the DIGSI PC logs off, the VD is removed. Commands are checked for their source and the device settings, and compared to the information set in the objects Switching authority" and Switching authority DIGSI". Configuration: Switching authority available: y/n (create appropriate object) Switching authority DIGSI available: y/n (create appropriate object) Specific object (e.g. switching device): Switching authority LOCAL (check for local commands: y/n) Specific object (e.g. switching device): Switching authority REMOTE (check for LOCAL, REMOTE, or DIGSI commands: y/n) 98 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.8 Switchgear Interlocking Table 2-14 Interlocking logic Current Switching Authority Status Switching Authority DIGSI Command issued with SC3)=LOCAL Command issued from SC=LOCAL or REMOTE Command with SC=DIGSI LOCAL (ON) Not registered not allocated Interlocked 2) interlocked because of LOCAL control" Interlocked DIGSI not logged on" LOCAL (ON) registered not allocated Interlocked 2) interlocked because of LOCAL control" Interlocked 2) interlocked because of LOCAL control" REMOTE (OFF) Not registered not allocated Interlocked 1) Interlocked because of REMOTE control " Interlocked DIGSI not logged on" REMOTE (OFF) registered Interlocked Interlocked 2) interInterlocked because locked because of of DIGSI control " DIGSI control" not allocated 1) 1) 2) 3) Also allowed" if: Switching authority LOCAL (check for local commands): n" Also allowed" if: Switching authority REMOTE (check for LOCAL, REMOTE, or DIGSI commands): n" VQ = Source of command SC = Auto SICAM: Commands that are initiated internally (command processing in the CFC) are not subject to switching authority and are therefore always allowed". Switching Authority (for devices without operator panel) The dongle cable sets the switching authority of the device to REMOTE". The specifications of the previous section apply. Switching mode (for devices with operation panel) The switching mode determines whether selected interlocking conditions will be activated or deactivated at the time of the switching operation. The following switching modes (local) are defined: * Local commands (SC=LOCAL) - interlocked (normal), or - non-interlocked switching. The 6MD66x is equipped with two key switches. The bottom switch is reserved for the switching mode. The Normal" position allows interlocked switching while the Interlocking OFF" position allows non-interlocked switching. The following switching modes (remote) are defined: * For remote commands or commands from DIGSI (VQ=LOCAL, REMOTE or DIGSI) - interlocked, or - non-interlocked switching. Here de-interlocking occurs through a separate de-interlocking job. The position of the key-switch is irrelevant. - For commands from CFC (SC = AUTO SICAM), please observe the notes in the DIGSI CFC manual /3/ (block: BOOL after command). SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 99 Functions 2.8 Switchgear Interlocking Switching Mode (for devices without operator panel) The F-cable sets the switching authority of the device to Normal". The specifications of the previous section apply. Interlocks Interlocks (e.g. via CFC) include the verification that predetermined switchgear position conditions are satisfied to prevent switching errors (e.g. disconnector vs. earth electrode, earth electrode only if no voltage applied) as well as verification of the state of other mechanical interlocking in the switchgear bay (e.g. High Voltage compartment doors). Interlocking can be bay interlocking (all information is directly available in the bay controller) or substation interlocking. In the latter case, the device receives information from adjacent bays over the inter-device communication (IDC) or IEC 61850 - GOOSE. Interlocking conditions can be programmed separately, for each switching device, for device control CLOSE and/or OPEN. Enable information with the data switching device is interlocked (GON/NACT/FLT) or enabled (COM)" can be set up * directly, using a single point or double point indication, key-switch, or internal indication (marking), or * by means of control logic via CFC. The current status is queried for a control command and updated cyclically. The assignment is done via Release object CLOSE/OPEN command". Double operation blocking Parallel switching operations are interlocked. On arrival of a command all command objects are tested which are also subject to the blockage, as to whether a command is current for them. While the command is being executed, the block is in turn active for all other commands. Device Status Check (setpoint = actual) Switching commands are checked as to whether the selected switching device is already in the desired position (set/actual comparison). This means that if a circuit breaker is already CLOSED and an attempt is made to send a closing command, the command will be refused with the response "scheduled condition equals actual condition". Switching device in intermediate position are not locked by the software. 100 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.8 Switchgear Interlocking De-interlockings De-interlockings can be bypassed to perform switching operations. This is either done internally by adding a bypass code to the command, or globally by so-called switching modes. * SC=LOCAL - The switching modes "interlocked (latched)" or "non-interlocked (unlatched)" can be set via the key switch. The position "Interlocking OFF" corresponds to non-interlocked switching and serves the special purpose of unlocking the standard interlocks. * REMOTE and DIGSI - Commands from SICAM or DIGSI are unlocked via the global switching mode REMOTE. A separate request must be sent for the unlocking. The unlocking applies only for one switching operation and only for commands caused by the same source. - Job: command to object "Switching mode REMOTE", ON - Job: switching command to "switching device" * Derived command via CFC (automatic command, SC=Auto SICAM): - The behaviour is configured in the CFC block ("BOOL to command"). 2.8.2 Information overview No. Information Type of Information Explanation -- KeySwitch1 DP Key-operated switch (local/remote) -- Cntrl Auth IE Control authority (derived from the position of the top keyoperated switch. Meaning: local/remote toggling of switching mode.) -- KeySwitch2 DP Key-operated switch (unlocked/locked) -- Mode LOCAL IE Switching mode Local (set by the device if the bottom key-operated switch is set to unlocked. Meaning: Unlocked local switching is possible; remote commands are still executed locked.) -- Mode REMOTE IE Switching mode Remote (Set by the system interface. If this flag has been set, remote switching commands to the bay controller are carried out unlocked. Commands initiated locally on the bay controller remain locked. Corresponds to the function S1-Fern of the 8TK switchgear interlocking system.) SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 101 Functions 2.9 Circuit breaker failure protection (optional) 2.9 Circuit breaker failure protection (optional) The circuit breaker failure protection provides rapid back-up fault clearance, in the event that the local circuit breaker fails to respond to a trip command from a protective device. 2.9.1 Function Description General Remarks on Circuit breaker Failure Protection and Automatic Reclosure The two functions circuit breaker failure protection (described in this chapter) and automatic reclosure (see Chapter 2.10) are available with software version V4.6. Integrating these protection functions into a bay controller is useful for applications in which two circuit breakers are assigned to one feeder as it allows to do without extra equipment. Circuit breaker failure protection and automatic reclosure are order options, refer to the Appendix A.1. An exemplary configuration showing the possible use of CB failure protection and automatic reclosure in the 6MD66x is shown in the figure below. Another possible configuration would be the one-and-one-half circuit breakers method. Figure 2-36 Feeder with two circuit breakers, simplified Although the line protection function, in this example a 7SA distance protection, could provide automatic reclosure for both circuit breakers, this would require a highly complex logic of the CFC for the 7SA. As to breaker failure protection, the distance protection relay would not be able to perform it in this configuration because it works with a summation current. Integrating these two functions into the 6MD66x bay controller therefore allows to do without extra equipment and makes engineering easier. As a special feature in comparison with pure protection devices, the current measuring inputs of the bay controller are connected with the instrument transformers in the substation, not with the protection transformers. This ensures the high measuring accuracy of 0.5% of the nominal value. However, the instrument transformers are more or less subject to saturation when a fault current passes through them. Measurement of the fault current is therefore not possible. However, detection and switch-off of the fault current is possible for the CB failure protection function. A type 0.5 FS 5 transformer should be used as primary transformer. In order to simplify external wiring of the device, the 6MD66x bay controllers version V4.6 or higher have new command types which are capable of 3-pole control of the protection devices. These commands have the following names in the DIGSI Information catalog: * BR_D31 3-pole trip, 1-pole close * BR_D33 3-pole trip and 3-pole close * BR_D44 3-pole trip and close with common contact. 102 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.9 Circuit breaker failure protection (optional) The allocation of the trip and close signals to the relay contacts for the new commands in the DIGSI configuration matrix is shown in the figure below. Figure 2-37 Routing of the new command types in the DIGSI matrix The use one of these command types makes it sufficient to connect the circuit breaker exactly once to the control device. The 3-pole control makes it possible for the protective funtion to use the same relays. I.e. the circuit breaker is wired as 3-pole relay to the control device and both the protective function (breaker failure protection or AR) and the control function are allocated to the same relays in the configuration matrix. However, the feedbacks are to be allocated, as before, as double-point indications to the command and if required as 1pole ones to the protective function. General Whenever, e.g. a short-circuit protection relay of a feeder issues a trip command to the circuit breaker, this is repeated to the breaker failure protection (Figure 2-38). A timer T-BF in the breaker failure protection is started. The timer runs as long as a trip command is present and current continues to flow through the breaker poles. Figure 2-38 Simplified function diagram of circuit breaker failure protection with current flow monitoring Normally, the breaker will open and interrupt the fault current. The current monitoring stage quickly resets (typical >10 ms) and stops the timer T-BF. If the trip command is not carried out (circuit breaker failure case), current continues to flow and the timer runs to its set limit. The circuit breaker failure protection then issues a command to trip the backup circuit breakers and interrupt the fault current. SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 103 Functions 2.9 Circuit breaker failure protection (optional) The reset time of the feeder protection is not relevant because the circuit breaker failure protection itself recognizes the interruption of the current. For protective functions where the tripping criterion is not dependent on current (e.g. Buchholz protection), current flow is not a reliable criterion for proper operation of the breaker. In such cases, the circuit breaker position can be derived from the auxiliary contacts of the breaker. Therefore, instead of monitoring the current, the condition of the auxiliary contacts is monitored (see Figure 2-39). For this purpose, the outputs from the auxiliary contacts must be fed to binary inputs on the relay (refer also to Section 2.11). Figure 2-39 Simplified function diagram of circuit breaker failure protection controlled by circuit breaker auxiliary contact Current flow monitoring Each of the phase currents and an additional plausibility current (see below) are filtered by numerical filter algorithms so that only the fundamental component is used for further evaluation. Special measures are taken in order to detect a current interruption. In case of sinusoidal currents the current interruption is detected after approximately 10 ms. With aperiodic DC current components in the fault current and/or in the current transformer secondary circuit after interruption (e.g. current transformers with linearized core), or saturation of the current transformers caused by the DC component in the fault current, it can take one AC cycle before the interruption of the primary current is reliably detected. This is generally the case in the 6MD66x because the device, in order to achieve the required measuring accuracy, is connected to the instrument transformers, and not to the protection transformers. The detection of a current disconnection stops the delay times after which a trip command is issued. The pickup signal is not reset until disconnection has been reliably detected. The currents are monitored and compared with the set threshold. Besides the three phase currents, two further current detectors are provided in order to allow a plausibility check (see Figure 2-40). As plausibility current, the earth current IE (3*I0) is preferably used. If the earth current is not available, the device calculates it with the formula: 3*I0 = IL1 + IL2 + IL3 Additionally, the value calculated by 6MD66x of three times the negative sequence current 3*I2 is used for plausibility check. This is calculated according to the equation: 3*I2 = IL1 + a2*IL2 + a*IL3 where a = ej120. 104 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.9 Circuit breaker failure protection (optional) These plausibility currents do not have any direct influence on the basic functionality of the circuit breaker failure protection but they allow a plausibility check in that at least two current thresholds must have been exceeded before any of the circuit breaker failure delay times can be started, thus providing high security against false operation. Figure 2-40 Current flow monitoring with plausibility currents 3*I0 and 3*I2 The design of the current transformers must ensure at least that even with maximum saturation the secondary current is above the limit threshold of the measuring inputs for at least 3 milliseconds per half-cycle. The limit threshold depends on the board type and can be 1.2 or 1.5 time the nominal current. Processing of the Circuit Breaker Auxiliary Contacts The position of the circuit breaker is derived from the central function control of the device (refer also to Section 2.11). Evaluation of the breaker auxiliary contacts is carried out in the breaker failure protective function only when the current flow monitoring I> BF has not picked up. Once the current flow criterion has picked up during the trip signal from the feeder protection, the circuit breaker is assumed to be open as soon as the current disappears, even if the associated auxiliary contact does not (yet) indicate that the circuit breaker has opened (see Figure 2-41). This gives preference to the more reliable current criterion and avoids false operation due to a defect, e.g. in the auxiliary contact mechanism or circuit. This interlock feature is provided for each individual phase as well as for 3-pole trip. It is possible to disable the auxiliary contact criterion. If you set the parameter switch Chk BRK CONTACT (Figure 2-43 top) to NO, the breaker failure protection can only be started when current flow is detected. The position of the auxiliary contacts is then not evaluated even if the auxiliary contacts are connected to the device. SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 105 Functions 2.9 Circuit breaker failure protection (optional) Figure 2-41 Interlock of the auxiliary contact criterion - example for phase L1 1) if phase-segregated auxiliary contacts are available 2 if series-connected NC contacts are available ) On the other hand, current flow is not a reliable criterion for proper operation of the circuit breaker for faults which do not cause detectable current flow (e.g. Buchholz protection). Information regarding the position of the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts is required in these cases to check the correct response of the circuit breaker. For this purpose, the binary input >BF Start w/o I" No. 1439 is provided (Figure 2-43 left). This input initiates the breaker failure protection even if no current flow is detected. Common phase initiation Common phase initiation is used, for example, in systems with only 3-pole tripping, for transformer feeders, or if the busbar protection trips. It is the only available initiation mode when using the 6MD66x version capable of 3-pole tripping only. If the circuit breaker failure protection is intended to be initiated by further external protection devices, it is recommended, for security reasons, to connect two binary inputs to the device. Besides the trip command of the external protection to the binary input >BF Start 3pole" no. 1415 it is recommended to connect also the general device pickup to binary input >BF release" no. 1432. For Buchholz protection it is recommended that both inputs are connected to the device by two separate wire pairs. Nevertheless, it is possible to initiate the circuit breaker failure protection in single-channel mode should a separate release criterion not be available. The binary input >BF release" (No. 1432) must then not be assigned to any physical input of the device during configuration. Figure 2-43 shows the operating principle. When the trip signal appears from a protective function and at least one current flow criterion (according to Figure 2-40) is present, the breaker failure protection is initiated and the corresponding delay time(s) is (are) started. If the current criterion is not fulfilled for any of the phases, the position of the circuit breaker auxiliary contact can be queried as shown in Figure 2-42. If the circuit breaker poles have individual auxiliary contacts, the series connection of the three normally closed (NC) auxiliary contacts is used. After a 3-pole trip command the circuit breaker has only operated correctly if no current is flowing via any phase or alternatively all three auxiliary contacts indicate the CB is open. Figure 2-42 illustrates how the internal signal "CB pole L1 closed" is created (see Figure 2-43 left) if at least one circuit breaker pole is closed. 106 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.9 Circuit breaker failure protection (optional) Figure 2-42 Creation of signal "CB any pole closed" If all three binary inputs >LS Pos.Ein Lx are configured, the device dispenses with a 3-pole check of >CB 3p Closed" and >CB 3p Open". If an internal protection function or an external protection device trips without current flow, the circuit breaker failure protection is initiated by the internal input Start internal w/o I", if the trip signal comes from the internal voltage protection or frequency protection, or by the external input >BF Start w/o I". In this case the start signal is maintained until the circuit breaker is reported to be open by the auxiliary contact criterion. Initiation can be blocked via the binary input >BLOCK BkrFail" (e.g. during test of the feeder protection relay). Figure 2-43 Breaker failure protection with common phase initiation SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 107 Functions 2.9 Circuit breaker failure protection (optional) Phase segregated initiation Phase segregated initiation of the circuit breaker failure protection is necessary if the circuit breaker poles are operated individually, e.g. if 1-pole automatic reclosure is used. This is possible if the device is able to trip 1pole. If the circuit breaker failure protection is intended to be initiated by further external protection devices, it is recommended, for security reasons, to connect two binary inputs to the device. Besides the three trip commands of the external relay to the binary input >BF Start L1", >BF Start L2" and >BF Start L3" it is recommended to connect also, for example, the general device pickup to binary input >BF release". Figure 2-44 shows this connection. Nevertheless, it is possible to initiate the circuit breaker failure protection in single-channel mode should a separate release criterion not be available. The binary input >BF release" must then not be assigned to any physical input of the device during configuration. If the external protection device does not provide a general fault detection signal, a general trip signal can be used instead. Alternatively, the parallel connection of a separate set of trip contacts can produce such a release signal as shown in Figure 2-45. The starting condition logic for the delay times is shown in Figure 2-46. In principle, it is designed similar to that for the common phase initiation, but, individually for each of the three phases. Thus, current flow and initiation conditions are processed for each phase. In case of 1-pole interruption before an automatic reclose cycle, current disappearance is reliably monitored for the tripped breaker pole only. 108 Figure 2-44 Breaker failure protection with phase segregated initiation -- example for initiation by an external protection device with release by a fault detection signal Figure 2-45 Breaker failure protection with phase segregated initiation -- example for initiation by an external protection device with release by a separate set of trip contacts SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.9 Circuit breaker failure protection (optional) The starting condition logic for the delay times is shown in Figure 2-41. In principle, it is designed similar to that for the common phase initiation, but, individually for each of the three phases. Thus, current flow and initiation conditions are processed for each phase. In case of 1-pole interruption before an automatic reclose cycle, current disappearance is reliably monitored for the tripped breaker pole only. The auxiliary contact criterion is also processed for each individual circuit breaker pole. If, however, the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts are not available for each individual circuit breaker pole, then a 1-pole trip command is assumed to be executed only if the series connection of the normally open (NO) auxiliary contacts is interrupted. This information is provided to the circuit breaker failure protection by the central function control of the device (refer to Section 2.11). The 3-phase starting signal Start L123" is generated if there are start signals for more than one phase. The input "BF Start w/o I" (e.g. from Buchholz protection) operates only in 3-phase mode. The function is the same as with common phase initiation. The additional release-signal >BF release" (if assigned to a binary input) affects all external initiation conditions. Initiation can be blocked via the binary input >BLOCK BkrFail" (e.g. during test of the feeder protection relay). SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 109 Functions 2.9 Circuit breaker failure protection (optional) Figure 2-46 Initiation conditions with 1-pole trip command Delay Times When the initiatiation conditions are fulfilled, the associated timers are started. The circuit breaker pole(s) must open before the associated time has elapsed. Different delay times are possible for 1-pole and 3-pole initiation. An additional delay time can be used for twostage circuit breaker failure protection. With single-stage breaker failure protection, the trip command is routed to the adjacent circuit breakers should the local feeder breaker fail (refer to Figure 2-38 or 2-39). The adjacent circuit breakers are all those which must trip in order to interrupt the fault current, i.e. the breakers which feed the bus-bar or the bus-bar section to which the feeder under consideration is connected. The possible initiation conditions for the breaker failure protection are those discussed above. Depending on the application of the feeder protection, common phase or phase segregated initiation conditions may occur. Tripping by the breaker failure protection is always 3-pole. 110 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.9 Circuit breaker failure protection (optional) The simplest solution is to start the delay timer T2 (Figure 2-47). The phase-segregated initiation signals are omitted if the feeder protection always trips 3-pole or if the circuit breaker is not capable of 1-pole tripping. If different delay times are required after a 1-pole trip or 3-pole trip it is possible to use the timer stages T11pole and T1-3pole according to Figure 2-48. Figure 2-47 Single-stage breaker failure protection with common phase initiation Figure 2-48 Single-stage breaker failure protection with different delay times With two-stage circuit breaker failure protection the trip command of the feeder protection is usually repeated, after a first time stage, to the feeder circuit breaker, often via a second trip coil or set of trip coils, if the circuit breaker has not responded to the original trip command. A second time stage monitors the response to this repeated trip command and trips the circuit breakers of the relevant busbar section if the fault has not yet been cleared after this second time. For the first time stage, a different time delay T1-1pole can be selected for a 1-pole trip than for a 3-pole trip by the feeder protection. Additionally, you can select (by setting parameter 1p-RETRIP (T1)) whether this repeated trip should be 1-pole or 3-pole. SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 111 Functions 2.9 Circuit breaker failure protection (optional) Figure 2-49 Two-stage breaker failure protection with phase segregated initiation Circuit Breaker not Operational There may be cases when it is already obvious that the circuit breaker associated with a feeder protection relay cannot clear a fault, e.g. when the tripping voltage or the tripping energy is not available. In such a case it is not necessary to wait for the response of the feeder circuit breaker. If provision has been made for the detection of such a condition (e.g. control voltage monitor or air pressure monitor), the monitor alarm signal can be fed to the binary input >CB faulty" of the 6MD66x. On occurrence of this alarm and a trip command by the feeder protection, a separate timer T3-BkrDefective, which is normally set to 0, is started (Figure 2-50). Thus, the adjacent circuit breakers (bus-bar) are tripped immediately in case the feeder circuit breaker is not operational. With Bkr Defective you can set which of the regular time delays T1 and T2 of the breaker failure protection, if any, are to be used in the case of a circuit breaker malfunction. Figure 2-50 Circuit breaker faulty Transfer trip to the remote end circuit breaker The device has the facility to provide an additional intertrip signal to the circuit breaker at the remote line end in the event that the local feeder circuit breaker fails. For this, a suitable protection signal transmission link is required (e.g. via communication cable, power line carrier transmission, radio transmission, or optical fibre transmission). With devices using digital transmission via protection interface, the remote commands can be applied. 112 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.9 Circuit breaker failure protection (optional) To realise this intertrip, the desired command -- usually the trip command which is intended to trip the adjacent circuit breakers -- is assigned to a binary output of the device. The contact of this output triggers the transmission device. When using digital signal transmission, the command is connected to a remote command via the user-defined logic (CFC). End Fault Protection An end fault is defined here as a short-circuit which has occurred at the end of a line or protected object, between the circuit breaker and the current transformer set. Figure 2-51 shows the situation. The fault is located -- as seen from the current transformer (= measurement location) -- on the busbar side, it will thus not be regarded as a feeder fault by the feeder protection relay. It can only be detected by either a reverse stage of the feeder protection or by the busbar protection. However, a trip command given to the feeder circuit breaker does not clear the fault since the opposite end continues to feed the fault. Thus, the fault current does not stop flowing even though the feeder circuit breaker has properly responded to the trip command. Figure 2-51 End fault between circuit breaker and current transformers The end fault protection has the task to recognize this situation and to transmit a trip signal to the remote end(s) of the protected object to clear the fault. For this purpose, the output command BF EndFlt TRIP" is available to trigger a signal transmission device (e.g. power line carrier, radio wave, or optical fibre) -- if applicable, together with other commands that need to be transferred or (when using digital signal transmission) as command via the protection data interface. The end fault protection detects an end fault because it registers that current is flowing even though the circuitbreaker auxiliary contacts signal that the circuit-breaker is open. Figure 2-52 shows the functional principle. If current flow is detected (current criterion L*>" according to figure 2-40) but no circuit-breaker pole is closed (auxiliary contact criterion 1 pole closed" is not active), the timer T-EndFault is started, and after time-out a trip command is sent to the opposite end. Figure 2-52 Functional scheme of the end fault protection SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 113 Functions 2.9 Circuit breaker failure protection (optional) Pole Discrepancy Supervision The pole discrepancy supervision has the task to detect discrepancies in the position of the three circuit breaker poles. Under steady-state operating conditions, either all three poles of the circuit breaker must be closed, or all three poles must be open. Discrepancy is permitted only for a short time interval during a 1-pole automatic reclose cycle. The scheme functionality is shown in Figure 2-53. The signals which are processed here are the same as those used for the circuit breaker failure protection. The pole discrepancy condition is established when at least one pole is closed ( one pole closed") and at the same time not all three poles are closed ( one pole open"). Additionally, the current criteria (from Figure 2-40) are processed. Pole discrepancy can only be detected when current is not flowing through all three poles (<3), i.e. through only one or two poles. When current is flowing through all three poles, all three poles must be closed even if the breaker auxiliary contacts indicate a different status. If pole discrepancy is detected, this is indicated by a fault detection signal. This signal identifies the pole which was open before the trip command of the pole discrepancy supervision occurred. Figure 2-53 Function diagram of pole discrepancy supervision Flash-Over Protection (FOP) When the circuit breaker is open, the flashover protection detects a loss of insulation in the circuit breaker. To do so, the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts, the three phase currents, the three phase voltages and the circuit breaker switching commands are all monitored. Flashover can occur if: * The insulation medium in the circuit breaker fails. * The voltage difference at the circuit breaker exceeds its specified insulation voltage. The flashover protection generates two indications/commands: * Flashover suspected": Allows to repeat the trip command to the breaker in order to switch selectively the circuit breaker concerned, e.g. in the case of a breaker auxiliary contact failure. * Breaker failure FOP": This command opens the higher-level circuit breakers and the remote end circuit breakers, as in conventional breaker failure protection. 114 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.9 Circuit breaker failure protection (optional) Figure 2-54 Operation scheme of the flashover protection The phase-to-earth voltage is monitored to ensure that the flashover protection picks up only if at least 80 per cent of the nominal voltage are or were available for up to 100 ms prior to current measurement. If the current exceeds the set threshold I> BF (set in address 3902), the current measurement detects a breaker failure. The auxiliary contact signals of the individual breaker poles >LS Pos.Ein Lx indicate that the respective breaker pole is open. Since the auxiliary contacts are of decisive importance for the operation of the flashover protection, this protection can only pick up if >LS Pos.Ein Lx is also allocated to binary inputs. In order to avoid spurious pickup of the flashover protection when switching the circuit breaker, the switching commands are also registered and used to block the flashover protection. These include: * The binary inputs >BF Start L1", >BF Start L2" and >BF Start L3" (address 1435,1436 and 1437) for the phases. if this binary input signal is active, an external protection device opens the associated breaker pole. * Binary input >BF Start 3pole". if this binary input signal is active, an external protection device opens all three breaker poles. * The binary signal >ManClose, if the circuit breaker is closed manually. * The internal commands AR CLOSE command" or AR forced 3-pole trip", generated by the 6MD66x's automatic reclosure function . SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 115 Functions 2.9 Circuit breaker failure protection (optional) CT Allocation The allocation of the current transformers to the phase currents required for the breaker failure protection function is checked (MVChn Ix). If not all three current transformers have a phase current allocated to it, the plausibility check detects an error and outputs an alarm to that effect. If the flashover protection (FO Protection in address 3940) is active, the plausibility check for transformer allocation comprises the voltage transformers as well (MVChn Ux). This function is only effective if it is switched on, not blocked, and the transformer allocation is OK. This state is shown by the indication BF effective. The parameter 3911 Plausib. check is used to switch the plausibility check for transformer allocation in special cases, e.g. if only 1-pole breaker failure protection is required for protecting a reactor. Connection Examples Unlike SIPROTEC protection devices, where the allocation of the measuring transducers to the measured quantities is always fixed, the measured quantities in the 6MD66x can be freely allocated to the individual function blocks. Allocation is performed by linking in the DIGSI configuration matrix a column (for the transformer) with a line (for the currents). Connection examples and a sample configuration for the measuring inputs, trip commands and auxiliary contacts is provided in the Appendix. 2.9.2 Setting Notes General The breaker failure protection and its ancillary functions (end fault protection, pole discrepancy supervision and flashover protection) can only operate if they were configured Enabled during configuration of the scope of functions (address 139 BREAKER FAILURE). Circuit breaker failure protection The circuit breaker failure protection is switched ON or OFF at address 3901 FCT BreakerFail. The current threshold I> BF (address 3902) should be selected such that the protection will operate with the smallest expected short-circuit current. A setting of 10 % below the minimum fault current for which circuit breaker failure protection must operate is recommended. On the other hand, the value should not be set lower than necessary. If the circuit breaker failure protection is configured with zero sequence current threshold (address 139 = ), the pickup threshold for the zero sequence current 3I0> BF (address 3912) can be set independently of I> BF. Normally, the circuit breaker failure protection evaluates the current flow criterion as well as the position of the circuit breaker auxiliary contact(s). If the auxiliary contact(s) status is not available in the device, this criterion cannot be processed. In this case, set address 3909 Chk BRK CONTACT to NO. 116 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.9 Circuit breaker failure protection (optional) Two-stage Breaker Failure Protection With two-stage operation, the trip command is repeated after a time delay T1 to the local feeder breaker, normally to a different set of trip coils of this breaker. A choice can be made whether this trip repetition shall be 1pole or 3-pole if the initial trip of the external protection device was 1-pole (provided 1-pole trip is possible). This choice is made in parameter 1p-RETRIP (T1). Set this parameter to YES if you wish 1-pole trip for the first stage, otherwise to NO. If the circuit breaker does not respond to this trip repetition, the adjacent circuit breakers are tripped after T2, i.e. the circuit breakers of the busbar or of the concerned busbar section and, if necessary, also the circuit breaker at the remote end unless the fault has been cleared. Separate delay times can be set * for 1- or 3-pole trip repetition to the local feeder circuit breaker after a 1-pole trip of the feeder protection T11pole at address 3904, * for 3-pole trip repetition to the local feeder circuit breaker after 3-pole trip of the feeder protection T1-3pole (address 3905), * for trip of the adjacent circuit breakers (busbar zone and remote end if applicable) T2 at address 3906. The delay times are determined from the maximum operating time of the feeder circuit breaker, the reset time of the current detectors of the breaker failure protection, plus a safety margin which allows for any tolerance of the delay timers. The time sequence is illustrated in Figure 2-55. The dropout time for sinusoidal currents is 15 ms. If current transformer saturation is anticipated, the time should be set to 25 ms. Figure 2-55 Time sequence example for normal clearance of a fault, and with circuit breaker failure, using two-stage breaker failure protection SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 117 Functions 2.9 Circuit breaker failure protection (optional) Single-stage Breaker Failure Protection With single-stage operation, the adjacent circuit breakers (i.e. the circuit breakers of the busbar zone and, if applicable, the circuit breaker at the remote end) are tripped after a delay time T2 (address 3906) should the fault not have been cleared within this time. The timers T1-1pole (address 3904) and T1-3pole (address 3905) are then set to since they are not needed. You can also use the first stage alone if you wish to use different delay times after 1-pole and 3-pole tripping of the feeder protection. In this case set T1-1pole (address 3904) and T1-3pole (address 3905) separately, but address 3903 1p-RETRIP (T1) to NO to avoid a 1-pole trip command to the busbar. Set T2 (address 3906) to or equal to T1-3pole (address 3905). Be sure that the correct trip commands are assigned to the desired trip relay(s). The delay times are determined from the maximum operating time of the feeder circuit breaker, the reset time of the current detectors of the breaker failure protection, plus a safety margin which allows for any tolerance of the delay timers. The time sequence is illustrated in Figure 2-56. The dropout time for sinusoidal currents is 15 ms. If current transformer saturation is anticipated, the time should be set to 25 ms. Figure 2-56 Time sequence example for normal clearance of a fault, and with circuit breaker failure, using single-stage breaker failure protection Circuit breaker not operational These delays are not necessary if the control circuit of the local circuit breaker is faulted (e.g. control voltage failure or air pressure failure) since it is apparent that the circuit breaker is not capable of clearning the fault. If the relay is informed about this disturbance (via the binary input >CB faulty"), the adjacent circuit breakers (busbar and remote end if applicable) are tripped after the time T3-BkrDefective (address 3907) which is usually set to 0. Address 3908 Trip BkrDefect. determines to which output the trip command is routed in the event that the circuit breaker is not operational when a feeder protection trip occurs. Select that output which is used to trip the adjacent circuit breakers (bus-bar trip). 118 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.9 Circuit breaker failure protection (optional) End fault protection The end fault protection can be switched separately ON or OFF in address 3921 End Flt. stage. An end fault is a short-circuit between the circuit breaker and the current transformer set of the feeder. The end fault protection presumes that the device is informed about the circuit breaker position via circuit breaker auxiliary contacts connected to binary inputs. If, during an end fault, the circuit breaker is tripped by a reverse stage of the feeder protection or by the busbar protection (the fault is a busbar fault as determined from the location of the current transformers), the fault current will continue to flow, because the fault is fed from the remote end of the feeder circuit. The time T-EndFault (address 3922) is started when, during the time of pickup condition of the feeder protection, the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts indicate open poles and, at the same time, current flow is still detected (address 3902). The trip command of the end fault protection is intended for the transmission of an intertrip signal to the remote end circuit breaker. Thus, the delay time must be set so that it can bridge out short transient apparent end fault conditions which may occur during switching of the circuit breaker. Pole discrepancy supervision In address 3931 PoleDiscrepancy (pole discrepancy protection), the pole discrepancy supervision can be switched separately ON or OFF. It is only useful if the circuit breaker poles can be operated individually. It avoids that only one or two poles of the local circuit breaker are open continuously. It has to be provided that either the auxiliary contacts of each pole or the series connection of the NO auxiliary contacts and the series connection of the NC auxiliary contacts are connected to the device's binary inputs. If these conditions are not fulfilled, switch address 3931 OFF. The delay time T-PoleDiscrep. (address 3932) indicates how long a circuit breaker pole discrepancy condition of the feeder circuit breaker, i.e. only one or two poles open, may be present before the pole discrepancy supervision issues a 3-pole trip command. This time must be clearly longer than the duration of a 1-pole automatic reclose cycle. The time should be less than the permissible duration of an unbalanced load condition which is caused by the unsymmetrical position of the circuit breaker poles. Conventional values are 2 s to 5 s. SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 119 Functions 2.9 Circuit breaker failure protection (optional) 2.9.3 Settings Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments 3901 FCT BreakerFail ON OFF OFF Breaker Failure Protection is 3902 I> BF 0.05 .. 1.20 A 0.10 A Pick-up threshold I> 3903 1p-RETRIP (T1) NO YES YES 1pole retrip with stage T1 (local trip) 3904 T1-1pole 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 0.00 sec T1, Delay after 1pole start (local trip) 3905 T1-3pole 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 0.00 sec T1, Delay after 3pole start (local trip) 3906 T2 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 0.15 sec T2, Delay of 2nd stage (busbar trip) 3907 T3-BkrDefective 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 0.00 sec T3, Delay for start with defective bkr. 3908 Trip BkrDefect. NO with T1-trip with T2-trip w/ T1/T2-trip NO Trip output selection with defective bkr 3909 Chk BRK CONTACT NO YES YES Check Breaker contacts 3911 Plausib. check YES NO YES plausibility check transformer masking 3912 3I0> BF 0.05 .. 1.20 A 0.10 A Pick-up threshold 3I0> 3921 End Flt. stage ON OFF OFF End fault stage is 3922 T-EndFault 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 2.00 sec Trip delay of end fault stage 3931 PoleDiscrepancy ON OFF OFF Pole Discrepancy supervision 3932 T-PoleDiscrep. 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 2.00 sec Trip delay with pole discrepancy 3940 FO Protection ON OFF OFF Flash Over Protection 120 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.9 Circuit breaker failure protection (optional) 2.9.4 Information List No. Information Type of Information Comments 1401 >BF on SP >BF: Switch on breaker fail protection 1402 >BF off SP >BF: Switch off breaker fail protection 1403 >BLOCK BkrFail SP >BLOCK Breaker failure 1415 >BF Start 3pole SP >BF: External start 3pole 1432 >BF release SP >BF: External release 1435 >BF Start L1 SP >BF: External start L1 1436 >BF Start L2 SP >BF: External start L2 1437 >BF Start L3 SP >BF: External start L3 1439 >BF Start w/o I SP >BF: External start 3pole (w/o current) 1440 BkrFailON/offBI IntSP Breaker failure prot. ON/OFF via BI 1451 BkrFail OFF OUT Breaker failure is switched OFF 1452 BkrFail BLOCK OUT Breaker failure is BLOCKED 1453 BkrFail ACTIVE OUT Breaker failure is ACTIVE 1454 BF Mask. Error OUT Breaker fail. masking error curr. transf 1459 BF EndFlt PU OUT BF Pickup End fault stage 1461 BF Start OUT Breaker failure protection started 1472 BF T1-TRIP 1pL1 OUT BF Trip T1 (local trip) - only phase L1 1473 BF T1-TRIP 1pL2 OUT BF Trip T1 (local trip) - only phase L2 1474 BF T1-TRIP 1pL3 OUT BF Trip T1 (local trip) - only phase L3 1476 BF T1-TRIP L123 OUT BF Trip T1 (local trip) - 3pole 1489 BF Flash Over OUT BF Flash Over 1490 BF FO TRIP OUT BF Flash Over Trip 1493 BF TRIP CBdefec OUT BF Trip in case of defective CB 1494 BF T2-TRIP(bus) OUT BF TRIP T2 (busbar trip) 1495 BF EndFlt TRIP OUT BF Trip End fault stage 1496 BF CBdiscrSTART OUT BF Pole discrepancy pickup 1497 BF CBdiscr L1 OUT BF Pole discrepancy pickup L1 1498 BF CBdiscr L2 OUT BF Pole discrepancy pickup L2 1499 BF CBdiscr L3 OUT BF Pole discrepancy pickup L3 1500 BF CBdiscr TRIP OUT BF Pole discrepancy Trip SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 121 Functions 2.10 Automatic reclosure function (optional) 2.10 Automatic reclosure function (optional) Experience shows that about 85% of the arc faults on overhead lines are extinguished automatically after being tripped by the protection. The line can therefore be re-energised. Reclosure is performed by an automatic reclose function (AR). Automatic reclosure function is only permitted on overhead lines because the possibility of extinguishing a fault arc automatically only exists there. It must not be used in any other case. If the protected object consists of a mixture of overhead lines and other equipment (e.g. overhead line in block with a transformer or overhead line/cable), it must be ensured that reclosure can only be performed in the event of a fault on the overhead line. If the circuit breaker poles can be operated individually, a 1-pole automatic reclosure is usually initiated in the case of 1-phase faults and a 3-pole automatic reclosure in the case of multi-phase faults in the network with earthed system star point. If the fault still exists after reclosure (arc not extinguished or metallic short-circuit), the protection issues a final trip. In some systems several reclosing attempts are performed. The integrated automatic reclosure function of the 6MD66x device is controlled by an external protection. Signals between the 6MD66x and the protection device are exchanged through the binary inputs and outputs. If both devices have an IEC61850 interface, information can also be exchanged through the GOOSE mechanism. The automatic reclosure function contained in this device is an optional one (MLFB-dependent). 2.10.1 Function Description The auto-reclose function is initiated by a trip command from a feeder protection. This functionality is presented in detail in the figure and description below. Figure 2-57 Example application of AR functions A typical reclosure operation proceeds as follows. The feeder protection picks up because of a network fault, and after expiry of the tripping delay outputs a trip command that opens the connected circuit breaker and disconnects the feeder from the infeed. The pickup and trip signals are transmitted to the 6MD66x through binary inputs. After expiry of a dead time, the device outputs a close command to the circuit breaker to reconnect the faulted feeder. 122 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.10 Automatic reclosure function (optional) The isolation of the line from voltage often results in extinction of the electric arc caused by the network fault, so that after the reclosure the feeder protection no longer detects a fault. The reclosure was in that case successful. In cases where the fault is not yet eliminated after reclosing the circuit breaker, this cycle may be repeated several times. The figure below shows a case where the network fault is not cleared until the second trip command. The action times and blocking times, which are also shown in the figure, serve for the control of the AR function and can be adapted to the local network conditions by parameter settings. This is described in more detail farther below. The indication AR in progress is generated by the AR for the duration of all AR cycles. Figure 2-58 Example of a chronological sequence of a double reclosure operation The integrated automatic reclosure function allows up to 8 reclosure attempts. The number of reclosing cycles is set in DIGSI under "Functional Scope - Automatic Reclosing (No. 133)". The first four interrupt cycles can operate with different parameters (action and dead times, 1/3-pole). The parameters of the fourth cycle also apply for the fifth cycle and onwards. Connection of the Measured Voltages The automatic reclose function is provided with optional control modes that use the phase-to-earth voltages of the protected feeder as input quantities. Unlike SIPROTEC protection devices, where the allocation of the measuring transducers to the measured quantities is always fixed, the measured quantities in the 6MD66x can be freely allocated. This is done with the phase-to-earth voltages in the automatic reclose function. They are allocated by linking in the DIGSI configuration matrix each column representing a transducer with a line representing the voltage Input U1" ... . SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 123 Functions 2.10 Automatic reclosure function (optional) Figure 2-59 Allocation of voltage inputs for the automatic reclosure function In case automatic reclosure functions depending on the voltage values are enabled, a plausibility check is conducted which examines whether a voltage transformer is assigned to each voltage input of the automatic reclosing. If this is not the case, the automatic reclosure function is indicated as ineffective and the AR Mask. Error" alarm indication is output. Circuit Breaker Commands Basically, the automatic reclose function can output two types of commands to a circuit breaker: a 3-pole trip command (forced 3-pole trip), and a 3-pole close command. Commands are output through the output relays provided in the 6MD66x. The procedure of assigning the circuit breaker to the automatic reclosure function is based on entering close and trip command indications in a circuit breaker object as state. The choice of the circuit breaker object can be made using the Cmd.via control parameter. These objects can in turn be assigned to output relays of the 6MD66x using the DIGSI configuration matrix. If the Cmd.via control parameter is set to None" to perform the circuit breaker assignment, no switching object is closed and the AR Close command common to protective devices is generated. It can be allocated to output relays as a normal single indication. The transfer trip indication is generated independent of whether this parameter is set or not. The figure below illustrates the procedure on a configuration example: 124 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.10 Automatic reclosure function (optional) Figure 2-60 Allocation of the circuit breaker to the automatic reclosure function Circuit Breaker Auxiliary Contacts The logic functions of the AR evaluate, among other things, the circuit breaker position. This is done using the binary signals transmitted by the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts, which are routed to appropriately configured binary inputs of the 6MD66x. The circuit breaker position is evaluated not only by the AR but also by the breaker failure protection function, if the device is equipped with it. SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 125 Functions 2.10 Automatic reclosure function (optional) Figure 2-61 Example for allocation of CB auxiliary contacts to function blocks Starting Conditions The AR function is started by the detection of a rising-edge trip command from the protection device operating in conjunction with the AR. What happens on starting the AR is determined by the setting of the parameter AR CONTROL MODE. This parameter specifies whether the AR is controlled by trip command or by pickup, and whether it operates with or without cyclic control by action times. The automatic reclosing is not started if the circuit breaker has not been ready for at least one TRIP-CLOSE- TRIP-cycle at the instant of the first trip command. This can be achieved by setting parameters. Action Times It is often desirable to remove the ready for reclosure state if the short-circuit condition was sustained for a certain time, e.g. because it is assumed that the arc has burned in to such an extent that there is no longer any chance of automatic arc extinction during the reclose dead time. The automatic reclosure function of the 6MD66x can be operated with or without action times (configuration parameter AR control mode). Without action time, initiation takes place as soon as the first trip command appears. 126 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.10 Automatic reclosure function (optional) When operating with action time, an action time is available for each reclose cycle. The action times are started through binary inputs. If no trip command is present before the action time expires, the corresponding reclose cycle is not carried out. For each reclosure cycle, it can be specified whether or not it should allow the initiation. Following the first general pickup, only those action times are relevant whose cycles allow starting because the other cycles are not allowed to initiate. By means of the action times and the permission to start the recloser (permission to be the first cycle that is executed), it is possible to determine which reclose cycles are executed depending on the time it takes the protection function to trip. Example 1: 3 cycles are set. Starting of the automatic reclosure function is allowed for at least the first cycle. The action times are set as follows: * 1st Reclosure: T Action = 0.2 s; * 2nd Reclosure: T Action = 0.8 s; * 3rd Reclosure: T Action = 1.2 s; Since reclosure is ready before the fault occurs, the first trip of a time overcurrent protection following a fault is fast, i.e. before the end of any action time. This starts the automatic reclose function. After unsuccessful reclosure, the 2nd cycle would then become active; but the time overcurrent protection does not trip in this example until after 1s according to its grading time. Since the action time for the second cycle was exceeded here, the second cycle is blocked. The 3rd cycle with its parameters is therefore carried out now. If the trip command appeared more than 1.2 s after the 1st reclosure, there would be no further reclosure. Example 2: 3 cycles are set. Starting is only allowed for the first. The action times are set as in example 1. The first protection trip takes place 0.5 s after starting. Since the action time for the 1st cycle has already expired at this time, this cannot start the automatic reclose function. As the 2nd and 3rd cycles are not permitted to start the reclose function they will also not be initiated. Therefore no reclosure takes place as no starting took place. Example 3: 3 cycles are set. At least the first two cycles are set such that they can start the recloser. The action times are set as in example 1. The first protection trip takes place 0.5 s after starting. Since the action time for the 1st cycle has already expired at this time, it cannot start the automatic reclosure function, but the 2nd cycle, for which initiating is allowed, is activated immediately. This 2nd cycle therefore starts the automatic reclosure function, the 1st cycle is practically skipped. Control Mode of the Automatic Reclosure The dead times -- these are the times from elimination of the fault (drop off of the trip command or signalling via auxiliary contacts) to the initiation of the automatic close command -- may vary, depending on the automatic reclosure control mode selected when determining the functional scope and the resulting signals of the starting protective functions. In control mode TRIP ... (With TRIP command...) 1-pole or 1/3-pole reclose cycles are possible if the device and the circuit breaker are suitable. In this case, different dead times (for every AR-cycle) are possible after 1pole tripping and after 3-pole tripping. The tripping protection function determines the type of tripping: 1-pole or 3-pole. Selection of the dead time depends on this. In control mode PICKUP ... (With PICKUP...) different dead times can be set for every reclosure cycle after 3-phase faults. Selection of the dead time in this case depends on the type of fault determined by the initiating protective function at the instant that the trip command resets. This operating mode allows the dead times to be dependent on the type of fault in the case of 3-pole reclose cycles. In the control mode with cyclic control by action times, the cycle action times are started by the pickup. In the control mode without cyclic control by action times, the pickup signal from the protection device is irrelevant. The AR cycles are always performed in chronological order (1st cycle, 2nd cycle etc.). SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 127 Functions 2.10 Automatic reclosure function (optional) Reclosure Block Different conditions lead to blocking of the automatic reclosure. No reclosure is, for example, possible if it is blocked via a binary input. If the automatic reclosure has not yet been started, it cannot be started at all. If a reclose cycle is already in progress, dynamic blocking takes place (see below). Each individual cycle may also be blocked via binary input. In this case the cycle concerned is declared as invalid and will be skipped in the sequence of permissible cycles. If blocking takes place while the cycle concerned is already running, this leads to aborting of the reclosure, i.e. no reclosure takes place even if other valid cycles have been parameterised. Internal blocking signals, with a limited duration, arise during the course of the reclose cycles: The reclaim time TIME RESTRAINT begins with every automatic reclosure command. If the reclosure is successful, all the functions of the automatic reclosure return to the quiescent state at the end of the blocking time; a fault after expiry of the reclaim time is treated as a new fault in the network. Re-tripping by a protection function during the reclaim time initiates the next reclose cycle in the case of multiple reclosure; if no further reclosure is permitted, the last reclosure cycle is declared as unsuccessful if re-tripping within the reclaim time takes place. The automatic reclosure is blocked dynamically. The dynamic blocking locks the reclosure for the duration of the dynamic blocking time (0.5 s). This occurs, for example, after a final tripping or other events which block the auto reclose function after it has been started. Restarting is locked out for this time. When this time expires, the automatic reclosure function returns to its quiescent state and is ready for a new fault in the network. If the circuit breaker is closed manually (by the control discrepancy switch connected to a binary input, the local control possibilities or via one of the serial interfaces), the automatic reclosure is blocked for a manual-closeblocking time T-BLOCK MC. If a trip command is issued during this time, it can be assumed that a metallic shortcircuit is the cause (e.g. closed earth switch). Every trip command within this time is therefore a final trip. With the user definable logic functions (CFC) further control functions can be processed in the same way as a manual-close command. Interrogation of Circuit Breaker Ready A precondition for automatic reclosure following clearance of a short-circuit is that the circuit breaker is ready for at least one TRIP-CLOSE-TRIP cycle when the automatic reclosure circuit is started (i.e. at the time of the first trip command). The readiness of the circuit breaker is signalled to the device through the binary input >CB1 Ready" (No. 371). In the event of a single cycle reclosure this interrogation is usually sufficient. Since, for example, the air pressure or the spring tension for the circuit breaker mechanism drops after the trip, no further interrogation should take place. Especially when multiple reclosing attempts are programmed, it is recommended to monitor the circuit breaker condition not only prior to the first, but also before each following reclosing attempt. Reclosure will be blocked until the binary input indicates that the circuit breaker is ready to complete another CLOSE-TRIP cycle. The recovery time of the circuit breaker can be monitored by the 6MD66x. This monitoring time CB TIME OUT starts as soon as the CB indicates the not ready state. The dead time may be extended if the ready state is not indicated when it expires. However, if the circuit breaker does not indicate its ready status for a longer period than the monitoring time, reclosure is locked out dynamically (see also above under margin heading Reclosure Block"). Monitoring with an AR Cycle in Progress Monitoring of the circuit breaker readiness is also performed before a reclosure and during the dead time, if it has been released for the cycle with the parameter ADT CB? CLOSE. When the binary input >CB ready goes OFF, the AR is not dynamically blocked at once, but the CB ready monitoring time CB TIME OUT is started. This CLOSE command management provides a controlled delay of the CLOSE command to allow the circuit 128 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.10 Automatic reclosure function (optional) breaker a recovery time after its previous trip before completing another close/trip cycle. This recovery time is used, for instance, to build up sufficient air pressure for the next switching operations. If the BI >CB ready goes ON again before the monitoring time has elapsed, the monitoring time will be reset, and the AR continues. * If the CB monitoring time is still running at the end of the regular dead time, the dead time will be extended by the rest of the CB monitoring time. If the readiness of the CB returns within the maximum permissible extension of the dead time defined by parameter T-DEAD EXT., and before expiry of the CB monitoring time, the AR will be continued, and the monitoring time reset. If the CB monitoring time is still running at the end of the maximum permissible extension of the dead time defined by parameter T-DEAD EXT., the automatic reclosure function will be blocked dynamically. If the monitoring time elapses before the circuit breaker signals its readiness, the automatic reclosure function will be blocked dynamically. The dynamic blocking aborts the reclosure attempt. No CLOSE command is generated. After expiry of the settable dynamic blocking time T BLK DYN, the AR will be reset. Processing the Circuit Breaker Auxiliary Contacts If the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts are connected to the device, the reaction of the circuit breaker is also checked for plausibility. The circuit breaker auxiliary contacts can be connected to the device through the binary inputs >CB1 3p Closed", >CB1 3p Open" and 1-pole >CB1Pole Lx. These binary signals inform the AR whether the circuit breaker is open, closed or in intermediate position. No current criterion is used. Whether auxiliary contacts are evaluated depends on which of them are allocated, if any. * No CB auxiliary contact allocated If no circuit breaker auxiliary contacts are allocated, the AR cannot detect the switching status of the circuit breaker. Monitoring for "CB open without TRIP" and starting the dead time in dependence of the circuit breaker feedback is not possible in this case. The AR is controlled by the TRIP command instead. * Circuit breaker signal >CB1 3p Open" allocated If binary signal >CB1 3p Open" alone is used, the circuit breaker is considered 3-pole open while the signal is active. If the binary signal is active and no trip command applies, the automatic reclosure function is statically blocked when it is in normal state, dynamically blocked when it is running and the CB not ready" indication is output. The dead time is started while the automatic reclosure function is running if the binary input becomes active following the trip command. An intermediate position of the circuit breaker cannot be detected for this type of allocation. * Circuit breaker signals >CB1 3p Closed" or >CB Pole Lx allocated If binary signal >CB1 3p Closed" is used, the circuit breaker is considered 3-pole closed while the signal is active. If the >CB Aux. Lx signals are allocated, the state of each pole of the cicruit breaker can be determined what is especially important for a 1-pole reclosure. If such a binary signal is active and no trip command applies, the automatic reclosure function is blocked statically when it is in normal state, dynamically when it is running and the CB not ready" indication output. The dead time is started while the automatic reclosure function is running if the binary input becomes inactive following the trip command. An intermediate position of the circuit breaker cannot be detected for this type of allocation. * Circuit breaker signals >CB1 3p Open" and >CB1 3p Closed" allocated If both binary signals are used, the circuit breaker is considered open, when >CB1 3p Open" is active and >CB1 3p Closed" inactive. An vice versa, the circuit breaker is considered closed, when >CB1 3p Open" is inactive and >CB1 3p Closed" active. All other states are considered intermediate position. If the circuit breaker is in intermediate position or opens without a trip command being detected, the automatic reclosure is blocked statically when it is in normal state and dynamically when it is running. The start of the dead time takes place while the automatic reclosure is running, when the circuit breaker is considered open. The static blocking of the automatic reclosure function is indicated via the AR is blocked" indication, dynamic via AR is NOT ready" and the blocking cause via CB not ready" in both cases. SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 129 Functions 2.10 Automatic reclosure function (optional) Sequence of a 3-pole Interrupt Cycle If the automatic reclosure function is ready, the short-circuit protection trips three pole for all faults inside the stage selected for reclosure. The auto reclose function is then started. When the trip command resets or the circuit breaker opens (auxiliary contact criterion) an (adjustable) dead time starts. At the end of this dead time the circuit breaker receives a close command. At the same time, the (adjustable) blocking time is started. If during configuration of the protective functions in AR control mode = PICKUP ... was set, different dead times can be parameterised depending on the type of protection pickup. If the fault is cleared (successful reclosure), the reclaim time expires and all functions return to their quiescent state. The fault is cleared. If the fault has not been eliminated (unsuccessful reclosure), the short-circuit protection initiates a final trip following a protection stage active without reclosure. Any fault during the reclaim time leads to a final trip. After unsuccessful reclosure (final tripping) the automatic reclosure function is blocked dynamically (see also margin heading Reclose Block", above). The sequence above applies for single reclosure cycles. In 6MD66x multiple reclosure (up to 8 shots) is also possible (see below). Sequence of a 1-pole Interrupt Cycle 1-pole reclose cycles are only possible with the appropriate device version and if this was selected during the configuration of the protective functions (Trip 1pole, see also Section 2.1.1.2). Of course, the circuit breaker must also be suitable for 1-pole tripping. If the automatic reclosure function is ready, the short-circuit protection trips single pole for all 1-phase faults inside the stage selected for reclosure. 1-pole tripping is of course only possible by short-circuit protective functions which can determine the faulty phase. If multiple-phase faults occur, the fault protection issues a final 3-pole trip with the stage that is valid without reclosure. Any 3-pole trip is final. The automatic reclosure function is blocked dynamically (see also margin heading Blocking reclosure", above). The automatic reclosure function is started in the case of 1-pole tripping. The (adjustable) dead time for the 1pole reclose cycle starts with reset of the trip command or opening of the circuit breaker pole (auxiliary contact criterion). After expiry of the dead time, the circuit breaker receives a close command. At the same time, the (adjustable) reclaim time is started. If the reclosure is blocked during the dead time following a 1-pole trip, immediate 3-pole tripping can take place as an option (forced 3-pole trip). If the fault is cleared (successful reclosure), the reclaim time expires and all functions return to their quiescent state. The fault is cleared. If the fault has not been eliminated (unsuccessful reclosure), the short-circuit protection initiates a final 3-pole trip with the protection stage that is valid without reclosure. All faults during the reclaim time also lead to a final 3-pole trip. After unsuccessful reclosure (final tripping) the automatic reclosure function is blocked dynamically (see also margin heading Reclose Block", above). The sequence above applies for single reclosure cycles. In 6MD66x multiple reclosure (up to 8 shots) is also possible (see below). 130 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.10 Automatic reclosure function (optional) Sequence of a 1 and 3-pole Interrupt Cycle This operating mode is only possible with the appropriate device version and if this was selected during configuration of the protective functions (see also Section 2.1.1.2). Of course, the circuit breaker must also be suitable for 1-pole tripping. If the automatic reclosure function is ready, the short-circuit protection trips 1-pole for 1-phase faults and 3-pole for multi-phase faults. 1-pole tripping is of course only possible with short-circuit protective functions that can determine the faulty phase. The valid protection stage selected for reclosure ready state applies for all fault types. The automatic reclosure function is started at the moment of tripping. Depending on the type of fault, the (adjustable) dead time for the 1-pole reclose cycle or the (separately adjustable) dead time for the 3-pole reclose cycle starts following the reset of the trip command or opening of the circuit breaker (pole) (auxiliary contact criterion). After expiry of the dead time, the circuit breaker receives a close command. At the same time, the (adjustable) reclaim time is started. If the reclosure is blocked during the dead time following a 1-pole trip, immediate 3-pole tripping can take place as an option (forced 3-pole trip). If the fault is cleared (successful reclosure), the reclaim time expires and all functions return to their quiescent state. The fault is cleared. If the fault has not been eliminated (unsuccessful reclosure), the short-circuit protection initiates a final 3-pole trip with the protection stage that is valid without reclosure. All faults during the reclaim time also lead to a final 3-pole trip. After unsuccessful reclosure (final tripping), the automatic reclosure function is blocked dynamically (see also margin heading Reclose Block", above). The sequence above applies for single reclosure cycles. In 6MD66x multiple reclosure (up to 8 shots) is also possible (see below). Multiple auto-reclosure If a short-circuit still exists after a reclosure attempt, further reclosure attempts can be made. Up to 8 reclosure attempts are possible with the automatic reclosure function integrated in the 6MD66x. The first four reclosure cycles are independent of each other. Each one has separate action and dead times, can operate with 1- or 3-pole trip and can be blocked separately via binary inputs. The parameters and intervention possibilities of the fourth cycle also apply to the fifth cycle and onwards. The sequence is the same in principle as in the different reclosure programs described above. However, if the first reclosure attempt was unsuccessful, the reclosure function is not blocked, but instead the next reclose cycle is started. The appropriate dead time starts with the reset of the trip command or opening of the circuit breaker (pole) (auxiliary contact criterion). The circuit breaker receives a new close command after expiry of the dead time. At the same time the reclaim time is started. The reclaim time is reset with each new trip command after reclosure and is started again with the next close command until the set maximum number of permissible auto-reclose cycles has been reached. If one of the reclosing attempts is successful, i.e. the fault disappeared after reclosure, the blocking time expires and the automatic reclosing system is reset. The fault is cleared. If none of the cycles is successful, the short-circuit protection initiates a final 3-pole trip after the last permissible reclosure, following a protection stage that is valid without auto-reclosure. The automatic reclosure function is blocked dynamically (see also margin heading Blocking reclosure", above). SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 131 Functions 2.10 Automatic reclosure function (optional) Handling Evolving Faults When 1-pole or 1-and 3-pole reclose cycles are executed in the network, particular attention must be paid to sequential faults. Evolving faults are faults which occur during the dead time after clearance of the first fault. There are various ways of handling sequential faults in the 6MD66x depending on the requirements of the network: For the detection of an evolving fault you can select whether the trip command of the external protection during the dead time or every further pickup is the criterion for an evolving fault. There are also various selectable possibilities for the response of the internal auto- reclose function to a detected evolving fault. * EV. FLT. MODE blocks AR: The reclosure is blocked as soon as a sequential fault is detected. The tripping by the sequential fault is always 3-pole. This applies irrespective of whether 3-pole cycles have been permitted or not. There are no further reclosure attempts; the automatic reclosure function is blocked dynamically (see also margin heading Blocking reclosure", above). * EV. FLT. MODE starts 3p AR: As soon as a sequential fault is detected, the recloser switches to a 3-pole cycle. Each trip command is 3pole. The separately settable dead time for sequential faults starts with the clearance of the sequential fault; after the dead time the circuit breaker receives a close command. The further sequence is the same as for 1- and 3-pole cycles. The complete dead time in this case consists of the part of the dead time for the 1-pole reclosure up to the clearance of the sequential fault plus the dead time for the sequential fault. This makes sense because the duration of the 3-pole dead time is most important for the stability of the network. If reclosure is blocked due to a sequential fault without the protection issuing a 3-pole trip command (e.g. for sequential fault detection with starting), the device can send a 3-pole trip command so that the circuit breaker does not remain open with one pole (forced 3-pole trip). Dead Line Check (DLC) If the voltage of a disconnected phase does not disappear following a trip, reclosure can be prevented. A prerequisite for this function is that the voltage transformers are connected on the line side of the circuit breaker. To select this function the dead line check must be activated. The automatic reclosure function then checks the disconnected line for no-voltage: the line must have been without voltage for at least an adequate measuring time during the dead time. If this was not the case, the reclosure is blocked dynamically. A voltage detection fault causes blocking of the automatic reclosure function in the dead line check mode. Voltage detection faults are, for example, pickup of the voltage failure monitoring or the >FAIL:Feeder VT" binary signal. This no-voltage check on the line is of advantage if a small generator (e.g. wind generator) is connected along the line. 132 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.10 Automatic reclosure function (optional) Reduced Dead Time (RDT) If automatic reclosure function is performed in connection with time-graded protection, non-selective tripping before reclosure is often unavoidable in order to achieve fast, simultaneous tripping at all line ends. The 6MD66x has a reduced dead time (RDT)" procedure which reduces the effect of the short-circuit on healthy line sections to a minimum. All phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth voltages are measured for the reduced dead time procedure. These voltages must rise above the threshold U-live> (address 3440) for the voltage measuring time T U-stable (address 3438). The value set for U-live> is appropriately converted for the phase-to-phase voltages. The voltage transformers must be located on the line side of the circuit breaker. In the event of a short-circuit close to one of the line ends, the surrounding lines can initially be tripped because, for example, a distance protection detects the fault in its overreaching zone Z1B (Figure 2-62, mounting location III). If the network is meshed and there is at least one other infeed on busbar B, the voltage there returns immediately after clearance of the fault. For 1-pole tripping it is sufficient if there is an earthed transformer with delta winding connected at busbar B which ensures symmetry of the voltages and thus induces a return voltage in the open phase. This allows a distinction between the faulty line and the unfaulted line to be made as follows: Since line B - C is only tripped singled-ended at C, it receives a return voltage from the end B which is not tripped so that at C the open phase(s) also has(have) voltage. If the device detects this at position III, reclosure can take place immediately or in a shorter time (to ensure sufficient voltage measuring time). The healthy line B - C is then back in operation. Line A-B is tripped at both ends. No voltage is therefore present identifying the line as the faulted one at both ends. The normal dead time comes into service here. Figure 2-62 Example of a reduced dead time (RDT) A, B, C Busbars I, II, III Relay locations X Tripped circuit breakers SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 133 Functions 2.10 Automatic reclosure function (optional) Adaptive Dead Time (ADT) In all the previous alternatives it was assumed that defined and equal dead times were set at both line ends, if necessary for different fault types and/or reclose cycles. It is also possible to set the dead times (for different fault types and/or reclose cycles, if necessary) at one line end only and to configure the adaptive dead time at the other end(s). This requires that the voltage transformers are located on the line side of the circuit breaker or that a close command can be sent to the remote line end. Figure 2-63 shows an example with voltage measurement. It is assumed that device I operates with defined dead times whereas the adaptive dead time is configured at position II. It is important that the line is at least fed from busbar A, i.e. the side with the defined dead times. When using the adaptive dead time, the automatic reclosing function at line end II decides autonomously whether to allow reclosing or not. Its decision is based on the line voltage at end II, which was reapplied from end I following reclosure. Device II will thus initiate reclosing as soon as it is evident that the line has been reenergized from end I. All phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth voltages are monitored. In the illustrated example, the lines are disconnected at positions I, II and III. In I reclosure takes place after the configured dead time. At position III a reduced dead time can be used (see above) if there is also an infeed on busbar B. If the fault has been cleared (successful reclosure), line A - B is re-connected to the voltage at busbar A through position I. Device II detects this voltage and also recloses after a short delay (to ensure a sufficient voltage measuring time). The fault is cleared. If the fault has not been cleared after reclosure at I (unsuccessful reclosure), the line will be disconnected again in position I with the result that no healthy voltage is detected at location II so that the circuit breaker there does not reclose. In the case of multiple reclosure the sequence may be repeated several times following an unsuccessful reclosure until one of the reclosure attempts is successful or a final trip takes place. Figure 2-63 Example of adaptive dead time (ADT) A, B, C Busbars I, II, III Relay locations X Tripped circuit breakers As is shown by the example, the adaptive dead time has the following advantages: * The circuit breaker at position II is not reclosed if the fault persists and is not unnecessarily stressed as a result. * With non-selective tripping by overreach at position III no further trip and reclose cycles occur here because the short-circuit path via busbar B and position II remains interrupted even in the event of several reclosure attempts. * At position I overreach is allowed in the case of multiple reclosures and even in the event of final tripping because the line remains open at position II and therefore no actual overreach can occur at I. 134 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.10 Automatic reclosure function (optional) The adaptive dead time also includes the reduced dead time because the criteria are the same. There is no need to set the reduced dead time as well. Control of the Automatic Reclosure by the TRIP Command If the auto-reclosure is controlled by the trip command, the following inputs and outputs are recommended to be used: The automatic reclosure function is started via the Binary inputs: 2711 >AR Start" General fault detection for the automatic reclosure circuit (only required for action time), 2712 >Trip L1 AR" Trip command L1 for the automatic reclosure circuit, 2713 >Trip L2 AR" Trip command L2 for the automatic reclosure circuit, 2714 >Trip L3 AR" Trip command L3 for the automatic reclosure circuit. The general pickup is decisive for starting the action times. It is also required if the automatic reclosing function has to detect sequential faults via pickup. In other cases, this input information is irrelevant. The trip commands decide whether the dead time is activated for 1-pole or 3-pole reclose cycles or whether the reclosure is blocked in the event of a 3-pole trip (depending on the configured dead times). Figure 2-64 Connection example with external protection device for 1-/3-pole reclosure; AR control mode = with TRIP Figure 2-64 shows as a connection example the interconnection between the automatic reclosure of 6MD66x and a protection device. SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 135 Functions 2.10 Automatic reclosure function (optional) To achieve 3-pole coupling of the external protection and to release, if necessary, its accelerated stages before reclosure, the following output functions are suitable: 2864 AR 1p Trip Perm" Internal automatic reclosure function ready for 1-pole reclose cycle, i.e. allows 1-pole tripping (logic inversion of the 3-pole coupling). 2889 AR 1.CycZoneRel" Internal automatic reclosure function ready for the first reclose cycle, i.e. releases the stage of the external protection device for reclosure, the corresponding outputs can be used for other cycles. This output can be omitted if the external protection does not require an overreaching stage (e.g. differential protection or comparison mode with distance protection). 2820 AR Program1pole" Internal automatic reclosure function is programmed for one pole, i.e. only recloses after 1-pole tripping. This output can be omitted if no overreaching stage is required (e.g. differential protection or comparison mode with distance protection). Instead of the 3-phase-segregated trip commands, the 1-pole and 3-pole tripping may also be signalled to the internal automatic reclosure function - provided that the external protection device is capable of this -, i.e. assign the following binary inputs of the 6MD66x: 2711 >AR Start" General fault detection for the internal automatic reclosure function (only required for action time), 2715 >Trip 1p for AR" Trip command 1-pole for the internal automatic reclosure function, 2716 >Trip 3p for AR" Trip command 3-pole for the internal automatic reclosure function. If only 3-pole reclosure cycles are to be executed, it is sufficient to assign the binary input >Trip 3p for AR" (No. 2716) for the trip signal. Figure 2-66 shows an example. Any overreaching stages of the external protection are enabled again by AR 1.CycZoneRel" (No. 2889) and of further cycles, if applicable. Figure 2-65 136 Connection example with external protection device for 1-/3-pole reclosure; AR control mode = with TRIP SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.10 Automatic reclosure function (optional) Figure 2-66 Connection example with external protection device for 3-pole reclosure; AR control mode = with TRIP But if the internal automatic reclose function is controlled by the pickup (only possible for 3-pole tripping: 110 Trip 1pole = 3pole only), the phase-dedicated pickup signals of the external protection must be connected if distinction shall be made between different types of fault. The general trip command then suffices for tripping (No. 2746). Figure 2-67 shows a connection example. Control of the Automatic Reclosure by the Pickup Signal If, on the other hand, the internal auto-reclosure is controlled by the pickup, the phase-dedicated pickup signals must be connected from the external protection. The general trip command then suffices for tripping. Connection examples in the figure below. Figure 2-67 Connection example with external protection device for fault detection dependent dead time -- dead time control by pickup signals of the protection device; AR control mode = with PICKUP SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 137 Functions 2.10 Automatic reclosure function (optional) 2.10.2 Setting Notes General If no reclosure is required on the feeder for which the 6MD66x is used (e.g. for cables, transformers, motors or similar), the automatic reclosure function must be removed during configuration of the device (see Section 2.1.1.2). The auto reclose function is then totally disabled, i.e. the automatic reclosure is not processed in the 6MD66x. No signals regarding the auto reclose function are generated, and the binary inputs for the auto reclose function are ignored. All parameters for setting the auto reclose function are inaccessible and of no significance. For the auto reclose function to be active, all three possible methods for switching it ON/OFF must be switched ON: * Parameter settings * Binary inputs * System interface When the device is started up, the AR is switched ON through binary inputs and the system interface, if it has not been explicitly switched OFF through the system interface. Basically, the AR can only be reactivated from the same source from which it was deactivated. If it was switched OFF by more than one mechanism, all sources must switch the AR back ON before it becomes active again. If the internal automatic reclosure function is to be used, the user must select during the configuration of the functions (Section 2.1.1.2) the type of reclosure in address Auto Reclose and the AR control mode in AR control mode. Up to 8 reclosure attempts are allowed with the integrated automatic reclosure function in the 6MD66x. There are individual settings and common settings, which apply for one or more of the reclose cycles. It is possible to set different individual parameters for the first four reclose cycles. From the fifth cycle on the parameters for the fourth cycle apply. The automatic reclosing function can be turned ON or OFF with the parameter AUTO RECLOSE. A prerequisite for automatic reclosure taking place after a trip due to a short-circuit is that the circuit breaker is ready for at least one TRIP-CLOSE-TRIP cycle at the time the automatic reclosure circuit is started, i.e. at the time of the first trip command. The readiness of the circuit breaker is signalled to the device through the binary input >CB1 Ready" (FNo 371). If no such signal is available, leave the setting CB? 1.TRIP = NO because no automatic reclosure would be possible at all otherwise. If circuit breaker interrogation is possible, you should set CB? 1.TRIP = YES. Furthermore, the circuit breaker ready state can also be interrogated prior to every reclosure. This is set when setting the individual reclose cycles (see below). To check the ready status of the circuit breaker is regained during the dead times, you can set a circuit breaker ready monitor time in CB TIME OUT. The time is set slightly longer than the recovery time of the circuit breaker after a TRIP-CLOSE-TRIP cycle. If the circuit breaker is not ready again by the time this timer expires, no reclosure takes place, the automatic reclosure function is blocked dynamically. Waiting for the circuit breaker to be ready can lead to an increase of the dead times. Interrogation of a synchrocheck (if used) can also delay reclosure. To avoid uncontrolled prolongation, it is possible to set a maximum prolongation of the dead time in this case in T-DEAD EXT.. This prolongation is unlimited if the setting is applied. This setting can only be altered with DIGSI under Additional Settings. Remember that longer dead times are only permissible after 3-pole tripping when no stability problems arise or when a synchro-check takes place before reclosure. Generally, the monitoring time should be longer than the maximum duration of the synchronization process. The reclaim time TIME RESTRAINT defines the time that must elapse, after a successfulreclosing attempt, before the automatic reclosing function is reset. Re-tripping of a protective function within this time initiates the next reclose cycle in the event of multiple reclosure; if no further reclosure is permitted, the last reclosure is 138 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.10 Automatic reclosure function (optional) treated as unsuccessful. The reclaim time must therefore be longer than the longest response time of a protective function which can start the automatic reclosure circuit. A few seconds are generally sufficient. In areas with frequent thunderstorms or storms, a shorter reclaim time may be necessary to avoid feeder lockout due to sequential lightning strikes or flashovers. A longer reclaim time should be chosen where circuit breaker supervision is not possible (see above) during multiple reclosures, e.g. because of missing auxiliary contacts and information on the circuit breaker ready status. In this case, the reclaim time should be longer than the time required for the circuit breaker mechanism to be ready. The blocking duration following Manual-Close detection T-BLOCK MC must guarantee the circuit breaker to open and close reliably (0.5 s to 1 s). If a fault is detected by a protective function within this time after closing of the circuit breaker was detected, no reclosure takes place and a final 3-pole trip command is issued. If this is not desired, set the blocking duration to 0. The options for handling evolving faults are described in Section 2.10 under margin heading Handling Evolving Faults". The treatment of evolving faults is not necessary on line ends where the adaptive dead time is applied (Auto Reclose = ADT). The detection of an evolving fault can be defined in EV. FLT. RECOG.. EV. FLT. RECOG. with PICKUP means that, during a dead time, every pickup of a protective function will be interpreted as an evolving fault. With EV. FLT. RECOG. with TRIP a fault during a dead time is only interpreted as an evolving fault if it has led to a trip command by a protective function. This may also include trip commands which are coupled in from external via a binary input or which have been transmitted from an opposite end of the protected object. If an external protection device operates together with the internal auto-reclosure, evolving fault detection with pickup presupposes that a pickup signal from the external device is also connected to the 6MD66x; otherwise an evolving fault can only be detected with the external trip command even if with PICKUP was set here. EV. FLT. MODE blocks AR means that no reclosure takes place after detection of an evolving fault. This is always useful when only 1-pole reclosure is to take place or when stability problems are expected due to the subsequent 3-pole dead time. If a 3-pole reclose cycle is to be initiated by tripping of the evolving fault, set EV. FLT. MODE = starts 3p AR. In this case, a separately adjustable 3-pole dead time is started with the 3-pole trip command due to the sequential fault. This is only useful if 3-pole reclosure is also permitted. T-Start MONITOR monitors the reaction of the circuit breaker after a trip command. If the CB has not opened during this time (from the beginning of the trip command), the automatic reclosure is blocked dynamically. The criterion for circuit breaker opening is the position of the circuit breaker auxiliary contact or the disappearance of the trip command. If a circuit breaker failure protection (internal or external) is used on the feeder, this time should be shorter than the delay time of the circuit breaker failure protection so that no reclosure takes place if the circuit breaker fails. If the reclosure command is transmitted to the opposite end, this transmission can be delayed by the time setting in T RemoteClose. This transmission is only possible if the device operates with adaptive dead time at the remote end (Auto Reclose = ADT at the remote end). This parameter is otherwise irrelevant. On the one hand, this delay serves to prevent the remote end device from reclosing unnecessarily when local reclosure is unsuccessful. On the other hand, it should be noted that the line is not available for energy transport until the remote end has also closed. This delay must therefore be added to the dead time for consideration of the network stability. Forced 3-pole Trip If reclosure is blocked during the dead time of a 1-pole cycle without a 3-pole trip command having been initiated, the breaker remains open at one pole. With AR TRIP 3pole it is possible to determine that the tripping logic of the device issues a 3-pole trip command in this case (pole discrepancy prevention for the CB poles). Set this parameter to YES if the CB can be tripped 1-pole and has no pole discrepancy protection itself. Nevertheless, the device pre-empts the pole discrepancy supervision of the CB because the forced 3-pole trip of the device is immediately initiated as soon as the reclosure is blocked following a 1-pole trip or if the CB auxiliary contacts report an implausible breaker state (see also Section 2.10 at margin heading Processing the Circuit SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 139 Functions 2.10 Automatic reclosure function (optional) Breaker Auxiliary Contacts"). The forced 3-pole coupling is also activated when only 3-pole cycles are allowed, but a 1-pole trip is signalled externally via a binary input. The forced 3-pole coupling is unnecessary if only a common 3-pole control of the CB is possible. Dead Line Check / Reduced Dead Time With DLC / RDT the dead line check or the reduced dead time function can be activated. Either the one or the other can be used as the two options are contradictory. The voltage transformers must be connected to the line side of the circuit breaker if either of these modes is to be used. If this is not the case or if neither of the two functions is used, set DLC / RDT = WITHOUT. If the adaptive dead time is used (see below), the parameters mentioned here are omitted because the adaptive dead time implies the properties of the reduced dead time. DLC / RDT = DLC means that the dead line check of the line voltage is used. This only enables reclosure after it becomes apparent that the line is dead. In this case, the phase-earth voltage limit is set in U-dead< below which the line is considered voltage-free (disconnected). The setting is applied in Volts secondary. If setting is performed from a personal computer using DIGSI, this value may be entered as a primary value. T U-stable determines the measuring time available for determining the no-voltage condition. U-dead< is irrelevant here. DLC / RDT = RDT means that the reduced dead time is used. This is described in detail in Section 2.10 at margin heading Reduced Dead Time (RDT)". In this case the setting of U-live> determines the limit voltage, Phase-Earth, above which the line is considered to be fault-free. The setting must be smalIer than the lowest expected operating voltage. The setting is applied in Volts secondary. If setting is performed from a personal computer using DIGSI, this value may be entered as a primary value. T U-stable determines the measuring time available for determining the voltage. It should be longer than any transient voltage oscillations resulting from line energization. U-dead< is irrelevant here. Adaptive Dead Time (ADT) When operating with adaptive dead time, it must be ensured in advance that one end per line operates with defined dead times and has an infeed. The other (or the others in multi-branch lines) may operate with adaptive dead time. It is essential that the voltage transformers are located on the line side of the circuit breaker. Details about this function can be found in Section 2.10 at margin heading Adaptive Dead Time (ADT)". For the line end with defined dead times the number of desired reclose cycles must be set during the configuration of the protective functions in Auto Reclose. For the devices operating with adaptive dead time, Auto Reclose = ADT must be set during the configuration of the protective functions. Only the parameters described below are interrogated in the latter case. No settings are then made for the individual reclosure cycles. The adaptive dead time implies functionality of reduced dead time. The adaptive dead time may be voltage-controlled or Remote-CLOSE-controlled. Both are possible at the same time. In the first case, reclosure takes place as soon as the return voltage, after reclosure at the remote end, is detected. For this purpose the device must be connected to voltage transformers located on the line side. In the case of Remote-CLOSE, the autoreclosure waits until the Remote-CLOSE command is received from the remote end. The action time T-ACTION ADT is the timeframe after pickup of the external protection which can start the automatic reclosure function within which the trip command must appear. If no trip command is issued until the action time has expired, there is no reclosure. Depending on the configuration of the function scope (see Section 2.1.1.2), the action time may also be omitted; this applies especially when an initiating protective function has no fault detection signal. The dead times are determined by the reclosure command of the device at the line end with the defined dead times. In cases where this reclosure command does not appear, e.g. because the reclosure was in the meantime blocked at this end, the readiness of the local device must return to the quiescent state at some time. This takes place after the maximum wait time T-MAX ADT. This must be long enough to include the last reclosure of the remote end. In the case of single cycle reclosure, the sum of the maximum dead time plus reclaim time of the other device is sufficient. In the case of multiple reclosure the worst case is that all reclosures of the other end except the last one are unsuccessful. The time of all these cycles must be taken into account. To save 140 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.10 Automatic reclosure function (optional) having to make exact calculations, it is possible to use the sum of all dead times and all protection operating times plus one reclaim time. The 1-pole release is signalled to the external protection device operation in conjunction with the 6MD66x through a binary input. The external protection device must not trip 1-pole until it has received that signal. In ADT CB? CLOSE it can be determined whether circuit-breaker ready is interrogated before reclosure after an adaptive dead time. With the setting YES, the dead time may be extended if the circuit breaker is not ready for a CLOSE-OPEN-cycle when the dead time expires. The maximum extension that is possible is the circuit breaker monitoring time; this was set for all reclosure cycles together in CB TIME OUT (see above). Details about the circuit-breaker monitoring can be found in the function description, Section 2.10, at margin heading Interrogation of the Circuit Breaker Ready State". If there is a danger of stability problems in the network during a 3-pole reclosure cycle, set ADT SynRequest to YES. In this case a check is made before reclosure following a 3-pole trip whether the voltages of the feeder and busbar are sufficiently synchronous. This on condition that either the internal synchronism and voltage check function is available or that an external device is available for synchronism check. If only 1-pole reclose cycles are executed or no stability problems are expected during 3-pole dead times (e.g. due to closely meshed networks or in radial networks), set ADT SynRequest to NO. T U-stable and U-live> are only significant if the voltage-controlled adaptive dead time is used. Set in Ulive> the limit voltage phase-earth above which the line is considered to be fault-free. The setting must be smalIer than the lowest expected operating voltage. The setting is applied in Volts secondary. If setting is performed from a personal computer using DIGSI, this value may be entered as a primary value. T U-stable determines the measuring time available for determining the voltage. It should be longer than any transient oscillations resulting from line energization. 1. Reclosure Cycle If working on a line with adaptive dead time, no further parameters are needed for the individual reclose cycles in this case. All the following parameters assigned to the individual cycles are then superfluous and inaccessible. 1.AR: START is only available if the automatic reclosure is configured with action time in the operating mode, i.e. if during configuration of the protective functions (see Section 2.1.1.2) AR control mode = Pickup w/ Tact or Trip w/ Tact was set (the first setting only applies to 3-pole tripping). It determines whether automatic reclosure should be started at all with the first cycle. This parameter is included mainly for the sake of uniformity of the parameters for every reclosure attempt and is set to YES for the first cycle. If several cycles are performed, you can (at AR control mode = Pickup ...) set this parameter and different action times to control the effectiveness of the individual cycles. Notes and examples can be found in Section 2.10 at margin heading Action Times". The action time 1.AR: T-ACTION is the timeframe after pickup of the external protection which can start the automatic reclosure function within which the trip command must appear. If no trip command is issued until the action time has expired, there is no reclosure. Depending on the configuration of the functional scope, the action time may also be omitted; this applies especially when an initiating protective function of the external protection device has no fault detection signal. Depending on the configured operating mode of the automatic reclosure (AR control mode), only 1.AR Tdead1Trip and 1.AR Tdead3Trip (if AR control mode = with TRIP...) are available, or 1.AR Tdead1Trip to 1.AR Tdead3Trip (if AR control mode = with PICKUP ...). In AR control mode = with TRIP... you can set different dead times for 1-pole and 3-pole reclose cycles. Whether 1-pole or 3-pole tripping takes place depends solely on the initiating protective functions of the external protection device. 1-pole tripping is only possible, of course, if the device and the corresponding protective function are also capable of 1-pole tripping. SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 141 Functions 2.10 Automatic reclosure function (optional) Table 2-15 AR control mode = with TRIP ... 1.AR Tdead1Trip is the dead time after 1-pole tripping, 1.AR Tdead3Trip is the dead time after 3-pole tripping. If you only want to allow a 1-pole reclosure cycle, set the dead time for 3-pole tripping to . If you only want to allow a 3-pole reclosure cycle, set the dead time for 1-pole tripping to . The protection will then trip 3-pole regardless of the fault type, since it does not receive the signal for 1-pole release from the 6MD66x. The dead time after 1-pole tripping (if set) 1.AR Tdead1Trip should be long enough for the short-circuit arc to be extinguished and the surrounding air to be de-ionized so that the reclosure promises to be successful. The longer the line, the longer is this time due to the charging of the conductor capacitances. Usual values are 0.9 s to 1.5 s. For 3-pole tripping (1.AR Tdead3Trip) the stability of the network is the main concern. Since the disconnected line cannot transfer any synchronizing forces, only a short dead time is often permitted. The usual values are 0.3 s to 0.6 s. If the device is operating with a synchronism check device, a longer dead time may be tolerated under certain circumstances. Longer 3-pole dead times are also possible in radial networks. For AR control mode = with PICKUP ... it is possible to make the dead times dependent on the type of fault detected by the initiating protection function(s) of the external protection device. Table 2-16 AR control mode = with PICKUP ... 1.AR Tdead 1Flt is the dead time after 1-phase pickup, 1.AR Tdead 2Flt is the dead time after 2-phase pickup, 1.AR Tdead 3Flt is the dead time after 3-phase pickup. If the dead time is to be the same for all types of faults, set all three parameters the same. Note that these settings only cause different dead times for different pickups. The tripping can only be 3-pole. With the setting in addressEV. FLT. MODE starts 3p AR, it is possible to apply a separate dead time 1.AR: Tdead EV. for the 3-pole dead time after clearance of the evolving fault (see above at heading General"). Stability aspects are also decisive here. Normally the setting constraints are similar to 1.AR Tdead3Trip. In 1.AR: CB? CLOSE it can be determined whether the readiness of the circuit breaker is interrogated before this first reclosure. With the setting YES, the dead time may be extended if the circuit breaker is not ready for a CLOSE-OPEN-cycle when the dead time expires. The maximum extension that is possible is the circuit breaker monitoring time; this was set for all reclosure cycles together in CB TIME OUT (see above). Details about the circuit-breaker monitoring can be found in the function description, Section 2.10, at margin heading Interrogation of the Circuit Breaker Ready State". If there is a danger of stability problems in the network during a 3-pole reclosure cycle, set 1.AR SynRequest to YES. In this case, a check is made before every reclosure following 3-pole tripping whether the voltages of the feeder and busbar are sufficiently synchronized. This on condition that either the internal synchronism and voltage check function is available or that an external device is available for synchronism check. If only 1-pole reclose cycles are executed or no stability problems are expected during 3-pole dead times (e.g. due to closely meshed networks or in radial networks), set 1.AR SynRequest to NO. 2. to 4th Reclosure Cycle If several cycles have been set in the configuration of the scope of protective functions, you can set individual reclosure parameters for the 2nd to 4th cycles. The same options are available as for the first cycle. Again, only some of the parameters shown below will be available depending on the selections made during configuration of the scope of protective functions of the external protection device. For the 2nd cycle: 142 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.10 Automatic reclosure function (optional) 2.AR: START Start in 2nd cycle generally allowed 2.AR: T-ACTION Action time for the 2nd cycle 2.AR Tdead 1Flt Dead time after 1-phase pickup 2.AR Tdead 2Flt Dead time after 2-phase pickup 2.AR Tdead 3Flt Dead time after 3-phase pickup 2.AR Tdead1Trip Dead time after 1-pole tripping 2.AR Tdead3Trip Dead time after 3-pole tripping 2.AR: Tdead EV. Dead time after evolving fault 2.AR: CB? CLOSE CB ready interrogation before reclosing 2.AR SynRequest Sync. check after 3-pole tripping For the 3rd cycle: 3.AR: START Start in 3rd cycle generally allowed 3.AR: T-ACTION Action time for the 3rd cycle 3.AR Tdead 1Flt Dead time after 1-phase pickup 3.AR Tdead 2Flt Dead time after 2-phase pickup 3.AR Tdead 3Flt Dead time after 3-phase pickup 3.AR Tdead1Trip Dead time after 1-pole tripping 3.AR Tdead3Trip Dead time after 3-pole tripping 3.AR: Tdead EV. Dead time after evolving fault 3.AR: CB? CLOSE CB ready interrogation before reclosing 3.AR SynRequest Sync. check after 3-pole tripping For the 4th cycle: 4.AR: START Start in 4th cycle generally allowed 4.AR: T-ACTION Action time for the 4th cycle 4.AR Tdead 1Flt Dead time after 1-phase pickup 4.AR Tdead 2Flt Dead time after 2-phase pickup 4.AR Tdead 3Flt Dead time after 3-phase pickup 4.AR Tdead1Trip Dead time after 1-pole tripping 4.AR Tdead3Trip Dead time after 3-pole tripping 4.AR: Tdead EV. Dead time after evolving fault 4.AR: CB? CLOSE CB ready interrogation before reclosing 4.AR SynRequest Sync. check after 3-pole tripping 5th to 8th Reclose Cycle If more than four cycles were set during configuration of the functional scope, the dead times preceding the fifth (5th) through the ninth (9th) reclosing attempts are equal to the open circuit breaker time which precedes the fourth (4th) reclosing attempt. SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 143 Functions 2.10 Automatic reclosure function (optional) Notes on the Information Overview The most important information about automatic reclosure is briefly explained insofar as it was not mentioned in the following lists or described in detail in the preceding text. >BLK 1.AR-cycle" (No. 2742) to >BLK 4.-n. AR" (No. 2745) The respective auto-reclose cycle is blocked. If the blocking state already exists when the automatic reclosure function is initiated, the blocked cycle is not executed and may be skipped (if other cycles are permitted). The same applies if the automatic reclosure function is started (running), but not internally blocked. If the block signal of a cycle appears while this cycle is being executed (in progress), the automatic reclosure function is blocked dynamically; no further automatic reclosures cycles are then executed. AR 1.CycZoneRel" (No. 2889) to AR 4.CycZoneRel" (No. 2892) The automatic reclosure is ready for the respective reclosure cycle. This information indicates which cycle will be run next. For example, external protection functions can use this information to release accelerated or overreaching trip stages prior to the corresponding reclose cycle. AR is blocked" (No. 2783) The automatic reclosure is blocked (e.g. circuit breaker not ready). This information indicates to the operational information system that in the event of an upcoming system fault there will be a final trip, i.e. without reclosure. If the automatic reclosure has been started, this information does not appear. AR is NOT ready" (No. 2784) The automatic reclosure is not ready for reclosure at the moment. In addition to the AR is blocked" (No. 2783) mentioned above there are also obstructions during the course of the auto-reclosure cycles such as action time run out" or last reclaim time running". This information is particularly helpful during testing because no protection test cycle with reclosure may be initiated during this state. AR in progress" (No. 2801) This information appears following the start of the automatic reclosure function, i.e. with the first trip command that can start the automatic reclosure function. If this reclosure was successful (or any in the case of multiple cycles), the information is reset with the expiry of the last reclaim time. If no reclosure was successful or if reclosure was blocked, it ends with the last - the final - trip command. AR Sync.Request" (No. 2865) Measuring request to an external synchronism check device. AR Sync.Request" is only relevant if the parameter 3413 Cmd.via control is set to No", since only in that case synchronization is performed by an external synchronism check device. The information appears at the end of a dead time subsequent to threepole tripping if a synchronism request was parameterized for the corresponding cycle. Reclosure only takes place when the synchronism check device has provided release signal >Sync.release" (No. 2731). Cmd.via control (No. 3413) The control device to be switched (Q0, Q1 etc.) can be specified with this parameter. The control device can be closed (CLOSE command) or opened (in case of a forced 3-pole trip). The advantage of this setting is that plausibility checks are performed for the device. 144 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.10 Automatic reclosure function (optional) If Cmd.via control is set to No", the CLOSE command is output using the single-point indications 2851 AR Close". The setting of Cmd.via control has also an effect on the synchronization of the breaker closure (if synchronization is desired). If a control device is set, synchronization is always performed using an internal synchronization module. If Cmd.via control is set to No" control device, synchronization is performed via binary input 2731 AR Close". Internal SYNC (No. 3414) This parameter is relevant if commands are output via a control device (Q0, Q1 etc.) and synchronization of the breaker closure is desired. In that case the synchronization module is specified in this parameter. The control device stated in the setting of the selected synchronization module must be the same as in parameter 3413 Cmd.via control. >Sync.release" (No. 2731) Release of reclosure by an external synchronism check device if this was requested by the output information AR Sync.Request" (No. 2865). 2.10.3 Settings Addresses which have an appended "A" can only be changed with DIGSI, under Additional Settings. Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments 3401 AUTO RECLOSE OFF ON OFF Auto-Reclose Function 3402 CB? 1.TRIP YES NO NO CB ready interrogation at 1st trip 3403 TIME RESTRAINT 0.50 .. 300.00 sec 3.00 sec Auto Reclosing reset time 3404 T-BLOCK MC 0.50 .. 300.00 sec; 0 1.00 sec AR blocking duration after manual close 3406 EV. FLT. RECOG. with PICKUP with TRIP with TRIP Evolving fault recognition 3407 EV. FLT. MODE blocks AR starts 3p AR is ignored starts 3p AR Evolving fault (during the dead time) 3408 T-Start MONITOR 0.01 .. 300.00 sec 0.20 sec AR start-signal monitoring time 3409 CB TIME OUT 0.01 .. 300.00 sec 3.00 sec Circuit Breaker (CB) Supervision Time 3410 T RemoteClose 0.00 .. 300.00 sec; sec Send delay for remote close command 3411A T-DEAD EXT. 0.50 .. 300.00 sec; 10.00 sec Maximum dead time extension 3413 Cmd.via control (Setting options depend on configuration) None Close command via control device 3414 Internal SYNC (Setting options depend on configuration) None Internal synchronisation 3420 AR w/ DIST. YES NO YES AR with Distance Protection SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 145 Functions 2.10 Automatic reclosure function (optional) Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments 3421 AR w/ SOTF-O/C YES NO YES AR with switch-onto-fault overcurrent 3422 AR w/ W/I YES NO YES AR with weak infeed tripping 3423 AR w/ EF-O/C YES NO YES AR with earth fault overcurrent prot. 3424 AR w/ DTT YES NO YES AR with direct transfer trip 3425 AR w/ BackUpO/C YES NO YES AR with back-up overcurrent 3430 AR TRIP 3pole YES NO YES 3pole TRIP by AR 3431 DLC / RDT WITHOUT RDT DLC WITHOUT Dead Line Check / Reduced Dead Time 3432 ADT Op. mode w/ VoltageCheck w/ RemoteClose w/ VoltageCheck Operating mode for Adaptive Dead Time 3433 T-ACTION ADT 0.01 .. 300.00 sec; 0.20 sec Action time 3434 T-MAX ADT 0.50 .. 3000.00 sec 5.00 sec Maximum dead time 3435 ADT 1p allowed YES NO NO 1pole TRIP allowed 3436 ADT CB? CLOSE YES NO NO CB ready interrogation before reclosing 3437 ADT SynRequest YES NO NO Request for synchro-check after 3pole AR 3438 T U-stable 0.10 .. 30.00 sec 0.10 sec Supervision time for dead/live voltage 3440 U-live> 30 .. 90 V 48 V Voltage threshold for live line or bus 3441 U-dead< 2 .. 70 V 30 V Voltage threshold for dead line or bus 3450 1.AR: START YES NO YES Start of AR allowed in this cycle 3451 1.AR: T-ACTION 0.01 .. 300.00 sec; 0.20 sec Action Time 3453 1.AR Tdead 1Flt 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; 1.20 sec Dead time after 1phase faults 3454 1.AR Tdead 2Flt 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; 1.20 sec Dead time after 2phase faults 3455 1.AR Tdead 3Flt 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; 0.50 sec Dead time after 3phase faults 3456 1.AR Tdead1Trip 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; 1.20 sec Dead time after 1pole trip 3457 1.AR Tdead3Trip 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; 0.50 sec Dead time after 3pole trip 3458 1.AR: Tdead EV. 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec 1.20 sec Dead time after evolving fault 3459 1.AR: CB? CLOSE YES NO NO CB ready interrogation before reclosing 3460 1.AR SynRequest YES NO NO Request for synchro-check after 3pole AR 146 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.10 Automatic reclosure function (optional) Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments 3461 2.AR: START YES NO NO AR start allowed in this cycle 3462 2.AR: T-ACTION 0.01 .. 300.00 sec; 0.20 sec Action time 3464 2.AR Tdead 1Flt 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; 1.20 sec Dead time after 1phase faults 3465 2.AR Tdead 2Flt 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; 1.20 sec Dead time after 2phase faults 3466 2.AR Tdead 3Flt 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; 0.50 sec Dead time after 3phase faults 3467 2.AR Tdead1Trip 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; sec Dead time after 1pole trip 3468 2.AR Tdead3Trip 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; 0.50 sec Dead time after 3pole trip 3469 2.AR: Tdead EV. 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec 1.20 sec Dead time after evolving fault 3470 2.AR: CB? CLOSE YES NO NO CB ready interrogation before reclosing 3471 2.AR SynRequest YES NO NO Request for synchro-check after 3pole AR 3472 3.AR: START YES NO NO AR start allowed in this cycle 3473 3.AR: T-ACTION 0.01 .. 300.00 sec; 0.20 sec Action time 3475 3.AR Tdead 1Flt 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; 1.20 sec Dead time after 1phase faults 3476 3.AR Tdead 2Flt 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; 1.20 sec Dead time after 2phase faults 3477 3.AR Tdead 3Flt 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; 0.50 sec Dead time after 3phase faults 3478 3.AR Tdead1Trip 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; sec Dead time after 1pole trip 3479 3.AR Tdead3Trip 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; 0.50 sec Dead time after 3pole trip 3480 3.AR: Tdead EV. 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec 1.20 sec Dead time after evolving fault 3481 3.AR: CB? CLOSE YES NO NO CB ready interrogation before reclosing 3482 3.AR SynRequest YES NO NO Request for synchro-check after 3pole AR 3483 4.AR: START YES NO NO AR start allowed in this cycle 3484 4.AR: T-ACTION 0.01 .. 300.00 sec; 0.20 sec Action time 3486 4.AR Tdead 1Flt 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; 1.20 sec Dead time after 1phase faults 3487 4.AR Tdead 2Flt 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; 1.20 sec Dead time after 2phase faults 3488 4.AR Tdead 3Flt 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; 0.50 sec Dead time after 3phase faults 3489 4.AR Tdead1Trip 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; sec Dead time after 1pole trip 3490 4.AR Tdead3Trip 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; 0.50 sec Dead time after 3pole trip 3491 4.AR: Tdead EV. 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec 1.20 sec Dead time after evolving fault 3492 4.AR: CB? CLOSE YES NO NO CB ready interrogation before reclosing 3493 4.AR SynRequest YES NO NO Request for synchro-check after 3pole AR SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 147 Functions 2.10 Automatic reclosure function (optional) 2.10.4 Information List No. Information Type of Information Comments 2701 >AR ON SP >Auto reclose ON 2702 >AR OFF SP >Auto reclose OFF 2703 >BLOCK AR SP >BLOCK Auto reclose 2711 >AR Start SP >External start of internal Auto reclose 2712 >Trip L1 AR SP >AR: Ext. Trip L1 for internal AR 2713 >Trip L2 AR SP >AR: Ext. Trip L2 for internal AR 2714 >Trip L3 AR SP >AR: Ext. Trip L3 for internal AR 2715 >Trip 1p for AR SP >Ext. 1pole Trip for internal Auto Recl. 2716 >Trip 3p for AR SP >Ext. 3pole Trip for internal Auto Recl. 2727 >AR RemoteClose SP >AR: Remote Close signal 2731 >Sync.release SP >AR: Synchronism from ext. sync.-check 2737 >BLOCK 1pole AR SP >AR: Block 1pole AR-cycle 2738 >BLOCK 3pole AR SP >AR: Block 3pole AR-cycle 2739 >BLK 1phase AR SP >AR: Block 1phase-fault AR-cycle 2740 >BLK 2phase AR SP >AR: Block 2phase-fault AR-cycle 2741 >BLK 3phase AR SP >AR: Block 3phase-fault AR-cycle 2742 >BLK 1.AR-cycle SP >AR: Block 1st AR-cycle 2743 >BLK 2.AR-cycle SP >AR: Block 2nd AR-cycle 2744 >BLK 3.AR-cycle SP >AR: Block 3rd AR-cycle 2745 >BLK 4.-n. AR SP >AR: Block 4th and higher AR-cycles 2746 >Trip for AR SP >AR: External Trip for AR start 2747 >Pickup L1 AR SP >AR: External pickup L1 for AR start 2748 >Pickup L2 AR SP >AR: External pickup L2 for AR start 2749 >Pickup L3 AR SP >AR: External pickup L3 for AR start 2750 >Pickup 1ph AR SP >AR: External pickup 1phase for AR start 2751 >Pickup 2ph AR SP >AR: External pickup 2phase for AR start 2752 >Pickup 3ph AR SP >AR: External pickup 3phase for AR start 2780 AR Mask. Error OUT AR: Masking error voltage transformer 2781 Auto recl. OFF OUT Auto recloser is switched OFF 2782 Auto recl. ON IntSP Auto recloser is switched ON 2783 AR is blocked OUT AR: Auto-reclose is blocked 2784 AR is NOT ready OUT Auto recloser is NOT ready 2787 CB not ready OUT AR: Circuit breaker not ready 2788 AR T-CBreadyExp OUT AR: CB ready monitoring window expired 2796 AR on/off BI IntSP AR: Auto-reclose ON/OFF via BI 2801 AR in progress OUT Auto-reclose in progress 2809 AR T-Start Exp OUT AR: Start-signal monitoring time expired 2810 AR TdeadMax Exp OUT AR: Maximum dead time expired 2818 AR evolving Flt OUT AR: Evolving fault recognition 2820 AR Program1pole OUT AR is set to operate after 1p trip only 2821 AR Td. evol.Flt OUT AR dead time after evolving fault 2839 AR Tdead 1pTrip OUT AR dead time after 1pole trip running 2840 AR Tdead 3pTrip OUT AR dead time after 3pole trip running 2841 AR Tdead 1pFlt OUT AR dead time after 1phase fault running 148 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.10 Automatic reclosure function (optional) No. 2842 Information AR Tdead 2pFlt Type of Information OUT Comments AR dead time after 2phase fault running 2843 AR Tdead 3pFlt OUT AR dead time after 3phase fault running 2844 AR 1stCyc. run. OUT AR 1st cycle running 2845 AR 2ndCyc. run. OUT AR 2nd cycle running 2846 AR 3rdCyc. run. OUT AR 3rd cycle running 2847 AR 4thCyc. run. OUT AR 4th or higher cycle running 2848 AR ADT run. OUT AR cycle is running in ADT mode 2851 AR Close OUT Auto-reclose Close command 2852 AR Close1.Cyc1p OUT AR: Close command after 1pole 1st cycle 2853 AR Close1.Cyc3p OUT AR: Close command after 3pole 1st cycle 2854 AR Close 2.Cyc OUT AR: Close command after 2nd cycle 2861 AR T-Recl. run. OUT AR: Reclaim time is running 2862 AR Successful OUT Auto reclose cycle successful 2863 AR Lockout OUT Auto reclose Lockout 2864 AR 1p Trip Perm OUT AR: 1pole trip permitted by internal AR 2865 AR Sync.Request OUT AR: Synchro-check request 2871 AR TRIP 3pole OUT AR: TRIP command 3pole 2889 AR 1.CycZoneRel OUT AR 1st cycle zone extension release 2890 AR 2.CycZoneRel OUT AR 2nd cycle zone extension release 2891 AR 3.CycZoneRel OUT AR 3rd cycle zone extension release 2892 AR 4.CycZoneRel OUT AR 4th cycle zone extension release 2893 AR Zone Release OUT AR zone extension (general) 2894 AR Remote Close OUT AR Remote close signal send SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 149 Functions 2.11 Function control 2.11 Function control The function logic with its associated process monitor coordinates the sequence of the protective functions, processes functional decisions, and processes data received from the system. In particular, this includes: Applications * Line energization recognition, * Processing of the circuit breaker position(s), * Openpole detector, * Voltage supervision, * Fault detection logic, * Tripping logic. 2.11.1 Line Energization Recognition The line energization recognition function is relevant in the 6MD66x if the automatic reclosing function is activated. When a protected object is manually switched onto a fault, it is desirable to avoid a reclosure, i.e. to block the AR. The manual closing command must be indicated to the device via a binary input. In order to be independent of the duration that the switch is closed, the command is set to a defined length in the device (adjustable with the address 1150 SI Time Man.Cl). The figure below shows the logic diagram. Figure 2-68 Logic diagram of the manual closing procedure If the device has an integrated automatic reclosure, the integrated manual closure logic of the 6MD66x automatically distinguishes between an external control command via the binary input and an automatic reclosure by the internal automatic reclosure so that the binary input >Manual Close" can be connected directly to the control circuit of the close coil of the circuit breaker (Figure 2-69). Each closing operation that is not initiated by the internal automatic reclosure function is interpreted as a manual closure, even it has been initiated by a control command from the device. 150 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.11 Function control Figure 2-69 2.11.2 Manual closure with internal automatic reclosure CB Circuit breaker TC Circuit breaker close coil CBaux Circuit breaker auxiliary contact Detection of the circuit breaker position For Protection Purposes Various functions of the 6MD66x need information on the circuit breaker position in order to function optimally. These are: * the plausibility check before automatic reclosing, * Circuit breaker failure protection, * Verification of the dropout condition for the trip command. A circuit breaker position logic is incorporated in the device (Figure 2-70). Depending on the type of auxiliary contact(s) provided by the circuit breaker and the method in which these are connected to the device, there are several alternatives of implementing this logic. In most cases it is sufficient to report the status of the circuit breaker with its auxiliary contacts to the device via binary input. This always applies if the circuit breaker is only switched 3-pole. Then the NO auxiliary contact of the circuit breaker is connected to a binary input which must be configured to the input function >CB 3p Closed" (No. 379). The other inputs are then not used and the logic is restricted in principle to simply forwarding the input information. If the circuit breaker poles can be switched individually, and only a parallel connection of the NO individual pole auxiliary contacts is available, the relevant binary input (BI) is allocated to the function >CB 3p Open" (no. 380). The remaining inputs are not used in this case. If the circuit breaker poles can be switched individually and if the individual auxiliary contacts are available, an individual binary input should be used for each auxiliary contact if this is possible and if the device can and is to trip 1-pole. With this configuration, the device can process the maximum amount of information. Three binary inputs are used for this purpose: * >CB Aux. L1" (No. 351) for the auxiliary contact of pole L1, * >CB Aux. L2" (No. 352) for the auxiliary contact of pole L2, * >CB Aux. L3" (No. 353) for the auxiliary contact of pole L3. The inputs No. 379 >CB 3p Closed" and No. 380 >CB 3p Open" are not used in this case, even if they are configured to binary inputs and receive signals. SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 151 Functions 2.11 Function control If the circuit breaker can be switched individually, two binary inputs are sufficient if both the parallel as well as series connection of the auxiliary contacts of the three poles are available. In this case, the parallel connection of the auxiliary contacts is routed to the input function >CB 3p Closed" (No. 379) and the series connection is routed to the input function >CB 3p Open" (No. 380). Please note that Figure 2-70 shows the complete logic for all connection alternatives. For each particular application, only a portion of the inputs is used as described above. The eight output signals of the circuit breaker position logic can be processed by the individual protection and supplementary functions. The output signals are blocked if the signals transmitted from the circuit breaker are not plausible: for example, the circuit breaker cannot be open and closed at the same time. Furthermore, no current can flow over an open breaker contact. Figure 2-70 152 Circuit breaker position logic SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.11 Function control Automatic Reclosure Separate binary inputs comprising information on the position of the circuit breaker are available for the automatic reclosure. This is important for * The plausibility check before automatic reclosure (refer to Section 2.10), When using 11/2 or 2 circuit breakers in each feeder, the automatic reclosure function is referred to one circuit breaker. The feedback information of this circuit breaker can be connected separately to the device. For this, separate binary inputs are available, which should be treated the same and configured additionally if necessary. These have a similar significance as the inputs described above for protection applications and are marked with CB1 ..." to distinguish them, i.e.: * >CB1 3p Closed" (No. 410) for the series connection of the NO auxiliary contacts of the CB, * >CB1 3p Open" (No. 411) for the series connection of the NC auxiliary contacts of the CB, * >CB1 Pole L1" (No. 366) for the auxiliary contact of pole L1, * >CB1 Pole L2" (No. 367) for the auxiliary contact of pole L2, * >CB1 Pole L3" (No. 368) for the auxiliary contact of pole L3. 2.11.3 Open-pole Detector The open-pole detector determines on the basis of the measured current and voltage whether the line section to be protected is isolated. Parameter 1130 PoleOpenCurrent serves to specify the residual current that will be used as the criterion whether the line is de-energized. The "open_pole_i" signal of a phase is set as soon as the phase current drops below the configured threshold "PoleOpenCurrent". The signal is stabilised by means of a hysteresis; stabilisation over time is not provided. The negative effects of current transformer saturation and limitation, which are to be expected in the 6MD66x when the currents exceed approx. 1.2In, are not taken into account because the maximum current limit PoleOpenCurrent is 1.0In. Figure 2-71 Creation process of the "open_pole_i" signals In the stabilisation of the open-pole detector, the following hysteresis is used for the parameters PoleOpenCurrent: * Pickup thresholdParameterised threshold * Dropout threshold1.1*parameterised threshold SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 153 Functions 2.11 Function control 2.11.4 Voltage Supervision If the automatic reclosure function of the 6MD66x is configured with the operation mode "Dead line check", it also makes sense to set the appropriate parameters for activation the voltage supervision function. If the voltage supervision detects a failure of the phase-to-earth voltages, the automatic reclosure is blocked. Voltage supervision is based on a plausibility check between the phase currents and the phase-to-earth voltages. Where the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts are available, i.e. configured to binary inputs, they should also be used for supervision. A failure of the measured voltage is detected if the following conditions are met at the same time: * All three phase-to-earth voltages are less than U<max (3ph), * At least 1 phase current is larger than PoleOpenCurrent or at least 1 breaker pole is closed (can be set), * No protection function has picked up, * This condition persists for a settable time T V-Supervision (default setting: 3 s). The time T V-Supervision is required to prevent that a voltage failure is detected before the protection picks up. Figure 2-72 154 Logic diagram of the fuse failure monitor SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.11 Function control 2.11.5 Pickup Logic for the Entire Device Phase Segregated Pickup The pickup logic combines the fault detection (pickup) signals of all protection functions. In the case of those protection functions that allow for phase segregated pickup, the pickup is output in a phase segregated manner. Thus, the alarms Relay PICKUP L1", Relay PICKUP L2" and Relay PICKUP L3" are available. General Pickup The pickup signals are combined with OR and lead to a general pickup of the device. It is signalled with Relay PICKUP". If no function of the device is picked up any longer, Relay PICKUP" disappears (indication OFF"). General device pickup is a precondition for a series of internal and external functions that occur subsequently. The following are among the internal functions controlled by general device pickup: * Opening of a trip log: from general device pickup to general device dropout, all fault indications are entered in the trip log. * Initialization of fault record: the storage and maintenance of fault values can also be made dependent on the occurrence of a trip command. * Generation of spontaneous indications: Certain fault indications can be displayed as spontaneous indications (see margin heading Spontaneous Indications"). In addition, this indication can be made dependent on the general device trip. * Start action time of automatic reclosure (if available and used). Spontaneous Indications Spontaneous indications are alarms that are displayed automatically after a general pickup of the device or after the trip command of the device. In the case of 6MD66x they are the following: Relay PICKUP": Protection function that picked up; S/E/F TRIP": Protection function which tripped (only device with graphical display); PU Time": Operating time from the general pickup to the dropout of the device, in ms; TRIP Time": the operating time from general pickup to the first trip command of the device, in ms; SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 155 Functions 2.11 Function control 2.11.6 Tripping Logic of the Entire Device 3-pole Tripping The following protection functions implemented in the 6MD66x carry out a 3-pole trip command: * Tripping of the breaker failure protection for the local circuit breaker, if the conditions for 1-pole tripping are not fulfilled, * Tripping of the breaker failure protection for the adjacent circuit breakers, * 3-pole transfer trip of the automatic reclosure function. If a 1-pole tripping is generally not possible or not desired, the output function Relay TRIP 3ph. is used for the output of commands to the circuit breaker. In these cases the following sections regarding 1-pole tripping are not of interest. 1-pole Tripping In the 6MD66x, 1-pole tripping is only provided for tripping of the local circuit breaker, if the conditions for a trip are fulfilled (1-pole starting via binary input, and parameter 3903 1p-RETRIP (T1) of the breaker failure protection set to "yes"). The general phase-segregated trip command alarms are Relay TRIP L1", Relay TRIP L2" and Relay TRIP L3". These alarms can be allocated to LEDs or output relays. In the event of 3-pole tripping all three alarms pick up. . General Trip All trip signals for the functions are connected by OR and generate the message Relay TRIP". This can be allocated to LED or output relay. Terminating the Tripping Command Once a trip command is initiated, it is phase segregatedly latched (in the event of 3-pole tripping for each of the three poles) (refer to Figure 2-73). At the same time, the minimum trip command duration TMin TRIP CMD is started. This ensures that the trip command is output for a sufficiently long time to the circuit breaker even if the tripping protection function resets very rapidly. The trip commands can only be terminated when the last protection function dropped out (i.e. functions no longer pick up) AND the minimum trip signal duration has expired. A 1-pole trip command leads to the 1-pole trip command alarms Relay TRIP 1pL1" to Relay TRIP 1pL3". A further condition for the reset of the trip command is that the circuit breaker has opened, in the event of singlepole tripping the relevant circuit breaker pole. In the function control of the device, this is checked by means of the circuit breaker position feedback (Section Detection of the Circuit Breaker Position") and the flow of current. In address 1130 PoleOpenCurrent, the residual current threshold which may definitely not be exceeded when the circuit breaker pole is open, is set. Address 1135 Reset Trip CMD determines under which conditions a trip command is reset. If CurrentOpenPole is set, the trip command is reset as soon as the current disappears. It is important that the value set in address 1130 PoleOpenCurrent (see above) is undershot. If Current AND CB is set, the circuit breaker auxiliary contact must send a message that the circuit breaker is open. It is a prerequisite for this setting that the position of the auxiliary contact is allocated via a binary input. If this additional condition is not required for resetting the trip command (e.g. if test sockets are used for protection testing), it can be switched off with the setting . 156 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.11 Function control Figure 2-73 Storage and termination of the trip command Trip-dependent Indications The recording of indications masked to local LEDs, and the maintenance of spontaneous indications, can be made dependent on whether the device has issued a trip command. The information will then not be output if a protection function (i.e. the breaker failure protection) has picked up in the event of a fault, but the 6MD66x has not tripped because the pickup was reset first. Figure 2-74 Logic diagram of the no-trip-no-flag feature (command-dependent alarms) Switching Statistics The number of trips of the local circuit breaker initiated by the device 6MD66x are counted. Their number is counted separately for each breaker pole. If the device is equipped with the integrated automatic reclosure, the automatic close commands are also counted, separately for reclosure after 1-pole tripping, after 3-pole tripping as well as separately for the first reclosure cycle and other reclosure cycles. The counter and memory levels are secured against loss of auxiliary voltage. They can be set to zero or to any other initial value. For more details, refer to the SIPROTEC 4 System Description. SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 157 Functions 2.11 Function control 2.11.7 Setting Notes Trip command duration The setting of the minimum trip signal duration TMin TRIP CMD (address 240 was already discussed in Subsection 2.1.2. This setting applies to all protection functions that initiate tripping. 158 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.12 Inter-relay communication through port C 2.12 Inter-relay communication through port C Inter-relay communication through port C, abbreviated IRC, allows the exchange of information between SIPROTEC 4 devices without a SICAM control centre. For this purpose, devices are connected to each other via an RS485 connection or an external converter and fibre optic cable. Process information such as indications and measured values (RMS values) are transferred via this bus. Configuration of the Inter-relay communication through port C is performed with the DIGSI operating program. To be able to manage 32 Users/Fault indications, you need DIGSI as from version 4.5. Communication works cyclically on the basis of an image protocol. The cycle time is constant in fault-free operation and dependent on the baud rate, the amount of process information and the number of connected devices. Please refer also to "Relationship between the number of users and transmission time". All SIPROTEC 4 devices communicating with each other are called users of an IRC combination. An IRC combination can handle a maximum of thirty two users. Applications * An Inter-relay communication through port C setup always makes sense if the same process information needs to made available to several SIPROTEC 4 devices. Instead of sending the same process information to several SIPROTEC 4 devices per single line wiring, it is only sent to a single SIPROTEC 4 device. The other SIPROTEC 4 devices receive the required process information via the serial IRC bus. * An application for the Inter-relay communication through port C could be the interlocking conditions within a bay with a 11/2 circuit breaker method operated with three bay controllers. * A quick view of the IRC combination provides the Web Monitor (see Chapter 2.15). Combination data, device data, master data, combination structure and messages of each user are displayed there. * The OLM (Optical Link Module) interface modules required for an optical connection of the IRC user can be found in the accessory list in the Appendix. Prerequisites Certain requirements must be fulfilled to build an IRC combination. The participating SIPROTEC 4 devices must be suited toward Inter-relay communication through port C (available only for 6MD66). A corresponding communications module must be installed in the SIPROTEC 4 devices. The DIGSI operating program must be installed on the PC. The project must contain at least two SIPROTEC 4 devices which fulfill the requirements for Inter-relay communication through port C and an IRC combination (can be created via configuration). SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 159 Functions 2.12 Inter-relay communication through port C 2.12.1 Function Principle The IRC is based on the Master-Slave principle. One SIPROTEC 4 device of the IRC combination operates as the master. All other nodes are slaves. The master sends queries to all the slaves one after the other. On receiving this query, each slave transmits its particular process information meant for the IRC combination. The master collects all the process information it receives and collates it, together with its own information, into a single message. It then sends this message to all the slaves. From this message, each slave then extracts the process information which is relevant to the particular slave. Note Due to the cyclical method of operation of the IRC, only those indications are transferred whose value changes are pending longer than the actual cycle time, which can be 50 ms or more. Electrical RS485 connection Figure 2-75 Connection of bay controllers to inter-relay communication (electrical) The connection between the devices occurs electrically via an RS485 interface. The electrical connections are terminated with resistors at the ends (first and last device), which are set via jumpers in the 6MD66x device. The jumper settings can be found in Chapter Installation and Commissioning. 160 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.12 Inter-relay communication through port C Optical connection OLM Figure 2-76 Connection of bay controllers to inter-relay communication (optical) A 7XV5651 is used as interface converter (optical/electrical). The 6MD66x is connected to the 7XV5651 by means of an electrical RS485 interface. The electrical connections must be terminated with resistors. These terminating resistors are adjusted with jumpers in the 6MD66x and with DIL switches (S1, switch 1 and 2) in the 7XV5651. The jumper settings are described in the chapter Installation and Commissioning. The connection of the interface converters is optical (in series) and its operation is asynchronous. A theoretical baud rate of 9600 Baud to 115200 Baud is set with a DIL switch (S2, switch 5 off, 6 on, 7 on, 8 off). A matching setting can be selected in DIGSI using the interface settings. SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 161 Functions 2.12 Inter-relay communication through port C Application Example Figure 2-77 2.12.2 11/2- Circuit breaker method, disconnector and earth electrode not shown Configuring Inter-relay Communication The procedure for configuring the devices connected with each other in the Inter-relay communication through port C is explained in the following sections. Insert SIPROTEC 4 device Objects of type SIPROTEC device are inserted into the project structure from the device catalog via drag and drop. Right-click an object of type Folder. In the context menu, click Insert new object SIPROTEC device. The window Device catalog opens. Alternatively click Device catalog in the context menu. When selecting a device type, note that this must be suitable for a Inter-relay communication through port C. After placing the object within the project, the dialog box Properties - SIPROTEC device opens, as usual. 162 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.12 Inter-relay communication through port C Figure 2-78 Properties SIPROTEC device dialog box Importing a SIPROTEC 4 device In addition to inserting a new device, a device which is already available in another project can be imported into the project structure. It is to be noted here that a device can then only participate in an IRC combination if it is imported as a SIPROTEC device. A SIPROTEC variant cannot participate in an IRC combination, as the VD address is not unique. Right-click an object of type Folder. In the context menu, click Import device.... The Import device dialog box opens. Select the alternative As SIPROTEC device and confirm with OK. Specifying the Device Model Select an order number (MLFB number) to specify the device model in DIGSI. It is important to select the entry Inter-Relay Communication from the drop-down list box Function interface. Click OK when you have defined the entire device model. Proceed in a similar manner with the rest of the objects of type SIPROTEC device which are to be users of the IRC combination. An object of type IRC combination is inserted with the DIGSI Manager. The nodes of an IRC combination and the required transmission parameters are specified here. SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 163 Functions 2.12 Inter-relay communication through port C Inserting an IRC Combination An object of the type IDC combination defines the stations of an IDC combination and the required communication parameters. Furthermore, this object contains information from the settings group concerning the updating of an IDC combination. You can only insert an object of type IRC combination within an object of type Folder. Right-click an object of type Folder. In the context menu, click Insert new object IRC combination. Within a project you can insert any number of objects of type IRC combination. The placement of the object within the project does not have any effect on its functionality. Each SIPROTEC 4 device suitable for an IRC combination is available within a project as a node to each object of type IRC combination. You must only remember that each SIPROTEC 4 device can only function as a node of a single IRC combination at any one time. However, you should select the placement taking clarity of layout into account. Several IRC combinations can also be managed within a single project. Each IRC combination is represented here by its own object of type IRC combination. IRC Failure Indication For devices selected via the MLFB numbers, additional failure indications Bay Bus Disturbance (n = 1 - 32 for possible number of devices) are generated in the Device group of the device matrix. These failure indications can be allocated individually. These failure indications are set to ON by the IRC failure monitor at the beginning of the failure and to OFF during establishment of a connection after the transmission of the current state of process information. On failure of one of the devices, an alarm to that effect is issued (e.g. Bay Bus D04 to ON) which can be seen in all other devices. With the configuration you now ensure that only those interlock conditions are blocked which require information from the affected device. All other interlocks receiving information via the IRC are available as before. The master repeats the slave query in case of faulty messages. The number of repetitions is configurable. A large number of repetitions (with message errors or a poor connection) extends the cycle time of the bus. Only one repetition should be set for fibre-optic connections. After a connection failure, the master attempts to establish a new connection after a configurable number of bus cycles (pauses). As each (failed) connection establishment extends the bus cycle time, the number of pauses should be as large as possible. Otherwise, a large number of pauses extends the time until a failed device operates on the bus again. A good initial value here is 10 bus cycles. 164 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.12 Inter-relay communication through port C Figure 2-79 IRC fault indications SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 165 Functions 2.12 Inter-relay communication through port C 2.12.3 Correlation between Number of Nodes and Transmission Time The correlation between the number of IRC nodes, the number of information items configured to IRC, the connection baud rate and the cycle time achieved for information transmission has been established by tests. The test result is shown in the figure below Figure 2-80 Correlation with number of IRC nodes The figure above shows that a high baud rate must be set for large systems with many users and many IRC allocated information items to receive acceptable cycle times. For more than 16 users, the maximum possible baud rate of 3.125 MBd should be selected (possible only when using the HDLC transmission mode). The HDLC mode is normally recommended; the UART mode offers only the advantage of reducing the workload of CPU users by setting automatic address detection. However, this is usually not necessary. The number of information items is to be understood per device, i.e. 16 or 32 information items per device This means that the maximum amount of information that can be transmitted simultaneously is 32 x 32 = 1024 items. The direct correlation between cycle time and baud rate is illustrated in the figure below. 166 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.12 Inter-relay communication through port C Figure 2-81 Correlation with IRC communication baud rate Here again it can be seen that in large systems with a large amount of indications to be transmitted the maximum baud rate of 3.125 MBaud must be set to achieve acceptable cycle times for the interlocking application. 2.12.4 Selecting a Combination Node An IRC combination can include up to thirty two users as from DIGSI V4.5. Older DIGSI versions allows a maximum of sixteen users. These users are stored as a property of the object type IRC combination. To select the user of an IRC combination, open the Properties dialog box of the respective object. Right-click the object of type IRC combination. Click Object properties in the context menu. The dialog box Properties - IRC combination opens. Select the Node tab. SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 167 Functions 2.12 Inter-relay communication through port C Figure 2-82 Properties dialog box -- IRC combination, Node tab Available Devices The names of all SIPROTEC 4 devices which can operate as nodes for the processed IRC combination are shown in the box Available devices. These are the devices from the current project which fulfil the requirements for Inter-relay communication through port C, and which are not already nodes of another IRC combination. In addition to the name of a SIPROTEC 4 device, its position within the project is also displayed. Selecting a Node To add a SIPROTEC 4 device to the IRC combination, select its name in the box Available devices. Then click Add. To remove a SIPROTEC 4 device from the IRC combination, select its name in the Combination nodes box. Then click Remove. Several devices can be added to, or removed from, the IRC combination simultaneously through multiple selection. Alternatively, add or remove a SIPROTEC 4 device with a double-click on its name in the appropriate box. An IRC combination can comprise a maximum of thirty-two nodes. When this number has been reached, a fault indication is displayed as soon as you want to add another SIPROTEC 4 device. 168 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.12 Inter-relay communication through port C Specifying a Master Each IRC combination requires a SIPROTEC 4 device as a master. The first SIPROTEC 4 device you select is automatically defined as the master. The master device is labelled in the box Combination nodes with a blue circle to the left of the name of the device. If another SIPROTEC 4 device is to be used as a master, select its name in the box Combination nodes. Then click Master. If the device labelled as the master is removed from the combination, the first SIPROTEC 4 device in the list of nodes is automatically defined as the new master. Basically, any device in the IRC combination can function as a master. The master function requires additional processor performance. You should therefore select a device which is subjected to the least usage by the actual program run. Accepting Settings To apply your settings, click OK. The Properties - IRC combination dialog box is closed. 2.12.5 Allocating Information of the Individual Devices Involved The purpose of the IRC combination is to distribute process information between SIPROTEC 4 devices. You must therefore make the following decisions for each SIPROTEC 4 device participating in an IRC combination: * Which process information from the SIPROTEC 4 device should be made available to the other devices in the IRC combination? * Which process information from the SIPROTEC 4 device should be assignable to process information received from the IRC combination? You make this selection for each SIPROTEC 4 device individually in the DIGSI allocation matrix. Open the SIPROTEC device with the DIGSI device processing function. Double-click the object Allocate to display the device matrix. IRC Columns One column with the name O is provided in the device matrix for the IRC combination as source and IRC combination as destination. These columns are fundamentally only visible when the functionality of the IRC has been defined in the device model. These columns are shielded as soon as you select the information filter Only commands. This is explained by the fact that commands cannot be swapped within an IRC combination. SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 169 Functions 2.12 Inter-relay communication through port C Allocatable Information Types The following information types can be allocated within an IRC combination: * Single point indication (only SI, not SI_F) * Double point indication (only OI, not OI_F) * Internal single indication (only IE, not IE_F), must be selected as destination (not EM!) * Internal double point indication * Bit pattern indication * Transformer tap indication * Limit value * User-defined limit value * Measured value * User-defined measured value * External metered value (only ExMV, not MVMV and PMV) Routing Information to the IRC Source Information that is routed to IRC as source can be assigned to information of other nodes of the IRC combination during the course of the run process. Information received from an IRC combination is represented within the SIPROTEC 4 device by information specific to this device. The assignment between received information and device-specific information takes place with the combination matrix. Routing Information to the IRC Destination Information that is routed to IRC as destination can be forwarded to other nodes of the IRC combination. This forwarding procedure is also defined using the combination matrix. Routing Rules Several rules must be observed when routing information. A consistency check monitors whether these rules are complied with. * Information initiated by a device or a function (e.g. device ready) cannot be routed as a source. * Information can only be routed to the IRC as source if it has not already been routed to another source. Similarly, any item of information routed to the IRC as source may not be routed to any other sources. * An item of information cannot be simultaneously routed to the IRC as source and to the IRC as target. * Overall, 32 items of information can be routed to the IRC as target. * Source and destination must be the same data type (e.g. correct: type SI to SI or ExtSi; incorrect: type SI to OI). * Indications coming from the source IRC should be configured as external indications (ExtSi, ExtDI). 170 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.12 Inter-relay communication through port C 2.12.6 Routing Information between the Devices Involved You have specified information for each individual SIPROTEC 4 device within an IRC combination with the device matrix. You must decide, * what information is to be transmitted from which source device to which destination device, and * what information is to be created in the destination device by the information it has received. Note The combination matrix is structured similarly to the device matrix. The mechanisms, e.g. to hide and show lines and columns, are identical to those of the device matrix. An extensive description of combination matrix operation can be found in the SIPROTEC System Description /1/. Combination Matrix Several requirements must be fulfilled in order to open the combination matrix: * The combination matrix may not already have been opened for another IRC combination. * The IRC combination for which the combination matrix is to be opened must comprise at least two SIPROTEC 4 devices. * No SIPROTEC 4 device which functions as a node in the combination may be opened for editing. Right-click an object of type IRC combination. Click Open object in the context menu. Alternatively, you can double-click the object. The combination matrix opens. Figure 2-83 IRC combination matrix Structure of the Combination Matrix After opening the combination matrix you will see that it is divided up both horizontally and vertically. Several columns or rows can be visually combined into blocks by clicking the button at the top or left margin of the combination matrix. SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 171 Functions 2.12 Inter-relay communication through port C Horizontally, the matrix is divided into two main areas: Source and Destination. Information is compiled vertically in groups. * Source Information serves as the source. It is described by the display text, the long text and the type. In the combination matrix, all information is displayed which you have routed to the destination IRC combination for each SIPROTEC 4 device individually in the device matrix. * Destination The destination designates the SIPROTEC 4 device to which information is forwarded. A destination column is shown in the combination matrix for each node device in an IRC combination. * Group A group represents the scope of information that a node of an IRC combination makes available to the other nodes. A group is therefore shown in the combination matrix for each SIPROTEC 4 device contained in an IRC combination. Each group bears the same name as the related SIPROTEC 4 device. Routing Information Items Information which has been routed in the device matrix to the IRC as destination is made available in the combination matrix as source information. Conversely, all information which has been routed in the device matrix to IRC as source is made available in the combination matrix as destination information. Note that the destination information is not visible until a routing action takes place. To route a source information to a specific SIPROTEC 4 device in the combination matrix, click the common cell of Information and Destination device. The cell is transformed into a drop-down list box. It offers the display texts of the destination information routed as the source in the destination device and which is of the same data type. Select one of these information packets. Repeat this procedure for all the remaining assignments. Routing Rules Some rules must also be observed when routing information within the combination matrix. Their compliance is also monitored, however, as with the device matrix via automatic consistency checking. * Only one source information packet may be assigned to a destination information packet. However, a source information packet can be routed to several destination information packets. * The sort and type of source and destination information packets must be identical. You cannot, for example, route a single message to an output indication. However, there are two exceptions: incoming-outgoing indications and in-out indications can be routed between each other. This also applies to double point indications and double point indications with fault positions. Saving and Terminating Routings All your routings must be explicitly saved. Click File Save as on the menu bar for this. To close the combination matrix click File Exit in the menu bar. 172 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.12 Inter-relay communication through port C 2.12.7 Setting Communication Parameters for Individual Devices A special communication module must be installed in each SIPROTEC 4 device provided for Inter-relay communication through port C. This module is already installed and correctly allocated if you ordered a SIPROTEC 4 device with Inter-relay communication through port C. For this reason, this section is only relevant for upgrading. The slot to which this communication module is connected in the SIPROTEC 4 device is the only setting which needs to be made in the device-specific communication parameters. Right-click the object of type SIPROTEC device for which you want to edit the parameter for the Inter-relay communication through port C. Click Object properties in the context menu. The dialog box Properties SIPROTEC device opens. Select the Inter-relay communication tab. Note This tab is only available if the following requirements are fulfilled simultaneously: The current SIPROTEC 4 device is fundamentally suitable for Inter-relay communication through port C. Inter-relay Communication has been selected as the function interface in the Communications modules tab. The SIPROTEC 4 device is already a node in an IRC combination. Setting a Slot Note A modification to the slot setting, in comparison to the delivery setting, should only be made if there is just cause and only with the required system knowledge! The set slot and the actual slot are not automatically checked for consistency. Please carefully check your settings yourself. SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 173 Functions 2.12 Inter-relay communication through port C In the Slot drop-down list box select the name of the slot in which the communications module is installed in the SIPROTEC 4 device. Figure 2-84 Properties - SIPROTEC device dialog box, Inter-relay Communication tab To apply your settings, click OK. The Properties - SIPROTEC device dialog box is closed. The parameter is not activated until the parameter set is updated. 174 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.12 Inter-relay communication through port C 2.12.8 Setting communication parameters for a combination While the slot to which this communications module is connected is the only setting which needs to be made in the device-specific communication parameters, several settings need to be taken into consideration for the combination as a whole. The settings which need to be made are summarized in two groups: * Interface settings These serial interface settings must be identical for all the SIPROTEC 4 devices in the IRC combination. Otherwise the devices are not able to communicate with one another. They are therefore defined centrally for the combination. * Bus parameters Settings relating to the bus arbitration only affect the parameter set of the SIPROTEC 4 device which serves as the master in the IRC combination. However, as each participating SIPROTEC 4 device can fundamentally be defined as the master, these settings are also made during configuration of the IRC combination. Right-click the object of type IRC combination. Click Object properties in the context menu. The dialog box Properties - IRC combination opens. Select the Transmission parameters tab. Figure 2-85 Properties dialog box -- IRC combination, Transmission parameters tab Note We recommend using the preset transmission parameters, namely HDLC. The transmission speed - baud rate - that should be achieved must be determined and set in accordance with system conditions. SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 175 Functions 2.12 Inter-relay communication through port C Specifying Interface Settings The following interface settings can be set: * Transmission Schemes Select the name of a transmission mode from this drop-down list box. You can choose between UART and HDLC. HDLC ensures an approx. 15% greater transmission density than UART using the same baud rate. * Baud rate Select a baud rate from this drop-down list box. Which baud rates are available for selection depend on the transmission mode you have selected. The higher the transmission rate, the shorter the cycle time or the more nodes can be connected to the bus with the same cycle time. The processor load of the master increases when the cycle time is small and when many slaves are connected to the bus. In exceptional cases, the parameter Minimal cycle time must be increased for this reason. * Automatic address detection If this check box is activated, the SIPROTEC 4 device only considers a message it receives if it is addressed to it. This action relieves the load on the CPU of the SIPROTEC 4 device. This option can only be selected if UART is set as the transmission mode. Setting the Bus Arbitration The following parameters can be set for bus arbitration: * Maximum number of message repeats If a message is corrupted during transmission, it can be sent again. In this spin box you can enter how many attempts should be made to transmit a message. A maximum of three new transmission attempts are allowed. * Number of pauses before a new query is sent to a failed device If a SIPROTEC 4 device in the combination has failed, the master can exempt it from queries for a certain number of cycles. To do this, select a value between 0 and 254 in the drop-down list box. * Minimum cycle time The cycle time defines the total duration of a cycle, during which all slave devices are queried by the master device. Select a value between 10 and 10,000 ms. from the spin box. As the length of the cycle time depends on the capacity of the master, the cycle time actually achieved may be higher than the value set in the parameters. To ensure that the master uses the shortest possible cycle time, select the check box Minimum cycle time, continuous. 176 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.12 Inter-relay communication through port C 2.12.9 Checking and Updating Parameter Sets The parameter sets of individual or all combination nodes must be updated either when configuring an IRC combination for the first time, or if the settings of single combination parameters have been altered, according to the modifications which have been made. Right-click the object of type IRC combination. Click Object properties in the context menu. The dialog box Properties - IRC combination opens. Select the Updating tab. The Updating tab gives an overview of the update status of the parameter sets of the individual combination nodes. Figure 2-86 Properties dialog box -- IRC combination, Updating tab Checking the Update Status Every device in DIGSI which has a current parameter set is designated in column P with a check mark. If this parameter set has already been transmitted to the real SIPROTEC 4 device, you can manually make a note of this by entering a check mark in column G. To do this, click in the corresponding check box. This selection can only be set if the parameter set in DIGSI 4 is up to date. It is automatically deleted if changes have been made which affect the parameter set of the SIPROTEC 4 device concerned. DIGSI itself detects which parameter sets are no longer up to date. As soon as the update command has been issued, these parameter sets are updated one after the other. However, it is important for you to know after which modification which SIPROTEC 4 device needs to be reinitialized. Here is a brief overview: * Changing the slot for the communications module: parameter set of the node concerned. * Modification of a serial interface setting on the tab Transmission parameters: parameter sets of all nodes. * Modification of a bus parameter in the tab Transmission parameters: parameter set of the master. * Routing changes in the combination matrix: parameter sets of both nodes concerned. SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 177 Functions 2.12 Inter-relay communication through port C * Routing changes in the device matrix of a SIPROTEC 4 device to IRC as the destination: parameter set of the node concerned. * Deleting or adding a node: parameter sets of all nodes. Updating Parameter Sets To update all outdated parameter sets, click Update all parameter sets. Messages detailing the progress of updating are shown in the Report window. The parameter sets are updated in DIGSI. Figure 2-87 Report, IRC update tab If you have made changes in the combination matrix, you can update these changes immediately in the affected parameter sets. Click File Save and Generate Parameter Sets on the menu bar for this. 2.12.10 Printing Combination Information You can print the following information relating to an IRC combination: * Transmission parameter settings of the IRC combination. * The names of the SIPROTEC 4 devices in the IRC combination, including the classification letters of the selected slots. * Update information for each individual node in the IRC combination. Right-click an object of type IRC combination. Click Delete Object contents in the context menu. The Print Combination Information dialog box opens. Figure 2-88 178 Print combination information dialog box SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.12 Inter-relay communication through port C Specifying the Scope of Printing You specify the scope of the information to be printed by selecting individual checkboxes. Subsequently click OK. The Print Manager window opens. This window allows you to call up a page preview for the information you want to print. You can influence the presentation in the Print Manager window. Figure 2-89 IRC combination, print manager Scrolling Click Next to show the next print page. This button is inactive if the last available print page is already being displayed. Then click Previous to show the previous print page. This button is inactive if the first print page is already being displayed. Changing the Display Mode Click One page / two pages to alternate between a single page view and a two page view. Changing the Scale of the Display Click Zoom to zoom the display of the print page in defined stages. This button is inactive as soon as the largest possible display size has been reached. Alternatively, click with the left mouse button for as long as the mouse cursor is in the display area. When you do this the display of the print page is also zoomed in defined stages. Click Zoom out to zoom out the display of the print page in defined stages. This button is inactive as soon as the smallest possible display size has been reached. Note An enlarged or shrunken view has no influence on the print results. Printing Information Click Print to print the displayed information. SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 179 Functions 2.12 Inter-relay communication through port C 2.12.11 Time Synchronisation In addition to transmitting the process information, the IRC can synchronise the time in the connected devices. The master, which synchronises its time via a radio clock for example, passes on the time each minute to the connected slaves. Time synchronisation via IRC must be set in the slaves for this. Open the SIPROTEC device with the DIGSI device processing function. Double-click in the data window on Time synchronisation. The Time Synchronisation & Time Format dialog box is displayed. Select the entry Inter-relay communication from the Time synchronisation source list box and confirm the entry with OK. Figure 2-90 Time synchronisation & time format dialog box Note The time synchronisation source stated in the master must not be Inter-relay communication through port C. Rather, the configured source must be the one used by the master itself, e.g. "Time signal DCF 77". 180 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.13 Inter relay communication with GOOSE through Ethernet 2.13 Inter relay communication with GOOSE through Ethernet The release of the software version V4.6 makes it possible for all 6MD66x bay controllers to allow for communication according to the new IEC61850 standard. An addition to connection to the substation controller, it also enables a connection between bay controllers and protective devices. This allows for an inter relay communication functionality via this Ethernet interface as well, as described in the previous Chapter 2.12. In the IEC61850 communication standard, this field to field communication is called GOOSE (Generic Object Orientated Substation Event). Advantages of the GOOSE communication compared to the previous inter relay communication: -- No dedicated interface required; communication takes place through the system interface -- Large selection of possible partner devices. Other SIPROTEC4 devices, such as 7SJ or 7SA, are also equipped with IEC61850 GOOSE. This communication standard is also being adopted by other manufacturers. -- No master-slave scheme; each node can send and receive autonomously. This section shows on a simple example how to build up a substation switchgear interlocking scheme based on GOOSE communication with 6MD66x bay controllers. Applications * Inter-relay communication with IEC61850-GOOSE can be used for the exchange of information between bay controllers. No substation controller is required for this. One main application for bay controllers is crossbay switchgear interlocking. However, other process information can be exchanged with GOOSE as well (as with IRC in general), such as measured or metered values. Prerequisites The 6MD66x devices participating in GOOSE inter-relay communication must meet the following requirements: Device software version at least V4.6 Equipped with an EN100 communication module for communication with IEC61850 (MLFB: 11th digit = 9, extension -L0R, optical EN100 module planned for the future) DIGSI version at least V4.6 with station configuration editor (ordering option) At least two such devices must have been created in the DIGSI project. Also, an IEC61850 substation must be created ("Insert new object" in DIGSI Manager). This new object allows to access the station configurator (by double-clicking after configuration of the substation, refer to following chapters). SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 181 Functions 2.13 Inter relay communication with GOOSE through Ethernet 2.13.1 Function Principle Unlike IRC, GOOSE does not use the master-slave principle. Each node sends and receives information autonomously according to its configuration in the system configurator. The devices are connected to switches using Ethernet patch cables, as shown in the figure below. Figure 2-91 Nodes of an IEC61850 Ethernet The Ethernet link is used both for inter-relay communication with GOOSE and for communication with the SICAM PAS station unit. 182 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.13 Inter relay communication with GOOSE through Ethernet 2.13.2 Parameterizing the GOOSE Communication Let us consider the example of a switchgear interlocking application in which 2 feeders of a double busbar exchange information with the bus coupler (see the figure below). Figure 2-92 Single line display of the example "Switchgear interlocking with GOOSE" In the two feeder bays C01 and C03, switching of the busbar disconnectors Q1 and Q2 is allowed if the bus coupler C02 is closed. The coupler must not be opened if both busbar disconnectors are closed in either bay C01 or C03 (bus coupler lock-in). The information required for these interlocking conditions is to be exchanged directly between the three 6MD66x bay controllers via IEC61850-GOOSE. Each of the three bays has a bay controller assigned to it, as shown in the figure below. SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 183 Functions 2.13 Inter relay communication with GOOSE through Ethernet Figure 2-93 Assignment of GOOSE nodes to system From the bus coupler C02, the information "CouplClsd" (ON if the coupler is closed) is sent to the two feeders. This information is generated in the CFC of the bus coupler C02 from the feedback signals of the three switching devices. The two feeders send to the bus coupler the information "C01BBDiscClsd" and "C03BBDiscClsd", which is likewise generated in the CFC (ON if the busbar disconnectors Q1 and Q2 are both CLOSED). In a fist step, the information to be transmitted must be configured in the DIGSI configuration matrix for all three devices. In addition, the information to be received is also configured; this principle is known from IRC. The figure below shows the information to be configured in the configuration matrix. Figure 2-94 184 Configuration matrix of devices C01, C02, C03 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.13 Inter relay communication with GOOSE through Ethernet You can see, for example, that C01SSTrGes information (busbar isolator is closed in field C01) is formed in CFC (source "C") and sent to the system interface (destination "S"). Thus, it is available to all other GOOSE users. This is used by the C02 field, where the "C01SSTrGes" information with source "S" and destination "C" was created. This information is thus collected by the system interface and processed in CFC. The information items with destination "S" are of type internal marking (IE) and information items with source "S" of type external single message (exEM). If IRC and GOOSE are operated simultaneously, either IRC or GOOSE may be set as the source of information items, but not both at the same time. As soon as an information item is configured to "System interface" as either source or target, the following selection box will appear in DIGSI: Figure 2-95 Selection box for allocating IEC61850 addresses This box is used to assign addresses for the IEC61850 communication. The numbers assigned by DIGSI are suggestions and can be manually modified (this is only recommended for special cases). The logical node CTRL (Control) is permanently assigned to user-defined indications and commands. The prefix of the logical node is not preset and can be freely selected. In this example, SFS is chosen for switchgear interlocking; up to 11 characters can be entered. SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 185 Functions 2.13 Inter relay communication with GOOSE through Ethernet 2.13.3 Communication connection status The status of the communication connection (disturbed / undisturbed) is supplied with each transmitted message as information status. In case of a disturbed GOOSE connection, the information has a status of "not updated". This status can be extracted from the information using, for example, the new "DI_GET_STATUS" status module in CFC (for double messages) and should also be processed in the interlocking. This status corresponds to IRC_Fault when communicating via Port C. 2.13.4 Selecting the GOOSE Nodes In the next step, all nodes for the GOOSE inter-relay communication are selected in the system configurator. To do so, create an IEC61850 substation (right-click in the DIGSI Manager - Insert new object - IEC61850 substation) and right-click it. Go to the "Nodes" tab. Figure 2-96 Specifying nodes At the beginning, all devices in a DIGSI project that have an IEC61850 interface are displayed in the top window. Highlight the nodes for the IEC61850-GOOSE communication (in this example all three devices) and click the "Add" arrow. All three nodes are now moved to the bottom window and are available for configuration in the system configurator. This procedure is the same as that in the traditional IRC. 186 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.13 Inter relay communication with GOOSE through Ethernet 2.13.5 Creating an IP Network with the System Configurator Now double-click the system configurator to open it. The devices selected as "nodes" of the GOOSE communication must have been opened at least once with DIGSI. The system configurator has the two views "Network" and "Configuration", as shown in the figure below. Select first the "Network" view. Figure 2-97 Specifying addresses of Ethernet nodes in the system configurator The system configurator creates a subnet for the nodes and assigns the IP addresses automatically. The addresses can be changed manually if they do not fit into an existing network configuration. If the IP network is to be used exclusively for the GOOSE communication of the configured nodes, the addresses can be left as they are. SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 187 Functions 2.13 Inter relay communication with GOOSE through Ethernet 2.13.6 Routing Information between Nodes Go now to the "Configuration" view to interlink the information provided by the GOOSE nodes. First of all, assign a name to the application. To do so, select the subnet containing the GOOSE nodes (here Subnet1), and insert an "application" (menu bar - Insert - Application), as shown in the figure below. Figure 2-98 Starting the GOOSE configuration Assign a meaningful name to the application, e.g. "Switchgear interlocking". The "Configuration" view is composed of three important windows. In the top centre, the links between source and target are shown. At the bottom left, the possible source information is shown in a selection list, and at the bottom right the possible target information. After you have created an application, the three devices belonging to the subnet appear in the source and target lists. First, select a source information of the device C01 6MD66x. To do this, click the device in the "Sources" window. This opens a tree view with the four Logical Devices which are contained in the device: CRTL, DR, EXT and MEAS. The previously generated information items for interlocking can be found in the Logical Device CTRL. The required information items can be found at the very bottom of the list under CTRL. Source information is C01SSTrGes. This information is available under the Logical Node SFSGGIO1. 188 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.13 Inter relay communication with GOOSE through Ethernet Figure 2-99 Selecting the source information Use the "Add source" button, which is activated when you select the information, to copy this information to the link list. Proceed in the same way for the other two items of source information from the other two devices. You will obtain the following result: SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 189 Functions 2.13 Inter relay communication with GOOSE through Ethernet Figure 2-100 Routing of all source information Proceed in the same way for the target information. Before clicking the "Add target" button, however, select from the link list the line which contains the required source information. For instance, the information "C01 Busbar disconnector closed" from bay C01 must be routed to the information of the same name in the bus coupler. After routing all information items, the link list looks like this: 190 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.13 Inter relay communication with GOOSE through Ethernet Figure 2-101 Routing of all target information Unlike the source information, the target information is not copied but moved. Each item of information can appear exactly once as a target (uniqueness), whereas an item of source information can have several targets. For instance, the information "Bus coupler closed" from C02 is transmitted to both feeder devices, C01 and C03. To make navigation in the tables easier, the familiar SIPROTEC texts are always displayed in parallel next to the IEC61850 information names. Save now the station with "Station - Save" from the menu bar. The SCD file describing the station configuration is now saved. SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 191 Functions 2.13 Inter relay communication with GOOSE through Ethernet 2.13.7 Update Parameter Sets and Print Status The last step is now to add the links created in the link list to the parameter sets of the three devices. To do so, close the station configurator, right-click the IEC61850 station and select once again "Object properties". There you select the "Update" tab, which looks now like this. Figure 2-102 Updating nodes By clicking the button "Update all parameter sets", you prompt the DIGSI Manager to add the routing information to the device parameter sets. A report is created, which can also be printed. 192 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.13 Inter relay communication with GOOSE through Ethernet Figure 2-103 Updating report After the update has been completed without errors, the nodes are marked with a checkmark in the column "P". When changes are made in individual devices or in the GOOSE configuration, this checkmark shows clearly which parameter sets are up to date and which are not. Figure 2-104 Updated parameter sets You can now load the parameter sets into the SIPROTEC4 6MD66x devices. SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 193 Functions 2.13 Inter relay communication with GOOSE through Ethernet 2.13.8 Time Synchronization Time synchronization is not possible with the GOOSE mechanism; in IEC61850 a client-server mechanism is provided for that purpose. In SIPROTEC4 devices, a client functionality is implemented for NTP (Network Time Protocol). If such a time server is available in the network, it can be used for time setup of the devices connected through IEC61850. For instance, the SICAM PAS Station Controller can be used as an NTP time server. To configure the device, open it with DIGSI and select "Time synchronization". Since the introduction of IEC61850, the option "Ethernet NTP" is available there. Figure 2-105 "Time synchronization" dialog box A prerequisite for this is that an appropriate time server exists in the network. 194 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.13 Inter relay communication with GOOSE through Ethernet 2.13.9 Setting Notes Interface Selection No settings are required for operation of the Ethernet system interface module (IEC 61850 EN100-Modul 1). If the device is equipped with such a module (see MLFB), the module is automatically configured to the interface available for it, namely . SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 195 Functions 2.14 Connecting external instrument transformers 2.14 Connecting external instrument transformers External instrument transformers are connected with the purpose of measuring and processing temperature, pressure or any 20-mA measured values. The external instrument transformers are connected to port C or port D and transmit their measured values to the bay controller via a serial communication protocol. At present, the instrument transformers by Ziehl (TR600 and TR800, Siemens MLFB ordering possible) can be connected. For this function select devices that have a 2 or 3 in 12th position of the MLFB number. 2.14.1 Function Description Measurement Box Measurement boxes are external devices which are mounted on a top-hat rail. They have up to 8 temperature or 8 x 20 mA measuring inputs, one RS485 interface for communication with the bay controller and one RJ45 interface for parameterization via Web browser and communication of measured values. The measurement box converts the measured values into a digital value. The digital values are delivered to a serial port. Note The measurement boxes 7XV5662-2AD10 or 7XV5662-5AD10 (RTD box) are available. They are each suitable for 6 measured values and the measurement box 7XV5662-7AD10 for 8 measured values. Mixed operation of the different measurement box types is not possible. Figure 2-106 Connection of one or optionally of two 7XV5662-7AD10 measurement boxes Communication with the bay controller The bay controller can have up to two measurement boxes connected to its service interface (port C). Up to 16 temperature measurement points or 16 x 20mA measuring inputs or 8 temperature measurement points and 8 x 20 mA measuring inputs are thus available. For greater distances to the bay controller, we recommend using optical fibre communication. Appendix A.3 3 shows possible communication architectures. 196 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.14 Connecting external instrument transformers 2.14.2 Setting Notes Connecting external instrument transformers Measured value acquisition is only effective if the measurement box(es) have been assigned at address 190 MEASUREMENT BOX when configuring port C. You will find this parameter in the DIGSI functional scope. Select the number of sensor inputs and the communication mode in address 191 MB CONNECTION. The values with "6" or "12" inputs are valid for the RTD boxes 7XV5662-2AD10 or 7XV5662-5AD10 and values with "8" or "16" inputs are relevant for the measurement box 7XV5662-7AD10 with 8x 20 mA measured values each. If the measurement boxes are operated in half-duplex mode, /CTS controlled by /RTS" must be selected for flow control (CTS) by means of a jumper (see section 3.1.2 in the chapter Installation and Commissioning"). Settings with DIGSI for the (bay control) device. The settings for each input are made in the same way. They are shown here at the example of measuring input 1. Select the sensor type for RTD 1 (measurement point 1) at address 9011 RTD 1 TYPE. You can select xxx for 20 mA measured values or Ni 120 and Ni 100 for temperature measurement. Select RTD 1 TYPE = Not connected if no measurement point is available for RTD 1. This setting can only be made in DIGSI under Display Additional Settings". In addition to the "20 mA measured values", the DIGSI setting xxx is also suitable for other options such as "PT100", "PT1000", "Ohm" or "Volt" in the 7XV5662-7AD10 measurement box. When using Ni 120 and Ni 100 in DIGSI, you must select "PT100" in the 7XV5662-7AD10 measurement box. Furthermore, you have to specify two pickup values for each measured value here. If they are exceeded, an alarm is generated in the 6MD66x. The range from -1999 to +9999 is available for scaling the pickup values. But only the values from 0 to 20 are actually usable since they are directly equivalent to the values in mA. SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 197 Functions 2.14 Connecting external instrument transformers Figure 2-107 198 Functional scope of the RTD box SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.14 Connecting external instrument transformers Figure 2-108 RTD box: Settings group with additional parameters Moreover, you can set an alarm value for each 20 mA measured value at address 9017 MBS1 Stage 1 and a tripping value at address 9018 MBS1 Stage 2. For temperature measurements you can set the alarm temperature to degree Celsius (C) in address 9013 RTD 1 STAGE 1 or to degree Fahrenheit (F) at address 9014 RTD 1 STAGE 1 depending on which temperature unit you selected in the power system data (section 2.1.1.2 in address 276 TEMP. UNIT). You can set the tripping temperature to degree Celsius (C) at address 9015 RTD 1 STAGE 2 or to degree Fahrenheit (F) at address 9016 RTD 1 STAGE 2. At address 9012 RTD 1 LOCATION you inform the device about the mounting position of RTD 1. The options Oil, Ambient, Winding, Bearing and Other are available. The selected option is not evaluated in the device; it merely informs the device about the medium that performs the temperature measurement. This setting can only be made in DIGSI under Display Additional Settings". Analogously, you can specify the settings for all connected measuring elements of the first measurement box. If the measurement box is activated in the functional scope, two new groups will be displayed in the routing matrix: One is the group labelled "Measurement Box" showing the indications and one group named "Meas. Thermal Values" containing the measured values. SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 199 Functions 2.14 Connecting external instrument transformers Figure 2-109 RTD box routing Monitoring functions The indication 17116 Failure MB1" is used to monitor measurement box 1 (17117 for measurement box 2). 14101 MB Fail" is a group indication which is displayed if one of the two individual failures is set. In addition, each single measured value is monitored e.g. 14114 MBS1 Fail", for instance if a sensor is not connected or a measured value overflows. Settings at the measurement box Table 2-17 Coordinating the settings between measurement box and bay controller RTD box (Web browser) 6MD66 (DIGSI) Note Temperature measurement PT100 Ni 100 or Ni 120 make sure that units are identical 20 mA measured values 20 mA Measurement box settings The values in the 6MD66x do not have units (leave C) The communication baud rate is 9600 bits/s. The parity is even. The bus number is set to 0 by default. Changes at the measurement box can be made in mode 7. The following convention applies: Table 2-18 Setting the bus address at the measurement box Mode Number of measurement boxes Address (for 7XV5662-2AD10 or 7XV5662-5AD10) Address (for 7XV5662-7AD10) simplex 1 0 92 half-duplex 1 1 1 half-duplex 2 1. Measurement box 1 1. Measurement box 1 2. Measurement box 2 2. Measurement box 2 You will find more information in the manual supplied with your measurement box. 200 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.14 Connecting external instrument transformers Further processing of the measured values and indications The measurement box is represented in DIGSI as a part of the 6MD66x, i.e. indications and measured values are displayed in the routing matrix just like the internal functions, and they can be routed and processed in the same way. This allows indications and measured values to be forwarded to the integrated user-defined logic (CFC) where they can be linked as desired. But the pickup indications RTD x St. 1 p.up" and RTD x St. 2 p.up" are neither added to the group indications 501 Relay PICKUP" and 511 Relay TRIP", nor do they initiate a fault condition. If you want an indication to appear in the operational log, place a checkmark into the corresponding intersection cell of column and row in the matrix. Figure 2-110 Routing matrix for 7XV5662-2/5* as an RTD box in C or F Figure 2-111 Routing matrix for 7XV5662-7* either as a 20-mA measured value box or for temperature measurement (20 mA are equivalent to 20,000) SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 201 Functions 2.15 Web Monitor 2.15 Web Monitor The Web Monitor makes possible the display of parameters, data and measuring values for SIPROTEC 4devices during installation or during operation. For this it uses Internet technology. The SIPROTEC-Web Monitor provides several functions for all devices, the others are available depending on the device. The 6MD66x specific functions are monitoring of the IRC combination and monitoring of the synchronizing function. Among general installation notes, this manual also describes functions of the SIPROTEC Web Monitor which are specific for 6MD66x only. The general functions are available in the Help file on DIGSICD (as from version DIGSI V4.60). The display is made by a Web Browser, e.g. Internet Explorer. Using the Web browser you can find, for example, a quick view of an IRC combination. Combination data, device data, master data, combination structure and process data of each user can be displayed there. In case of synchronizing function, the Web Monitor enables the display of switching ranges of a synchroscope and of synchronous networks. Prerequisites The Web-Monitor runs on the operator PC and requires only standard software. The following software programs / operating systems must be installed: Operating system: Microsoft Windows XP, Microsoft Windows 2000, Microsoft Windows NT, Microsoft Windows ME, Microsoft Windows 98 Internet browser: Netscape Communicator Version 4.7, Netscape Communicator Version 6.x or higher, or Microsoft Internet Explorer Version 5.0 or higher. Java must be installed and activated. Long-distance data transmission network: The required software component is included in Microsoft Windows XP, Microsoft Windows 2000, Microsoft Windows NT and Windows 98. This component is only needed if the device is connected through a serial interface. Network adapter: The required software component is integrated into Microsoft Windows XP, Microsoft Windows 2000, Microsoft Windows NT and Windows 98. This component is only needed when connecting the device via an Ethernet interface (possible for devices with EN100 interface). 202 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.15 Web Monitor 2.15.1 General During installation, the device parameterization created must be controlled in devices and their functions checked. The Web Monitor supports you during the simple and clear determination and display of important measuring values. Discrepancies in the wiring or the parameterisation can be found and solved quickly. To run the Web-Monitor, a link from the operator PC to the protection device via its front and rear operator interface (service interface) is necessary. This can be made directly by the 9-pole DIGSI cable by means of an existing long-distance data connection. Remote access via a modem is possible as well. An Internet browser must be installed on the operator PC (see paragraph on system requirements). DIGSI 4 is usually installed on the operator PC as well. Please make sure that DIGSI 4 and the Web-Monitor do not use the same operator interface at the same time. A serial simultaneous access would lead to data collisions. This means that either DIGSI 4 OR the Web-Monitor can use a device interface. Before the Web-Monitor is started, DIGSI 4 must be exited or you should at least have finished making the settings and allocations in DIGSI 4. It is possible to simultaneously operate DIGSI 4 at the front operator interface via a COM port of the operator PC and the Web-Monitor at the rear operating interface via an other COM port of the operating PC. The Web-Monitor is composed of HTML pages containing Java applets which are stored in the EEPROM of the 6MD66x SIPROTEC 4 device. It is an integral part of the SIPROTEC 4 device firmware and need not be separately installed. All that needs to be created on the operator PC is a long-distance data transmission network used for selection and communication. After the link has been successfully established through the data transmission network, the browser is started and the TCP-IP address of the protection device entered in it. The server address of the device, which is its homepage address, is transmitted to the browser and displayed as an HTML page. This TCP-IP address is set at the front and service interface using DIGSI 4, or directly on the device using the integrated operator interface. Note The process can only be monitored. Control the process through the data transmission link is only possible after a control feature has been set up and established. You can, either directly on the device or with DIGSI 4, modify a parameter in such a way that the device control feature contained in the Web-Monitor allows also the input of numerical values. You can then modify in the Web-Monitor parameters which are normally set only directly on the device, because passwords can now be entered from the keyboard. SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 203 Functions 2.15 Web Monitor 2.15.2 Functions Basic Functionality The basic functionality designates functions that are generally available, i.e. not device-dependent. These include: * Device operation * Indications * Fault record overview * Measured value overview * Diagnosis * Device file system * CFC A function description can be found in the Online Help of DIGSI as from version V4.60. Figure 2-112 Web-monitor - Basic display The above figure of the device operation view shows a device connected through the data transmission link with its control (keyboard) and display elements (display, LEDs, inscriptions). The device can be operated with the keys shown in the display in the same way as with the sealed keypad on the device. 204 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.15 Web Monitor Siemens recommends to block the controller using the Web Monitor. This can be achieved by allowing "Read only" access for the interface through which the Web browser accesses the device. You can receive this parameter in DIGSI via "Interfaces - Operator Interface at the Device" (for access via serial interface) or via "Interfaces - Ethernet at the device" (for access via Ethernet interface, refer to the following Figure). Figure 2-113 Setting the authorization for the Web Monitor for an access via Ethernet interface The figure below shows as an example the indications from the operational indication buffer arranged in a list. These indications are displayed with their short text stored in the device. SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 205 Functions 2.15 Web Monitor Figure 2-114 Event log Device-specific Functionality In addition to the general basic functionality, the Web-Monitor for the 6MD66x comprises the PRC functions IRC combination with user details and the synchronization functions. All in all, the following information can be displayed with the Web-Monitor. IRC combination * Combination data * Device data * Master data * Combination structure * Node details The IRC combination function of the Web-Monitor is started with the menu item "RC" in the operator menu. An IRC combination can comprise up to 32 nodes. Nodes are displayed in a list, with their node number and status (ON or OFF). Nodes connected with the Web-Monitor are shown in red. The nodes and their numbers are mouse-sensitive. This means that on moving the mouse over the node the cursor shape changes to a hand, and the colour of the node changes. By clicking on a node, you can then display details of that node - up to 32 items of process information - with the indications parameterised for it and the associated values. The synchronization function includes the following views: * Synchronization ranges The synchronization ranges are displayed in a coordinate system. The X axis shows the frequency and the Y axis the voltage. * Synchronoscope The synchronoscope is dynamically visualized by three diagrams showing respectively the difference angle, the difference voltages and the difference frequency. * Synchronous networks Synchronous networks are visualized by a pie chart and the current measured values. 206 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Functions 2.15 Web Monitor The figure below shows an example of the synchronoscope with selection list, pie/bar chart and the current measured values. Figure 2-115 Web-monitor - Synchronoscope All currently parameterized functions are shown in a list. An LED icon shows the current status of the selected group: bright green (ON) for active, and dark green (OFF) for inactive. For an inactive function group, only the parameter settings are shown, whereas for an active function group the current measured values are displayed as well. On startup, the first active function group found is displayed automatically. All measured values are read out directly in the device -- about every 100 ms -- and visualized in tables or diagrams. 2.15.3 Operating Modes The Web-Monitor works in the following operating modes set between the operator PC and the SIPROTEC 4 device: Direct Serial Link Direct link between the device's front or rear service interface and the serial interface of the operator PC. For this link the 9-pin cable must be used that is supplied as an accessory with DIGSI. Dial-up Connection Through a Modem Serial connection of the rear service port of the device with a modem in the system. This connection can be electrically implemented via RS232 (over short distance) or via fibre optics. The connection to the system modem is established from the office or from any other system using a switched line. DIGSI-Remote can also be carried out using this connection. Thus, parameters of a remote device can also be changed during the installation. SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 207 Functions 2.15 Web Monitor Operation with a Star Coupler Connection between the device's rear service interface and a star coupler using a direct optical link. Connection of the operator PC's serial interface to a star coupler. In this way several devices can be operated within the system; the existing installation can be used for central operation of protection devices. Operation with Ethernet Link through an Ethernet interface. This type of connection requires an EN100 communication module inside the device, and a connection of that module to a local network. For more information of the basic functionality, the installation and the operating system-specific configuration please refer to the Web-Monitor online help provided on the DIGSI CD. Access regulation for Web Monitor The Web Monitor access rights are assigned with DIGSI using the Interfaces entry. For this purpose, Siemens recommends to allow Read authorization; in doing so, neither the event list can be deleted, nor a command output, nor a saved LED reset via the Web Monitor. If you specify the Full access level, all these operating actions can also be carried out through the Web Monitor. Note The No access level is ineffective yet, i.e. here, the user receives full access rights as well. For this, refer to Figure 2-113. 208 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Mounting and Commissioning 3 This chapter is intended for experienced commissioning staff. They should be familiar with commissioning control devices, using the network and with the safety rules and instructions. Some hardware adaptations to the system data may become necessary. Some of the primary tests require the devices (line, transformer, etc.) to carry load. 3.1 Mounting and Connections 210 3.2 Checking Connections 231 3.3 Commissioning 237 3.4 Final Preparation of the Device 247 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 209 Mounting and Commissioning 3.1 Mounting and Connections 3.1 Mounting and Connections General WARNING! Beware of incorrect transport, storage, installation or assembly. Non-observance can result in death, personal injury or substantial property damage. The correct and safe operation of this device depends on proper transport, storage, installation and assembly of the device according to the warnings and instructions given in this manual. Particularly, you must observe the general installation and safety regulations for working in high-voltage environment (e.g. ANSI, IEC, EN, DIN, VDE or other national and international regulations). 3.1.1 Configuration Information Prerequisites For installation and connection, the following conditions and limitations apply: The rated device data has been checked as recommended in the SIPROTEC 4 System Description /1/ and their compliance with these data is verified with the Power System Data. Connection variants Connection examples for the current and voltage transformer circuits are given in the Appendix. Currents/Voltages Since the voltage inputs of the 6MD66x have an operating range from 0 V to 170 V, it is possible to evaluate phase-to-phase voltages up to 3 * 170 V = 294 V. Binary inputs and outputs The configuration of the binary inputs and outputs, i.e. the individual adaptation to the system conditions, is described in /1/. The connections to the system are dependent on this actual configuration. 210 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Mounting and Commissioning 3.1 Mounting and Connections 3.1.2 Hardware Modifications 3.1.2.1 General Hardware modifications concerning, for instance, nominal currents, the control voltage for binary inputs or termination of serial interfaces might be necessary. Follow the procedure described in this subsection, whenever hardware modifications are done. Auxiliary voltage The different input voltage ranges (DC 60 V to 110 V and DC 220 V to 250 V of the auxiliary voltage are interchangeable by modifying the jumper positions. Upon delivery all jumpers are set according to the data on the name plate and do not need to be changed (see also the ordering information in the Appendix). Life contact The life contact of the device is a changeover contact, i.e. either the NC contact or the NO contact can be connected to the device terminals F3 and F4 using a jumper (X40 on the CPU module). The assignment of the jumper to the contact type and the spatial arrangement of the jumper are described below. Rated currents The input transformers of the devices are set to a nominal current of 1 A or 5 A with jumpers. Upon delivery, the jumpers positions correspond to the specifications on the name plate. All jumpers must be set to the same rated current, i.e. one jumper (X61 to X63) for each input transformer and additionally the common jumper X60. Should you perform a change here, you must not forget to communicate this change to the device also via the parameter Transformer current I, secondary in the measuring transducer packets. Control voltage for binary inputs In the delivery status, the binary inputs are set in a way ensuring that a direct current equalling the supply voltage is set as control variable. If the rated values differ from the power system control voltage, it may be necessary to change the switching threshold of the binary inputs. To change the switching threshold of a binary input, you must change a jumper position. Note If binary inputs are used for trip circuit supervision, note that two binary inputs (or one binary input and one replacement resistor) are connected in series. The switching threshold must lie significantly below half the nominal control voltage. Replacing interfaces The serial interface are exchangeable. Which interfaces can be exchanged and how this is done is described in the section on interface modules Terminating serial interfaces To ensure reliable data transmission, the RS485 bus or PROFIBUS must be terminated at the last device on the bus (connect terminating resistors). For this purpose, terminating resistors are provided on the PCB of the CPU module and on the PROFIBUS interface module which can be connected via jumpers. Both jumpers must always be plugged identically. The termination resistors are disabled on unit delivery. SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 211 Mounting and Commissioning 3.1 Mounting and Connections 3.1.2.2 Disassembly Disassembly of the Device Note It is assumed for the following steps that the device is not operative. Working on the Printed Circuit Boards Caution! Be careful when changing PCB elements that affect nominal values of the device! As a consequence, the ordering number (MLFB) and the ratings on the nameplate no longer agree with the actual device properties. If such changes are necessary in exceptional cases, these changes must be clearly and visibly noted on the device. Self adhesive stickers are available for this purpose that can be used as additional nameplates. If you work on the printed circuit boards, for instance checking or re-plugging switching elements or exchanging modules, proceed as follows: * Prepare your workplace: Provide a mat suitable for electrostatically sensitive devices (ESD). And you need these tools: - a screwdriver with a 5 to 6 mm wide tip, - a Phillips screwdriver Pz size 1, - a socket wrench size 5 mm. * Unfasten the threaded bolts of the D-sub connector on the back at location A". * If the device has additional system interfaces on slots B" to D" besides the service interface at slot A", the screws located diagonally to the interfaces must be removed. * Remove the caps on the front cover of the device and loosen the screw underneath. * Pull of the front cover and carefully open it to one side. For devices with a detached operator panel, the front cover of the device can be removed directly after all screws have been unscrewed. Working on the Plug Connectors Caution! Beware of electrostatic discharges! Non-observance can result in minor personal injury or property damage. Avoid electrostatic discharges that occur while working on plug connectors by touching earthed metal parts first. Do not plug or pull interface connection while they are under voltage! 212 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Mounting and Commissioning 3.1 Mounting and Connections To work on the plug connectors, proceed as follows: * Release the connector of the ribbon cable between CPU processor module (1) and front cover at the front cover. To do so, push the top and bottom latches of the plug connector apart so that the plug connector of the ribbon cable is pressed out. This step is not necessary for devices with detached operation panel. On the CPU processor module (1) the 7-pin plug connector X16 behind the D-sub socket and the plug connector of the ribbon cable (connected to the 68-pin plug connector on the device back) must be removed. * Disconnect the plug connector of the ribbon cable between the CPU board (1) and the input/output modules I/O-4 (2) and I/O-5 (3). * Remove the boards and place them on a surface suitable for electrostatically sensitive modules (ESD). * Check the jumpers and change or remove them if necessary. Module Arrangement of 6MD662 Figure 3-1 Front view of a 662 device after removing the front cover (simplified and reduced in scale) SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 213 Mounting and Commissioning 3.1 Mounting and Connections Module arrangement of 6MD663 Figure 3-2 Front view of a 663 device after removing the front cover (simplified and reduced in scale) Module arrangement of 6MD664 Figure 3-3 214 Front view of a 664 device after removing the front cover (simplified and reduced in scale) SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Mounting and Commissioning 3.1 Mounting and Connections 3.1.2.3 Switching Elements on Printed Circuit Boards CPU processor module Check the set rated voltage of the integrated power supply, the quiescent state of the life contact, the selected control voltages of binary inputs BI1 to BI5 and the integrated RS232/RS485 interface using the layout of the PCB of the CPU processor module and the tables below. Figure 3-4 Processor module CPU with representation of the jumpers required for checking the settings SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 215 Mounting and Commissioning 3.1 Mounting and Connections Table 3-1 Jumper settings for the nominal voltage of the integrated power supply on the processor board CPU . Jumper Rated voltage DC 24 V to 48 V 1) 1) 3) DC 220 V to 250 V Not used 1-2 1-2 2-3 X52 Not used 1-2 and 3-4 1-2 and 3-4 2-3 X53 Not used 1-2 1-2 2-3 X55 Not used Open Open 1-2 In the version "DC 24 V to 48 V" changing the rated voltage by rearranging jumpers is not possible. Jumper position of the quiescent state of the Life contact on the CPU processor module Jumper Open in the quiescent state Closed in the quiescent state Presetting X40 1-2 2-3 2-3 Table 3-3 2) DC 110 V X51 Table 3-2 1) DC 60 V Jumper setting of the control voltages of the binary inputs BI1 to BI5 on the CPU processor module Binary input Jumper Threshold 19 V 1) Threshold 88 V 2) Threshold 176 V 3) BI1 X21 1-2 2-3 3-4 BI2 X22 1-2 2-3 3-4 BI3 X23 1-2 2-3 3-4 BI4 X24 1-2 2-3 3-4 BI5 X25 1-2 2-3 3-4 Factory settings for devices with rated supply voltage of DC 24 V to 60 V Factory settings for devices with rated supply voltage DC 110 V Factory settings for devices with rated supply voltage of DC 220 V to 250 V Table 3-4 Jumper settings of the integrated RS232/RS485 interface on the CPU processor module Jumper RS232 RS485 X105 to X110 1-2 2-3 Note Jumpers X105 to X110 must be set to the same position. The presetting of the jumpers corresponds to the ordered configuration. The R485 interface can be converted into an RS232 interface by modifying the jumpers. For an order with MLFB position 12 the same as 0, the interface is set to RS232. 216 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Mounting and Commissioning 3.1 Mounting and Connections Table 3-5 Jumper setting for CTS (Flow control) on the CPU processor module Jumper /CTS from Interface RS232 /CTS triggered by /RTS X111 1-2 2-3 The jumper is always inserted at position 2-3 at the factory. The jumper must be set to 2-3 for the RS232 connection of DIGSI. Jumper setting 2-3 is also required for the connection via star coupler or fibre optic cable; we recommend the connection cable Order No. 7XV5100-4 for this purpose. Jumper setting 1-2 is required for a modem connection; we recommend a standard connection cable (9-pin/25pin) for this. Table 3-6 Jumper Jumper setting of the terminating resistors of the RS232/RS485 interface on the CPU processor module Termination resistor Termination resistor Factory setting Connected Disconnected X103 2-3 1-2 1-2 X104 2-3 1-2 1-2 If there are no external resistors in the system, the last devices on a bus must be configured via the jumpers X103 and X104. Note Both jumpers must always be plugged in the same way! Jumper X90 serves for internal test purposes. The factory setting 1-2 must not be changed. SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 217 Mounting and Commissioning 3.1 Mounting and Connections I/O-4 module The selected control voltages of the binary inputs BE6 to BE65 are checked according to the table below. The assignment of the binary inputs to the installation location of the module can be found in Section Module arrangement. Figure 3-5 218 I/O-4 input/output module with representation of the jumpers required for checking the settings SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Mounting and Commissioning 3.1 Mounting and Connections Table 3-7 Jumper positions of the control voltages of the binary inputs BI6 to Bi65 on the input/output modules I/O-4 Binary input 1) 2) 3) Jumper Threshold 19 Threshold 88 V Threshold 176 2) V 3) V 1) BI6 BI21 BI36 BI51 X21 1-2 2-3 3-4 BI7 BI22 BI37 BI52 X22 1-2 2-3 3-4 BI8 BI23 BI38 BI53 X23 1-2 2-3 3-4 BI9 BI24 BI39 BI54 X24 1-2 2-3 3-4 BI10 BI25 BI40 BI55 X25 1-2 2-3 3-4 BI1 BI26 BI41 BI56 X26 1-2 2-3 3-4 BI12 BI27 BI42 BI57 X27 1-2 2-3 3-4 BI13 BI28 BI43 BI58 X28 1-2 2-3 3-4 BI14 BI29 BI44 BI59 X29 1-2 2-3 3-4 BI15 BI30 BI45 BI60 X30 1-2 2-3 3-4 BI16 BI31 BI46 BI61 X31 1-2 2-3 3-4 BI17 BI32 BI47 BI62 X32 1-2 2-3 3-4 BI18 BI33 BI48 BI63 X33 1-2 2-3 3-4 BI19 BI34 BI49 BI64 X34 1-2 2-3 3-4 BI20 BI35 BI50 BI65 X35 1-2 2-3 3-4 Factory settings for devices with rated supply voltages of DC 24 V to 60 V Factory settings for devices with supply voltages DC 110 V Factory setting for devices with supply voltages of DC 220 V to 250 V The jumpers X71, X72 and X73 on the I/O-4 input/output module serve to set the bus address. The jumpers must not be changed. The table shows the factory settings for the jumpers. Table 3-8 Module address jumper settings of input/output modules I/O-4 Jumper Insertion slot Slot 19 (1) Slot 33 (2) Slot 5 (3) Slot 19 (4) X71 1-2 (H) 2-3 (L) 1-2 (H) 2-3 (L) X72 2-3 (L) 1-2 (H) 1-2 (H) 2-3 (L) X73 2-3 (L) 2-3 (L) 2-3 (L) 1-2 (H) SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 219 Mounting and Commissioning 3.1 Mounting and Connections I/O-5 module Check the set rated currents of the current input transformers here. All jumpers must be set for one rated current, i.e. respectively one jumper (X61 to X63) for each input transformer and additionally the common jumper X60. Figure 3-6 I/O-5 input/output module with representation of the jumpers required for checking the settings Jumpers X71, X72 and X73 on the input/output module I/O-5 are used to set the bus address and must not be changed. The table shows the factory setting of the jumpers. The insertion slot of the module is described in Section Module arrangement. Jumpers X60 - X63 serve for setting the nominal current secondary current 1 A or 5 A. All jumpers must be set identically. 220 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Mounting and Commissioning 3.1 Mounting and Connections Table 3-9 Jumper position of the module address of the input/output module I/O-5 6MD662 Jumper Position X71 1-2 X72 1-2 X73 2-3 Jumper Position X71 2-3 X72 2-3 X73 1-2 Jumper Position X71 1-2 X72 2-3 X73 1-2 6MD663 6MD664 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 221 Mounting and Commissioning 3.1 Mounting and Connections 3.1.2.4 Interface Modules Replacing interface modules Figure 3-7 Example, CPU processor module with interface modules Note Please note that you can only use interface modules with which the device can be ordered from our factory via the ordering code (see Appendix). 222 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Mounting and Commissioning 3.1 Mounting and Connections Table 3-10 Replacement modules for interfaces Interface Insertion slot Replacement module RS485 FO 820 nm PROFIBUS FMS RS485 System interface B PROFIBUS FMS Single ring PROFIBUS FMS Double ring PROFIBUS DP RS485 PROFIBUS DP Double ring IEC 61850 Ethernet electrical DIGSI service interface D FO 820 nm The order numbers of the replacement modules can be found in the Appendix. Serial interfaces with bus capability For bus-capable interfaces a termination is necessary at the bus for each last device, i.e. termination resistors must be connected. With the 6MD66x this applies to versions with RS485 or PROFIBUS interfaces. The termination resistors are located on the corresponding PROFIBUS interface module, which is located on the CPU processor module or directly on the PCB of the CPU processor module. Upon delivery, the jumpers are in such a position that the terminating resistors are switched off. Both jumpers of a module must always be plugged in the same sense. Figure 3-8 Position of the jumpers for configuration of termination resistors of the PROFIBUS FMS and PROFIBUS DP interface SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 223 Mounting and Commissioning 3.1 Mounting and Connections The terminating resistors for the PROFIBUS interface can also be connected externally (e.g. to the connection module). In this case, the terminating resistors located on the PROFIBUS interface module or directly on the PCB of the CPU board must be switched off. Figure 3-9 Termination of the RS485 interface (external) Note The RS485 interface used with this device for the inter-relay communication cannot be provided with terminating resistors externally as shown in the figure above, as the +5 V voltage is not routed out with this device (please refer also to Table 3-11). The RS485 interface on the processor module can be terminated directly on the processor module (see the CPU module for the jumper setting). External termination of the RS485 bus is only possible between the lines A/A and B/B each with 120 at the bus ends. The resulting resistance must not be smaller than 60 . The achievable data transmission rate depends on the distance and the quality of the data line in use. Distances of up to 1000 m are feasible. Figure 3-10 224 Correlation between data rate and bus length SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Mounting and Commissioning 3.1 Mounting and Connections IEC 61850 Ethernet (EN100) The Ethernet interface module has no jumpers. No hardware modifications are required to use it. 3.1.2.5 Reassembly The device is assembled as follows: * Carefully insert the boards into the case. For the device version designed for surface mounting, we recommend pressing on the metal levers when inserting the CPU board; it is easier to insert this way. * First plug the plug connector of the ribbon cable into the input/output boards I/O and then onto the CPU board. Be careful that no connector pins are bent! Do not apply force! * Insert the plug connector of the ribbon cable between the CPU board and the front cover into the socket of the front cover. This step is not necessary for the device version with detached or without operator panel. Instead the plug connector of the ribbon cable connected to a 68-pin plug connector on the device back must be plugged into the plug connector of the CPU board. The 7-pin X16 connector belonging to the ribbon cable must be plugged behind the D-sub female connector. The plugging position is not relevant in this context as the connection is protected against polarity reversal. * Press the connector latches together. * Put the front cover back on and screw it tight to the housing. * Mount the covers again. * Re-tighten the interfaces on the back of the device. This is not necessary if the device is designed for surface mounting. SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 225 Mounting and Commissioning 3.1 Mounting and Connections 3.1.3 Mounting 3.1.3.1 Panel Flush Mounting * Remove the four covers at the corners and 2 in the centre above and below on the front cover. This exposes the 6 elongated holes in the mounting bracket. * Insert the device into the panel cut-out and secure with the six screws. Dimensional drawings can be found in the Technical data section. * Replace the 6 covers. * Install the protective and operational grounding at the back of the device using at least one M4 screw. The cross-sectional area of the cable used must correspond to the maximum connected cross-section be at least 2.5 mm2. * Establish the connections via the plug or screw-type terminals on the device back as shown in the circuit diagram. When using forked lugs for screwed connections or direct connection, the screws must be screwed in so far that the screw heads are flush with the outer edge of the connection module. When using ring-type lugs, the lug must be centered in the connection chamber in such a way that the screw thread fits in the hole of the lug. Section /1/ provides important information about maximum cross-sections, tightening torques, bending radii and strain relief. Figure 3-11 226 Panel flush mounting of a device (housing size 1/1) SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Mounting and Commissioning 3.1 Mounting and Connections 3.1.3.2 Installation in a Rack or Cabinet To install the device in a rack or cabinet, two angular rails are required. The ordering codes are stated in the Appendix under A.1. * First screw the two angular rails slightly into the rack or cabinet using four screws. * Remove the four covers at the corners and two cover in the upper middle and two at the bottom at the front cover. This gives access to 6 elongated holes in the mounting bracket. * Screw the device to the angular rails using six screws. * Replace the six covers. * Tighten the eight screws of the angular rail in the rack or cabinet. * Install the protective and operational grounding at the back of the device using at least one M4 screw. The cross-sectional area of the cable used must correspond to the maximum connected cross-section but at least 2.5 mm2. * Establish the connections via the plug or screw-type terminals on the device back as shown in the circuit diagram. When using forked lugs for screwed connections or direct connection, the screws must be screwed in so far that the screw heads are flush with the outer edge of the connection module. When using ring-type lugs, the lug must be centered in the connection chamber in such a way that the screw thread fits in the hole of the lug. The SIPROTEC 4 System Description /1/ provides important information about maximum crosssections, tightening torques, bending radii and strain relief. Figure 3-12 Installing a 6MD66x into a rack or cabinet SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 227 Mounting and Commissioning 3.1 Mounting and Connections 3.1.3.3 Mounting with detached operator panel Caution! Be careful when removing or plugging the connector between device and detached operator panel Non-observance of the following measure can result in property damage. Without the cable the device is not ready for operation! Never pull or plug the connector between the device and the detached operator panel during operation while the device is alive! For mounting the device proceed as follows: * Tighten the device by means of 10 screws. The dimensional drawing can be found in the Technical data section. * Install the protective and operational grounding at the back of the device using at least one M4 screw. The cross-sectional area of the cable used must correspond to the maximum connected cross-section but at least 2.5 mm2. * Establish the connections via the plug or screw-type terminals on the device back as shown in the circuit diagram. When using forked lugs for screwed connections or direct connection, the screws must be screwed in so far that the screw heads are flush with the outer edge of the connection module. When using ring-type lugs, the lug must be centered in the connection chamber in such a way that the screw thread fits in the hole of the lug. The SIPROTEC 4 System Description /1/ provides important information about maximum crosssections, tightening torques, bending radii and strain relief. For mounting the operator panel please observe the following: * Remove the four covers at the corners of the front cover. This gives access to 4 elongated holes in the mounting bracket. * Insert the operator panel into the panel cut-out and fasten with four screws. The dimensional drawing is shown in the Technical Data. * Put the four covers back into place. * Install the protective and operational grounding at the back of the operation panel using at least one M4 screw. The cross-sectional area of the cable used must correspond to the maximum connected crosssection but at least 2.5 mm2. * Connect the operator panel to the device. To do so, plug the 68-pin connector of the cable belonging to the operator panel into the corresponding socket on the device back (see SIPROTEC 4 System Description /1/). 228 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Mounting and Commissioning 3.1 Mounting and Connections 3.1.3.4 Mounting without operator panel For mounting the device proceed as follows: * Tighten the device by means of 10 screws. The dimensional drawing can be found in the Technical data section. * Install the protective and operational grounding at the back of the device using at least one M4 screw. The cross-sectional area of the cable used must correspond to the maximum connected cross-section but at least 2.5 mm2. * Establish the connections via the plug or screw-type terminals on the device back as shown in the circuit diagram. When using forked lugs for screwed connections or direct connection, the screws must be screwed in so far that the screw heads are flush with the outer edge of the connection module. When using ring-type lugs, the lug must be centered in the connection chamber in such a way that the screw thread fits in the hole of the lug. The SIPROTEC 4 System Description provides important information about maximum cross-sections, tightening torques, bending radii and strain relief. Caution! Be careful when pulling or plugging the dongle cable Non-observance of the following measures can result in minor personal injury or property damage: Never pull or plug the dongle cable while the device is alive! Without the cable the device is not ready for operation! The connector of the dongle cable at the device must always be plugged during operation! For mounting the D-sub socket of the dongle cable please observe the following steps: * Fasten the 9-pin socket of the dongle cable using the delivered fasteners as shown in the following illustration (example). The dimensional drawing for the panel or cabinet cut-out is provided in the Technical Data. * Plug the 68-pin connector of the cable into the corresponding terminal on the device back. SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 229 Mounting and Commissioning 3.1 Mounting and Connections Figure 3-13 Plugging the subminiature connector of the dongle cable into the control panel or cabinet door (example housing size 1/2) Note The dongle cable is included in the scope of delivery of the operator interface. 230 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Mounting and Commissioning 3.2 Checking Connections 3.2 Checking Connections 3.2.1 Checking the Data Connections of the Serial Interfaces The following tables illustrate the pin assignments of the various serial device interfaces and of the time synchronization interface. The position of the connections can be seen in the following figure. 3.2.2 Figure 3-14 9-pin D-subminiature female connectors Figure 3-15 Ethernet connector Operator interface When the recommended communication cable is used (see A.1 for the ordering number), correct connection between the SIPROTEC 4 device and the PC or laptop is automatically ensured. 3.2.3 Service / function interface Check the data connection if the service is used to communicate with the device via hard wiring or a modem. The same applies for the IRC connection. SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 231 Mounting and Commissioning 3.2 Checking Connections 3.2.4 System interface When a serial interface of the device is connected to a central substation control system, the data connection must be checked. A visual check of the send and receive channels must be carried out. With RS232 and fibre optic interfaces, each connection is dedicated to one transmission direction. The data output of one device must be connected to the data input of the other device and vice versa. With data cables, the connections are designated according to DIN 66020 and ISO 2110: * TxD = Data output * RxD = Data Receive * RTS = Request to send * CTS = Clear to send * GND = Signal / Operational Ground The cable shield is to be grounded at both line ends. For extremely EMC environments, the GND may be connected via a separate individually shielded wire pair to improve immunity to interference. The following tables list the assignments of the D-sub socket for the various interfaces. Table 3-11 Pin No. Assignment of the D-sub socket at the different interfaces Operator interface 1 - 2 RxD 3 4 5 6 RS232 RS485 PROFIBUS FMS Slave, RS485 Ethernet PROFIBUS DP Slave, RS485 EN 100 Tx+ RxD - TxD TxD A/A' (RxD/TxD-N) B/B' (RxD/TxD-P) Rx+ - - - CNTR-A (TTL) -- GND GND C/C' (GND) C/C' (GND) -- - - - +5 V (max. load < 100 mA) Rx+ 7 - RTS --1) - 8 - CTS B/B' (RxD/TxD-P) A/A' (RxD/TxD-N) -- 9 - - - - not existent 1) 232 - Tx- -- Pin 7 also carries the RTS signal with RS232 level when operated as RS485 interface. Pin 7 must therefore not be connected! SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Mounting and Commissioning 3.2 Checking Connections 3.2.5 Termination For bus-capable interfaces a termination is necessary at the bus for each last device, i.e. terminating resistors for the RS485 or PROFIBUS interfaces must be connected. The terminating resistors are located on the RS485 and PROFIBUS interface module, which is located on the CPU processor module. If the bus is extended, make sure again that only the last device on the bus has the terminating resistors switched-in, and that all other devices on the bus do not. WARNING! Warning of faulty data transmission! Non-observance can result in death, personal injury, or substantial property damage. The external terminating resistors provided in the PROFIBUS connectors cannot be used for the RS485 standard, as the +5 V voltage is not routed out to the standard RS485 interface (see also note on Figure 3-9). If the external termination of the PROFIBUS connectors are used, the RS485 bus will not work correctly. ! 3.2.6 Time Synchronization Interface Either DC 5 V, 12 V or 24 V time synchronization signals can be processed if the connections are made as indicated in the table below. Table 3-12 1) D-subminiature connector assignment of the time synchronization interface Pin No. Designation Signal Meaning 1 P24_TSIG Input 24 V 2 P5_TSIG Input 5 V 3 M_TSIG Return Line 4 M_TSYNC 1) Return Line 1) 5 Shield Shield Potential 6 - - 7 P12_TSIG Input 12 V 8 P_TSYNC 1) Input 24 V 1) 9 SHIELD Shield Potential assigned, but not used SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 233 Mounting and Commissioning 3.2 Checking Connections 3.2.7 Optical Fibres WARNING! Laser Radiation! Do not look directly into the fibre-optic elements! The transmission via fibre optics is particularly insensitive to electromagnetic interference and thus ensures galvanic isolation of the connection. Transmit and receive connections are shown with the symbols for transmit and for receive. The normal setting of the character idle state for the optical fibre interface is Light off". If the character idle state is to be changed, use the operating program DIGSI, as described in the SIPROTEC 4 System Description. 3.2.8 Measurement Box If one or two 7XV5662 measurement boxes are connected, check their connections at port C. Note The measurement boxes 7XV5662-2AD10 or 7XV5662-5AD10 are each suitable for 6 measured values and the 7XV5662-7AD10 measurement box for 8 measured values. Mixed operation of the different measurement box types is not possible. Verify also the termination: The terminating resistors must be connected to 6MD66x (see margin heading Termination"). Additional information can be found in the manual supplied with the 7XV5662-xAD. Check the transmission parameters at the measurement box. The baudrate, parity and bus number are important. Measurement boxes are connected as follows: * For connecting 1 measurement box 7XV5662-xAD: Bus number = 1 for half-duplex mode (is set at the 7XV5662-xAD) * When connecting 2 measurement boxes 7XV5662-xAD: bus number = 1 for the first measurement box (set at the 7XV5662-xAD for measurement point 1 to 8), bus number = 2 for the second measurement box (set at the 7XV5662-xAD for the measurement points 9 to 16). 234 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Mounting and Commissioning 3.2 Checking Connections 3.2.9 Checking the System Connections Before the device is energized for the first time, the device should have been in the final operating environment for at least 2 hours to equalize the temperature, minimize humidity and avoid condensation. The connections are checked with the device installed at its final location. The system is switched off and grounded during the check. WARNING! Beware of hazardous voltages Non-observance of the following measures can result in death, personal injury or substantial property damages. The inspection steps must be carried out only by accordingly qualified staff who are familiar with and observe the safety regulations and precautionary measures. Caution! Be careful when operating the device without battery on a battery charger! Non-observance of the following measure can lead to unusually high voltages and as a consequence destroy the device Do not operate the device on a battery charger without a connected battery. (Limit values can be found in the technical data). To check the system connections, proceed as follows: * The miniature circuit breakers of the auxiliary power supply and of the measuring voltage must be switched off. * Check the continuity of all current and voltage transformer connections against the system and connection diagrams: - Are the current transformers earthed correctly? - Do the current transformer connections have the same polarity? - Is the phase assignment of the current transformers correct? - Are the voltage transformers earthed correctly? - Do the voltage transformer connections have the same, correct polarity? - Is the phase assignment of the voltage transformers correct? - Is the polarity for current input IE correct (if used)? - Is the polarity for voltage input UE correct (if used for broken delta winding)? * Check the short-circuiting devices of the connectors for the current circuits. This can be performed with secondary test equipment or other test equipment for checking continuity. - Unscrew the front cover. - Remove the ribbon cable connected to the input/output module I/O-5 and pull the module out until there is no more contact between the module and the connector socket at the housing. - Check the continuity on the connection side for each current connection pair. - Re-insert the module firmly; press the ribbon cable on carefully. Be careful that no connector pins are bent! Don't use force! - At the terminals of the device, again check the continuity for each pair of current terminals. - Reinstall the front cover and screw it tight. SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 235 Mounting and Commissioning 3.2 Checking Connections * Connect an ammeter in the auxiliary power supply circuit. A range of about 2.5 A to 5 A is appropriate. * Switch on the miniature circuit breaker for auxiliary voltage (supply protection), check the voltage level and, if applicable, the polarity of the voltage at the device terminals or at the connection modules. * The current input should correspond to the power input in neutral position of the device. A transient needle deflection of the ammeter merely indicates the charging current inrush of the capacitors. * Switch of the miniature circuit breaker for the auxiliary power supply. * Remove the ammeter, restore the normal auxiliary voltage connection. * Switch on the miniature circuit breaker for the auxiliary power supply * Switch on the voltage transformer circuit breaker. * Check the direction of the rotating field at the device terminals. * Switch off the miniature circuit breaker for the transformer voltage and the auxiliary power supply. * Check the trip and close circuits to the circuit breakers. * Check the control lines from and to other devices. * Check the signalling wires. * Switch on the miniature circuit breaker. 236 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Mounting and Commissioning 3.3 Commissioning 3.3 Commissioning WARNING! Warning of dangerous voltages when operating an electrical device Non-observance of the following measures can result in death, personal injury or substantial property damage. Only qualified people shall work on and around this device. They must be thoroughly familiar with all warnings and safety notices in this instruction manual as well as with the applicable safety steps, safety regulations, and precautionary measures. The device is to be grounded to the substation ground before any other connections are made. Hazardous voltages can exist in the power supply and at the connections to current transformers, voltage transformers, and test circuits. Hazardous voltages can be present in the device even after the power supply voltage has been removed (capacitors can still be charged). After removing voltage from the power supply, wait a minimum of 10 seconds before re-energizing the power supply. This wait allows the initial conditions to be firmly established before the device is re-energized. The limit values given in Technical Data (Chapter 10) must not be exceeded, neither during testing nor during commissioning. When testing the device with secondary test equipment, make sure that no other measurement quantities are connected and that the TRIP command lines and possibly the CLOSE command lines to the circuit breakers are interrupted, unless otherwise specified. DANGER! Hazardous voltages during interruptions in secondary circuits of current transformers Non-observance of the following measure will result in death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage. Short-circuit the current transformer secondary circuits before current connections to the device are opened. For the commissioning switching operations have to be carried out. A prerequisite for the prescribed tests is that these switching operations can be executed without danger. They are accordingly not meant for operational checks. WARNING! Warning of dangers evolving from improper primary tests Non-observance of the following measures can result in death, personal injury or substantial property damage. Primary test may only be carried out by qualified personnel, who are familiar with the commissioning of protection systems, the operation of the plant and the safety rules and regulations (switching, earthing, etc.). SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 237 Mounting and Commissioning 3.3 Commissioning 3.3.1 Test Mode / Transmission Block If the device is connected to a central or main computer system via the SCADA interface, then the information that is transmitted can be influenced. This is only possible with some of the protocols available (see Table Protocol-dependent functions" in the Appendix A.5). If Test mode is set ON, then a message sent by a SIPROTEC 4 device to the main system has an additional test bit. This bit allows the message to be recognized as resulting from testing and not an actual fault or power system event. Furthermore it can be determined by activating the Transmission block that no indications at all are transmitted via the system interface during test mode. The SIPROTEC 4 System Description /1/ describes how to activate and deactivate test mode and blocked data transmission. Note that when DIGSI is being used, the program must be in the Online operating mode for the test features to be used. 3.3.2 Testing System Interfaces Prefacing Remarks If the device features a system interface and uses it to communicate with the control centre, the DIGSI device operation can be used to test if messages are transmitted correctly. This test option should however definitely not be used while the device is in service on a live system. DANGER! Danger evolving from operating the equipment (e.g. circuit breakers, disconnectors) by means of the test function Non-observance of the following measure will result in death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage. Equipment used to allow switching such as circuit breakers or disconnectors is to be checked only during commissioning. Do not under any circumstances check them by means of the testing mode during real" operation performing transmission and reception of messages via the system interface. Note After termination of the hardware test, the device will reboot. Thereby, all annunciation buffers are erased. If required, these buffers should be extracted with DIGSI prior to the test. The interface test is carried out using DIGSI in the Online operating mode: * Open the Online directory by double-clicking; the operating functions for the device appear. * Click on Test; the function selection appears in the right half of the screen. * Double-click on Testing Messages for System Interface shown in the list view. The dialog box Generate Annunciations opens (refer to the following figure). Structure of the Test Dialogue Box In the column Indication the display texts of all indications are displayed which were allocated to the system interface in the matrix. In the column Status SCHEDULED the user has to define the value for the messages to be tested. Depending on the indication type, several input fields are offered (e.g. ON"/ OFF"). By doubleclicking onto one of the fields the required value can be selected from the list. 238 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Mounting and Commissioning 3.3 Commissioning Figure 3-16 System interface test with dialog box: Generating indications - Example Changing the Operating State On clicking one of the buttons in the column Action you will be prompted for the password No. 6 (for hardware test menus). After correct entry of the password, individual annunciations can be initiated. To do so, click on the button Send in the corresponding line. The corresponding annunciation is issued and can be read out either from the event log of the SIPROTEC 4 device or from the substation control center. As long as the window is open, further tests can be performed. Test in Message Direction For all information that is transmitted to the central station test in Status Scheduled the desired options in the list which appears: * Make sure that each checking process is carried out carefully without causing any danger (see above and refer to DANGER!) * Click on Send in the function to be tested and check whether the transmitted information reaches the central station and shows the desired reaction. Data which are normally linked via binary inputs (first character >") are likewise indicated to the central station with this procedure. The function of the binary inputs itself is tested separately. Exiting the Test Mode To end the System Interface Test, click on Close. The device is briefly out of service while the start-up routine is executed. The dialogue box closes. Test in Command Direction The information transmitted in command direction must be indicated by the central station. Check whether the reaction is correct. SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 239 Mounting and Commissioning 3.3 Commissioning 3.3.3 Checking the Binary Inputs and Outputs Prefacing Remarks The binary inputs, outputs, and LEDs of a SIPROTEC 4 device can be individually and precisely controlled in DIGSI. This feature is used to verify control wiring from the device to plant equipment (operational checks) during commissioning. This test option should however definitely not" be used while the device is in service on a live system. DANGER! Danger evolving from operating the equipment (e.g. circuit breakers, disconnectors) by means of the test function Non-observance of the following measure will result in death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage. Equipment used to allow switching such as circuit breakers or disconnectors is to be checked only during commissioning. Do not under any circumstances check them by means of the testing mode during real" operation performing transmission and reception of messages via the system interface. Note After termination of the hardware test, the device will reboot. Thereby, all annunciation buffers are erased. If required, these buffers should be extracted with DIGSI prior to the test. The hardware test can be carried out using DIGSI in the Online operating mode: * Open the Online directory by double-clicking; the operating functions for the device appear. * Click on Test; the function selection appears in the right half of the screen. * Double-click in the list view on Hardware Test. The dialog box of the same name opens (see the following figure). Structure of the Test Dialogue Box The dialog box is divided into three groups: BI for binary inputs, REL for output relays, and LED for light-emitting diodes. On the left of each group is an accordingly labelled button. By double-clicking these buttons you can show or hide the individual information of the selected group. In the column Status the current status of the particular hardware component is displayed. It is displayed symbolically. The actual states of the binary inputs and outputs are displayed by the symbol of opened and closed switch contacts, those of the LEDs by a symbol of a lit or extinguished LED. The opposite state of each element is displayed in the column Scheduled. The display is made in plain text. The right-most column indicates the commands or messages that are configured (masked) to the hardware components. 240 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Mounting and Commissioning 3.3 Commissioning Figure 3-17 Test of the Binary Inputs and Outputs -- Example Changing the Operating State To change the condition of a hardware component, click on the associated switching field in the Scheduled column. Password No. 6 (if activated during configuration) will be requested before the first hardware modification is allowed. After entry of the correct password a condition change will be executed. Further condition changes remain possible while the dialog box is open. Test of the Binary Outputs Each individual output relay can be energized allowing a check of the wiring between the output relay of the 6MD66x and the system, without having to generate the message that is assigned to the relay. As soon as the first change of state for any of the output relays is initiated, all output relays are separated from the internal device functions, and can only be operated by the hardware test function. This means, that e.g. a TRIP command coming from a control command from the operator panel to an output relay cannot be executed. Proceed as follows in order to check the output relay : * Ensure that the switching of the output relay can be executed without danger (see above under DANGER!). * Each output relay must be tested via the corresponding Scheduled-cell in the dialog box. * The test sequence must be terminated (refer to margin heading Exiting the Procedure"), to avoid the initiation of inadvertent switching operations by further tests. SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 241 Mounting and Commissioning 3.3 Commissioning Test of the Binary Inputs To test the wiring between the plant and the binary inputs of the 6MD66x, the condition in the system which initiates the binary input must be generated and the response of the device checked. To do this, the dialog box Hardware Test must again be opened to view the physical state of the binary inputs. The password is not yet required. Proceed as follows in order to check the binary inputs: * Activate in the system each of the functions which cause the binary inputs. * The response of the device must be checked in the Status column of the dialog box. To do this, the dialog box must be updated. The options may be found below under the margin heading Updating the Display". * Terminate the test sequence (see below under the margin heading Exiting the Procedure"). If however the effect of a binary input must be checked without carrying out any switching in the plant, it is possible to trigger individual binary inputs with the hardware test function. As soon as the first state change of any binary input is triggered and the password no. 6 has been entered, all binary inputs are separated from the plant and can only be activated via the hardware test function. Test of the LEDs The LEDs may be tested in a similar manner to the other input/output components. As soon as you have initiated the first state change for any LED, all LEDs are disconnected from the functionality of the device and can only be operated by the hardware test function. This means e.g. that no LED is illuminated anymore by a device function or by pressing the LED reset button. Updating the Display During the opening of the dialog box Hardware Test the operating states of the hardware components which are current at this time are read in and displayed. An update occurs: * for each hardware component, if a command to change the condition is successfully performed, * for all hardware components if the Update button is clicked, * for all hardware components with cyclical updating (cycle time is 20 seconds) if the Automatic Update (20sec) field is marked. Exiting the Test Mode To end the hardware test, click on Close. The dialog box closes. The device becomes unavailable for a brief start-up period immediately after this. Then all hardware components are returned to the operating conditions determined by the plant settings. 242 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Mounting and Commissioning 3.3 Commissioning 3.3.4 Checking for Breaker Failure Protection General If the device is equipped with the breaker failure protection and this function is used, the integration of this protection function into the system must be tested under practical conditions. Because of the manifold applications and various configuration possibilities of the plant it is not possible to give a detailed description of the necessary test steps. It is important to consider the local conditions and the protection and plant drawings. Before starting the circuit tests it is recommended to isolate the circuit breaker of the feeder to be tested at both ends, i.e. line disconnectors and busbar disconnectors should be open so that the breaker can be operated without risk. Caution! Also for tests on the local circuit breaker of the feeder a trip command to the surrounding circuit breakers can be issued for the busbar. Non-observance of the following measure can result in minor personal injury or property damage. First disable the trip commands to the adjacent (busbar) breakers, e.g. by interrupting the associated control voltages. Before the breaker is closed again for normal operation the trip command of the feeder protection routed to the circuit breaker must be disconnected so that the trip command can only be initiated by the breaker failure protection. Although the following list does not claim to be complete, it may also contain points which are to be ignored in the current application. Auxiliary Contacts of the CB The circuit breaker auxiliary contact(s) form an essential part of the breaker failure protection system in case they have been connected to the device. Make sure the correct assignment has been checked. External Initiation Conditions If the breaker failure protection can also be started by external protection devices, the external start conditions are checked. Depending on the device version and the setting of the breaker failure protection, 1-pole or 3-pole trip are possible. The pole discrepancy check of the device or the actual breaker may lead to 3-pole tripping after 1-pole tripping. Therefore check first how the parameters of the breaker failure protection are set. See also Section 2.9.2, addresses 3901 onwards. In order for the breaker failure protection to be started, a current must flow at least through the monitored phase and the earth. This may be a secondary injected current. After every start the indication BF Start" (no. 1461) must appear in the spontaneous or fault indications. If only 1-pole initiation is possible: * Start by 1-pole trip command of the external protection L1: Binary input functions >BF Start L1" and, if necessary, >BF release" (in spontaneous or fault indications). Trip command (depending on settings). * Start by 1-pole trip command of the external protection L2: Binary input functions >BF Start L2" and, if necessary, >BF release" (in spontaneous or fault indications). Trip command (depending on settings). SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 243 Mounting and Commissioning 3.3 Commissioning * Start by 1-pole trip command of the external protection L3: Binary input functions >BF Start L3" and, if necessary, >BF release" (in spontaneous or fault indications). Trip command (dependent on settings). * Start by 3-pole trip command of the external protection via all three binary inputs L1, L2 and L3: Binary input functions >BF Start L1", >BF Start L2" and >BF Start L3" and, if necessary, >BF release" (in spontaneous or fault indications). 3-pole trip command. For 3-pole initiation: * Start by 3-pole trip command of the external protection : Binary input functions >BF Start 3pole" and, if necessary, >BF release" (in spontaneous or fault indications). Trip command (dependent on settings). Switch off test current. If start is possible without current flow: * Starting by trip command of the external protection without current flow: Binary input functions >BF Start w/o I" and, if necessary, >BF release" (in spontaneous or fault indications). Trip command (dependent on settings). Busbar Tripping The most important thing is the check of the correct distribution of the trip commands to the adjacent circuit breakers in case of breaker failure. The adjacent circuit breakers are those of all feeders which must be tripped in order to ensure interruption of the fault current should the local breaker fail. These are therefore the circuit breakers of all feeders which feed the busbar or busbar section to which the feeder with the fault is connected. A general detailed test guide cannot be specified because the layout of the adjacent circuit breakers largely depends on the system topology. In particular with multiple busbars the trip distribution logic for the surrounding circuit breakers must be checked. Here check for every busbar section that all circuit breakers which are connected to the same busbar section as the feeder circuit breaker under observation are tripped, and no other breakers. Tripping of the Remote End If the trip command of the circuit breaker failure protection must also trip the circuit breaker at the remote end of the feeder under observation, the transmission channel for this remote trip must also be checked. This is done together with transmission of other signals according to Sections Testing of the Teleprotection Scheme with ..." further below. Termination of the Checks All temporary measures taken for testing must be undone, e.g. especially switching states, interrupted trip commands, changes to setting values or individually switched off protection functions. 244 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Mounting and Commissioning 3.3 Commissioning 3.3.5 Triggering Oscillographic Recording for Test In order to verify the reliability of the protection relay even during inrush processes, closing tests can be carried out to conclude the commissioning process. Oscillograhpic records provide the maximum information about the behaviour of the protection relay. Prerequisite Along with the capability of storing fault recordings via pickup of the protection function, the 6MD66x also has the capability of capturing the same data when commands are given to the device via the DIGSI software, the serial interface, or a binary input. For the latter, the information >Trig.Wave.Cap." must be allocated to a binary input. In this case, a fault record is triggered e.g. via binary input when the protected object is energized. Such a test fault record triggered externally (i.e. not caused by pickup of a protection function) is processed like a normal oscillographic record, i.e. a fault log with number is generated which univocally identifies an oscillographic record. However, these recordings are not displayed in the trip log as they are not fault events. Start Test Measurement Recording To trigger test measurement recording with DIGSI, click on Test in the left part of the window. Double click in the list view the Test Wave Form entry (see Figure 3-18). Figure 3-18 Triggering oscillographic recording with DIGSI -- example Oscillographic recording is immediately started. During the recording, an annunciation is output in the left area of the status line. Bar segments additionally indicate the progress of the procedure. The SIGRA or the Comtrade Viewer program is required to view and analyse the oscillographic data. SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 245 Mounting and Commissioning 3.3 Commissioning 3.3.6 Testing User-defined Functions CFC Logic The device has a vast capability for allowing functions to be defined by the user, especially with the CFC logic. Any special function or logic added to the device must be checked. Naturally, general test procedures cannot be given. Rather, the configuration of these user defined functions and the necessary associated conditions must be known and verified. Of particular importance are possible interlocking conditions of the switchgear (circuit breakers, isolators, etc.). 3.3.7 Trip/Close Test for the Configured Resource Control by Local Command If the configured operating devices were not switched sufficiently in the hardware test already described, all configured switching devices must be switched on and off from the device via the integrated control element. The feedback information of the circuit breaker position injected via binary inputs is read out at the device and compared with the actual breaker position. With 6MD66x this is easy to do with the control display. The switching procedure is described in the SIPROTEC 4 System Description.The switching authority must be set in correspondence with the source of commands used. With the switch mode it is possible to select between interlocked and non-interlocked switching. Note that non-interlocked switching constitutes a safety risk. DANGER! A test cycle successfully started by the automatic reclosure function can lead to the closing of the circuit breaker! Non-observance of the following statement will result in death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage. Be fully aware that OPEN-commands sent to the circuit breaker can result in a trip-close-trip event of the circuit breaker by an external reclosing device. Control from a Remote Control Centre If the device is connected to a remote substation via a system interface, the corresponding switching tests may also be checked from the substation. Please also take into consideration that the switching authority is set in correspondence with the source of commands used. 246 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Mounting and Commissioning 3.4 Final Preparation of the Device 3.4 Final Preparation of the Device Firmly tighten all screws. Tighten all terminal screws, including those that are not used. Caution! Inadmissable tightening torques Non-observance of the following measure can result in minor personal injury or property damage. The tightening torques must not be exceeded as the threads and terminal chambers may otherwise be damaged! In case service settings were changed, check if they are correct. Check if power system data, control and auxiliary functions to be found with the configuration parameters are set correctly (Section 2). All desired elements and functions must be set ON. Keep a copy of all of the in-service settings on a PC. Check the internal clock of the device. If necessary, set the clock or synchronize the clock if the element is not automatically synchronized. For assistance, refer to the SIPROTEC 4 System Description /1/. The indication buffers are deleted under MAIN MENU Annunciation Set/Reset, so that in the future they only contain information on actual events and states (see also /1/). The counters in the switching statistics should be reset to the values that were existing prior to the testing (see also SIPROTEC 4 System Description /1/). The counters of the operational measured values (e.g. operation counter, if available) are reset under Main Menu Measurement Reset. Press the ESC key, several times if necessary, to return to the default display. The default display appears in the display (e.g. display of operation measured values). Clear the LEDs on the front panel by pressing the LED key, so that they only show real events and states. In this context, also output relays probably memorized are reset. Pressing the LED key also serves as a test for the LEDs on the front panel because they should all light when the button is pushed. Any LEDs that are lit after the clearing attempt are displaying actual conditions. The green RUN" LED must be on. The red ERROR" LED must not be lit. Close the protective switches. If test switches are available, then these must be in the operating position. The device is now ready for operation. SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 247 Mounting and Commissioning 3.4 Final Preparation of the Device 248 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Technical Data 4 This chapter provides the technical data of the device SIPROTEC 6MD66x and its individual functions, including the limiting values that under no circumstances may be exceeded. The electrical and functional data for the maximum functional scope are followed by the mechanical specifications with dimensional diagrams. 4.1 General 250 4.2 Switching device control 262 4.3 Circuit Breaker Synchronisation 263 4.4 User defined functions (CFC) 265 4.5 Operational measured values 270 4.6 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection (optional) 272 4.7 Automatic Reclosure (optional) 274 4.8 Inter-relay communication 275 4.9 External instrument transformers 276 4.10 Additional functions 277 4.11 Dimensions 278 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 249 Technical Data 4.1 General 4.1 General 4.1.1 Analog Inputs Current Inputs Rated system frequency fNom 50 Hz or 60 Hz Rated current INom 1 A or 5 A (adjustable) Burden per phase and ground path - at IN = 1 A Approx. 0.05 VA - at IN = 5 A Approx. 0.3 VA Current overload capability - thermal (RMS) 200 A for 1 s 15 A for 10 s 12 A continuous - dynamic (peak value) 250 INom (half-cycle) Precision (MLFB pos. 7 = 1.5) 0.5% of measured value at 50% to 120 % IN (under reference conditions) Precision for 150% In (MLFB pos. 7 = 2.6) 0.5% of measured value at 50% to 150% IN (under reference conditions) Accuracy for 200% In (MLFB-Pos. 7 = 3,7) 0.5 % of measured value for 50 % to 200 % IN (under reference conditions) Voltage Inputs Secondary nominal voltage 80 V to 125 V Measuring range 0 V to 170 V Burden at 100 V Approx. 0.3 VA Voltage overload capacity - thermal (RMS) 230 V continuous Precision 0.5 % of measured value at 50 % to 120 % UNom(under reference conditions) Measuring Transducer Inputs 250 Input direct current -20 mA to +20 mA Overload capability 100 mA continuous Input resistance 10 Power input 5.8 mW at 24 mA Precision < 1 % of nominal value (under reference conditions) SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Technical Data 4.1 General Limit Range Behaviour, Current Overflow (MLFB pos. 7 = 1.5) Phase current > 1.2 x rated current The derived quantities P, Q, S, cos, sin and also overflow as a result. Overflow for 150% In (MLFB pos. 7 = 2.6) Phase current > 1.5 x rated current The derived quantities P, Q, S, cos, sin and also overflow as a result. Overflow for 200% In (MLFB-Pos. 7 = 3,7) Phase current > 2.0 times the nominal current As a consequence, the derived quantities P, Q, S, cos, sin and also go into the overflow. Limit Range Behaviour, Voltage Overflow Secondary input voltage at the device > 120 Veff The derived quantities P, Q, S, cos, sin and also overflow as a result. Limit Range Behaviour, Power Zero, invalid A phase voltage < 0.1 x rated voltage or the nominal apparanet power S < 1 % Overflow A phase current or a phase-earth voltage in overflow Limit Range Behaviour, cos, sin, Zero, invalid A phase voltage < 0.1 x rated voltage or the nominal apparanet power S < 1 % Overflow A phase current or a phase-earth voltage in overflow Limit Range Behaviour, Frequency Zero, invalid Frequency < 45 Hz or secondary input voltage at device < 10 Vrms Overflow Frequency > 65 Hz SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 251 Technical Data 4.1 General 4.1.2 Auxiliary voltage Direct Voltage Power supply via integrated converter Nominal auxiliary direct voltage Uaux DC 24 V to 48 V DC 60 V/ 110 V/ 125 V Permissible voltage ranges DC 19 V to 58 V DC 48 V to 150 V Nominal auxiliary direct voltage Uaux DC 110 V/ 125 V/ 220 V/ 250 V Permissible voltage ranges 88 V to 300 V Superimposed AC ripple voltage, Peak to peak, IEC 60 255-11 15 % of the auxiliary voltage Quiescent power consumption Approx. 10.0 W Power consumption plus energised relay Bridging time for failure/short-circuit, IEC 60 255 255-11 Approx. 0.27 W 50 ms for U 110 V 20 ms for U 24 V Alternating voltage Power supply via integrated converter 4.1.3 Nominal auxiliary AC UH AC 115 V AC 230 V Permissible voltage ranges AC 92 V to 132 V AC 184 V to 265 V Binary inputs and outputs Binary inputs 252 Variant Number 6MD662*- 35 (configurable) 6MD663*- 50 (configurable) 6MD664*- 65 (configurable) Range of nominal direct voltage 24 V to 250 V , bipolar Peak current at high level 80 mA ( = 1.5 ms) Binary input BI1....65 Current consumption, energised (independent of the control voltage) Approx. 1.8 mA per BI Pickup times approx. 4 ms Switching thresholds adjustable with jumpers for nominal direct voltages 24 V, 48 V, 60 V Uhigh 19 V Ulow 10 V for nominal direct voltages 110 V Uhigh 88 V Ulow 44 V for nominal direct voltages 220 V to 250 V Uhigh 176 V Ulow 88 V Maximum allowable direct voltage 300 V Impulse filter on input 220 nF at 220 V with recovery time > 60 ms SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Technical Data 4.1 General Output Relays Flag/command relay1) Number and Information According to the order variant (allocatable) Order variant 6MD662*- 25 6MD663*- 35 6MD664*- 45 Contacts per relay 1 NO contact Turn on time < 9 ms Turn off time < 4 ms Switching capability ON 1000 W/VA 1) Switching capability OFF 30 VA 40 W resistive 25 W/VA at L/R 50ms Switching voltage 250 V Permissible current per contact / inrush peak 5 A continuous 30 A 0.5 s Permissible current per contact On common path Life contact 5 A continuous 30 A for 0.5 s 1 with 1 NO contact or 1 NC contact (switchable) Switching capability ON 30 W/VA Switching capability OFF 20 VA Switching voltage 250 V Permissible current 1 4.1.4 1 A continuous )Maximum permissible number of simultaneously energised relays: 29 Communications interfaces Operator Interface Connection Front side, non-isolated, RS232, 9 pin D-subminiature female connector for connection of a PC Operation with DIGSI Transmission Speed Min. 4800 Bd; max. 115 200 Bd; Factory Setting: 38 400 Bd; Parity: HE'D Maximum Distance of Transmission 49 feet (15 m) SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 253 Technical Data 4.1 General Service/Modem Interface Connection Isolated interface for data transfer Operation with DIGSI(R) Transmission speed min. 4800 Bd; max. 115 200 Bd; Factory setting 38 400 Bd RS232/RS485 RS232/RS485 according to the ordering variant Connection for flush-mounted case Rear panel, mounting location C", 9-pin Dsubminiature female connector Surface-mounting housing At the housing mounted case on the case bottom; Shielded data cable Test voltage 500 V; 50 Hz RS232 Channel distance 49.215 ft. (15 m) RS485 Channel distance 3281 ft. (1000 m) Fibre optic cable (FO) FO connector type ST connector Connection for flush-mounted case Rear panel, mounting location D" For panel surface-mounted case At the housing mounted case on the case bottom Optical wavelength = 820 nm Laser Class I according to EN Using glass fibre 50/125 m or using glass 60825-1/-2 fibre 62.5/125 m Permissible link signal attenua- max. 8 dB, with glass fibre 62.5/125 m tion Channel distance max. 0.93 mi. (1.5 km) Character idle state Selectable, factory setting Light off" HDLC 125 kBd, 250 kBd, 1 MBd, 1.25 MBd, 2 MBd, 2.5 MBd, 3125 MBd UART 115 kBd, 250 kBd HDLC 125 kBd UART 500 kBd Inter-device Communication Interface Transmission speed electrical optical Isolated interface for data transfer RS485 254 Connection for flush-mounted case Rear panel, mounting location C", 9-pin Dsubminiature female connector Surface-mounting case At the housing mounted case on the case bottom; Shielded data cable Test voltage 500 V; 50 Hz Channel distance max. 1000 m. (1 km) SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Technical Data 4.1 General System Interface PROFIBUS FMS and PROFIBUS DP RS485 Fibre optic cable FO Connection for flush-mounted case Rear panel, mounting location E", 9-pin Dsubminiature female connector For panel surface-mounted case At the housing mounted case on the case bottom Test voltage 500 V; 50 Hz Transmission speed up to 1.5 MBd Channel distance 1000 m at 93.75 kBd 500 m at 187.5 kBd 200 m at 1.5 MBd FO connector type ST connector single ring / double ring according to the order for FMS; for DP only double ring available Connection for flush-mounted case Rear panel, mounting location E" For panel surface-mounted case In console housing on the bottom side, only RS485 1) Transmission speed up to 1.5 MBd Recommended: > 500 kBd with normal casing 57.6 kBd for the detached operation panel Optical wavelength = 820 nm Laser Class I according to EN 60825-1/-2 Using glass fibre 50/125 m or using glass fibre 62.5/125 m Permissible link signal attenua- Max. 8 dB, with glass fibre 62.5/125 m tion Maximum channel distance between two modules with redundant optical ring topology, baud rates 500 kB/s and glass fibre 62.5/125 m 6562 ft. (2000 m) for glass fibre 62.5/125 m With plastic fibre: 6.562 ft. (2 m) At 500 kB/s, 5249.6 ft. (1600 m) at 1.5 MB/s, 530 m IEC 60,870-5-103 RS485 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Isolated interface for data transfer to a master terminal Connection for flush-mounted case Rear panel, mounting location E", 9-pin Dsubminiature female connector For panel surface-mounted case At the housing mounted case on the case bottom Test voltage 500 V; 50 Hz Transmission speed min. 4.8 kBd, max. 38.4 kBd Factory setting 38.4 kBd Channel distance max. 0.621 mi. (1 km) 255 Technical Data 4.1 General Fibre optics (FO) FO connector type ST connector Connection for Flush-Mounted Housing Rear panel, mounting location E" For surface-mounted case In console housing on the bottom side, only RS485 1) optical wavelength = 820 nm Laser Class I according to EN 60825-1/-2 When glass fibre used 50/125 m or 62.5/125 m when using fibre optics Admissible optical signal atten- Max. 8 dB, with glass fibre 62.5/125 m uation Channel distance 1.5 km. (2.5 kg) Character idle state Selectable, factory setting Light off" Ethernet electrical (EN 100) for IEC61850 Connection for Flush-Mounted Housing Connection for panel surface mounting housing Rear panel, mounting location B" 2 x RJ45 female connector 100BaseT acc. to IEEE802.3 Not available Test voltage (female connector) 500 V; 50 Hz 1) Transmission rate 100 MBit/s Channel distance 20 m. (2.5 kg) Common use of the OLM/G12 (OLM V3) with the optical PROFIBUS interfaces of the SIPROTEC(R) 4 devices may only use the OLM/G12 in compatibility mode (DIL switch S7 = ON)! The reason for this is the fact that the redundancy technology of the OLM V2 is implemented in the SIPROTEC(R) PROFIBUS interfaces, and this varies from OLM V3. An OLM V3 behaves in the same manner as an OLM V2 in compatibility mode. With an incorrect setting, secure data transmission cannot be guaranteed. Time Synchronisation Interface Time Synchronization DCF 77 / IRIG B Signal (telegram format IRIG-B000) Connection for Flush-Mounted Housing Rear panel, mounting location A" 9-pin D-subminiature female connector For surface-mounted case At two-tier terminals on housing bottom Rated signal voltages Selectable 5 V, 12 V or 24 V Signal Levels and Burdens: Nominal signal input voltage 5V 256 12 V 24 V UIIHigh 6.0 V 15.8 V 31 V UILow 1.0 V at IILow = 0.25 mA 1.4 V at IILow = 0.25 mA 1.9 V at IILow = 0.25 mA IIHigh 4.5 mA to 9.4 mA 4.5 mA to 9.3 mA 4.5 mA to 8.7 mA RI 890 at UI = 4 V 1930 at UI = 8.7 V 3780 at UI = 17 V 640 at UI = 6 V 1700 at UI = 15.8 V 3560 at UI = 31 V SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Technical Data 4.1 General 4.1.5 Electrical Test Regulations Standards: IEC 60255 (product standards) ANSI/IEEE Std C37.90.0/.1/.2 DIN 57435 Part 303 See also standards for individual tests Isolation Test Standards: IEC 60255-5 and IEC 60870-2-1 High Voltage Test (routine test) All circuits except 2.5 kV (rms), 50 Hz power supply, Binary Inputs, Communication Interface and Time Synchronization Interfaces High voltage test (routine test) auxiliary voltage and DC 3.5 kV binary inputs Voltage test (routine test): only isolated communica- AC 500 V, 50 Hz tion and time synchronisation interfaces Impulse Voltage Test (type test) All Circuits Except 5 kV (peak value); 1.2/50 s; 0.5 J; Communication and Time Synchronization Interfac- 3 positive and 3 negative pulses at intervals of 1 s es, Class III EMC Tests for Interference Immunity (Type Tests) Standards: IEC 60255-6 und -22, (product standards) EN 50082-2 (generic standard) DIN 57435 Teil 303 High frequency test IEC 60255-22-1, class III and VDE 0435 part 303, Class III 2,5 kV (peak value); 1 MHz; = 15 s; 400 pulses per s; test duration 2 s; Ri = 200 Electrostatic discharge IEC 60255-22-2, Class IV and IEC 61000-4-2, Class IV 8 kV contact discharge; 15 kV air discharge, both polarities; 150 pF; Ri = 330 Exposure to HF field, non-modulated IEC 60255-22-3 (Report), Class III 10 V/m; 27 MHz to 500 MHz Irradiation with HF field, amplitude modulated IEC 61000-4-3, Class III 10 V/m; 80 MHz to 1000 MHz; 80 % AM; 1 kHz Irradiation with HF field, pulse modulated IEC 61000-4-3/ENV 50 204, Class III 10 V/m; 900 MHz; repetition frequency 200 Hz; duty cycle of 50 % Fast Transient Disturbance Variables / Burst IEC 60255-22-4 and IEC 61000-4-4, Class IV 4 kV; 5/50 ns; 5 kHz; burst length = 15 ms; repetition 300 ms; both polarities; Ri = 50 ; test duration 1 min High energy surge voltages (SURGE), IEC 61000-4-5 Installation Class 3 Auxiliary voltage Impuls: 1,2/50 s Measuring inputs, binary inputs and relay outputs common mode: 2 kV; 12 ; 9 F diff. mode: 1 kV; 2 ; 18 F common mode: 2 kV; 42 ; 0,5 F diff. mode: 1 kV; 42 ; 0,5 F Line conducted HF, amplitude modulated IEC 61000-4-6, Class III 10 V; 150 kHz to 80 MHz; 80 % AM; 1 kHz Power System Frequency Magnetic Field IEC 61000-4-8, Class IV IEC 60255-6 30 A/m continuous; 300 A/m for 3 s; 50 Hz 0.5 mT; 50 Hz SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 257 Technical Data 4.1 General Oscillatory Surge Withstand Capability ANSI/IEEE Std C37.90.1 2.5 to 3 kV (peak value); 1 to 1.5 MHz; damped oscillation; 50 surges per s; test duration 2 s; Ri = 150 to 200 Fast Transient Surge Withstand Cap. ANSI/IEEE Std C37.90.1 4 kV to 5 kV: 10/150 ns: 50 pulses per s; both polarities: test duration 2 s: Ri = 80 Radiated Electromagnetic Interference ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2 35 V/m; 25 MHz to 1000 MHz Damped Oscillations IEC 60694, IEC 61000-4-12 2.5 kV (peak value), polarity alternating 100 kHz, 1 MHz, 10 MHz and 50 MHz, Ri = 200 EMC Tests for Interference Emission (Type Test) Standard: EN 50081-* (generic standard) Radio Noise Voltage to Lines, Only Power Supply Voltage IEC-CISPR 22 150 kHz up to 30 MHz Limit Class B Interference field strength IEC-CISPR 22 30 MHz to 1000 MHz Limit Class B Harmonic Currents on the Network Lead at 230 VAC Device is to be assigned Class D; (applies only for IEC 61000-3-2 devices with > 50 VA power consumption) Voltage fluctuations and flicker on the network incoming feeder at 230 VAC IEC 61000-3-3 258 Limits are observed SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Technical Data 4.1 General 4.1.6 Mechanical Tests Vibration and Shock Stress during Stationary Use Standards: IEC 60255-21 and IEC 60068 Oscillation IEC 60255-21-1, Class 2; IEC 60068-2-6 Sinusoidal 10 Hz to 60 Hz: 0.075 mm amplitude; 60 Hz to 150 Hz: 1 g acceleration Frequency sweep rate 1 Octave/min 20 cycles in 3 orthogonal axes Shock IEC 60255-21-2, Class 1; IEC 60068-2-27 Semi-sinusoidal 5 g acceleration, duration 11 ms, each 3 shocks in both directions of the 3 axes Seismic Vibration IEC 60255-21-3, Class 1; IEC 60068-3-3 Sinusoidal 1 Hz to 8 Hz: 3.5 mm amplitude (horizontal axis) 1 Hz to 8 Hz: 1.5 mm amplitude (vertical axis) 8 Hz to 35 Hz: 1 g acceleration (horizontal axis) 8 Hz to 35 Hz: 0.5 g acceleration (vertical axis) Frequency sweep 1 octave/min 1 cycle in 3 orthogonal axes Vibration and Shock Stress during Transport Standards: IEC 60255-21 and IEC 60068 Oscillation IEC 60255-21-1, Class 2; IEC 60068-2-6 Sinusoidal 5 Hz to 8 Hz: 7.5 mm amplitude; 8 Hz to 15 Hz: 2 g acceleration Frequency sweep 1 octave/min 20 cycles in 3 orthogonal axes Shock IEC 60255-21-2, Class 1; IEC 60068-2-27 Semi-sinusoidal 15 g acceleration, duration 11 ms, 3 shocks each in both directions of the 3 axes Continuous Shock IEC 60255-21-2, Class 1; IEC 60068-2-29 Semi-sinusoidal 10 g acceleration, duration 16 ms, 1000 shocks each in both directions of the 3 axes Note: All stress test data apply for devices in factory packaging. SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 259 Technical Data 4.1 General 4.1.7 Climatic stress Temperatures Standards: IEC 60255-6 Type tested (acc. to IEC 60086-2-1 and -2, Test Bd, for 16 h) -5 C to +55 C Permissible temporary operating temperature (tested for 96 h) -20 C to +70 C in quiescent state, i.e. no pickup and no indications (legibility of display may be restricted from +131 F (+55 C)) Recommended for permanent operation (accord- +23 F to +131 F (-5 C to +55 C) ing to IEC 60 255-6) Limiting temperatures for storage -13 F to +131 F (-25 C to +55 C) Limit temperatures during transport -13 F to +158 F (-25 C to +70 C) Storage and transport of the device with factory packaging! Limiting temperatures for normal operation (i.e. output relays not energized) -4 F to +158 F (-20 C to +70 C) Limiting temperatures with maximum load (max. -23 F to +104 F (-5 C to +40 C) cont. permissible input and output quantities) Humidity Permissible humidity Mean value per year 75 % relative humidity; on 56 days of the year up to 93 % relative humidity; condensation must be avoided! Siemens recommends that all devices be installed such that they are not exposed to direct sunlight, nor subject to large fluctuations in temperature that may cause condensation to occur. 4.1.8 Deployment Conditions The protective device is designed for use in an industrial environment and an electrical utility environment. Proper installation procedures should be followed to ensure electromagnetic compatibility (EMC). In addition, the following is recommended: * All contacts and relays that operate in the same cubicle, cabinet, or relay panel as the numerical protective device should, as a rule, be equipped with suitable surge suppression components. * For substations with operating voltages of 100 kV and above, all external cables should be shielded with a conductive shield grounded at both ends. For substations with lower operating voltages, no special measures are normally required. * Do not withdraw or insert individual modules or boards while the protective device is energized. In withdrawn condition, some components are electrostatically endangered; during handling the ESD standards (for Electrostatic Sensitive Devices) must be observed. They are not endangered when inserted into the case. 260 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Technical Data 4.1 General 4.1.9 Construction designs Case 7XP20 Dimensions See dimensional drawings, Section 4.11 Weight (maximum number of components ) approx. 662 in flush-mount case 10 kg. (2.5 kg) 663 in flush-mount case 23.1525 lb. (10.5 kg) 664 in flush-mount case 24.255 lb. (11 kg) 663 in case for detachted operator panel 27.5625 lb. (12.5 kg) 664 in case for detachted operator panel 28.665 lb. (13 kg) Detached operator panel 5.5125 lb. (2.5 kg) International protection under IEC 60 529 For equipment of the flush-mount housing Front IP 51 Rear IP20 In flush-mount case and in model with detached operator panel Front IP 51 Rear IP 50 For personal protection IP 2x with cover cap SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 261 Technical Data 4.2 Switching device control 4.2 262 Switching device control Number of controlled switchgear units Depends on the number of binary inputs and outputs available - 662 2-pin command output: 5 switchgears 1 1/2-pin command output: 6 switchgears - 663 2-pin command output: 8 switchgears 1 1/2-pin command output: 10 switchgears - 664 2-pin command output: 11 switchgears 1 1/2-pin command output: 14 switchgears Interlocking Freely programmable interlocking Indications Single point, double point, output, tagging and tap indications, bit patterns and counters Commands Single command / double command Pulse and continuous outputs Switching command to circuit breaker 1-, 11/2 - and 2-pin Programmable logic controller PLC logic, graphic input tool Local control Control via menu control, control keys Assignment of function keys Remote control Using communication interfaces Using substation automation system (e.g. SICAM) Using DIGSI(R) (e.g. via Modem) SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Technical Data 4.3 Circuit Breaker Synchronisation 4.3 Circuit Breaker Synchronisation Operating modes Test programs Synchronisation check, Line de-energized -- busbar energized live bus / dead line dead bus and dead line bypassing, or combination of them Synchronisation Closing the circuit breaker under synchronous and asynchronous power conditions possible (with circuit breaker operating time) Voltages Maximum working voltage 20 V to 140 V (phase-to-phase) (1 V increments) V< for dead status V> for live status 1 V to 60 V (phase-to-phase) (1 V increments) 20 V to 125 V (phase-to-phase) (1 V increments) Tolerances Dropout 2 % of pickup value or 2 V Approx. 0.9 (V>) or 1.1 (V<); max. 1 V V measurements Quantity difference Tolerance 0.5 V to 50 V (phase-to-phase) (increments 0.1 V) 1V Synchronous power conditions Measurement Tolerance 1 to 90 (increments 1 ) 2 f-measurement Tolerance 10 mHz to 100 mHz (increments 1 mHz) 20 mHz The maximum permissible frequency difference depends on the circuit breaker operating time Max. angle error 5 for f 2 Hz Enable delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s (0.01 s increments) Asynchronous power conditions f-measurement Tolerance 0.03 Hz to 2.00 Hz (0.01 Hz increments) 20 mHz The maximum permissible frequency difference depends on the circuit breaker operating time Synchronous/asynchronous limits 10 mHz to 100 mHz (increments 1 mHz) Circuit breaker operating time 0.01 s to 0.60 s (0.01 s increments) Times Minimum measuring time approx. 50 ms approx. 0.5 s (for df/dt not corrected) approx. 1.6 s (for df/dt corrected) Synchronisation function delay after start 250 ms 1.5 s with active Filter LFO Maximum wait time (max. synchronisation duration 0.01 s to 600.00 s (0.01 s increments) Tolerance of all timers 1 % of setting value or 10 ms SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 263 Technical Data 4.3 Circuit Breaker Synchronisation Operating range Synchrocheck at rated frequency 264 50 Hz 4 Hz 60 Hz 4 Hz SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Technical Data 4.4 User defined functions (CFC) 4.4 User defined functions (CFC) Function blocks and their possible assignment to the task levels Function Block Explanation Sequence Level MW_ PLC1_ PLC_ SFS_ BEARB BEARB BEARB BEARB ABSVALUE Magnitude Calculation X -- -- -- ADD Addition X X X X ALARM Alarm X X X X AND AND - Gate X X X X BLINK Blink module X X X X BOOL_TO_CO Boolean to Control (conversion) -- X X -- BOOL_TO_DI Boolean to Double Point (conversion) -- X X X BOOL_TO_IC Bool to Internal SI, Conversion -- X X X BUILD_DI Create Double Point Annunciation -- X X X CMD_CANCEL Cancel Command -- -- -- X CMD_CHAIN Switching Sequence -- X X -- CMD_INF Command Information -- -- -- X COMPARE Metered value comparison X X X X CONNECT Connection -- X X X COUNTER Meter X X X X CV_GET Decodes a metered value X X X X D_FF D- Flipflop -- X X X D_FF_MEMO Status Memory for Restart X X X X DI_GET_STATUS Decode status of double-point indication X X X X DI_SET_STATUS Generate double-point indication with status X X X X DI_TO_BOOL Double Point to Boolean (conversion) -- X X X DINT_TO_REAL Adapter X X X X DIST_DECODE Converts a double-point indication with status into four single-point indications with status X X X X DIV Division X X X X DM_DECODE Decode Double Point X X X X DYN_OR Dynamic OR LIVE_ZERO X X X X X -- -- -- LONG_TIMER Timer (max.1193h) X X X X LOOP Feedback Loop X X X X LOWER_SETPOINT Lower Limit X -- -- -- MEMORY Data storage X X X X MUL Multiplication X X X X MV_GET_STATUS Decodes the status of a value X X X X MV_SET_STATUS Sets the status of a value X X X X NAND NAND - Gate X X X X NEG Negator X X X X NOR NOR - Gate X X X X SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 265 Technical Data 4.4 User defined functions (CFC) Function Block Explanation Sequence Level MW_ PLC1_ PLC_ SFS_ BEARB BEARB BEARB BEARB OR OR - Gate X X X X REAL_TO_DINT Adapter X X X X REAL_TO_UINT Conversion X X X X RISE_DETECT Edge detector X X X X RS_FF RS- Flipflop -- X X X RS_FF_MEMO RS- Flipflop with status memory -- X X X SI_GET_STATUS Decodes the status of a single-point indication X X X X SI_SET_STATUS Generates a single-point indication with status X X X X SQUARE_ROOT Root Extractor X X X X SR_FF SR- Flipflop -- X X X SR_FF_MEMO SR- Flipflop with status memory -- X X X ST_AND AND gate with status X X X X ST_NOT Inverter with status X X X X ST_OR OR gate with status X X X X SUB Substraction X X X X TIMER Timer -- X X -- TIMER_SHORT simple timer -- X X -- UINT_TO_REAL Conversion X X X X UPPER_SETPOINT Upper Limit X -- -- -- X_OR XOR - Gate X X X X ZERO_POINT Zero Supression X -- -- -- Device-specific CFC blocks Table 4-1 BOSTATE - The block reads out the status of an output relay and outputs it as a Boolean value. Name Type Meaning Default Input BO UINT Number of the output relay 0 Number STATE BOOL Status of the output relay FALSE Task levels: Recommendation: This block should be placed in the MW-BEARB level; it will be updated cyclically there. Note: In the task levels PLC1_BEARB and PLC_BEARB the changes of the output relay are not trigger event for these levels. This levels are only triggered by changes of indications routed to them. Behaviour of the inputs and If the output relay with the number BO is available and the status of the associoutputs: ated output relay is active, STATE = TRUE is set, otherwise STATE = FALSE. 266 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Technical Data 4.4 User defined functions (CFC) Table 4-2 Input Output ASWITCH - This block allows switching between two REAL inputs (RMS values). Name Type Meaning Default SWITCH BOOL Analog value selection FALSE IN1 REAL Analog value 0.0 IN2 REAL Analog value 0.0 OUT REAL Selected analog value Task levels: Recommendation: In the task levels PLC1_BEARB and PLC_BEARB since these are triggered directly. Note: If you are using this block in the task levels MW_BEARB and SFS_BEARB, a change of the SWITCH signal will only be recognized if it lasts longer than the processing cycle of the task level. Behaviour of the inputs and outputs: Table 4-3 COUNTACTIVE - This block calculates the number of active inputs. This block is a generic block for which you can define the number of the summands between 2... 120. Name Input Output Type Meaning Default X1 BOOL Input value FALSE X2 to X120 BOOL Input value FALSE Y UINT Number of the "TRUE" input values 0 Task levels: Recommendation: In the task levels PLC1_BEARB and PLC_BEARB since these are triggered directly. Note: If you are using this block in the task levels MW_BEARB and SFS_BEARB, a change of the SWITCH signal will only be recognized if it lasts longer than the processing cycle of the task level. Behaviour of the inputs and outputs: Info: The COUNTACTIVE block allows you to converge two Boolean inputs X1 and X2 to INTEGER (FALSE=0, TRUE=1) and add them. The result of the addition is delivered at the output Y. You can increase the number of inputs to maximal 120 via the context menu of the block. SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 267 Technical Data 4.4 User defined functions (CFC) General Limits Designation Limit Comments Maximum number of all CFC charts considering all task levels 32 When the limit is exceeded, an error message is output by the device. Consequently, the device is put into monitoring mode. The red ERROR-LED lights up. Maximum number of all CFC charts considering one task level 16 Only Error Message (record in device fault log, evolving fault in processing procedure) Maximum number of all CFC inputs considering all charts 400 When the limit is exceeded, an error message is output by the device. Consequently, the device is put into monitoring mode. The red ERROR-LED lights up. Maximum number of inputs of one chart for each task level (number of unequal information items of the left border per task level) 400 Only fault annunciation (record in device fault log); here the number of elements of the left border per task level is counted. Since the same information is indicated at the border several times, only unequal information is to be counted. Maximum number of reset-resistant flipflops D_FF_MEMO 350 When the limit is exceeded, an error message is output by the device. Consequently, the device is put into monitoring mode. The red ERROR-LED lights up. Device-specific limits Limits 1) Code Maximum number of synchronous changes of chart inputs per task level 50 Maximum number of chart outputs per task level 150 1) When the limit is exceeded, an error message is output by the device. Consequently, the device starts monitoring. General Limits Additional limits 1) for the following four CFC blocks. Sequence Level Maximum number of blocks in the task levels. LONG_TIMER UNIVERSAL_ SHORT_TIMER CMD_CHAIN TIMER2) D_FF_MEMO MW_BEARB PLC1_BEARB PLC_BEARB unlimited 20 40 unlimited 50 SFS_BEARB 1) 2) 268 When the limit is exceeded, an error message is output by the device. Consequently, the device starts monitoring. In a CFC chart with the blocks Timer or Short_Timer, the time resolution specified in the time values must not be smaller than that of the device 6MD66xx < 10 ms). If time values are used that are smaller than the time resolution, the timers will not start with the starting pulse. SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Technical Data 4.4 User defined functions (CFC) Device-specific Limits Maximum number of TICKS 1) on the task levels Priority class MW_BEARB (Measured value processing) Limit in TICKS 3000 PLC1_BEARB (slow PLC processing) 5000 PLC_BEARB (fast PLC processing) 1000 SFS_BEARB (interlocking) 3000 1) When the sum of TICKS of all blocks exceeds the limits before-mentioned, an error message is output by CFC. Processing times in TICKS required by the individual elements Element Number of TICKS Block, basic requirement 5 Each input more than 3 inputs for generic modules 1 Connection to an input signal 6 Connection to an output signal 7 Additional for each chart 1 CMD_CHAIN SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 34 D_FF_MEMO 6 LOOP 8 DM_DECODE 8 DYN_OR 6 ADD 26 SUB 26 MUL 26 DIV 54 SQUARE_ROOT 83 269 Technical Data 4.5 Operational measured values 4.5 Operational measured values Operational measured values for currents IL1; IL2; IL3 in A (kA) primary and in A secondary or in % of INom Range (MLFB pos. 7 = 1.5) 10 % to 120 % IN Range for 150% In (MLFB-Pos. 7 = 2.6) 10 % to 150 % IN Range for 200% In (MLFB-Pos. 7 = 3,7) 10 % to 200 % IN Tolerance (MLFB pos. 7 = 1.5) < 1% of IN at | f-fN | < 5 Hz and at 10% to 50% IN < 0.5% of measured value at | f-fN | < 5 Hz and at 50 % to 120 % IN Tolerance for 150% In (MLFB-Pos. 7 = 2.6) < 1 % of IN at| f-fN | < 5 Hz and at 10 % to 50 % IN < 0.5 % of the measured value at | f-fN | < 5 Hz and at 50 % to 150 % IN Tolerance for 200% In (MLFB-Pos. 7 = 3,7) < 1 % of INom at | f-fNom | < 5 Hz and at 10 % to 50 % INom < 0.5 % of measured value at | f-fNom | < 5 Hz and at 50 % to 200 % IN Operational measured values for voltages Umeasured in kV primary, in U secondary or in % of UNom Range 10 % to 120 % of UNom Tolerance < 1 % of UNom at | f-fNom | < 5 Hz and at 10 % to 50 % UNom < 0.5 % of measured value at | f-fNom | < 5 Hz and at 50 % to 120 % UNom Operational measured values for power S, apparent power in kVAr (MVAr or GVAr) primary and in % of SNom Range 50 % to 120 % S/SNom Tolerance *) < 0.5 % of measured value at | f-fNom | < 5 Hz for U/UNom and I/INom = 50 % to 120 % P, real power in kW (MW or GW) primary and in % PNom Range for | cos | = 0.707 to 1.00 Tolerance *) < 0.5 % of measured value at | f-fNom | < 5 Hz For U/UNom and I/INom = 50 % to 120 % Q, reactive power in kVAr (MVAr or GVAr) primary and in % of QNom 270 Range For | sin | = 0.707 to 1.00 Tolerance *) < 0.5 % of measured value at | f-fNom | < 5 Hz For U/UNom and I/INom = 50 % to 120 % Operating measured value for power factor cos Range for | cos | = 0.707 to 1.00 Tolerance < 0.5 % of measured value at | f-fNom | < 5 Hz For U/UNom and I/INom = 50 % to 120 % and at | cos | < 0.707 < 0.01 % Operating measured value for power factor sin Range For | sin | = 0.707 to 1.00 Tolerance < 0.5 % of the measured value at | f-fN | < 5 Hz For U/UNom and I/INom = 50 % to 120 % and at | sin | < 0.707 < 0.01 % SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Technical Data 4.5 Operational measured values Operational measured values for angles in Tolerance < 0.5 Operational measured values for frequency f in Hz Range 20 mHz at U/UNom = 10 % to 120 % and at f = fNom 5 Hz Tolerance 20 mHz Measuring transducer limit range behaviour Current, overflow range (MLFB pos. 7 = 1.5) Phase current > 1.2 IN The derived quantities P, Q, C, sin , cos , and are then invalid Current, overflow range for 150% In (MLFB-Pos. 7 = 2.6) Phase current > 1.5 IN The derived quantities P, Q, C, sin , cos , and become invalid in this case. Current, overflow range for 200% In (MLFB-Pos. 7 = 3,7) Phase current > 2.0 IN The derived quantities P, Q, C, sin , cos , and are then invalid Voltage, overflow range Voltage > 1.2 INom The derived phase-phase voltages and quantities P, Q, C, sin , cos , and are then invalid Power, zero range, are invalid P, Q, S A phase voltage < 0.1UNom or the nominal apparanet power S < 1 % Power, overflow range A phase current or a phase-earth voltage in overflow Phase angle, zero range, are invalid sin , cos , and A phase voltage < 0.1UNom or the nominal apparanet power S < 1 % Frequency, zero range, is invalid f < 45 Hz or a phase voltage < 0.1UNom Frequency, overflow range f > 65 Hz Measured values, technical data of the 20 mA inputs Rated input current DC - 20 to 20 mA Measuring range DC -24 to 24 mA Input resistance 11% Active power input 5.76 W at INom = 24 mA Tolerance 1.0 %, relative to rated value of 20 mA Metered values as binary pulses Max. metered frequency 50 Hz Metered values calculated from current and voltage Precision < 0.5 % of measured value at | f-fNom | < 5 Hz and at 50 % to 120 % UNom or at 50 % to 120 %, 150 %, 200 % IN *) Tolerance values apply to system frequency 50 Hz; with system frequency 60 Hz < 1% SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 271 Technical Data 4.6 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection (optional) 4.6 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection (optional) Circuit breaker monitoring Current flow monitoring Zero sequence current monitoring for IN = 1 A 0.05 A to 20.00 A for IN = 5 A 0.25 A to 100.00 A for IN = 1 A 0.05 A to 20.00 A for IN = 5 A 0.25 A to 100.00 A Increments 0.01 A Increments 0.01 A Dropout to pickup ratio Approx. 0.95 Tolerance 5 % of set value or 1 % of nominal current Monitoring of circuit breaker auxiliary contact position for 3-pole tripping binary input for CB auxiliary contact for 1-pole tripping 1 binary input for auxiliary contact per pole or 1 binary input for series connection NO contact and NC contact Note: The circuit breaker failure protection can also operate without the indicated circuit breaker auxiliary contacts, but the function range is then reduced. Auxiliary contacts are necessary for the circuit breaker failure protection for tripping without or with a very low current flow (e.g. Buchholz protection) and for stub fault protection and circuit breaker pole discrepancy supervision. Initiation conditions For circuit breaker failure protection 1) Internal or external 1-pole trip 1) Internal or external 3-pole trip 1) Internal or external 3-pole trip without current 1) Via binary inputs Times Pickup time approx. 25 ms with measured quantities present, approx. 25 ms after switch-on of measured quantities Drop-off time, internal (overshoot time) 30 ms Delay times for all stages 0.00 s to 30.00 s; Tolerance 1 % of setting value or 10 ms Increments 0.01 s End Fault Protection with signal transmission to the opposite line end Pickup time approx. 25 ms Time Delay 0.00 s to 30.00 s; Tolerance 1 % of setting value or 10 ms Increments 0.01 s Pole Discrepancy Supervision Initiation criterion not all poles are closed or open Pickup time approx. 55 ms Monitoring time 0.00 s to 30.00 s; Tolerance 1 % of setting value or 10 ms 272 Increments 0.01 s SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Technical Data 4.6 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection (optional) Transformer class Recommended CT class SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Type 0.5 FS 5 (connection to transducer!) 273 Technical Data 4.7 Automatic Reclosure (optional) 4.7 Automatic Reclosure (optional) Automatic Reclosures Number of reclosures Max. 8, first 4 with individual settings Type (depending on ordered version) 1-pole, 3-pole or 1-/3-pole Control With pickup or trip command Action times Initiation possible without pickup and action time 0.01 s to 300.00 s; Increments 0.01 s Different dead times before reclosure can be set for all operating modes and cycles 0.01 s to 1800.00 s; Increments 0.01 s Dead times after evolving fault recognition 0.01 s to 1800.00 s Increments 0.01 s Reclaim time after reclosure 0.50 s to 300.00 s Increments 0.01 s Blocking time after dynamic blocking 0.5 s Blocking time after manual closing 0.50 s to 300.00 s; 0 Increments 0.01 s Start signal monitoring time 0.01 s to 300.00 s Increments 0.01 s Circuit breaker monitoring time 0.01 s to 300.00 s Increments 0.01 s Adaptive Dead Time/Reduced Dead Time/Dead Line Check Adaptive dead time With voltage measurement or with close command transmission Action times Initiation possible without pickup and action time 0.01 s to 300.00 s; Increments 0.01 s Maximum dead time 0.50 s to 3000.00 s Increments 0.01 s Voltage measurement dead line or bus 2 V to 70 V (Ph-E) Increments 1 V Voltage measurement live or bus 30 V to 90 V (Ph-E) Increments 1 V Voltage measuring time 0.10 s to 30.00 s Increments 0.01 s Time delay for close command transmission 0.00 s to 300.00 s; Increments 0.01 s 274 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Technical Data 4.8 Inter-relay communication 4.8 Inter-relay communication Number of stations in the IDC combination Max. 32 Number of information items which each IRC user Max. 32 can apply to the IRC bus Minimum appearance duration for indications 20 ms (due to IRC cycle time) which are to be transferred via inter relay communication SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 275 Technical Data 4.9 External instrument transformers 4.9 External instrument transformers Operational measured values Connectable measurement boxes 1 or 2 Number of measurement points per measurement box max. 2 * 6 for 7XV5662-2AD10 or 7XV5662-5AD10 (only PT 100) max. 2 * 8 for 7XV5662-7AD10 (PT 100 or 20 mA settable by parameterization at the measurement box) Measurement type temperature Pt 100 or Ni 100 or Ni 120 optionally 2-wire or 3-wire connection Measuring range for 20 mA inputs (only for 7XV5662-7AD10 ) 0 to 20 mA Additional information can be found in the manual supplied with the 7XV566. 276 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Technical Data 4.10 Additional functions 4.10 Additional functions Time Tagging Resolution for Event Log 1 ms Maximum Time Deviation (Internal Clock) 0.01 % Battery Lithium battery 3 V/1 Ah, type CR 1/2 AA Message Battery Fault" for insufficient battery charge Commissioning Aids Operational measured values Switching device test Test alarms Clock Time Synchronisation DCF 77/IRIG B-Signal (telegram format IRIG-B000) Binary input Communication Operating modes of the clock management No. Operating Mode Comments 1 Internal clock Internal synchronisation via RTC (default) 2 IEC 60870-5-103 External synchronisation via system interface (IEC 608705-103) 3 PROFIBUS FMS External synchronisation using PROFIBUS interface 4 Time signal IRIG B External synchronisation using IRIG B 5 Time signal DCF77 External synchronisation via time signal DCF 77 6 Time signal synchro-box External synchronisation via the time signal SIMEASSynch.Box 7 Pulse via binary input External synchronisation with pulse via binary input 8 Field bus (DNP, Modbus) External synchronisation using field bus 9 NTP (IEC 61850) External synchronisation using system interface (IEC 61850) SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 277 Technical Data 4.11 Dimensions 4.11 Dimensions 4.11.1 Panel flush mounting and cabinet flush mounting Figure 4-1 278 Dimensional drawing of a 6MD66x for panel surface and cabinet mounting SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Technical Data 4.11 Dimensions 4.11.2 Figure 4-2 Surface mounting with detached operation panel or without operation panel Dimensional drawing of a 6MD66x for surface mounting with/without operator control unit SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 279 Technical Data 4.11 Dimensions 4.11.3 Figure 4-3 280 Detached Operator Panel Dimensional drawing of a detached operator panel SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Technical Data 4.11 Dimensions 4.11.4 D-subminiature Connector of Dongle Cable (Panel or Cubicle Door Cutout) Figure 4-4 Dimensions of panel flush or cubicle door cutout of D-subminiature female connector of dongle cable SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 281 Technical Data 4.11 Dimensions 282 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 A Appendix This appendix is primarily a reference for the experienced user. It contains the ordering data, overview and connection diagrams, default settings as well as tables with all parameters and information for the device with its maximum extent. A.1 Ordering Information and Accessories 284 A.2 Terminal Assignments 288 A.3 Connection Examples 303 A.4 Default Settings 314 A.5 Protocol-dependent Functions 318 A.6 Functional Scope 319 A.7 Settings 321 A.8 Information List 336 A.9 Group Alarms 358 A.10 Measured Values 359 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 283 Appendix A.1 Ordering Information and Accessories A.1 Ordering Information and Accessories A.1.1 Ordering Information A.1.1.1 6MD66x V 4.82 6 High-voltage bay controller 6 M D 6 7 6 8 9 10 11 12 -- 13 14 15 16 -- 0 17 18 19 + L Equipment Item 6 35 1-point indications 22 1-pole single commands (can also be compiled with 2-pole commands and double commands) Three current transformers, four voltage transformers, two measurement inputs 20 mA 2 50 1 point indications 32 1-pole single commands (can also be compiled with 2-pole commands and double commands) Three current transformers, four voltage transformers, two measurement inputs 20 mA 3 65 1 point indications 42 1-pole single commands (can also be compiled with 2-pole commands and double commands) Three current transformers, four voltage transformers, two measurement inputs 20 mA 4 Rated current Item 7 IN = 1 A 1 IN = 1 A 150% In 2 IN = 1 A 200% In 3 IN = 5 A 5 IN = 5 A 150% In 6 IN = 5 A 200% In 7 Power Supply, Binary Input Pickup Threshold Setting DC 24 Vto 48 V, binary input threshold 19 V 1) 2 DC 60 V, binary input threshold 19 V 1) DC 110 V, binary input threshold 88 V Item 8 3 1) 4 DC 220 V to 250 V, binary input threshold 176 V 1) 5 Construction Item 9 Surface-mounting case, detached operator panel, installation in a low-voltage compartment Plug-in terminals (2 pin / 3 pin connectors) 2) A Surface-mounting case, no operator panel, installation in a low-voltage compartment Plug-in terminals (2 pin / 3 pin connectors) 2) B Surface-mounting case, detached operator panel, installation in a low-voltage compartment Screw-type terminals (direct connection / ring and spade lugs) 2) C Flush mounted case with integrated local operation (graphic display, keyboard) Plug-in terminals (2/3 pin connectors) D Flush mounted case with integrated local operation (graphic display, keyboard) Screw-type terminals (direct connection / ring and spade lugs) E Surface-mounting case, no operator panel, installation in a low-voltage compartment, screw-type terminals (direct connection / ring and spade lugs) 2) F 284 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Appendix A.1 Ordering Information and Accessories Region-specific Default / Language Settings and Function Versions Item 10 Region DE, 50 Hz, IEC, Language German (Language can be changed) A Region World, 50 Hz/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, Language English (Language can be changed) B Region US, 60 Hz, ANSI, Language American English (language can be changed) C Region world, 50 Hz/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, language French (language changeable) D Region World, 50 Hz/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, Language Spanish (language can be changed) E System Interface (Rear Side, Port B) Item 11 No system interface 0 IEC-Protocol, electrical RS485 2 IEC-Protocol, Optical, 820 nm, ST-Connector 3 PROFIBUS FMS Slave, electrical RS485 4 PROFIBUS FMS Slave, optical, single ring, ST connector 5 PROFIBUS FMS Slave, optical, double ring, ST connector 6 For further interface options see Additional Information L 9 Service/Function Interface (Rear of Device, Interface C and D) Item 12 No DIGSI interface at the back 0 DIGSI/modem electrical RS232, port C 1 DIGSI/modem/7XV5662 measurement box, electrical RS485, port C 2 DIGSI/modem/7XV5662 measurement box, optical 820 nm, ST connector, port D 3) 3 Inter-device communication, electrical RS485, port C 4 Inter-device communication, electrical RS485, port C and DIGSI optical 820 nm, ST connector, port D Control System Functionality Full functionality (measured value processing and display), with CB synchronization 3) Pos. 14 A 5 Pos. 15 A No measured value processing, no MW display, with synchronization 4) F A Full functionality (measured value processing and display), without CB synchronization A F No measured value processing, no MW display, without synchronization 4) F F Protection Functionality Pos. 16 Without 0 with the automatic reclosure function (AR) incl. fault record 1 with circuit breaker failure protection (CBF) incl. fault record 2 with automatic reclosure (AR) and circuit breaker failure protection (CBF) incl. fault record 3 with the fault record functionality 4 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 285 Appendix A.1 Ordering Information and Accessories Additional information L on further system interfaces (device rear) Item 17 Item 18 Item 19 (only if item 11 = 9) PROFIBUS DP Slave, RS485 L 0 A PROFIBUS DP Slave, double electrical RS485 (second module on port D) L 1 A PROFIBUS DP Slave, 820 nm, optical double ring, ST connector L 0 B IEC61850, 100 MBit Ethernet, electrical, double, RJ45-Connector L 0 R IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, optical, double, Duplex-LC connector L 0 S 1) 2) 3) 4) A.1.2 The threshold can be changed for each measuring input between 19 V, 88 V and 176 V Can only be ordered if the 6th digit is 3" or 4" Not for double Profibus DP (11th position = 9 and 17th to 19th position = L1A) Only if 16th position = 0 (without protection function) Accessories Exchangeable interface modules Name Order No. RS485 C53207-A351-D642-1 FO 820 nm C53207-A351-D643-1 PROFIBUS FMS RS485 C53207-A351-D603-1 PROFIBUS FMS Double ring C53207-A351-D606-1 PROFIBUS FMS single ring C53207-A351-D609-1 Measurement box Designation Order number Measurement box 6x RTD, Uaux = AC/DC 24 V to 60 V 7XV5662-2AD10-0000 Measurement box 6x RTD, Uaux = AC/DC 90 V to 240 V 7XV5662-5AD10-0000 Measurement box 8x RTD/20 mA , Uaux = AC/DC 24 V to 240 V 7XV5662-7AD10-0000 RS485/FO converter RS485/FO converter Order No. 820 nm; FC-Connector 7XV5650-0AA00 820 nm, with ST-Connector 7XV5650-0BA00 Optical Link Module (OLM) 286 Name Order No. Optical Link Module 6GK1502-3CB10 Power supply 24 VDC for OLM 7XV5810-0BA00 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Appendix A.1 Ordering Information and Accessories Cover caps Covering cap for terminal block type Order No. 18-pin voltage terminal, 12-pin current terminal C73334-A1-C31-1 12-pin voltage terminal, 8-pin current terminal C73334-A1-C32-1 Short-circuit links Covering cap for terminal type Order No. Voltage terminal (18-pin, 12-pin) C73334-A1-C34-1 12-pin/8-pin voltage terminal C73334-A1-C33-1 Socket housing Socket housing Order No. 2-pin C73334-A1-C35-1 3-pin C73334-A1-C36-1 Mounting rails for installation into a 19" rack Name Order No. Angle Strip (Mounting Rail) C73165-A63-C200-2 Lithium battery 3 V/1 Ah, type CR 1/2 AA Order No. VARTA 6127 101 301 Panasonic BR-1/2AA Battery Interface Cable Interface cable between PC and SIPROTEC Order No. Cable with 9-pin male/female connections 7XV5100-4 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 287 Appendix A.2 Terminal Assignments A.2 Terminal Assignments A.2.1 Panel Flush Mounting or Cabinet Mounting 6MD662*-*D/E (Page 1) 288 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Appendix A.2 Terminal Assignments 6MD662*-*D/E (Page 2) Figure A-1 General diagram for 662*-*D/E (panel flush mounted or cubicle mounted) SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 289 Appendix A.2 Terminal Assignments 6MD663*-*D/E (Page 1) 290 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Appendix A.2 Terminal Assignments 6MD663*-*D/E (Page 2) Figure A-2 General diagram for 663*-*D/E (panel flush mounted or cubicle mounted) SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 291 Appendix A.2 Terminal Assignments 6MD664*-*D/E (Page 1) 292 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Appendix A.2 Terminal Assignments 6MD664*-*D/E (Page 2) Figure A-3 General diagram for 664*-*D/E (panel flush mounted or cubicle mounted) SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 293 Appendix A.2 Terminal Assignments A.2.2 Housing with Detached Operator Panel 6MD663*-*A/C (Page 1) 294 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Appendix A.2 Terminal Assignments SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 295 Appendix A.2 Terminal Assignments 6MD663*-*A/C (Page 2) Figure A-4 296 General diagram 663*-*A/C (panel surface mounting with detached operator panel) SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Appendix A.2 Terminal Assignments 6MD664*-*A/C (Page 1) SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 297 Appendix A.2 Terminal Assignments 6MD664*-*A/C (Page 2) Figure A-5 298 General diagram 664*-*A/C (panel surface mounting with detached operator panel) SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Appendix A.2 Terminal Assignments A.2.3 Housing for installation without operator panel 6MD663*-*B/F (Page 1) SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 299 Appendix A.2 Terminal Assignments 6MD663*-*B/F (Page 2) Figure A-6 300 General diagram 663*-*B/F (devices for panel surface mounting without operator panel) SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Appendix A.2 Terminal Assignments 6MD664*-*B/F (Page 1) SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 301 Appendix A.2 Terminal Assignments 6MD664*-*B/F (Page 2) Figure A-7 302 General diagram 664*-*B/F (devices for panel surface mounting without operator panel) SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Appendix A.3 Connection Examples A.3 Connection Examples A.3.1 Connection Examples for Measured Values and Synchronization Figure A-8 Transformer connections to a current transformer and a voltage transformer (1-phase measuring transducer packet) SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 303 Appendix A.3 Connection Examples Figure A-9 304 Transformer connections to 3 current transformers and 3 voltage transformers (3-phase measuring transducer packet) SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Appendix A.3 Connection Examples Figure A-10 Transformer connections to 2 current transformers and 2 voltage transformers for an Aron connection and circuit breaker synchronization connection with VLL SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 305 Appendix A.3 Connection Examples Figure A-11 306 Connection of measured values for the synchronization blocks 1 to 5 (measurement transducer connection in accordance with connection examples 1 and 2) SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Appendix A.3 Connection Examples Figure A-12 Connection of measured values for the synchronization blocks 6 to 8 (measurement transducer connection in accordance with connection examples 1 and 2) SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 307 Appendix A.3 Connection Examples A.3.2 Figure A-13 308 Configuration Examples for Breaker Failure Protection and Automatic Reclosure Example allocation of the measuring inputs for the breaker failure protection SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Appendix A.3 Connection Examples Figure A-14 Example allocation of the trip commands from breaker failure protection SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 309 Appendix A.3 Connection Examples Figure A-15 310 Example allocation of the trip commands from breaker failure protection and control SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Appendix A.3 Connection Examples Figure A-16 Example allocation of the auxiliary contacts with identical circuit breaker for BF protection and AR and 1-pole signals SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 311 Appendix A.3 Connection Examples Figure A-17 312 Example allocation of the auxiliary contacts with identical circuit breaker for BF protection and AR and 3-pole signals SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Appendix A.3 Connection Examples A.3.3 Connection Examples for Measurement Boxes Figure A-18 Electrical connection (RS485) of a measurement box Figure A-19 Optical connection (FO) of a measurement box Figure A-20 Electrical connection (RS485) of two measurement boxes SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 313 Appendix A.4 Default Settings A.4 Default Settings When the device leaves the factory, a large number of LED indications, binary inputs and outputs as well as function keys are already preset. They are summarised in the following table. A.4.1 LEDs Table A-1 LED Indication Presettings LEDs Allocated Function LED A.4.2 Binary Input Table A-2 Binary Input BI6 BI7 BI8 BI9 BI10 BI11 BI12 BI13 BI14 BI15 A.4.3 none Binary input presettings for all devices and ordering variants Allocated Function Q0 Q0 Q1 Q1 Q2 Q2 Q8 Q8 Q9 Q9 Description circuit breaker Q0 circuit breaker Q0 bus disconnector Q1 bus disconnector Q1 bus disconnector Q2 bus disconnector Q2 earthing isolator Q8 earthing isolator Q8 feeder disconnector Q9 feeder disconnector Q9 Binary Output Table A-3 Output relay presettings for all devices and ordering variants Binary Output Allocated Function BO1 Q0 OPEN BO2 Q0 CLOSE BO3 Q1 OPEN BO4 Q1 CLOSE BO6 Q0 Common contact BO7 Q2 OPEN BO8 Q2 CLOSE BO9 Q1 Common contact BO10 Q2 Common contact 314 Function No. Function No. - Description circuit breaker Q0 circuit breaker Q0 bus disconnector Q1 bus disconnector Q1 circuit breaker Q0 bus disconnector Q2 bus disconnector Q2 bus disconnector Q1 bus disconnector Q2 - SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Appendix A.4 Default Settings Binary Output Allocated Function BO11 Q8 OPEN BO12 Q8 CLOSE BO15 Q9 OPEN BO16 Q9 CLOSE BO19 Q8 Common contact BO20 Q9 Common contact A.4.4 Function No. - Description earthing isolator Q8 earthing isolator Q8 feeder disconnector Q9 feeder disconnector Q9 earthing isolator Q8 feeder disconnector Q9 - Function Keys Table A-4 Applies to all devices and ordered variants Function Keys Allocated Function F1 Display of operational indications F2 Display of the primary operational measured values A.4.5 Default Display Figure A-21 Default display 6MD66x SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 315 Appendix A.4 Default Settings A.4.6 Pre-defined CFC Charts A CFC is already installed when the SIPROTEC(R) 4 device is delivered. Key switches Figure A-22 CFC chart keyswitches By interconnecting both DI_TO_BOOL blocks, the Switching Authority function of both key switches of the device is implemented. Interlocking Figure A-23 316 CFC chart interlocking 1/2 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Appendix A.4 Default Settings Figure A-24 CFC chart interlocking 2/2 The CFC chart starts the interlocking check which is performed when switching operations of switching elements linked on the left side are executed. SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 317 Appendix A.5 Protocol-dependent Functions A.5 Protocol-dependent Functions Protocol IEC 60870-5-103 IEC 61850 Ethernet PROFIBUS DP (EN100) Inter-relay communication (IRC, optional) PROFIBUS FMS Operational measured values Yes Yes Yes (without current message) Yes Metered values Yes Yes Yes (without current message) Yes Indications Yes Yes (setting taggings; without time stamp) Yes Yes (without time stamp) Commands According to VDEW (no system interlocking with local control) According to VDEW Yes (no system inter(without status locking with local information) control) Yes (setting taggings; without time stamp) Yes Time synchronisation Yes Yes Yes (not available with all control centres) Yes Measured value indication blocking Yes Yes No Yes Generation of test indications Yes Yes Yes Yes Transmission mode Cyclically/Event Cyclically/Event Cyclically Cyclically/Event Baud rate 4800 to 38400 Baud up to 100 MBaud Up to 1.5 MBaud up to 1.5 MBaud (optical), up to 6 MBaud (electrical) Type Electrical: RS485 Optical: ST connector Ethernet TP Electrical: RS485 optical via external converter Electrical: RS485 Optical: ST connector (double ring) Function Commissioning aids Physical properties 318 Electrical: RS485 Optical: ST connector (single or double ring) SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Appendix A.6 Functional Scope A.6 Functional Scope Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments 0 MU V_1 Disabled Enabled Disabled Measurement V 0 MU I_1 Disabled Enabled Disabled Measurement I 0 MU1P_1 Disabled Enabled Enabled Measurement 1phase 1.packet 0 MU1P_2 Disabled Enabled Disabled Measurement 1phase 2.packet 0 MU1P_3 Disabled Enabled Disabled Measurement 1phase 3.packet 0 MU3P_1 Disabled Enabled Enabled Measurement 3phase 1.packet 0 MUAron_1 Disabled Enabled Disabled Measurement Aron 1.packet 0 Synchronizing 1 Disabled Enabled Disabled Synchronizing Function 1 0 Synchronizing 2 Disabled Enabled Disabled Synchronizing Function 2 0 Synchronizing 3 Disabled Enabled Disabled Synchronizing Function 3 0 Synchronizing 4 Disabled Enabled Disabled Synchronizing Function 4 0 Synchronizing 5 Disabled Enabled Disabled Synchronizing Function 5 0 Synchronizing 6 Disabled Enabled Disabled Synchronizing Function 6 0 Synchronizing 7 Disabled Enabled Disabled Synchronizing Function 7 0 Synchronizing 8 Disabled Enabled Disabled Synchronizing Function 8 103 Grp Chge OPTION Disabled Enabled Disabled Setting Group Change Option 110 Trip 1pole 3pole only 1-/3pole 3pole only 1pole trip permitted 133 Auto Reclose 1 AR-cycle 2 AR-cycles 3 AR-cycles 4 AR-cycles 5 AR-cycles 6 AR-cycles 7 AR-cycles 8 AR-cycles ADT Disabled Disabled Auto-Reclose Function 134 AR control mode Pickup w/ Tact Pickup w/o Tact Trip w/ Tact Trip w/o Tact Trip w/ Tact AR control mode 139 BREAKER FAILURE Disabled Enabled Disabled Breaker Failure Protection SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 319 Appendix A.6 Functional Scope Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments 190 MEASUREMENT BOX Disabled Port C Port D Port E Disabled Measurement box 191 MB CONNECTION 6 RTD simplex 6 RTD HDX 12 RTD HDX 8 MBS simplex 8 MBS HalfDplx 16 MBS HalfDplx 6 RTD simplex Measurement box Connection Type 320 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Appendix A.7 Settings A.7 Settings Addresses which have an appended "A" can only be changed with DIGSI, under Additional Settings. Addr. Parameter Function MU U_1 Setting Options 0.00 .. 200.00 V; < > 0 Default Setting 100.00 V Comments 0 SecVoltgNomVal Secondary Voltage Nominal Value 0 SecCurrNomVal MU I_1 0.00 .. 5.00 A; < > 0 1.00 A Secondary Current Nominal Value 0 SecVoltgNomVal MU1P_1 0.00 .. 200.00 V; < > 0 100.00 V Secondary Voltage Nominal Value 0 SecCurrNomVal MU1P_1 0.00 .. 5.00 A; < > 0 1.00 A Secondary Current Nominal Value 0 SecVoltgNomVal MU1P_2 0.00 .. 200.00 V; < > 0 100.00 V Secondary Voltage Nominal Value 0 SecCurrNomVal MU1P_2 0.00 .. 5.00 A; < > 0 1.00 A Secondary Current Nominal Value 0 SecVoltgNomVal MU1P_3 0.00 .. 200.00 V; < > 0 100.00 V Secondary Voltage Nominal Value 0 SecCurrNomVal MU1P_3 0.00 .. 5.00 A; < > 0 1.00 A Secondary Current Nominal Value 0 SecVoltgNomVal MU3P_1 0.00 .. 200.00 V; < > 0 100.00 V Secondary Voltage Nominal Value 0 SecCurrNomVal MU3P_1 0.00 .. 5.00 A; < > 0 1.00 A Secondary Current Nominal Value 0 SecVoltgNomVal MUAron_1 0.00 .. 200.00 V; < > 0 100.00 V Secondary Voltage Nominal Value 0 SecCurrNomVal MUAron_1 0.00 .. 5.00 A; < > 0 1.00 A Secondary Current Nominal Value 0 T-CB close SYNC function 1 0.01 .. 0.60 sec 0.06 sec Closing (operating) time of CB 0 T-SYN. DURATION SYNC function 1 1.00 .. 2400.00 sec 30.00 sec Maximum duration of synchronismcheck 0 fmin SYNC function 1 92 .. 105 % 95 % Minimum frequency 0 fmax SYNC function 1 95 .. 108 % 105 % Maximum frequency 0 SyncSD SYNC function 1 (Setting options depend on configuration) None synchronizable switching device 0 Balancing U1/U2 SYNC function 1 0.50 .. 2.00 1.00 Balancing Factor U1/U2 0 Tr. U1-U2 SYNC function 1 0 .. 360 0 Angle adjustment U1-U2 (Trafo) 0 SecTransNomVal1 SYNC function 1 0.00 .. 170.00 V; < > 0 100.00 V Secondary Transformer Nominal Value 1 0 SecTransNomVal2 SYNC function 1 0.00 .. 170.00 V; < > 0 100.00 V Secondary Transformer Nominal Value 2 0 Umin SYNC function 1 20 .. 125 V 90 V Minimum Voltage for Synchronization 0 Umax SYNC function 1 20 .. 140 V 110 V Maximum Voltage for Synchronization 0 Udead SYNC function 1 1 .. 60 V 5V Voltage Treshold for Dead Line/Dead Bus 0 Sync.U1>U2< SYNC function 1 YES NO NO Synchronize to U1> and U2< 0 Sync.U1<U2> SYNC function 1 YES NO NO Synchronize to U1< and U2> 0 Sync.U1<U2< SYNC function 1 YES NO NO Synchronize to U1< and U2< 0 UdiffSyn SYNC function 1 0.5 .. 50.0 V 2.0 V Maximum voltage difference, synchronous 0 fdiff SYNC function 1 0.00 .. 2.00 Hz 0.10 Hz Maximum frequency difference, syn. 0 diff SYNC function 1 2 .. 90 10 Maximum angle difference, syn. 0 UdiffAsyn SYNC function 1 0.5 .. 50.0 V 2.0 V Maximum voltage differnece, asynchronous 0 f SYNCHRON SYNC function 1 10 .. 100 mHz 10 mHz Frequency diff. treshold Sync/Async. 0 T SYNCHRON SYNC function 1 0.00 .. 60.00 sec 0.05 sec Switch Delay for synchronous systems 0 d fdiff dt syn SYNC function 1 10 .. 25 mHz/s; mHz/s Maximum difference df/dt syn. 0 d fdiff dt asyn SYNC function 1 50 .. 500 mHz/s; mHz/s Maximum difference df/dt asyn. 0 Filter LFO SYNC function 1 NO YES NO Filter low frequency oscillation 0 f Deviation SYNC function 1 0 .. 100 mHz 0 mHz f deviation low frequency oscillations 0 T-CB close SYNC function 2 0.01 .. 0.60 sec 0.06 sec Closing (operating) time of CB SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 321 Appendix A.7 Settings Addr. Parameter 0 T-SYN. DURATION 0 0 Function Setting Options Default Setting Comments SYNC function 2 1.00 .. 2400.00 sec 30.00 sec Maximum duration of synchronismcheck fmin SYNC function 2 92 .. 105 % 95 % Minimum frequency fmax SYNC function 2 95 .. 108 % 105 % Maximum frequency 0 SyncSD SYNC function 2 (Setting options depend on configuration) None synchronizable switching device 0 Balancing U1/U2 SYNC function 2 0.50 .. 2.00 1.00 Balancing Factor U1/U2 0 Tr. U1-U2 SYNC function 2 0 .. 360 0 Angle adjustment U1-U2 (Trafo) 0 SecTransNomVal1 SYNC function 2 0.00 .. 170.00 V; < > 0 100.00 V Secondary Transformer Nominal Value 1 0 SecTransNomVal2 SYNC function 2 0.00 .. 170.00 V; < > 0 100.00 V Secondary Transformer Nominal Value 2 0 Umin SYNC function 2 20 .. 125 V 90 V Minimum Voltage for Synchronization 0 Umax SYNC function 2 20 .. 140 V 110 V Maximum Voltage for Synchronization 0 Udead SYNC function 2 1 .. 60 V 5V Voltage Treshold for Dead Line/Dead Bus 0 Sync.U1>U2< SYNC function 2 YES NO NO Synchronize to U1> and U2< 0 Sync.U1<U2> SYNC function 2 YES NO NO Synchronize to U1< and U2> 0 Sync.U1<U2< SYNC function 2 YES NO NO Synchronize to U1< and U2< 0 UdiffSyn SYNC function 2 0.5 .. 50.0 V 2.0 V Maximum voltage difference, synchronous 0 fdiff SYNC function 2 0.00 .. 2.00 Hz 0.10 Hz Maximum frequency difference, syn. 0 diff SYNC function 2 2 .. 90 10 Maximum angle difference, syn. 0 UdiffAsyn SYNC function 2 0.5 .. 50.0 V 2.0 V Maximum voltage differnece, asynchronous 0 f SYNCHRON SYNC function 2 10 .. 100 mHz 10 mHz Frequency diff. treshold Sync/Async. 0 T SYNCHRON SYNC function 2 0.00 .. 60.00 sec 0.05 sec Switch Delay for synchronous systems 0 d fdiff dt syn SYNC function 2 10 .. 25 mHz/s; mHz/s Maximum difference df/dt syn. 0 d fdiff dt asyn SYNC function 2 50 .. 500 mHz/s; mHz/s Maximum difference df/dt asyn. 0 Filter LFO SYNC function 2 NO YES NO Filter low frequency oscillation 0 f Deviation SYNC function 2 0 .. 100 mHz 0 mHz f deviation low frequency oscillations 0 T-CB close SYNC function 3 0.01 .. 0.60 sec 0.06 sec Closing (operating) time of CB 0 T-SYN. DURATION SYNC function 3 1.00 .. 2400.00 sec 30.00 sec Maximum duration of synchronismcheck 0 fmin SYNC function 3 92 .. 105 % 95 % Minimum frequency 0 fmax SYNC function 3 95 .. 108 % 105 % Maximum frequency 0 SyncSD SYNC function 3 (Setting options depend on configuration) None synchronizable switching device 0 Balancing U1/U2 SYNC function 3 0.50 .. 2.00 1.00 Balancing Factor U1/U2 0 Tr. U1-U2 SYNC function 3 0 .. 360 0 Angle adjustment U1-U2 (Trafo) 0 SecTransNomVal1 SYNC function 3 0.00 .. 170.00 V; < > 0 100.00 V Secondary Transformer Nominal Value 1 0 SecTransNomVal2 SYNC function 3 0.00 .. 170.00 V; < > 0 100.00 V Secondary Transformer Nominal Value 2 0 Umin SYNC function 3 20 .. 125 V 90 V Minimum Voltage for Synchronization 0 Umax SYNC function 3 20 .. 140 V 110 V Maximum Voltage for Synchronization 0 Udead SYNC function 3 1 .. 60 V 5V Voltage Treshold for Dead Line/Dead Bus 0 Sync.U1>U2< SYNC function 3 YES NO NO Synchronize to U1> and U2< 322 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Appendix A.7 Settings Addr. Parameter Function Setting Options Default Setting Comments 0 Sync.U1<U2> SYNC function 3 YES NO NO Synchronize to U1< and U2> 0 Sync.U1<U2< SYNC function 3 YES NO NO Synchronize to U1< and U2< 0 UdiffSyn SYNC function 3 0.5 .. 50.0 V 2.0 V Maximum voltage difference, synchronous 0 fdiff SYNC function 3 0.00 .. 2.00 Hz 0.10 Hz Maximum frequency difference, syn. 0 diff SYNC function 3 2 .. 90 10 Maximum angle difference, syn. 0 UdiffAsyn SYNC function 3 0.5 .. 50.0 V 2.0 V Maximum voltage differnece, asynchronous 0 f SYNCHRON SYNC function 3 10 .. 100 mHz 10 mHz Frequency diff. treshold Sync/Async. 0 T SYNCHRON SYNC function 3 0.00 .. 60.00 sec 0.05 sec Switch Delay for synchronous systems 0 d fdiff dt syn SYNC function 3 10 .. 25 mHz/s; mHz/s Maximum difference df/dt syn. 0 d fdiff dt asyn SYNC function 3 50 .. 500 mHz/s; mHz/s Maximum difference df/dt asyn. 0 Filter LFO SYNC function 3 NO YES NO Filter low frequency oscillation 0 f Deviation SYNC function 3 0 .. 100 mHz 0 mHz f deviation low frequency oscillations 0 T-CB close SYNC function 4 0.01 .. 0.60 sec 0.06 sec Closing (operating) time of CB 0 T-SYN. DURATION SYNC function 4 1.00 .. 2400.00 sec 30.00 sec Maximum duration of synchronismcheck 0 fmin SYNC function 4 92 .. 105 % 95 % Minimum frequency 0 fmax SYNC function 4 95 .. 108 % 105 % Maximum frequency 0 SyncSD SYNC function 4 (Setting options depend on configuration) None synchronizable switching device 0 Balancing U1/U2 SYNC function 4 0.50 .. 2.00 1.00 Balancing Factor U1/U2 0 Tr. U1-U2 SYNC function 4 0 .. 360 0 Angle adjustment U1-U2 (Trafo) 0 SecTransNomVal1 SYNC function 4 0.00 .. 170.00 V; < > 0 100.00 V Secondary Transformer Nominal Value 1 0 SecTransNomVal2 SYNC function 4 0.00 .. 170.00 V; < > 0 100.00 V Secondary Transformer Nominal Value 2 0 Umin SYNC function 4 20 .. 125 V 90 V Minimum Voltage for Synchronization 0 Umax SYNC function 4 20 .. 140 V 110 V Maximum Voltage for Synchronization 0 Udead SYNC function 4 1 .. 60 V 5V Voltage Treshold for Dead Line/Dead Bus 0 Sync.U1>U2< SYNC function 4 YES NO NO Synchronize to U1> and U2< 0 Sync.U1<U2> SYNC function 4 YES NO NO Synchronize to U1< and U2> 0 Sync.U1<U2< SYNC function 4 YES NO NO Synchronize to U1< and U2< 0 UdiffSyn SYNC function 4 0.5 .. 50.0 V 2.0 V Maximum voltage difference, synchronous 0 fdiff SYNC function 4 0.00 .. 2.00 Hz 0.10 Hz Maximum frequency difference, syn. 0 diff SYNC function 4 2 .. 90 10 Maximum angle difference, syn. 0 UdiffAsyn SYNC function 4 0.5 .. 50.0 V 2.0 V Maximum voltage differnece, asynchronous 0 f SYNCHRON SYNC function 4 10 .. 100 mHz 10 mHz Frequency diff. treshold Sync/Async. 0 T SYNCHRON SYNC function 4 0.00 .. 60.00 sec 0.05 sec Switch Delay for synchronous systems 0 d fdiff dt syn SYNC function 4 10 .. 25 mHz/s; mHz/s Maximum difference df/dt syn. 0 d fdiff dt asyn SYNC function 4 50 .. 500 mHz/s; mHz/s Maximum difference df/dt asyn. 0 Filter LFO SYNC function 4 NO YES NO Filter low frequency oscillation 0 f Deviation SYNC function 4 0 .. 100 mHz 0 mHz f deviation low frequency oscillations SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 323 Appendix A.7 Settings Addr. Parameter Function Setting Options Default Setting Comments 0 T-CB close SYNC function 5 0.01 .. 0.60 sec 0.06 sec Closing (operating) time of CB 0 T-SYN. DURATION SYNC function 5 1.00 .. 2400.00 sec 30.00 sec Maximum duration of synchronismcheck 0 fmin SYNC function 5 92 .. 105 % 95 % Minimum frequency 0 fmax SYNC function 5 95 .. 108 % 105 % Maximum frequency 0 SyncSD SYNC function 5 (Setting options depend on configuration) None synchronizable switching device 0 Balancing U1/U2 SYNC function 5 0.50 .. 2.00 1.00 Balancing Factor U1/U2 0 Tr. U1-U2 SYNC function 5 0 .. 360 0 Angle adjustment U1-U2 (Trafo) 0 SecTransNomVal1 SYNC function 5 0.00 .. 170.00 V; < > 0 100.00 V Secondary Transformer Nominal Value 1 0 SecTransNomVal2 SYNC function 5 0.00 .. 170.00 V; < > 0 100.00 V Secondary Transformer Nominal Value 2 0 Umin SYNC function 5 20 .. 125 V 90 V Minimum Voltage for Synchronization 0 Umax SYNC function 5 20 .. 140 V 110 V Maximum Voltage for Synchronization 0 Udead SYNC function 5 1 .. 60 V 5V Voltage Treshold for Dead Line/Dead Bus 0 Sync.U1>U2< SYNC function 5 YES NO NO Synchronize to U1> and U2< 0 Sync.U1<U2> SYNC function 5 YES NO NO Synchronize to U1< and U2> 0 Sync.U1<U2< SYNC function 5 YES NO NO Synchronize to U1< and U2< 0 UdiffSyn SYNC function 5 0.5 .. 50.0 V 2.0 V Maximum voltage difference, synchronous 0 fdiff SYNC function 5 0.00 .. 2.00 Hz 0.10 Hz Maximum frequency difference, syn. 0 diff SYNC function 5 2 .. 90 10 Maximum angle difference, syn. 0 UdiffAsyn SYNC function 5 0.5 .. 50.0 V 2.0 V Maximum voltage differnece, asynchronous 0 f SYNCHRON SYNC function 5 10 .. 100 mHz 10 mHz Frequency diff. treshold Sync/Async. 0 T SYNCHRON SYNC function 5 0.00 .. 60.00 sec 0.05 sec Switch Delay for synchronous systems 0 d fdiff dt syn SYNC function 5 10 .. 25 mHz/s; mHz/s Maximum difference df/dt syn. 0 d fdiff dt asyn SYNC function 5 50 .. 500 mHz/s; mHz/s Maximum difference df/dt asyn. 0 Filter LFO SYNC function 5 NO YES NO Filter low frequency oscillation 0 f Deviation SYNC function 5 0 .. 100 mHz 0 mHz f deviation low frequency oscillations 0 T-CB close SYNC function 6 0.01 .. 0.60 sec 0.06 sec Closing (operating) time of CB 0 T-SYN. DURATION SYNC function 6 1.00 .. 2400.00 sec 30.00 sec Maximum duration of synchronismcheck 0 fmin SYNC function 6 92 .. 105 % 95 % Minimum frequency 0 fmax SYNC function 6 95 .. 108 % 105 % Maximum frequency 0 SyncSD SYNC function 6 (Setting options depend on configuration) None synchronizable switching device 0 Balancing U1/U2 SYNC function 6 0.50 .. 2.00 1.00 Balancing Factor U1/U2 0 Tr. U1-U2 SYNC function 6 0 .. 360 0 Angle adjustment U1-U2 (Trafo) 0 SecTransNomVal1 SYNC function 6 0.00 .. 170.00 V; < > 0 100.00 V Secondary Transformer Nominal Value 1 0 SecTransNomVal2 SYNC function 6 0.00 .. 170.00 V; < > 0 100.00 V Secondary Transformer Nominal Value 2 0 Umin SYNC function 6 20 .. 125 V 90 V Minimum Voltage for Synchronization 0 Umax SYNC function 6 20 .. 140 V 110 V Maximum Voltage for Synchronization 0 Udead SYNC function 6 1 .. 60 V 5V Voltage Treshold for Dead Line/Dead Bus 0 Sync.U1>U2< SYNC function 6 YES NO NO Synchronize to U1> and U2< 324 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Appendix A.7 Settings Addr. Parameter Function Setting Options Default Setting Comments 0 Sync.U1<U2> SYNC function 6 YES NO NO Synchronize to U1< and U2> 0 Sync.U1<U2< SYNC function 6 YES NO NO Synchronize to U1< and U2< 0 UdiffSyn SYNC function 6 0.5 .. 50.0 V 2.0 V Maximum voltage difference, synchronous 0 fdiff SYNC function 6 0.00 .. 2.00 Hz 0.10 Hz Maximum frequency difference, syn. 0 diff SYNC function 6 2 .. 90 10 Maximum angle difference, syn. 0 UdiffAsyn SYNC function 6 0.5 .. 50.0 V 2.0 V Maximum voltage differnece, asynchronous 0 f SYNCHRON SYNC function 6 10 .. 100 mHz 10 mHz Frequency diff. treshold Sync/Async. 0 T SYNCHRON SYNC function 6 0.00 .. 60.00 sec 0.05 sec Switch Delay for synchronous systems 0 d fdiff dt syn SYNC function 6 10 .. 25 mHz/s; mHz/s Maximum difference df/dt syn. 0 d fdiff dt asyn SYNC function 6 50 .. 500 mHz/s; mHz/s Maximum difference df/dt asyn. 0 Filter LFO SYNC function 6 NO YES NO Filter low frequency oscillation 0 f Deviation SYNC function 6 0 .. 100 mHz 0 mHz f deviation low frequency oscillations 0 T-CB close SYNC function 7 0.01 .. 0.60 sec 0.06 sec Closing (operating) time of CB 0 T-SYN. DURATION SYNC function 7 1.00 .. 2400.00 sec 30.00 sec Maximum duration of synchronismcheck 0 fmin SYNC function 7 92 .. 105 % 95 % Minimum frequency 0 fmax SYNC function 7 95 .. 108 % 105 % Maximum frequency 0 SyncSD SYNC function 7 (Setting options depend on configuration) None synchronizable switching device 0 Balancing U1/U2 SYNC function 7 0.50 .. 2.00 1.00 Balancing Factor U1/U2 0 Tr. U1-U2 SYNC function 7 0 .. 360 0 Angle adjustment U1-U2 (Trafo) 0 SecTransNomVal1 SYNC function 7 0.00 .. 170.00 V; < > 0 100.00 V Secondary Transformer Nominal Value 1 0 SecTransNomVal2 SYNC function 7 0.00 .. 170.00 V; < > 0 100.00 V Secondary Transformer Nominal Value 2 0 Umin SYNC function 7 20 .. 125 V 90 V Minimum Voltage for Synchronization 0 Umax SYNC function 7 20 .. 140 V 110 V Maximum Voltage for Synchronization 0 Udead SYNC function 7 1 .. 60 V 5V Voltage Treshold for Dead Line/Dead Bus 0 Sync.U1>U2< SYNC function 7 YES NO NO Synchronize to U1> and U2< 0 Sync.U1<U2> SYNC function 7 YES NO NO Synchronize to U1< and U2> 0 Sync.U1<U2< SYNC function 7 YES NO NO Synchronize to U1< and U2< 0 UdiffSyn SYNC function 7 0.5 .. 50.0 V 2.0 V Maximum voltage difference, synchronous 0 fdiff SYNC function 7 0.00 .. 2.00 Hz 0.10 Hz Maximum frequency difference, syn. 0 diff SYNC function 7 2 .. 90 10 Maximum angle difference, syn. 0 UdiffAsyn SYNC function 7 0.5 .. 50.0 V 2.0 V Maximum voltage differnece, asynchronous 0 f SYNCHRON SYNC function 7 10 .. 100 mHz 10 mHz Frequency diff. treshold Sync/Async. 0 T SYNCHRON SYNC function 7 0.00 .. 60.00 sec 0.05 sec Switch Delay for synchronous systems 0 d fdiff dt syn SYNC function 7 10 .. 25 mHz/s; mHz/s Maximum difference df/dt syn. 0 d fdiff dt asyn SYNC function 7 50 .. 500 mHz/s; mHz/s Maximum difference df/dt asyn. 0 Filter LFO SYNC function 7 NO YES NO Filter low frequency oscillation 0 f Deviation SYNC function 7 0 .. 100 mHz 0 mHz f deviation low frequency oscillations SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 325 Appendix A.7 Settings Addr. Parameter Function Setting Options Default Setting Comments 0 T-CB close SYNC function 8 0.01 .. 0.60 sec 0.06 sec Closing (operating) time of CB 0 T-SYN. DURATION SYNC function 8 1.00 .. 2400.00 sec 30.00 sec Maximum duration of synchronismcheck 0 fmin SYNC function 8 92 .. 105 % 95 % Minimum frequency 0 fmax SYNC function 8 95 .. 108 % 105 % Maximum frequency 0 SyncSD SYNC function 8 (Setting options depend on configuration) None synchronizable switching device 0 Balancing U1/U2 SYNC function 8 0.50 .. 2.00 1.00 Balancing Factor U1/U2 0 Tr. U1-U2 SYNC function 8 0 .. 360 0 Angle adjustment U1-U2 (Trafo) 0 SecTransNomVal1 SYNC function 8 0.00 .. 170.00 V; < > 0 100.00 V Secondary Transformer Nominal Value 1 0 SecTransNomVal2 SYNC function 8 0.00 .. 170.00 V; < > 0 100.00 V Secondary Transformer Nominal Value 2 0 Umin SYNC function 8 20 .. 125 V 90 V Minimum Voltage for Synchronization 0 Umax SYNC function 8 20 .. 140 V 110 V Maximum Voltage for Synchronization 0 Udead SYNC function 8 1 .. 60 V 5V Voltage Treshold for Dead Line/Dead Bus 0 Sync.U1>U2< SYNC function 8 YES NO NO Synchronize to U1> and U2< 0 Sync.U1<U2> SYNC function 8 YES NO NO Synchronize to U1< and U2> 0 Sync.U1<U2< SYNC function 8 YES NO NO Synchronize to U1< and U2< 0 UdiffSyn SYNC function 8 0.5 .. 50.0 V 2.0 V Maximum voltage difference, synchronous 0 fdiff SYNC function 8 0.00 .. 2.00 Hz 0.10 Hz Maximum frequency difference, syn. 0 diff SYNC function 8 2 .. 90 10 Maximum angle difference, syn. 0 UdiffAsyn SYNC function 8 0.5 .. 50.0 V 2.0 V Maximum voltage differnece, asynchronous 0 f SYNCHRON SYNC function 8 10 .. 100 mHz 10 mHz Frequency diff. treshold Sync/Async. 0 T SYNCHRON SYNC function 8 0.00 .. 60.00 sec 0.05 sec Switch Delay for synchronous systems 0 d fdiff dt syn SYNC function 8 10 .. 25 mHz/s; mHz/s Maximum difference df/dt syn. 0 d fdiff dt asyn SYNC function 8 50 .. 500 mHz/s; mHz/s Maximum difference df/dt asyn. 0 Filter LFO SYNC function 8 NO YES NO Filter low frequency oscillation 0 f Deviation SYNC function 8 0 .. 100 mHz 0 mHz f deviation low frequency oscillations 203 Unom PRIMARY P.System Data 1 1.0 .. 1200.0 kV 110.0 kV Rated Primary Voltage 204 Unom SECONDARY P.System Data 1 80 .. 125 V 100 V Rated Secondary Voltage (Ph-Ph) 205 CT PRIMARY P.System Data 1 10 .. 5000 A 100 A CT Rated Primary Current 206 CT SECONDARY P.System Data 1 1A 5A 1A CT Rated Secondary Current 214 Rated Frequency P.System Data 1 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz Rated Frequency 240 TMin TRIP CMD P.System Data 1 0.02 .. 30.00 sec 0.10 sec Minimum TRIP Command Duration 241 TMax CLOSE CMD P.System Data 1 0.01 .. 30.00 sec 0.10 sec Maximum Close Command Duration 276 TEMP. UNIT P.System Data 1 Celsius Fahrenheit Celsius Unit of temperature measurement 302 CHANGE Change Group Group A Group B Group C Group D Binary Input Protocol Group A Change to Another Setting Group 401 T Backlight on Device, General 1 .. 60 min 10 min Time Backlight on 402 DIGSI backplane Device, General Disabled Port C Port D Disabled Serviceport for DIGSI 326 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Appendix A.7 Settings Addr. Parameter Function Setting Options Default Setting Comments 407 FltDisp.LED/LCD Device, General Target on PU Target on TRIP Target on PU Fault Display on LED / LCD 408 Spont. FltDisp. Device, General NO YES NO Spontaneous display of flt.annunciations 901 WAVEFORMTRIGGER Osc. Fault Rec. Save w. Pickup Save w. TRIP Start w. TRIP Save w. Pickup Waveform Capture 902 WAVEFORM DATA Osc. Fault Rec. Fault event Pow.Sys.Flt. Fault event Scope of Waveform Data 903 MAX. LENGTH Osc. Fault Rec. 0.30 .. 5.00 sec 2.00 sec Max. length of a Waveform Capture Record 904 PRE. TRIG. TIME Osc. Fault Rec. 0.05 .. 0.50 sec 0.25 sec Captured Waveform Prior to Trigger 905 POST REC. TIME Osc. Fault Rec. 0.05 .. 0.50 sec 0.10 sec Captured Waveform after Event 906 BinIn CAPT.TIME Osc. Fault Rec. 0.10 .. 5.00 sec; 0.50 sec Capture Time via Binary Input 1130A PoleOpenCurrent P.System Data 2 0.05 .. 1.00 A 0.10 A Pole Open Current Threshold 1135 Reset Trip CMD P.System Data 2 CurrentOpenPole Current AND CB CurrentOpenPole RESET of Trip Command 1150A SI Time Man.Cl P.System Data 2 0.01 .. 30.00 sec 0.30 sec Seal-in Time after MANUAL closures 2915 V-Supervision Measurem.Superv w/ CURR.SUP w/ I> & CBaux OFF w/ CURR.SUP Voltage Failure Supervision 2916A T V-Supervision Measurem.Superv 0.00 .. 30.00 sec 3.00 sec Delay Voltage Failure Supervision 2917 U<max (3ph) Measurem.Superv 2 .. 100 V 5V Maximum Voltage Threshold U< (3phase) 3401 AUTO RECLOSE Auto Reclose OFF ON OFF Auto-Reclose Function 3402 CB? 1.TRIP Auto Reclose YES NO NO CB ready interrogation at 1st trip 3403 TIME RESTRAINT Auto Reclose 0.50 .. 300.00 sec 3.00 sec Auto Reclosing reset time 3404 T-BLOCK MC Auto Reclose 0.50 .. 300.00 sec; 0 1.00 sec AR blocking duration after manual close 3406 EV. FLT. RECOG. Auto Reclose with PICKUP with TRIP with TRIP Evolving fault recognition 3407 EV. FLT. MODE Auto Reclose blocks AR starts 3p AR is ignored starts 3p AR Evolving fault (during the dead time) 3408 T-Start MONITOR Auto Reclose 0.01 .. 300.00 sec 0.20 sec AR start-signal monitoring time 3409 CB TIME OUT Auto Reclose 0.01 .. 300.00 sec 3.00 sec Circuit Breaker (CB) Supervision Time 3410 T RemoteClose Auto Reclose 0.00 .. 300.00 sec; sec Send delay for remote close command 3411A T-DEAD EXT. Auto Reclose 0.50 .. 300.00 sec; 10.00 sec Maximum dead time extension 3413 Cmd.via control Auto Reclose (Setting options depend on configuration) None Close command via control device 3414 Internal SYNC Auto Reclose (Setting options depend on configuration) None Internal synchronisation 3420 AR w/ DIST. Auto Reclose YES NO YES AR with Distance Protection 3421 AR w/ SOTF-O/C Auto Reclose YES NO YES AR with switch-onto-fault overcurrent 3422 AR w/ W/I Auto Reclose YES NO YES AR with weak infeed tripping 3423 AR w/ EF-O/C Auto Reclose YES NO YES AR with earth fault overcurrent prot. 3424 AR w/ DTT Auto Reclose YES NO YES AR with direct transfer trip 3425 AR w/ BackUpO/C Auto Reclose YES NO YES AR with back-up overcurrent 3430 AR TRIP 3pole Auto Reclose Auto Reclose YES NO YES 3pole TRIP by AR 3431 DLC / RDT Auto Reclose WITHOUT RDT DLC WITHOUT Dead Line Check / Reduced Dead Time SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 327 Appendix A.7 Settings Addr. Parameter Function Setting Options Default Setting ADT Op. mode Auto Reclose w/ VoltageCheck w/ RemoteClose 3433 T-ACTION ADT Auto Reclose 0.01 .. 300.00 sec; 0.20 sec Action time 3434 T-MAX ADT Auto Reclose 0.50 .. 3000.00 sec 5.00 sec Maximum dead time 3435 ADT 1p allowed Auto Reclose YES NO NO 1pole TRIP allowed 3436 ADT CB? CLOSE Auto Reclose YES NO NO CB ready interrogation before reclosing 3437 ADT SynRequest Auto Reclose YES NO NO Request for synchro-check after 3pole AR 3438 T U-stable Auto Reclose Auto Reclose 0.10 .. 30.00 sec 0.10 sec Supervision time for dead/live voltage 3440 U-live> Auto Reclose Auto Reclose 30 .. 90 V 48 V Voltage threshold for live line or bus 3441 U-dead< Auto Reclose Auto Reclose 2 .. 70 V 30 V Voltage threshold for dead line or bus 3450 1.AR: START Auto Reclose YES NO YES Start of AR allowed in this cycle 3451 1.AR: T-ACTION Auto Reclose 0.01 .. 300.00 sec; 0.20 sec Action Time 3453 1.AR Tdead 1Flt Auto Reclose 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; 1.20 sec Dead time after 1phase faults 3454 1.AR Tdead 2Flt Auto Reclose 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; 1.20 sec Dead time after 2phase faults 3455 1.AR Tdead 3Flt Auto Reclose 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; 0.50 sec Dead time after 3phase faults 3456 1.AR Tdead1Trip Auto Reclose 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; 1.20 sec Dead time after 1pole trip 3457 1.AR Tdead3Trip Auto Reclose 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; 0.50 sec Dead time after 3pole trip 3458 1.AR: Tdead EV. Auto Reclose 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec 1.20 sec Dead time after evolving fault 3459 1.AR: CB? CLOSE Auto Reclose YES NO NO CB ready interrogation before reclosing 3460 1.AR SynRequest Auto Reclose YES NO NO Request for synchro-check after 3pole AR 3461 2.AR: START Auto Reclose YES NO NO AR start allowed in this cycle 3462 2.AR: T-ACTION Auto Reclose 0.01 .. 300.00 sec; 0.20 sec Action time 3464 2.AR Tdead 1Flt Auto Reclose 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; 1.20 sec Dead time after 1phase faults 3465 2.AR Tdead 2Flt Auto Reclose 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; 1.20 sec Dead time after 2phase faults 3466 2.AR Tdead 3Flt Auto Reclose 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; 0.50 sec Dead time after 3phase faults 3467 2.AR Tdead1Trip Auto Reclose 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; sec Dead time after 1pole trip 3468 2.AR Tdead3Trip Auto Reclose 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; 0.50 sec Dead time after 3pole trip 3469 2.AR: Tdead EV. Auto Reclose 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec 1.20 sec Dead time after evolving fault 3470 2.AR: CB? CLOSE Auto Reclose YES NO NO CB ready interrogation before reclosing 3471 2.AR SynRequest Auto Reclose YES NO NO Request for synchro-check after 3pole AR 3472 3.AR: START Auto Reclose YES NO NO AR start allowed in this cycle 3473 3.AR: T-ACTION Auto Reclose 0.01 .. 300.00 sec; 0.20 sec Action time 3475 3.AR Tdead 1Flt Auto Reclose 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; 1.20 sec Dead time after 1phase faults 3476 3.AR Tdead 2Flt Auto Reclose 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; 1.20 sec Dead time after 2phase faults 3477 3.AR Tdead 3Flt Auto Reclose 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; 0.50 sec Dead time after 3phase faults 3478 3.AR Tdead1Trip Auto Reclose 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; sec Dead time after 1pole trip 3479 3.AR Tdead3Trip Auto Reclose 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; 0.50 sec Dead time after 3pole trip 3480 3.AR: Tdead EV. Auto Reclose 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec 1.20 sec Dead time after evolving fault 3481 3.AR: CB? CLOSE Auto Reclose YES NO NO CB ready interrogation before reclosing 3482 3.AR SynRequest Auto Reclose YES NO NO Request for synchro-check after 3pole AR 3483 4.AR: START Auto Reclose YES NO NO AR start allowed in this cycle 3484 4.AR: T-ACTION Auto Reclose 0.01 .. 300.00 sec; 0.20 sec Action time 3486 4.AR Tdead 1Flt Auto Reclose 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; 1.20 sec Dead time after 1phase faults 3487 4.AR Tdead 2Flt Auto Reclose 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; 1.20 sec Dead time after 2phase faults 328 w/ VoltageCheck Comments 3432 Operating mode for Adaptive Dead Time SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Appendix A.7 Settings Addr. 3488 Parameter 4.AR Tdead 3Flt Function Auto Reclose Setting Options 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; Default Setting Comments 0.50 sec Dead time after 3phase faults 3489 4.AR Tdead1Trip Auto Reclose 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; sec Dead time after 1pole trip 3490 4.AR Tdead3Trip Auto Reclose 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; 0.50 sec Dead time after 3pole trip 3491 4.AR: Tdead EV. Auto Reclose 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec 1.20 sec Dead time after evolving fault 3492 4.AR: CB? CLOSE Auto Reclose YES NO NO CB ready interrogation before reclosing 3493 4.AR SynRequest Auto Reclose YES NO NO Request for synchro-check after 3pole AR 3901 FCT BreakerFail Breaker Failure ON OFF OFF Breaker Failure Protection is 3902 I> BF Breaker Failure 0.05 .. 1.20 A 0.10 A Pick-up threshold I> 3903 1p-RETRIP (T1) Breaker Failure NO YES YES 1pole retrip with stage T1 (local trip) 3904 T1-1pole Breaker Failure 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 0.00 sec T1, Delay after 1pole start (local trip) 3905 T1-3pole Breaker Failure 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 0.00 sec T1, Delay after 3pole start (local trip) 3906 T2 Breaker Failure 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 0.15 sec T2, Delay of 2nd stage (busbar trip) 3907 T3-BkrDefective Breaker Failure 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 0.00 sec T3, Delay for start with defective bkr. 3908 Trip BkrDefect. Breaker Failure NO with T1-trip with T2-trip w/ T1/T2-trip NO Trip output selection with defective bkr 3909 Chk BRK CONTACT Breaker Failure NO YES YES Check Breaker contacts 3911 Plausib. check Breaker Failure YES NO YES plausibility check transformer masking 3912 3I0> BF Breaker Failure 0.05 .. 1.20 A 0.10 A Pick-up threshold 3I0> 3921 End Flt. stage Breaker Failure ON OFF OFF End fault stage is 3922 T-EndFault Breaker Failure 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 2.00 sec Trip delay of end fault stage 3931 PoleDiscrepancy Breaker Failure ON OFF OFF Pole Discrepancy supervision 3932 T-PoleDiscrep. Breaker Failure 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 2.00 sec Trip delay with pole discrepancy 3940 FO Protection Breaker Failure ON OFF OFF Flash Over Protection 9011A RTD 1 TYPE MeasurementBox Not connected Pt 100 Ni 120 Ni 100 Pt 100 RTD 1: Type 9011A MBS1 TYPE MeasurementBox Not connected Set in MB Ni 120 Ni 100 Set in MB MBS1: Type 9012A RTD 1 LOCATION MeasurementBox Oil Ambient Winding Bearing Other Other RTD 1: Location 9012A MBS1 LOCATION MeasurementBox Oil Ambient Winding Bearing Other Other MBS1: Location RTD 1: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup 9013 RTD 1 STAGE 1 MeasurementBox -50 .. 250 C; 100 C 9014 RTD 1 STAGE 1 MeasurementBox -58 .. 482 F; 212 F RTD 1: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup 9015 RTD 1 STAGE 2 MeasurementBox -50 .. 250 C; 120 C RTD 1: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup 9016 RTD 1 STAGE 2 MeasurementBox -58 .. 482 F; 248 F RTD 1: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup 9017 MBS1 Stage 1 MeasurementBox -1999.000 .. 9999.000 ; Measurement box sensor 1 stage 1 pickup 9018 MBS1 Stage 2 MeasurementBox -1999.000 .. 9999.000 ; Measurement box sensor 1 stage 2 pickup 9021A RTD 2 TYPE MeasurementBox Not connected Pt 100 Ni 120 Ni 100 Pt 100 RTD 2: Type SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 329 Appendix A.7 Settings Addr. Parameter Function Setting Options Default Setting Comments 9021A MBS2 TYPE MeasurementBox Not connected Set in MB Ni 120 Ni 100 Set in MB MBS2: Type 9022A RTD 2 LOCATION MeasurementBox Oil Ambient Winding Bearing Other Other RTD 2: Location 9022A MBS2 LOCATION MeasurementBox Oil Ambient Winding Bearing Other Other MBS2: Location 9023 RTD 2 STAGE 1 MeasurementBox -50 .. 250 C; 100 C RTD 2: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup 9024 RTD 2 STAGE 1 MeasurementBox -58 .. 482 F; 212 F RTD 2: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup 9025 RTD 2 STAGE 2 MeasurementBox -50 .. 250 C; 120 C RTD 2: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup 9026 RTD 2 STAGE 2 MeasurementBox -58 .. 482 F; 248 F RTD 2: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup 9027 MBS2 Stage 1 MeasurementBox -1999.000 .. 9999.000 ; Measurement box sensor 2 stage 1 pickup 9028 MBS2 Stage 2 MeasurementBox -1999.000 .. 9999.000 ; Measurement box sensor 2 stage 2 pickup 9031A RTD 3 TYPE MeasurementBox Not connected Pt 100 Ni 120 Ni 100 Pt 100 RTD 3: Type 9031A MBS3 TYPE MeasurementBox Not connected Set in MB Ni 120 Ni 100 Set in MB MBS3: Type 9032A RTD 3 LOCATION MeasurementBox Oil Ambient Winding Bearing Other Other RTD 3: Location 9032A MBS3 LOCATION MeasurementBox Oil Ambient Winding Bearing Other Other MBS3: Location 9033 RTD 3 STAGE 1 MeasurementBox -50 .. 250 C; 100 C RTD 3: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup 9034 RTD 3 STAGE 1 MeasurementBox -58 .. 482 F; 212 F RTD 3: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup 9035 RTD 3 STAGE 2 MeasurementBox -50 .. 250 C; 120 C RTD 3: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup 9036 RTD 3 STAGE 2 MeasurementBox -58 .. 482 F; 248 F RTD 3: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup 9037 MBS3 Stage 1 MeasurementBox -1999.000 .. 9999.000 ; Measurement box sensor 3 stage 1 pickup 9038 MBS3 Stage 2 MeasurementBox -1999.000 .. 9999.000 ; Measurement box sensor 3 stage 2 pickup 9041A RTD 4 TYPE MeasurementBox Not connected Pt 100 Ni 120 Ni 100 Pt 100 RTD 4: Type 9041A MBS4 TYPE MeasurementBox Not connected Set in MB Ni 120 Ni 100 Set in MB MBS4: Type 9042A RTD 4 LOCATION MeasurementBox Oil Ambient Winding Bearing Other Other RTD 4: Location 9042A MBS4 LOCATION MeasurementBox Oil Ambient Winding Bearing Other Other MBS4: Location 9043 RTD 4 STAGE 1 MeasurementBox -50 .. 250 C; 100 C RTD 4: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup 9044 RTD 4 STAGE 1 MeasurementBox -58 .. 482 F; 212 F RTD 4: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup 9045 RTD 4 STAGE 2 MeasurementBox -50 .. 250 C; 120 C RTD 4: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup 330 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Appendix A.7 Settings Addr. Parameter Function Setting Options Default Setting Comments 9046 RTD 4 STAGE 2 MeasurementBox -58 .. 482 F; 248 F RTD 4: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup 9047 MBS4 Stage 1 MeasurementBox -1999.000 .. 9999.000 ; Measurement box sensor 4 stage 1 pickup 9048 MBS4 Stage 2 MeasurementBox -1999.000 .. 9999.000 ; Measurement box sensor 4 stage 2 pickup 9051A RTD 5 TYPE MeasurementBox Not connected Pt 100 Ni 120 Ni 100 Pt 100 RTD 5: Type 9051A MBS5 TYPE MeasurementBox Not connected Set in MB Ni 120 Ni 100 Set in MB MBS5: Type 9052A RTD 5 LOCATION MeasurementBox Oil Ambient Winding Bearing Other Other RTD 5: Location 9052A MBS5 LOCATION MeasurementBox Oil Ambient Winding Bearing Other Other MBS5: Location RTD 5: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup 9053 RTD 5 STAGE 1 MeasurementBox -50 .. 250 C; 100 C 9054 RTD 5 STAGE 1 MeasurementBox -58 .. 482 F; 212 F RTD 5: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup 9055 RTD 5 STAGE 2 MeasurementBox -50 .. 250 C; 120 C RTD 5: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup 9056 RTD 5 STAGE 2 MeasurementBox -58 .. 482 F; 248 F RTD 5: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup 9057 MBS5 Stage 1 MeasurementBox -1999.000 .. 9999.000 ; Measurement box sensor 5 stage 1 pickup 9058 MBS5 Stage 2 MeasurementBox -1999.000 .. 9999.000 ; Measurement box sensor 5 stage 2 pickup 9061A RTD 6 TYPE MeasurementBox Not connected Pt 100 Ni 120 Ni 100 Pt 100 RTD 6: Type 9061A MBS6 TYPE MeasurementBox Not connected Set in MB Ni 120 Ni 100 Set in MB MBS6: Type 9062A RTD 6 LOCATION MeasurementBox Oil Ambient Winding Bearing Other Other RTD 6: Location 9062A MBS6 LOCATION MeasurementBox Oil Ambient Winding Bearing Other Other MBS6: Location RTD 6: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup 9063 RTD 6 STAGE 1 MeasurementBox -50 .. 250 C; 100 C 9064 RTD 6 STAGE 1 MeasurementBox -58 .. 482 F; 212 F RTD 6: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup 9065 RTD 6 STAGE 2 MeasurementBox -50 .. 250 C; 120 C RTD 6: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup 9066 RTD 6 STAGE 2 MeasurementBox -58 .. 482 F; 248 F RTD 6: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup 9067 MBS6 Stage 1 MeasurementBox -1999.000 .. 9999.000 ; Measurement box sensor 6 stage 1 pickup 9068 MBS6 Stage 2 MeasurementBox -1999.000 .. 9999.000 ; Measurement box sensor 6 stage 2 pickup 9071A MBS7 TYPE MeasurementBox Not connected Set in MB Ni 120 Ni 100 Set in MB MBS7: Type 9071A RTD 7 TYPE MeasurementBox Not connected Pt 100 Ni 120 Ni 100 Pt 100 RTD 7: Type SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 331 Appendix A.7 Settings Addr. Parameter Function Setting Options Default Setting Comments 9072A MBS7 LOCATION MeasurementBox Oil Ambient Winding Bearing Other Other MBS7: Location 9072A RTD 7 LOCATION MeasurementBox Oil Ambient Winding Bearing Other Other RTD 7: Location 9073 RTD 7 STAGE 1 MeasurementBox -50 .. 250 C; 100 C RTD 7: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup 9074 RTD 7 STAGE 1 MeasurementBox -58 .. 482 F; 212 F RTD 7: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup 9075 RTD 7 STAGE 2 MeasurementBox -50 .. 250 C; 120 C RTD 7: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup 9076 RTD 7 STAGE 2 MeasurementBox -58 .. 482 F; 248 F RTD 7: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup 9077 MBS7 Stage 1 MeasurementBox -1999.000 .. 9999.000 ; Measurement box sensor 7 stage 1 pickup 9078 MBS7 Stage 2 MeasurementBox -1999.000 .. 9999.000 ; Measurement box sensor 7 stage 2 pickup 9081A MBS8 TYPE MeasurementBox Not connected Set in MB Ni 120 Ni 100 Set in MB MBS8: Type 9081A RTD 8 TYPE MeasurementBox Not connected Pt 100 Ni 120 Ni 100 Pt 100 RTD 8: Type 9082A MBS8 LOCATION MeasurementBox Oil Ambient Winding Bearing Other Other MBS8: Location 9082A RTD 8 LOCATION MeasurementBox Oil Ambient Winding Bearing Other Other RTD 8: Location 9083 RTD 8 STAGE 1 MeasurementBox -50 .. 250 C; 100 C RTD 8: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup 9084 RTD 8 STAGE 1 MeasurementBox -58 .. 482 F; 212 F RTD 8: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup 9085 RTD 8 STAGE 2 MeasurementBox -50 .. 250 C; 120 C RTD 8: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup 9086 RTD 8 STAGE 2 MeasurementBox -58 .. 482 F; 248 F RTD 8: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup 9087 MBS8 Stage 1 MeasurementBox -1999.000 .. 9999.000 ; Measurement box sensor 8 stage 1 pickup 9088 MBS8 Stage 2 MeasurementBox -1999.000 .. 9999.000 ; Measurement box sensor 8 stage 2 pickup 9091A RTD 9 TYPE MeasurementBox Not connected Pt 100 Ni 120 Ni 100 Pt 100 RTD 9: Type 9091A MBS9 TYPE MeasurementBox Not connected Set in MB Ni 120 Ni 100 Set in MB MBS9: Type 9092A RTD 9 LOCATION MeasurementBox Oil Ambient Winding Bearing Other Other RTD 9: Location 9092A MBS9 LOCATION MeasurementBox Oil Ambient Winding Bearing Other Other MBS9: Location 9093 RTD 9 STAGE 1 MeasurementBox -50 .. 250 C; 100 C RTD 9: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup 9094 RTD 9 STAGE 1 MeasurementBox -58 .. 482 F; 212 F RTD 9: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup 9095 RTD 9 STAGE 2 MeasurementBox -50 .. 250 C; 120 C RTD 9: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup 9096 RTD 9 STAGE 2 MeasurementBox -58 .. 482 F; 248 F RTD 9: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup 9097 MBS9 Stage 1 MeasurementBox -1999.000 .. 9999.000 ; Measurement box sensor 9 stage 1 pickup 332 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Appendix A.7 Settings Addr. Parameter Function Setting Options Default Setting Comments 9098 MBS9 Stage 2 MeasurementBox -1999.000 .. 9999.000 ; Measurement box sensor 9 stage 2 pickup 9101A RTD10 TYPE MeasurementBox Not connected Pt 100 Ni 120 Ni 100 Pt 100 RTD10: Type 9101A MBS10 TYPE MeasurementBox Not connected Set in MB Ni 120 Ni 100 Set in MB MBS10: Type 9102A RTD10 LOCATION MeasurementBox Oil Ambient Winding Bearing Other Other RTD10: Location 9102A MBS10 LOCATION MeasurementBox Oil Ambient Winding Bearing Other Other MBS10: Location 9103 RTD10 STAGE 1 MeasurementBox -50 .. 250 C; 100 C RTD10: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup 9104 RTD10 STAGE 1 MeasurementBox -58 .. 482 F; 212 F RTD10: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup 9105 RTD10 STAGE 2 MeasurementBox -50 .. 250 C; 120 C RTD10: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup 9106 RTD10 STAGE 2 MeasurementBox -58 .. 482 F; 248 F RTD10: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup 9107 MBS10 Stage 1 MeasurementBox -1999.000 .. 9999.000 ; Measurement box sensor 10 stage 1 pickup 9108 MBS10 Stage 2 MeasurementBox -1999.000 .. 9999.000 ; Measurement box sensor 10 stage 2 pickup 9111A RTD11 TYPE MeasurementBox Not connected Pt 100 Ni 120 Ni 100 Pt 100 RTD11: Type 9111A MBS11 TYPE MeasurementBox Not connected Set in MB Ni 120 Ni 100 Set in MB MBS11: Type 9112A RTD11 LOCATION MeasurementBox Oil Ambient Winding Bearing Other Other RTD11: Location 9112A MBS11 LOCATION MeasurementBox Oil Ambient Winding Bearing Other Other MBS11: Location 9113 RTD11 STAGE 1 MeasurementBox -50 .. 250 C; 100 C RTD11: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup 9114 RTD11 STAGE 1 MeasurementBox -58 .. 482 F; 212 F RTD11: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup 9115 RTD11 STAGE 2 MeasurementBox -50 .. 250 C; 120 C RTD11: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup 9116 RTD11 STAGE 2 MeasurementBox -58 .. 482 F; 248 F RTD11: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup 9117 MBS11 Stage 1 MeasurementBox -1999.000 .. 9999.000 ; Measurement box sensor 11 stage 1 pickup 9118 MBS11 Stage 2 MeasurementBox -1999.000 .. 9999.000 ; Measurement box sensor 11 stage 2 pickup 9121A RTD12 TYPE MeasurementBox Not connected Pt 100 Ni 120 Ni 100 Pt 100 RTD12: Type 9121A MBS12 TYPE MeasurementBox Not connected Set in MB Ni 120 Ni 100 Set in MB MBS12: Type SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 333 Appendix A.7 Settings Addr. Parameter Function Setting Options Default Setting Comments 9122A RTD12 LOCATION MeasurementBox Oil Ambient Winding Bearing Other Other RTD12: Location 9122A MBS12 LOCATION MeasurementBox Oil Ambient Winding Bearing Other Other MBS12: Location 9123 RTD12 STAGE 1 MeasurementBox -50 .. 250 C; 100 C RTD12: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup 9124 RTD12 STAGE 1 MeasurementBox -58 .. 482 F; 212 F RTD12: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup 9125 RTD12 STAGE 2 MeasurementBox -50 .. 250 C; 120 C RTD12: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup 9126 RTD12 STAGE 2 MeasurementBox -58 .. 482 F; 248 F RTD12: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup 9127 MBS12 Stage 1 MeasurementBox -1999.000 .. 9999.000 ; Measurement box sensor 12 stage 1 pickup 9128 MBS12 Stage 2 MeasurementBox -1999.000 .. 9999.000 ; Measurement box sensor 12 stage 2 pickup 9131A MBS13 TYPE MeasurementBox Not connected Set in MB Ni 120 Ni 100 Set in MB MBS13: Type 9132A MBS13 LOCATION MeasurementBox Oil Ambient Winding Bearing Other Other MBS13: Location 9137 MBS13 Stage 1 MeasurementBox -1999.000 .. 9999.000 ; Measurement box sensor 13 stage 1 pickup 9138 MBS13 Stage 2 MeasurementBox -1999.000 .. 9999.000 ; Measurement box sensor 13 stage 2 pickup 9141A MBS14 TYPE MeasurementBox Not connected Set in MB Ni 120 Ni 100 Set in MB MBS14: Type 9142A MBS14 LOCATION MeasurementBox Oil Ambient Winding Bearing Other Other MBS14: Location 9147 MBS14 Stage 1 MeasurementBox -1999.000 .. 9999.000 ; Measurement box sensor 14 stage 1 pickup 9148 MBS14 Stage 2 MeasurementBox -1999.000 .. 9999.000 ; Measurement box sensor 14 stage 2 pickup 9151A MBS15 TYPE MeasurementBox Not connected Set in MB Ni 120 Ni 100 Set in MB MBS15: Type 9152A MBS15 LOCATION MeasurementBox Oil Ambient Winding Bearing Other Other MBS15: Location 9157 MBS15 Stage 1 MeasurementBox -1999.000 .. 9999.000 ; Measurement box sensor 15 stage 1 pickup 9158 MBS15 Stage 2 MeasurementBox -1999.000 .. 9999.000 ; Measurement box sensor 15 stage 2 pickup 9161A MBS16 TYPE MeasurementBox Not connected Set in MB Ni 120 Ni 100 Set in MB MBS16: Type 9162A MBS16 LOCATION MeasurementBox Oil Ambient Winding Bearing Other Other MBS16: Location 334 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Appendix A.7 Settings Addr. Parameter Function Setting Options Default Setting Comments 9167 MBS16 Stage 1 MeasurementBox -1999.000 .. 9999.000 ; Measurement box sensor 16 stage 1 pickup 9168 MBS16 Stage 2 MeasurementBox -1999.000 .. 9999.000 ; Measurement box sensor 16 stage 2 pickup SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 335 Appendix A.8 Information List A.8 Information List Indications for IEC 60 870-5-103 are always reported ON / OFF if they are subject to general interrogation for IEC 60 870-5-103. If not, they are reported only as ON. New user-defined indications or such newly allocated to IEC 60 870-5-103 are set to ON / OFF and subjected to general interrogation if the information type is not a spontaneous event (.._Ev"). Further information on indications can be found in detail in the SIPROTEC 4 System Description, Order No. E50417-H1100-C151. In columns Event Log", Trip Log" and Ground Fault Log" the following applies: UPPER CASE NOTATION "ON/OFF": definitely set, not allocatable lower case notation "on/off": preset, allocatable *: not preset, allocatable <blank>: neither preset nor allocatable In column Marked in Oscill.Record" the following applies: definitely set, not allocatable lower case notation "m": preset, allocatable *: not preset, allocatable <blank>: neither preset nor allocatable Log Buffers Configurable in Matrix Data Unit General Interrogation 240 20 1 Yes LED BO 106 21 1 Yes on off LED BO IntSP _Ev * LED BO Device, General OUT on off LED BO Device, General OUT on off LED BO Setting Group A is active (P-GrpA Change Group act) IntSP ON * OFF * LED BO 106 23 1 Yes - Setting Group B is active (P-GrpB Change Group act) IntSP ON * OFF * LED BO 106 24 1 Yes - Setting Group C is active (PGrpC act) Change Group IntSP ON * OFF * LED BO 106 25 1 Yes - Setting Group D is active (PGrpD act) Change Group IntSP ON * OFF * LED BO 106 26 1 Yes - Fault Recording Start (FltRecSta) Osc. Fault Rec. IntSP ON * OFF m LED BO 135 208 1 Yes Device, General OUT on off Reset LED (Reset LED) Device, General IntSP on LED BO >Back Light on (>Light on) Device, General SP on off LED BI BO - Stop data transmission (DataStop) Device, General IntSP on off LED - Test mode (Test mode) Device, General IntSP on off - Hardware Test Mode (HWTestMod) Device, General IntSP - Clock Synchronization (SynchClock) Device, General - Error FMS FO 1 (Error FMS1) - Error FMS FO 2 (Error FMS2) - 336 Chatter Suppression BO Relay No - LED Function Key 1 - Binary Input 19 Disturbance CFC (Distur.CFC) LED 106 - Event Log ON/OFF Information Number IEC 60870-5-103 Type Type of Informatio n Marked in Oscill. Record Function Ground Fault Log ON/OFF Description Trip (Fault) Log On/Off No. UPPER CASE NOTATION "M": BO SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Appendix A.8 Information List Log Buffers Configurable in Matrix Information Number Data Unit General Interrogation 86 1 Yes 240 160 20 240 160 1 240 161 20 240 161 1 240 162 20 240 162 1 240 164 20 240 164 1 240 163 20 240 163 1 Yes BO 135 48 1 No LED BI BO 135 49 1 Yes * LED BI BO * LED BI BO Key Switch 1 (Local/Remote) (KeySwitch1) Cntrl Authority DP on off LED - Control Authority (Cntrl Auth) Cntrl Authority IntSP ON OFF LED - Key Switch 2 (Interlocking OFF/ON) (KeySwitch2) Cntrl Authority DP on off LED - Controlmode LOCAL (ModeLOCAL) Cntrl Authority IntSP ON OFF LED - Controlmode REMOTE (ModeR- Cntrl Authority EMOTE) IntSP ON OFF LED - circuit breaker Q0 (Q0) Control Device CF_D 2 on off - circuit breaker Q0 (Q0) Control Device DP on off - bus disconnector Q1 (Q1) Control Device CF_D 2 on off - bus disconnector Q1 (Q1) Control Device DP on off - bus disconnector Q2 (Q2) Control Device CF_D 2 on off - bus disconnector Q2 (Q2) Control Device DP on off - earthing isolator Q8 (Q8) Control Device CF_D 2 on off - earthing isolator Q8 (Q8) Control Device DP on off - feeder disconnector Q9 (Q9) Control Device CF_D 2 on off - feeder disconnector Q9 (Q9) Control Device DP on off - Release circuit breaker Q0 (ReleaseQ0) Control Device IntSP on off LED BO - Release bus disconnector Q1 (ReleaseQ1) Control Device IntSP on off LED BO - Release bus disconnector Q2 (ReleaseQ2) Control Device IntSP on off LED BO - Release earthing isolator Q8 (ReleaseQ8) Control Device IntSP on off LED BO - Release feeder disconnector Q9 (ReleaseQ9) Control Device IntSP on off LED BO - Threshold Value 1 (ThreshVal1) Thresh.-Switch IntSP on off LED BI - Error Systeminterface (SysIntErr.) Protocol IntSP on off LED 1 No Function configured (Not con- Device, General figured) OUT 2 Function Not Available (Non Exis- Device, General tent) OUT 3 >Synchronize Internal Real Time Device, General Clock (>Time Synch) SP_E v * LED BI 4 >Trigger Waveform Capture (>Trig.Wave.Cap.) Osc. Fault Rec. SP on * m 5 >Reset LED (>Reset LED) Device, General SP * * 7 >Setting Group Select Bit 0 (>Set Change Group Group Bit0) SP * * Chatter Suppression 101 Relay Yes Function Key 1 Binary Input 85 LED 101 - SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 IEC 60870-5-103 Type Marked in Oscill. Record Type of Informatio n Ground Fault Log ON/OFF Function Trip (Fault) Log On/Off Description Event Log ON/OFF No. BO BI CB BO BI CB BO BI CB BO BI CB BO BI CB FC TN BO Yes Yes Yes Yes CB BO FC TN 337 Appendix A.8 Information List Log Buffers LED Configurable in Matrix Marked in Oscill. Record Type of Informatio n Ground Fault Log ON/OFF Function * LED BI BO on off * LED BO IntSP on off * LED BO IntSP on off * LED BO * * 009.0100 Failure EN100 Modul (Failure Modul) EN100-Modul 1 IntSP 009.0101 Failure EN100 Link Channel 1 (Ch1) (Fail Ch1) EN100-Modul 1 009.0102 Failure EN100 Link Channel 2 (Ch2) (Fail Ch2) EN100-Modul 1 SP * * LED BI BO Device, General SP * * LED BI BO 135 54 1 Yes 51 Device is Operational and Protecting (Device OK) Device, General OUT on off LED BO 135 81 1 Yes 52 At Least 1 Protection Funct. is Active (ProtActive) Device, General IntSP on off LED BO 106 18 1 Yes 55 Reset Device (Reset Device) Device, General OUT on LED BO 56 Initial Start of Device (Initial Start) Device, General OUT on LED BO 106 5 1 No 67 Resume (Resume) Device, General OUT on LED BO 68 Clock Synchronization Error (Clock SyncError) Device, General IntSP on off LED BO 69 Daylight Saving Time (DayLightSavTime) Device, General OUT on off LED BO 70 Setting calculation is running (Settings Calc.) Device, General OUT on off LED BO 106 22 1 Yes 71 Settings Check (Settings Check) Device, General OUT * LED BO 72 Level-2 change (Level-2 change) Device, General OUT on off LED BO 73 Local setting change (Local change) Device, General OUT * LED BO 110 Event lost (Event Lost) Device, General OUT_ * Ev LED BO 135 130 1 No LED BO 135 145 1 Yes 135 187 1 Yes * 113 Flag Lost (Flag Lost) Device, General OUT 125 Chatter ON (Chatter ON) Device, General OUT on off 126 Protection ON/OFF (via system port) (ProtON/OFF) Device, General IntSP ON * OFF * LED BO 127 Auto Reclose ON/OFF (via system port) (AR ON/OFF) Device, General IntSP ON * OFF * LED BO 140 Error with a summary alarm (Error Sum Alarm) Device, General OUT ON OFF * LED BO 147 Error Power Supply (Error PwrSupply) Device, General OUT on off LED BO 168 Failure: Voltage absent (Fail U absent) Measurem.Superv OUT ON * OFF LED BO 170.0001 >Sync1 effective (>Sy1 eff.) SYNC function 1 SP on off LED BI BO 170.0001 >Sync2 effective (>Sy2 eff.) SYNC function 2 SP on off LED BI BO 170.0001 >Sync3 effective (>Sy3 eff.) SYNC function 3 SP on off LED BI BO 170.0001 >Sync4 effective (>Sy4 eff.) SYNC function 4 SP on off LED BI BO 170.0001 >Sync5 effective (>Sy5 eff.) SYNC function 5 SP on off LED BI BO 338 * Chatter Suppression Device, General >Stop data transmission (>DataStop) Relay >Test mode (>Test mode) 16 Function Key 15 Binary Input General Interrogation SP Data Unit >Setting Group Select Bit 1 (>Set Change Group Group Bit1) Information Number 8 IEC 60870-5-103 Type Trip (Fault) Log On/Off Description Event Log ON/OFF No. SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Appendix A.8 Information List 170.0001 >Sync6 effective (>Sy6 eff.) SYNC function 6 SP on off LED BI BO 170.0001 >Sync7 effective (>Sy7 eff.) SYNC function 7 SP on off LED BI BO 170.0001 >Sync8 effective (>Sy8 eff.) SYNC function 8 SP on off LED BI BO 170.0041 >Sync1 block (>Sy1 block) SYNC function 1 SP on off LED BI BO 170.0041 >Sync2 block (>Sy2 block) SYNC function 2 SP on off LED BI BO 170.0041 >Sync3 block (>Sy3 block) SYNC function 3 SP on off LED BI BO 170.0041 >Sync4 block (>Sy4 block) SYNC function 4 SP on off LED BI BO 170.0041 >Sync5 block (>Sy5 block) SYNC function 5 SP on off LED BI BO 170.0041 >Sync6 block (>Sy6 block) SYNC function 6 SP on off LED BI BO 170.0041 >Sync7 block (>Sy7 block) SYNC function 7 SP on off LED BI BO 170.0041 >Sync8 block (>Sy8 block) SYNC function 8 SP on off LED BI BO 170.0042 >Sync1 direct Command Output (>Sy1 dirCO) SYNC function 1 SP on off LED BI BO 170.0042 >Sync2 direct Command Output (>Sy2 dirCO) SYNC function 2 SP on off LED BI BO 170.0042 >Sync3 direct Command Output (>Sy3 dirCO) SYNC function 3 SP on off LED BI BO 170.0042 >Sync4 direct Command Output (>Sy4 dirCO) SYNC function 4 SP on off LED BI BO 170.0042 >Sync5 direct Command Output (>Sy5 dirCO) SYNC function 5 SP on off LED BI BO 170.0042 >Sync6 direct Command Output (>Sy6 dirCO) SYNC function 6 SP on off LED BI BO 170.0042 >Sync7 direct Command Output (>Sy7 dirCO) SYNC function 7 SP on off LED BI BO 170.0042 >Sync8 direct Command Output (>Sy8 dirCO) SYNC function 8 SP on off LED BI BO 170.0043 >Sync1 Measuement only (>Sy1 SYNC function 1 Meas) SP on off LED BI BO 170.0043 >Sync2 Measurement only (>Sy2 SYNC function 2 Meas) SP on off LED BI BO 170.0043 >Sync3 Measurement only (>Sy3 SYNC function 3 Meas) SP on off LED BI BO 170.0043 >Sync4 Measurement only (>Sy4 SYNC function 4 Meas) SP on off LED BI BO 170.0043 >Sync5 Measurement Only (>Sy5 Meas) SYNC function 5 SP on off LED BI BO 170.0043 >Sync6 Measurement only (>Sy6 SYNC function 6 Meas) SP on off LED BI BO 170.0043 >Sync7 Measurement only (>Sy7 SYNC function 7 Meas) SP on off LED BI BO 170.0043 >Sync8 Measurement only (>Sy8 SYNC function 8 Meas) SP on off LED BI BO 170.0044 >Sync1 switch to U1> and U2< (>Sy1U1>U2<) SP on off LED BI BO SYNC function 1 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 General Interrogation Data Unit Information Number IEC 60870-5-103 Type Chatter Suppression Relay Function Key Binary Input Configurable in Matrix LED Log Buffers Marked in Oscill. Record Type of Informatio n Ground Fault Log ON/OFF Function Trip (Fault) Log On/Off Description Event Log ON/OFF No. 339 Appendix A.8 Information List on off LED BI BO 170.0044 >Sync3 switch to U1> and U2< (>Sy3U1>U2<) SYNC function 3 SP on off LED BI BO 170.0044 >Sync4 switch to U1> and U2< (>Sy4U1>U2<) SYNC function 4 SP on off LED BI BO 170.0044 >Sync5 switch to U1> and U2< (>Sy5U1>U2<) SYNC function 5 SP on off LED BI BO 170.0044 >Sync6 switch to U1> and U2< (>Sy6U1>U2<) SYNC function 6 SP on off LED BI BO 170.0044 >Sync7 switch to U1> and U2< (>Sy7U1>U2<) SYNC function 7 SP on off LED BI BO 170.0044 >Sync8 switch to U1> and U2< (>Sy8U1>U2<) SYNC function 8 SP on off LED BI BO 170.0045 >Sync1 switch to U1< and U2> (>Sy1U1<U2>) SYNC function 1 SP on off LED BI BO 170.0045 >Sync2 switch to U1< and U2> (>Sy2U1<U2>) SYNC function 2 SP on off LED BI BO 170.0045 >Sync3 switch to U1< and U2> (>Sy3U1<U2>) SYNC function 3 SP on off LED BI BO 170.0045 >Sync4 switch to U1< and U2> (>Sy4U1<U2>) SYNC function 4 SP on off LED BI BO 170.0045 >Sync5 switch to U1< and U2> (>Sy5U1<U2>) SYNC function 5 SP on off LED BI BO 170.0045 >Sync6 switch to U1< and U2> (>Sy6U1<U2>) SYNC function 6 SP on off LED BI BO 170.0045 >Sync7 switch to U1< and U2> (>Sy7U1<U2>) SYNC function 7 SP on off LED BI BO 170.0045 >Sync8 switch to U1< and U2> (>Sy8U1<U2>) SYNC function 8 SP on off LED BI BO 170.0046 >Sync1 switch to U1< and U2< (>Sy1U1<U2<) SYNC function 1 SP on off LED BI BO 170.0046 >Sync2 switch to U1< and U2< (>Sy2U1<U2<) SYNC function 2 SP on off LED BI BO 170.0046 >Sync3 switch to U1< and U2< (>Sy3U1<U2<) SYNC function 3 SP on off LED BI BO 170.0046 >Sync4 switch to U1< and U2< (>Sy4U1<U2<) SYNC function 4 SP on off LED BI BO 170.0046 >Sync5 switch to U1< and U2< (>Sy5U1<U2<) SYNC function 5 SP on off LED BI BO 170.0046 >Sync6 switch to U1< and U2< (>Sy6U1<U2<) SYNC function 6 SP on off LED BI BO 170.0046 >Sync7 switch to U1< and U2< (>Sy7U1<U2<) SYNC function 7 SP on off LED BI BO 170.0046 >Sync8 switch to U1< and U2< (>Sy8U1<U2<) SYNC function 8 SP on off LED BI BO 170.0049 Sync. Release of CLOSE Command (Sync. CloseRel) SYNC function 1 OUT on off LED BO 170.0049 Sync. Release of CLOSE Command (Sync. CloseRel) SYNC function 2 OUT on off LED BO 170.0049 Sync. Release of CLOSE Command (Sync. CloseRel) SYNC function 3 OUT on off LED BO 170.0049 Sync. Release of CLOSE Command (Sync. CloseRel) SYNC function 4 OUT on off LED BO 170.0049 Sync. Release of CLOSE Command (Sync. CloseRel) SYNC function 5 OUT on off LED BO 340 General Interrogation SP Data Unit SYNC function 2 Information Number >Sync2 switch to U1> and U2< (>Sy2U1>U2<) IEC 60870-5-103 Type 170.0044 Chatter Suppression Relay Function Key Binary Input Configurable in Matrix LED Log Buffers Marked in Oscill. Record Type of Informatio n Ground Fault Log ON/OFF Function Trip (Fault) Log On/Off Description Event Log ON/OFF No. 41 201 1 Yes SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Appendix A.8 Information List on off LED BO 170.0049 Sync. Release of CLOSE Command (Sync. CloseRel) SYNC function 7 OUT on off LED BO 170.0049 Sync. Release of CLOSE Command (Sync. CloseRel) SYNC function 8 OUT on off LED BO 170.0050 Synchronization Error (Sync. Error) SYNC function 1 OUT on off LED BO 170.0050 Synchronization Error (Sync. Error) SYNC function 2 OUT on off LED BO 170.0050 Synchronization Error (Sync. Error) SYNC function 3 OUT on off LED BO 170.0050 Synchronization Error (Sync. Error) SYNC function 4 OUT on off LED BO 170.0050 Synchronization Error (Sync. Error) SYNC function 5 OUT on off LED BO 170.0050 Synchronization Error (Sync. Error) SYNC function 6 OUT on off LED BO 170.0050 Synchronization Error (Sync. Error) SYNC function 7 OUT on off LED BO 170.0050 Synchronization Error (Sync. Error) SYNC function 8 OUT on off LED BO 170.0051 Sync. blocked (Sync. block) SYNC function 1 OUT on off LED BO 170.0051 Sync. blocked (Sync. block) SYNC function 2 OUT on off LED BO 170.0051 Sync. blocked (Sync. block) SYNC function 3 OUT on off LED BO 170.0051 Sync. blocked (Sync. block) SYNC function 4 OUT on off LED BO 170.0051 Sync. blocked (Sync. block) SYNC function 5 OUT on off LED BO 170.0051 Sync. blocked (Sync. block) SYNC function 6 OUT on off LED BO 170.0051 Sync. blocked (Sync. block) SYNC function 7 OUT on off LED BO 170.0051 Sync. blocked (Sync. block) SYNC function 8 OUT on off LED BO 170.0052 Sync. Monitoring Time exceeded SYNC function 1 (Sync.MonTimeExc) OUT on off LED BO 170.0052 Sync. Monitoring Time exceeded SYNC function 2 (Sync.MonTimeExc) OUT on off LED BO 170.0052 Sync. Monitoring Time exceeded SYNC function 3 (Sync.MonTimeExc) OUT on off LED BO 170.0052 Sync. Monitoring Time exceeded SYNC function 4 (Sync.MonTimeExc) OUT on off LED BO 170.0052 Sync. Monitoring Time exceeded SYNC function 5 (Sync.MonTimeExc) OUT on off LED BO 170.0052 Sync. Monitoring Time exceeded SYNC function 6 (Sync.MonTimeExc) OUT on off LED BO 170.0052 Sync. Monitoring Time exceeded SYNC function 7 (Sync.MonTimeExc) OUT on off LED BO 170.0052 Sync. Monitoring Time exceeded SYNC function 8 (Sync.MonTimeExc) OUT on off LED BO 170.0053 Sync. Synchron (Sync. synchron) SYNC function 1 OUT on off LED BO SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 General Interrogation OUT Data Unit SYNC function 6 Information Number Sync. Release of CLOSE Command (Sync. CloseRel) IEC 60870-5-103 Type 170.0049 Chatter Suppression Relay Function Key Binary Input Configurable in Matrix LED Log Buffers Marked in Oscill. Record Type of Informatio n Ground Fault Log ON/OFF Function Trip (Fault) Log On/Off Description Event Log ON/OFF No. 41 202 1 Yes 41 205 1 Yes 41 206 1 Yes 341 Appendix A.8 Information List 170.0053 Sync. Synchron (Sync. synchron) SYNC function 2 OUT on off LED BO 170.0053 Sync. Synchron (Sync. synchron) SYNC function 3 OUT on off LED BO 170.0053 Sync. Synchron (Sync. synchron) SYNC function 4 OUT on off LED BO 170.0053 Sync. Synchron (Sync. synchron) SYNC function 5 OUT on off LED BO 170.0053 Sync. Synchron (Sync. synchron) SYNC function 6 OUT on off LED BO 170.0053 Sync. Synchron (Sync. synchron) SYNC function 7 OUT on off LED BO 170.0053 Sync. Synchron (Sync. synchron) SYNC function 8 OUT on off LED BO 170.0054 Sync. Condition U1> U2< fulfilled SYNC function 1 (Sync. U1> U2<) OUT on off LED BO 170.0054 Sync. Condition U1> U2< fulfilled SYNC function 2 (Sync. U1> U2<) OUT on off LED BO 170.0054 Sync. Condition U1> U2< fulfilled SYNC function 3 (Sync. U1> U2<) OUT on off LED BO 170.0054 Sync. Condition U1> U2< fulfilled SYNC function 4 (Sync. U1> U2<) OUT on off LED BO 170.0054 Sync. Condition U1> U2< fulfilled SYNC function 5 (Sync. U1> U2<) OUT on off LED BO 170.0054 Sync. Condition U1> U2< fulfilled SYNC function 6 (Sync. U1> U2<) OUT on off LED BO 170.0054 Sync. Condition U1> U2< fulfilled SYNC function 7 (Sync. U1> U2<) OUT on off LED BO 170.0054 Sync. Condition U1> U2< fulfilled SYNC function 8 (Sync. U1> U2<) OUT on off LED BO 170.0055 Sync. Condition U1< U2> fulfilled SYNC function 1 (Sync. U1< U2>) OUT on off LED BO 170.0055 Sync. Condition U1< U2> fulfilled SYNC function 2 (Sync. U1< U2>) OUT on off LED BO 170.0055 Sync. Condition U1< U2> fulfilled SYNC function 3 (Sync. U1< U2>) OUT on off LED BO 170.0055 Sync. Condition U1< U2> fulfilled SYNC function 4 (Sync. U1< U2>) OUT on off LED BO 170.0055 Sync. Condition U1< U2> fulfilled SYNC function 5 (Sync. U1< U2>) OUT on off LED BO 170.0055 Sync. Condition U1< U2> fulfilled SYNC function 6 (Sync. U1< U2>) OUT on off LED BO 170.0055 Sync. Condition U1< U2> fulfilled SYNC function 7 (Sync. U1< U2>) OUT on off LED BO 170.0055 Sync. Condition U1< U2> fulfilled SYNC function 8 (Sync. U1< U2>) OUT on off LED BO 170.0056 Sync. Condition U1< U2< fulfilled SYNC function 1 (Sync. U1< U2<) OUT on off LED BO 170.0056 Sync. Condition U1< U2< fulfilled SYNC function 2 (Sync. U1< U2<) OUT on off LED BO 170.0056 Sync. Condition U1< U2< fulfilled SYNC function 3 (Sync. U1< U2<) OUT on off LED BO 170.0056 Sync. Condition U1< U2< fulfilled SYNC function 4 (Sync. U1< U2<) OUT on off LED BO 170.0056 Sync. Condition U1< U2< fulfilled SYNC function 5 (Sync. U1< U2<) OUT on off LED BO 342 General Interrogation Data Unit Information Number IEC 60870-5-103 Type Chatter Suppression Relay Function Key Binary Input Configurable in Matrix LED Log Buffers Marked in Oscill. Record Type of Informatio n Ground Fault Log ON/OFF Function Trip (Fault) Log On/Off Description Event Log ON/OFF No. SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Appendix A.8 Information List LED BO 170.0056 Sync. Condition U1< U2< fulfilled SYNC function 7 (Sync. U1< U2<) OUT on off LED BO 170.0056 Sync. Condition U1< U2< fulfilled SYNC function 8 (Sync. U1< U2<) OUT on off LED BO 170.0057 Sync. Voltage difference exceed- SYNC function 1 ed (Sync. Vdiff>) OUT on off LED BO 170.0057 Sync. Voltage difference exceed- SYNC function 2 ed (Sync. Vdiff>) OUT on off LED BO 170.0057 Sync. Voltage difference exceed- SYNC function 3 ed (Sync. Vdiff>) OUT on off LED BO 170.0057 Sync. Voltage difference exceed- SYNC function 4 ed (Sync. Vdiff>) OUT on off LED BO 170.0057 Sync. Voltage difference exceed- SYNC function 5 ed (Sync. Vdiff>) OUT on off LED BO 170.0057 Sync. Voltage difference exceed- SYNC function 6 ed (Sync. Vdiff>) OUT on off LED BO 170.0057 Sync. Voltage difference exceed- SYNC function 7 ed (Sync. Vdiff>) OUT on off LED BO 170.0057 Sync. Voltage difference exceed- SYNC function 8 ed (Sync. Vdiff>) OUT on off LED BO 170.0058 Sync. frequency difference exceeded (Sync. fdiff>) SYNC function 1 OUT on off LED BO 170.0058 Sync. frequency difference exceeded (Sync. fdiff>) SYNC function 2 OUT on off LED BO 170.0058 Sync. frequency difference exceeded (Sync. fdiff>) SYNC function 3 OUT on off LED BO 170.0058 Sync. frequency difference exceeded (Sync. fdiff>) SYNC function 4 OUT on off LED BO 170.0058 Sync. frequency difference exceeded (Sync. fdiff>) SYNC function 5 OUT on off LED BO 170.0058 Sync. frequency difference exceeded (Sync. fdiff>) SYNC function 6 OUT on off LED BO 170.0058 Sync. frequency difference exceeded (Sync. fdiff>) SYNC function 7 OUT on off LED BO 170.0058 Sync. frequency difference exceeded (Sync. fdiff>) SYNC function 8 OUT on off LED BO 170.0059 Sync.angle difference exceeded (Sync. diff>) SYNC function 1 OUT on off LED BO 170.0059 Sync.angle difference exceeded (Sync. diff>) SYNC function 2 OUT on off LED BO 170.0059 Sync.angle difference exceeded (Sync. diff>) SYNC function 3 OUT on off LED BO 170.0059 Sync.angle difference exceeded (Sync. diff>) SYNC function 4 OUT on off LED BO 170.0059 Sync.angle difference exceeded (Sync. diff>) SYNC function 5 OUT on off LED BO 170.0059 Sync.angle difference exceeded (Sync. diff>) SYNC function 6 OUT on off LED BO 170.0059 Sync.angle difference exceeded (Sync. diff>) SYNC function 7 OUT on off LED BO 170.0059 Sync.angle difference exceeded (Sync. diff>) SYNC function 8 OUT on off LED BO 170.0060 Sync. frequency f1 too high (Sync. f1>>) SYNC function 1 OUT on off LED BO SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 General Interrogation on off Data Unit OUT Information Number Sync. Condition U1< U2< fulfilled SYNC function 6 (Sync. U1< U2<) IEC 60870-5-103 Type 170.0056 Chatter Suppression Relay Function Key Binary Input Configurable in Matrix LED Log Buffers Marked in Oscill. Record Type of Informatio n Ground Fault Log ON/OFF Function Trip (Fault) Log On/Off Description Event Log ON/OFF No. 41 207 1 Yes 41 208 1 Yes 41 209 1 Yes 343 Appendix A.8 Information List 170.0060 Sync. frequency f1 too high (Sync. f1>>) SYNC function 2 OUT on off LED BO 170.0060 Sync. frequency f1 too high (Sync. f1>>) SYNC function 3 OUT on off LED BO 170.0060 Sync. frequency f1 too high (Sync. f1>>) SYNC function 4 OUT on off LED BO 170.0060 Sync. frequency f1 too high (Sync. f1>>) SYNC function 5 OUT on off LED BO 170.0060 Sync. frequency f1 too high (Sync. f1>>) SYNC function 6 OUT on off LED BO 170.0060 Sync. frequency f1 too high (Sync. f1>>) SYNC function 7 OUT on off LED BO 170.0060 Sync. frequency f1 too high (Sync. f1>>) SYNC function 8 OUT on off LED BO 170.0061 Sync. frequency f1 too low (Sync. SYNC function 1 f1<<) OUT on off LED BO 170.0061 Sync. frequency f1 too low (Sync. SYNC function 2 f1<<) OUT on off LED BO 170.0061 Sync. frequency f1 too low (Sync. SYNC function 3 f1<<) OUT on off LED BO 170.0061 Sync. frequency f1 too low (Sync. SYNC function 4 f1<<) OUT on off LED BO 170.0061 Sync. frequency f1 too low (Sync. SYNC function 5 f1<<) OUT on off LED BO 170.0061 Sync. frequency f1 too low (Sync. SYNC function 6 f1<<) OUT on off LED BO 170.0061 Sync. frequency f1 too low (Sync. SYNC function 7 f1<<) OUT on off LED BO 170.0061 Sync. frequency f1 too low (Sync. SYNC function 8 f1<<) OUT on off LED BO 170.0062 Sync. frequency f2 too high (Sync. f2>>) SYNC function 1 OUT on off LED BO 170.0062 Sync. frequency f2 too high (Sync. f2>>) SYNC function 2 OUT on off LED BO 170.0062 Sync. frequency f2 too high (Sync. f2>>) SYNC function 3 OUT on off LED BO 170.0062 Sync. frequency f2 too high (Sync. f2>>) SYNC function 4 OUT on off LED BO 170.0062 Sync. frequency f2 too high (Sync. f2>>) SYNC function 5 OUT on off LED BO 170.0062 Sync. frequency f2 too high (Sync. f2>>) SYNC function 6 OUT on off LED BO 170.0062 Sync. frequency f2 too high (Sync. f2>>) SYNC function 7 OUT on off LED BO 170.0062 Sync. frequency f2 too high (Sync. f2>>) SYNC function 8 OUT on off LED BO 170.0063 Sync. frequency f2 too low (Sync. SYNC function 1 f2<<) OUT on off LED BO 170.0063 Sync. frequency f2 too low (Sync. SYNC function 2 f2<<) OUT on off LED BO 170.0063 Sync. frequency f2 too low (Sync. SYNC function 3 f2<<) OUT on off LED BO 170.0063 Sync. frequency f2 too low (Sync. SYNC function 4 f2<<) OUT on off LED BO 170.0063 Sync. frequency f2 too low (Sync. SYNC function 5 f2<<) OUT on off LED BO 344 General Interrogation Data Unit Information Number IEC 60870-5-103 Type Chatter Suppression Relay Function Key Binary Input Configurable in Matrix LED Log Buffers Marked in Oscill. Record Type of Informatio n Ground Fault Log ON/OFF Function Trip (Fault) Log On/Off Description Event Log ON/OFF No. SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Appendix A.8 Information List 170.0063 Sync. frequency f2 too low (Sync. SYNC function 6 f2<<) OUT on off LED BO 170.0063 Sync. frequency f2 too low (Sync. SYNC function 7 f2<<) OUT on off LED BO 170.0063 Sync. frequency f2 too low (Sync. SYNC function 8 f2<<) OUT on off LED BO 170.0064 Sync. voltage U1 too high (Sync. SYNC function 1 U1>>) OUT on off LED BO 170.0064 Sync. voltage U1 too high (Sync. SYNC function 2 U1>>) OUT on off LED BO 170.0064 Sync. voltage U1 too high (Sync. SYNC function 3 U1>>) OUT on off LED BO 170.0064 Sync. voltage U1 too high (Sync. SYNC function 4 U1>>) OUT on off LED BO 170.0064 Sync. voltage U1 too high (Sync. SYNC function 5 U1>>) OUT on off LED BO 170.0064 Sync. voltage U1 too high (Sync. SYNC function 6 U1>>) OUT on off LED BO 170.0064 Sync. voltage U1 too high (Sync. SYNC function 7 U1>>) OUT on off LED BO 170.0064 Sync. voltage U1 too high (Sync. SYNC function 8 U1>>) OUT on off LED BO 170.0065 Sync. voltage U1 too low (Sync. U1<<) SYNC function 1 OUT on off LED BO 170.0065 Sync. voltage U1 too low (Sync. U1<<) SYNC function 2 OUT on off LED BO 170.0065 Sync. voltage U1 too low (Sync. U1<<) SYNC function 3 OUT on off LED BO 170.0065 Sync. voltage U1 too low (Sync. U1<<) SYNC function 4 OUT on off LED BO 170.0065 Sync. voltage U1 too low (Sync. U1<<) SYNC function 5 OUT on off LED BO 170.0065 Sync. voltage U1 too low (Sync. U1<<) SYNC function 6 OUT on off LED BO 170.0065 Sync. voltage U1 too low (Sync. U1<<) SYNC function 7 OUT on off LED BO 170.0065 Sync. voltage U1 too low (Sync. U1<<) SYNC function 8 OUT on off LED BO 170.0066 Sync. voltage U2 too high (Sync. SYNC function 1 U2>>) OUT on off LED BO 170.0066 Sync. voltage U2 too high (Sync. SYNC function 2 U2>>) OUT on off LED BO 170.0066 Sync. voltage U2 too high (Sync. SYNC function 3 U2>>) OUT on off LED BO 170.0066 Sync. voltage U2 too high (Sync. SYNC function 4 U2>>) OUT on off LED BO 170.0066 Sync. voltage U2 too high (Sync. SYNC function 5 U2>>) OUT on off LED BO 170.0066 Sync. voltage U2 too high (Sync. SYNC function 6 U2>>) OUT on off LED BO 170.0066 Sync. voltage U2 too high (Sync. SYNC function 7 U2>>) OUT on off LED BO 170.0066 Sync. voltage U2 too high (Sync. SYNC function 8 U2>>) OUT on off LED BO 170.0067 Sync. voltage U2 too low (Sync. U2<<) OUT on off LED BO SYNC function 1 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 General Interrogation Data Unit Information Number IEC 60870-5-103 Type Chatter Suppression Relay Function Key Binary Input Configurable in Matrix LED Log Buffers Marked in Oscill. Record Type of Informatio n Ground Fault Log ON/OFF Function Trip (Fault) Log On/Off Description Event Log ON/OFF No. 345 Appendix A.8 Information List Sync. voltage U2 too low (Sync. U2<<) SYNC function 2 OUT on off LED BO 170.0067 Sync. voltage U2 too low (Sync. U2<<) SYNC function 3 OUT on off LED BO 170.0067 Sync. voltage U2 too low (Sync. U2<<) SYNC function 4 OUT on off LED BO 170.0067 Sync. voltage U2 too low (Sync. U2<<) SYNC function 5 OUT on off LED BO 170.0067 Sync. voltage U2 too low (Sync. U2<<) SYNC function 6 OUT on off LED BO 170.0067 Sync. voltage U2 too low (Sync. U2<<) SYNC function 7 OUT on off LED BO 170.0067 Sync. voltage U2 too low (Sync. U2<<) SYNC function 8 OUT on off LED BO 170.0080 Sync. volt.-diff. exceeded synch. netw. (Sync. Udiffsyn>) SYNC function 1 OUT on off LED BO 170.0080 Sync. volt.-diff. exceeded synch. netw. (Sync. Udiffsyn>) SYNC function 2 OUT on off LED BO 170.0080 Sync. volt.-diff. exceeded synch. netw. (Sync. Udiffsyn>) SYNC function 3 OUT on off LED BO 170.0080 Sync. volt.-diff. exceeded synch. netw. (Sync. Udiffsyn>) SYNC function 4 OUT on off LED BO 170.0080 Sync. volt.-diff. exceeded synch. netw. (Sync. Udiffsyn>) SYNC function 5 OUT on off LED BO 170.0080 Sync. volt.-diff. exceeded synch. netw. (Sync. Udiffsyn>) SYNC function 6 OUT on off LED BO 170.0080 Sync. volt.-diff. exceeded synch. netw. (Sync. Udiffsyn>) SYNC function 7 OUT on off LED BO 170.0080 Sync. volt.-diff. exceeded synch. netw. (Sync. Udiffsyn>) SYNC function 8 OUT on off LED BO 170.0081 Sync. volt.-diff. exceeded asynch. SYNC function 1 netw. (Sync.Udiffasyn>) OUT on off LED BO 170.0081 Sync. volt.-diff. exceeded asynch. SYNC function 2 netw. (Sync.Udiffasyn>) OUT on off LED BO 170.0081 Sync. volt.-diff. exceeded asynch. SYNC function 3 netw. (Sync.Udiffasyn>) OUT on off LED BO 170.0081 Sync. volt.-diff. exceeded asynch. SYNC function 4 netw. (Sync.Udiffasyn>) OUT on off LED BO 170.0081 Sync. volt.-diff. exceeded asynch. SYNC function 5 netw. (Sync.Udiffasyn>) OUT on off LED BO 170.0081 Sync. volt.-diff. exceeded asynch. SYNC function 6 netw. (Sync.Udiffasyn>) OUT on off LED BO 170.0081 Sync. volt.-diff. exceeded asynch. SYNC function 7 netw. (Sync.Udiffasyn>) OUT on off LED BO 170.0081 Sync. volt.-diff. exceeded asynch. SYNC function 8 netw. (Sync.Udiffasyn>) OUT on off LED BO 170.0082 Sync. frq.-diff. exceeded synch. netw. (Sync. fdiffsyn>) SYNC function 1 OUT on off LED BO 170.0082 Sync. frq.-diff. exceeded synch. netw. (Sync. fdiffsyn>) SYNC function 2 OUT on off LED BO 170.0082 Sync. frq.-diff. exceeded synch. netw. (Sync. fdiffsyn>) SYNC function 3 OUT on off LED BO 170.0082 Sync. frq.-diff. exceeded synch. netw. (Sync. fdiffsyn>) SYNC function 4 OUT on off LED BO 170.0082 Sync. frq.-diff. exceeded synch. netw. (Sync. fdiffsyn>) SYNC function 5 OUT on off LED BO IEC 60870-5-103 Type Chatter Suppression Relay Function Key Binary Input LED Configurable in Matrix Marked in Oscill. Record Ground Fault Log ON/OFF Trip (Fault) Log On/Off Log Buffers Event Log ON/OFF Type of Informatio n General Interrogation 170.0067 346 Function Data Unit Description Information Number No. SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Appendix A.8 Information List 170.0082 Sync. frq.-diff. exceeded synch. netw. (Sync. fdiffsyn>) SYNC function 6 OUT on off LED BO 170.0082 Sync. frq.-diff. exceeded synch. netw. (Sync. fdiffsyn>) SYNC function 7 OUT on off LED BO 170.0082 Sync. frq.-diff. exceeded synch. netw. (Sync. fdiffsyn>) SYNC function 8 OUT on off LED BO 170.0083 Sync. frq.-diff. exceeded asynch. SYNC function 1 netw. (Sync.fdiffasyn>) OUT on off LED BO 170.0083 Sync. frq.-diff. exceeded asynch. SYNC function 2 netw. (Sync.fdiffasyn>) OUT on off LED BO 170.0083 Sync. frq.-diff. exceeded asynch. SYNC function 3 netw. (Sync.fdiffasyn>) OUT on off LED BO 170.0083 Sync. frq.-diff. exceeded asynch. SYNC function 4 netw. (Sync.fdiffasyn>) OUT on off LED BO 170.0083 Sync. frq.-diff. exceeded asynch. SYNC function 5 netw. (Sync.fdiffasyn>) OUT on off LED BO 170.0083 Sync. frq.-diff. exceeded asynch. SYNC function 6 netw. (Sync.fdiffasyn>) OUT on off LED BO 170.0083 Sync. frq.-diff. exceeded asynch. SYNC function 7 netw. (Sync.fdiffasyn>) OUT on off LED BO 170.0083 Sync. frq.-diff. exceeded asynch. SYNC function 8 netw. (Sync.fdiffasyn>) OUT on off LED BO 170.0084 Sync.dFdiffdtS> (Sync.dFdiffdtS>) SYNC function 1 OUT on off LED BO 170.0084 Sync.dFdiffdtS> (Sync.dFdiffdtS>) SYNC function 2 OUT on off LED BO 170.0084 Sync.dFdiffdtS> (Sync.dFdiffdtS>) SYNC function 3 OUT on off LED BO 170.0084 Sync.dFdiffdtS> (Sync.dFdiffdtS>) SYNC function 4 OUT on off LED BO 170.0084 Sync.dFdiffdtS> (Sync.dFdiffdtS>) SYNC function 5 OUT on off LED BO 170.0084 Sync.dFdiffdtS> (Sync.dFdiffdtS>) SYNC function 6 OUT on off LED BO 170.0084 Sync.dFdiffdtS> (Sync.dFdiffdtS>) SYNC function 7 OUT on off LED BO 170.0084 Sync.dFdiffdtS> (Sync.dFdiffdtS>) SYNC function 8 OUT on off LED BO 170.0085 Sync.dFdiffdtA> (Sync.dFdiffdtA>) SYNC function 1 OUT on off LED BO 170.0085 Sync.dFdiffdtA> (Sync.dFdiffdtA>) SYNC function 2 OUT on off LED BO 170.0085 Sync.dFdiffdtA> (Sync.dFdiffdtA>) SYNC function 3 OUT on off LED BO 170.0085 Sync.dFdiffdtA> (Sync.dFdiffdtA>) SYNC function 4 OUT on off LED BO 170.0085 Sync.dFdiffdtA> (Sync.dFdiffdtA>) SYNC function 5 OUT on off LED BO 170.0085 Sync.dFdiffdtA> (Sync.dFdiffdtA>) SYNC function 6 OUT on off LED BO 170.0085 Sync.dFdiffdtA> (Sync.dFdiffdtA>) SYNC function 7 OUT on off LED BO 170.0085 Sync.dFdiffdtA> (Sync.dFdiffdtA>) SYNC function 8 OUT on off LED BO 170.0086 Sync. syn (Sync. syn) SYNC function 1 OUT on off LED BO SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 General Interrogation Data Unit Information Number IEC 60870-5-103 Type Chatter Suppression Relay Function Key Binary Input Configurable in Matrix LED Log Buffers Marked in Oscill. Record Type of Informatio n Ground Fault Log ON/OFF Function Trip (Fault) Log On/Off Description Event Log ON/OFF No. 347 Appendix A.8 Information List 170.0086 Sync. syn (Sync. syn) SYNC function 2 OUT on off LED BO 170.0086 Sync. syn (Sync. syn) SYNC function 3 OUT on off LED BO 170.0086 Sync. syn (Sync. syn) SYNC function 4 OUT on off LED BO 170.0086 Sync. syn (Sync. syn) SYNC function 5 OUT on off LED BO 170.0086 Sync. syn (Sync. syn) SYNC function 6 OUT on off LED BO 170.0086 Sync. syn (Sync. syn) SYNC function 7 OUT on off LED BO 170.0086 Sync. syn (Sync. syn) SYNC function 8 OUT on off LED BO 170.0087 Sync. asyn (Sync. asyn) SYNC function 1 OUT on off LED BO 170.0087 Sync. asyn (Sync. asyn) SYNC function 2 OUT on off LED BO 170.0087 Sync. asyn (Sync. asyn) SYNC function 3 OUT on off LED BO 170.0087 Sync. asyn (Sync. asyn) SYNC function 4 OUT on off LED BO 170.0087 Sync. asyn (Sync. asyn) SYNC function 5 OUT on off LED BO 170.0087 Sync. asyn (Sync. asyn) SYNC function 6 OUT on off LED BO 170.0087 Sync. asyn (Sync. asyn) SYNC function 7 OUT on off LED BO 170.0087 Sync. asyn (Sync. asyn) SYNC function 8 OUT on off LED BO 170.0091 Sync. fdiff deviation exceeded (Sync. fDev>) SYNC function 1 OUT on off LED BO 170.0091 Sync. fdiff deviation exceeded (Sync. fDev>) SYNC function 2 OUT on off LED BO 170.0091 Sync. fdiff deviation exceeded (Sync. fDev>) SYNC function 3 OUT on off LED BO 170.0091 Sync. fdiff deviation exceeded (Sync. fDev>) SYNC function 4 OUT on off LED BO 170.0091 Sync. fdiff deviation exceeded (Sync. fDev>) SYNC function 5 OUT on off LED BO 170.0091 Sync. fdiff deviation exceeded (Sync. fDev>) SYNC function 6 OUT on off LED BO 170.0091 Sync. fdiff deviation exceeded (Sync. fDev>) SYNC function 7 OUT on off LED BO 170.0091 Sync. fdiff deviation exceeded (Sync. fDev>) SYNC function 8 OUT on off LED BO 170.2102 >Sync1 release blocking (>Sy1 rlblk) SYNC function 1 SP on off LED BI BO 170.2102 >Sync2 release blocking (>Sy2 rlblk) SYNC function 2 SP on off LED BI BO 170.2102 >Sync3 release blocking (>Sy3 rlblk) SYNC function 3 SP on off LED BI BO 170.2102 >Sync4 release blocking (>Sy4 rlblk) SYNC function 4 SP on off LED BI BO 170.2102 >Sync5 release blocking (>Sy5 rlblk) SYNC function 5 SP on off LED BI BO 348 General Interrogation Data Unit Information Number IEC 60870-5-103 Type Chatter Suppression Relay Function Key Binary Input Configurable in Matrix LED Log Buffers Marked in Oscill. Record Type of Informatio n Ground Fault Log ON/OFF Function Trip (Fault) Log On/Off Description Event Log ON/OFF No. SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Appendix A.8 Information List on off LED BI BO 170.2102 >Sync7 release blocking (>Sy7 rlblk) SYNC function 7 SP on off LED BI BO 170.2102 >Sync8 release blocking (>Sy8 rlblk) SYNC function 8 SP on off LED BI BO 170.2103 Sync. CLOSE command is BLOCKED (Sync. CLOSE BLK) SYNC function 1 OUT on off LED BO 170.2103 Sync. CLOSE command is BLOCKED (Sync. CLOSE BLK) SYNC function 2 OUT on off LED BO 170.2103 Sync. CLOSE command is BLOCKED (Sync. CLOSE BLK) SYNC function 3 OUT on off LED BO 170.2103 Sync. CLOSE command is BLOCKED (Sync. CLOSE BLK) SYNC function 4 OUT on off LED BO 170.2103 Sync. CLOSE command is BLOCKED (Sync. CLOSE BLK) SYNC function 5 OUT on off LED BO 170.2103 Sync. CLOSE command is BLOCKED (Sync. CLOSE BLK) SYNC function 6 OUT on off LED BO 170.2103 Sync. CLOSE command is BLOCKED (Sync. CLOSE BLK) SYNC function 7 OUT on off LED BO 170.2103 Sync. CLOSE command is BLOCKED (Sync. CLOSE BLK) SYNC function 8 OUT on off LED BO 177 Failure: Battery empty (Fail Battery) Device, General OUT on off LED BO 183 Error Board 1 (Error Board 1) Device, General OUT on off LED BO 184 Error Board 2 (Error Board 2) Device, General OUT on off LED BO 185 Error Board 3 (Error Board 3) Device, General OUT on off LED BO 186 Error Board 4 (Error Board 4) Device, General OUT on off LED BO 187 Error Board 5 (Error Board 5) Device, General OUT on off LED BO 188 Error Board 6 (Error Board 6) Device, General OUT on off LED BO 189 Error Board 7 (Error Board 7) Device, General OUT on off LED BO 301 Power System fault (Pow.Sys.Flt.) Device, General OUT on off ON OFF * General Interrogation SP Data Unit SYNC function 6 Information Number >Sync6 release blocking (>Sy6 rlblk) IEC 60870-5-103 Type 170.2102 Chatter Suppression Relay Function Key Binary Input Configurable in Matrix LED Log Buffers Marked in Oscill. Record Type of Informatio n Ground Fault Log ON/OFF Function Trip (Fault) Log On/Off Description Event Log ON/OFF No. 41 204 1 Yes 135 231 2 Yes 135 232 2 Yes 302 Fault Event (Fault Event) Device, General OUT * ON * 320 Warn: Limit of Memory Data exceeded (Warn Mem. Data) Device, General OUT on off * * LED BO 321 Warn: Limit of Memory Parameter Device, General exceeded (Warn Mem. Para.) OUT on off * * LED BO 322 Warn: Limit of Memory Operation Device, General exceeded (Warn Mem. Oper.) OUT on off * * LED BO 323 Warn: Limit of Memory New exceeded (Warn Mem. New) Device, General OUT on off * * LED BO 351 >Circuit breaker aux. contact: Pole L1 (>CB Aux. L1) P.System Data 2 SP * * * LED BI BO 150 1 1 Yes 352 >Circuit breaker aux. contact: Pole L2 (>CB Aux. L2) P.System Data 2 SP * * * LED BI BO 150 2 1 Yes 353 >Circuit breaker aux. contact: Pole L3 (>CB Aux. L3) P.System Data 2 SP * * * LED BI BO 150 3 1 Yes SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 349 Appendix A.8 Information List Log Buffers Information Number Data Unit General Interrogation SP * * * LED BI BO 150 6 1 Yes 361 >Failure: Feeder VT (MCB tripped) (>FAIL:Feeder VT) P.System Data 2 SP ON * OFF * LED BI BO 150 38 1 Yes 366 >CB1 Pole L1 (Pos. Contact=Breaker) (>CB1 Pole L1) P.System Data 2 SP * * * LED BI BO 150 66 1 Yes 367 >CB1 Pole L2 (Pos. Contact=Breaker) (>CB1 Pole L2) P.System Data 2 SP * * * LED BI BO 150 67 1 Yes 368 >CB1 Pole L3 (Pos. Contact=Breaker) (>CB1 Pole L3) P.System Data 2 SP * * * LED BI BO 150 68 1 Yes 371 >Circuit Breaker 1 READY for re- P.System Data 2 closing (>CB1 Ready) SP * * * LED BI BO 150 71 1 Yes 378 >CB faulty (>CB faulty) P.System Data 2 SP * * * LED BI BO 379 >CB aux. contact 3pole Closed (>CB 3p Closed) P.System Data 2 SP * * * LED BI BO 150 78 1 Yes 380 >CB aux. contact 3pole Open (>CB 3p Open) P.System Data 2 SP * * * LED BI BO 150 79 1 Yes 410 >CB1 aux. 3p Closed (for AR, CB-Test) (>CB1 3p Closed) P.System Data 2 SP * * * LED BI BO 150 80 1 Yes 411 >CB1 aux. 3p Open (for AR, CB- P.System Data 2 Test) (>CB1 3p Open) SP * * * LED BI BO 150 81 1 Yes 501 Relay PICKUP (Relay PICKUP) P.System Data 2 OUT * * m LED BO 106 84 2 Yes 503 Relay PICKUP Phase L1 (Relay PICKUP L1) P.System Data 2 OUT * * m LED BO 106 64 2 Yes 504 Relay PICKUP Phase L2 (Relay PICKUP L2) P.System Data 2 OUT * * m LED BO 106 65 2 Yes 505 Relay PICKUP Phase L3 (Relay PICKUP L3) P.System Data 2 OUT * * m LED BO 106 66 2 Yes 507 Relay TRIP command Phase L1 (Relay TRIP L1) P.System Data 2 OUT * * m LED BO 106 69 2 No 508 Relay TRIP command Phase L2 (Relay TRIP L2) P.System Data 2 OUT * * m LED BO 106 70 2 No 509 Relay TRIP command Phase L3 (Relay TRIP L3) P.System Data 2 OUT * * m LED BO 106 71 2 No 510 General CLOSE of relay (Relay CLOSE) P.System Data 2 OUT * * * LED BO 511 Relay GENERAL TRIP command P.System Data 2 (Relay TRIP) OUT * ON m LED BO 106 68 2 No 512 Relay TRIP command - Only Phase L1 (Relay TRIP 1pL1) P.System Data 2 OUT * * * LED BO 513 Relay TRIP command - Only Phase L2 (Relay TRIP 1pL2) P.System Data 2 OUT * * * LED BO 514 Relay TRIP command - Only Phase L3 (Relay TRIP 1pL3) P.System Data 2 OUT * * * LED BO 515 Relay TRIP command Phases L123 (Relay TRIP 3ph.) P.System Data 2 OUT * * * LED BO 536 Final Trip (Final Trip) P.System Data 2 OUT ON ON * LED BO 150 180 2 Yes 545 Time from Pickup to drop out (PU P.System Data 2 Time) VI 546 Time from Pickup to TRIP (TRIP Time) P.System Data 2 VI 561 Manual close signal detected (Man.Clos.Detect) P.System Data 2 OUT ON * * LED BO 150 211 1 No 563 CB alarm suppressed (CB Alarm P.System Data 2 Supp) OUT * * LED BO 350 * * * Chatter Suppression P.System Data 2 Relay >Manual close signal (>Manual Close) Function Key 356 Binary Input Type IEC 60870-5-103 LED Configurable in Matrix Marked in Oscill. Record Type of Informatio n Ground Fault Log ON/OFF Function Trip (Fault) Log On/Off Description Event Log ON/OFF No. SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Appendix A.8 Information List Log Buffers Information Number Data Unit General Interrogation VI 1001 Number of breaker TRIP commands L1 (TripNo L1=) Statistics VI 1002 Number of breaker TRIP commands L2 (TripNo L2=) Statistics VI 1003 Number of breaker TRIP commands L3 (TripNo L3=) Statistics VI 1401 >BF: Switch on breaker fail protection (>BF on) Breaker Failure SP * * * LED BI BO 1402 >BF: Switch off breaker fail protection (>BF off) Breaker Failure SP * * * LED BI BO 1403 >BLOCK Breaker failure (>BLOCK BkrFail) Breaker Failure SP ON * OFF * LED BI BO 1415 >BF: External start 3pole (>BF Start 3pole) Breaker Failure SP ON * OFF * LED BI BO 1432 >BF: External release (>BF release) Breaker Failure SP ON * OFF * LED BI BO 1435 >BF: External start L1 (>BF Start Breaker Failure L1) SP ON * OFF * LED BI BO 1436 >BF: External start L2 (>BF Start Breaker Failure L2) SP ON * OFF * LED BI BO 1437 >BF: External start L3 (>BF Start Breaker Failure L3) SP ON * OFF * LED BI BO 1439 >BF: External start 3pole (w/o current) (>BF Start w/o I) Breaker Failure SP ON * OFF * LED BI BO 1440 Breaker failure prot. ON/OFF via BI (BkrFailON/offBI) Breaker Failure IntSP ON * OFF * LED BO 1451 Breaker failure is switched OFF (BkrFail OFF) Breaker Failure OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 166 151 1 Yes 1452 Breaker failure is BLOCKED (BkrFail BLOCK) Breaker Failure OUT ON ON OFF OFF * LED BO 166 152 1 Yes 1453 Breaker failure is ACTIVE (BkrFail ACTIVE) Breaker Failure OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 166 153 1 Yes 1454 Breaker fail. masking error curr. transf (BF Mask. Error) Breaker Failure OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 1459 BF Pickup End fault stage (BF EndFlt PU) Breaker Failure OUT * ON OFF * LED BO 166 184 1 Yes 1461 Breaker failure protection started Breaker Failure (BF Start) OUT * ON OFF m LED BO 166 161 1 Yes 1472 BF Trip T1 (local trip) - only phase L1 (BF T1-TRIP 1pL1) Breaker Failure OUT * ON * LED BO 1473 BF Trip T1 (local trip) - only phase L2 (BF T1-TRIP 1pL2) Breaker Failure OUT * ON * LED BO 1474 BF Trip T1 (local trip) - only phase L3 (BF T1-TRIP 1pL3) Breaker Failure OUT * ON * LED BO 1476 BF Trip T1 (local trip) - 3pole (BF Breaker Failure T1-TRIP L123) OUT * ON m LED BO 166 176 2 Yes 1489 BF Flash Over (BF Flash Over) Breaker Failure OUT * ON * LED BO 1490 BF Flash Over Trip (BF FO TRIP) Breaker Failure OUT * ON * LED BO 1493 BF Trip in case of defective CB (BF TRIP CBdefec) Breaker Failure OUT * ON m LED BO 166 193 2 Yes 1494 BF TRIP T2 (busbar trip) (BF T2- Breaker Failure TRIP(bus)) OUT * ON m LED BO 106 85 2 Yes 1495 BF Trip End fault stage (BF EndFlt TRIP) OUT * ON m LED BO 166 195 2 Yes Breaker Failure SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Chatter Suppression Statistics Relay Number of breaker TRIP commands (# TRIPs=) Function Key 1000 Binary Input Type IEC 60870-5-103 LED Configurable in Matrix Marked in Oscill. Record Type of Informatio n Ground Fault Log ON/OFF Function Trip (Fault) Log On/Off Description Event Log ON/OFF No. 351 Appendix A.8 Information List LED BO 1497 BF Pole discrepancy pickup L1 (BF CBdiscr L1) Breaker Failure OUT * ON OFF * LED BO 1498 BF Pole discrepancy pickup L2 (BF CBdiscr L2) Breaker Failure OUT * ON OFF * LED BO 1499 BF Pole discrepancy pickup L3 (BF CBdiscr L3) Breaker Failure OUT * ON OFF * LED BO 1500 BF Pole discrepancy Trip (BF CBdiscr TRIP) Breaker Failure OUT * ON m LED BO 2701 >Auto reclose ON (>AR ON) Auto Reclose SP * * * LED BI BO 2702 >Auto reclose OFF (>AR OFF) Auto Reclose SP * * * LED BI BO 2703 >BLOCK Auto reclose (>BLOCK AR) Auto Reclose SP ON * OFF * LED BI BO 2711 >External start of internal Auto reclose (>AR Start) Auto Reclose SP * ON * LED BI BO 2712 >AR: Ext. Trip L1 for internal AR (>Trip L1 AR) Auto Reclose SP * ON * LED BI BO 2713 >AR: Ext. Trip L2 for internal AR (>Trip L2 AR) Auto Reclose SP * ON * LED BI BO 2714 >AR: Ext. Trip L3 for internal AR (>Trip L3 AR) Auto Reclose SP * ON * LED BI BO 2715 >Ext. 1pole Trip for internal Auto Recl. (>Trip 1p for AR) Auto Reclose SP * ON * LED BI BO 2716 >Ext. 3pole Trip for internal Auto Recl. (>Trip 3p for AR) Auto Reclose SP * ON * LED BI BO 2727 >AR: Remote Close signal (>AR RemoteClose) Auto Reclose SP * ON * LED BI BO 2731 >AR: Synchronism from ext. sync.-check (>Sync.release) Auto Reclose SP * * * LED BI BO 2737 >AR: Block 1pole AR-cycle (>BLOCK 1pole AR) Auto Reclose SP ON * OFF * LED BI BO 2738 >AR: Block 3pole AR-cycle (>BLOCK 3pole AR) Auto Reclose SP ON * OFF * LED BI BO 2739 >AR: Block 1phase-fault ARcycle (>BLK 1phase AR) Auto Reclose SP ON * OFF * LED BI BO 2740 >AR: Block 2phase-fault ARcycle (>BLK 2phase AR) Auto Reclose SP ON * OFF * LED BI BO 2741 >AR: Block 3phase-fault ARcycle (>BLK 3phase AR) Auto Reclose SP ON * OFF * LED BI BO 2742 >AR: Block 1st AR-cycle (>BLK 1.AR-cycle) Auto Reclose SP ON * OFF * LED BI BO 2743 >AR: Block 2nd AR-cycle (>BLK 2.AR-cycle) Auto Reclose SP ON * OFF * LED BI BO 2744 >AR: Block 3rd AR-cycle (>BLK 3.AR-cycle) Auto Reclose SP ON * OFF * LED BI BO 2745 >AR: Block 4th and higher ARcycles (>BLK 4.-n. AR) Auto Reclose SP ON * OFF * LED BI BO 2746 >AR: External Trip for AR start (>Trip for AR) Auto Reclose SP * ON * LED BI BO 2747 >AR: External pickup L1 for AR start (>Pickup L1 AR) Auto Reclose SP * ON * LED BI BO 2748 >AR: External pickup L2 for AR start (>Pickup L2 AR) Auto Reclose SP * ON * LED BI BO 2749 >AR: External pickup L3 for AR start (>Pickup L3 AR) Auto Reclose SP * ON * LED BI BO 352 General Interrogation * Data Unit ON OFF Relay * Function Key OUT Binary Input Breaker Failure Trip (Fault) Log On/Off BF Pole discrepancy pickup (BF CBdiscrSTART) Event Log ON/OFF 1496 IEC 60870-5-103 Information Number Configurable in Matrix Type Log Buffers Chatter Suppression Type of Informatio n LED Function Marked in Oscill. Record Description Ground Fault Log ON/OFF No. 166 196 2 Yes 166 200 2 Yes SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Appendix A.8 Information List Log Buffers Information Number Data Unit General Interrogation SP * ON * LED BI BO 2751 >AR: External pickup 2phase for AR start (>Pickup 2ph AR) Auto Reclose SP * ON * LED BI BO 2752 >AR: External pickup 3phase for AR start (>Pickup 3ph AR) Auto Reclose SP * ON * LED BI BO 2780 AR: Masking error voltage transformer (AR Mask. Error) Auto Reclose OUT * ON * LED BO 2781 Auto recloser is switched OFF (Auto recl. OFF) Auto Reclose OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 40 81 1 Yes 2782 Auto recloser is switched ON (Auto recl. ON) Auto Reclose IntSP * * * LED BO 106 16 1 Yes 2783 AR: Auto-reclose is blocked (AR is blocked) Auto Reclose OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 40 83 1 Yes 2784 Auto recloser is NOT ready (AR is Auto Reclose NOT ready) OUT * ON * LED BO 2787 AR: Circuit breaker not ready (CB Auto Reclose not ready) OUT * * * LED BO 40 87 1 No 2788 AR: CB ready monitoring window Auto Reclose expired (AR T-CBreadyExp) OUT * ON * LED BO 2796 AR: Auto-reclose ON/OFF via BI (AR on/off BI) Auto Reclose IntSP * * * LED BO 2801 Auto-reclose in progress (AR in progress) Auto Reclose OUT * ON * LED BO 40 101 2 Yes 2809 AR: Start-signal monitoring time expired (AR T-Start Exp) Auto Reclose OUT * ON * LED BO 2810 AR: Maximum dead time expired Auto Reclose (AR TdeadMax Exp) OUT * ON * LED BO 2818 AR: Evolving fault recognition (AR evolving Flt) Auto Reclose OUT * ON * LED BO 2820 AR is set to operate after 1p trip only (AR Program1pole) Auto Reclose OUT * * * LED BO 2821 AR dead time after evolving fault Auto Reclose (AR Td. evol.Flt) OUT * ON * LED BO 2839 AR dead time after 1pole trip running (AR Tdead 1pTrip) Auto Reclose OUT * ON * LED BO 2840 AR dead time after 3pole trip running (AR Tdead 3pTrip) Auto Reclose OUT * ON * LED BO 2841 AR dead time after 1phase fault running (AR Tdead 1pFlt) Auto Reclose OUT * ON * LED BO 2842 AR dead time after 2phase fault running (AR Tdead 2pFlt) Auto Reclose OUT * ON * LED BO 2843 AR dead time after 3phase fault running (AR Tdead 3pFlt) Auto Reclose OUT * ON * LED BO 2844 AR 1st cycle running (AR 1stCyc. Auto Reclose run.) OUT * ON * LED BO 2845 AR 2nd cycle running (AR 2ndCyc. run.) Auto Reclose OUT * ON * LED BO 2846 AR 3rd cycle running (AR 3rdCyc. Auto Reclose run.) OUT * ON * LED BO 2847 AR 4th or higher cycle running (AR 4thCyc. run.) Auto Reclose OUT * ON * LED BO 2848 AR cycle is running in ADT mode Auto Reclose (AR ADT run.) OUT * ON * LED BO 2851 Auto-reclose Close command (AR Close) OUT * ON m LED BO 106 128 1 No Auto Reclose SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Chatter Suppression Auto Reclose Relay >AR: External pickup 1phase for AR start (>Pickup 1ph AR) Function Key 2750 Binary Input Type IEC 60870-5-103 LED Configurable in Matrix Marked in Oscill. Record Type of Informatio n Ground Fault Log ON/OFF Function Trip (Fault) Log On/Off Description Event Log ON/OFF No. 353 Appendix A.8 Information List * LED BO 2853 AR: Close command after 3pole 1st cycle (AR Close1.Cyc3p) Auto Reclose OUT * * * LED BO 2854 AR: Close command after 2nd cycle (AR Close 2.Cyc) Auto Reclose OUT * * * LED BO 2861 AR: Reclaim time is running (AR T-Recl. run.) Auto Reclose OUT * * * LED BO 2862 Auto reclose cycle successful (AR Successful) Auto Reclose OUT * * * LED BO 2863 Auto reclose Lockout (AR Lockout) Auto Reclose OUT * * * LED BO 2864 AR: 1pole trip permitted by internal AR (AR 1p Trip Perm) Auto Reclose OUT * * * LED BO 2865 AR: Synchro-check request (AR Sync.Request) Auto Reclose OUT * * * LED BO 2871 AR: TRIP command 3pole (AR TRIP 3pole) Auto Reclose OUT * ON * LED BO 2889 AR 1st cycle zone extension release (AR 1.CycZoneRel) Auto Reclose OUT * * * LED BO 2890 AR 2nd cycle zone extension release (AR 2.CycZoneRel) Auto Reclose OUT * * * LED BO 2891 AR 3rd cycle zone extension release (AR 3.CycZoneRel) Auto Reclose OUT * * * LED BO 2892 AR 4th cycle zone extension release (AR 4.CycZoneRel) Auto Reclose OUT * * * LED BO 2893 AR zone extension (general) (AR Auto Reclose Zone Release) OUT * * * LED BO 2894 AR Remote close signal send (AR Remote Close) OUT * ON * LED BO 2895 No. of 1st AR-cycle CLOSE com- Statistics mands 1pole (AR #Close1./1p=) VI 2896 No. of 1st AR-cycle CLOSE com- Statistics mands 3pole (AR #Close1./3p=) VI 2897 No. of higher AR-cycle CLOSE Statistics commands 1p (AR #Close2./1p=) VI 2898 No. of higher AR-cycle CLOSE Statistics commands 3p (AR #Close2./3p=) VI 14101 MB Fail (broken wire/shorted) (MB Fail) MeasurementBox OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 14111 Fail: RTD 1 (broken wire/shorted) MeasurementBox (Fail: RTD 1) OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 14112 RTD 1 Temperature stage 1 picked up (RTD 1 St.1 p.up) MeasurementBox OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 14113 RTD 1 Temperature stage 2 picked up (RTD 1 St.2 p.up) MeasurementBox OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 14114 MBS1 Fail (shorted/broken wire) (MBS1 Fail) MeasurementBox OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 14115 Measurement box sensor 1 Stage MeasurementBox 1 p.up (MBS1 St.1 p.up) OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 14116 Measurement box sensor 1 Stage MeasurementBox 2 p.up (MBS1 St.2 p.up) OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 14121 Fail: RTD 2 (broken wire/shorted) MeasurementBox (Fail: RTD 2) OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 14122 RTD 2 Temperature stage 1 picked up (RTD 2 St.1 p.up) OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 354 Auto Reclose MeasurementBox General Interrogation * Data Unit * Information Number OUT IEC 60870-5-103 Type Auto Reclose Relay AR: Close command after 1pole 1st cycle (AR Close1.Cyc1p) Function Key 2852 Binary Input LED Configurable in Matrix Chatter Suppression Log Buffers Marked in Oscill. Record Type of Informatio n Ground Fault Log ON/OFF Function Trip (Fault) Log On/Off Description Event Log ON/OFF No. 40 163 1 Yes SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Appendix A.8 Information List BO 14124 MBS2 Fail (shorted/broken wire) (MBS2 Fail) MeasurementBox OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 14125 Measurement box sensor 2 Stage MeasurementBox 1 p.up (MBS2 St.1 p.up) OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 14126 Measurement box sensor 2 Stage MeasurementBox 2 p.up (MBS2 St.2 p.up) OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 14131 Fail: RTD 3 (broken wire/shorted) MeasurementBox (Fail: RTD 3) OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 14132 RTD 3 Temperature stage 1 picked up (RTD 3 St.1 p.up) MeasurementBox OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 14133 RTD 3 Temperature stage 2 picked up (RTD 3 St.2 p.up) MeasurementBox OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 14134 MBS3 Fail (shorted/broken wire) (MBS3 Fail) MeasurementBox OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 14135 Measurement box sensor 3 Stage MeasurementBox 1 p.up (MBS3 St.1 p.up) OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 14136 Measurement box sensor 3 Stage MeasurementBox 2 p.up (MBS3 St.2 p.up) OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 14141 Fail: RTD 4 (broken wire/shorted) MeasurementBox (Fail: RTD 4) OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 14142 RTD 4 Temperature stage 1 picked up (RTD 4 St.1 p.up) MeasurementBox OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 14143 RTD 4 Temperature stage 2 picked up (RTD 4 St.2 p.up) MeasurementBox OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 14144 MBS4 Fail (shorted/broken wire) (MBS4 Fail) MeasurementBox OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 14145 Measurement box sensor 4 Stage MeasurementBox 1 p.up (MBS4 St.1 p.up) OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 14146 Measurement box sensor 4 Stage MeasurementBox 2 p.up (MBS4 St.2 p.up) OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 14151 Fail: RTD 5 (broken wire/shorted) MeasurementBox (Fail: RTD 5) OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 14152 RTD 5 Temperature stage 1 picked up (RTD 5 St.1 p.up) MeasurementBox OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 14153 RTD 5 Temperature stage 2 picked up (RTD 5 St.2 p.up) MeasurementBox OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 14154 MBS5 Fail (shorted/broken wire) (MBS5 Fail) MeasurementBox OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 14155 Measurement box sensor 5 Stage MeasurementBox 1 p.up (MBS5 St.1 p.up) OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 14156 Measurement box sensor 5 Stage MeasurementBox 2 p.up (MBS5 St.2 p.up) OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 14161 Fail: RTD 6 (broken wire/shorted) MeasurementBox (Fail: RTD 6) OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 14162 RTD 6 Temperature stage 1 picked up (RTD 6 St.1 p.up) MeasurementBox OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 14163 RTD 6 Temperature stage 2 picked up (RTD 6 St.2 p.up) MeasurementBox OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 14164 MBS6 Fail (shorted/broken wire) (MBS6 Fail) MeasurementBox OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 14165 Measurement box sensor 6 Stage MeasurementBox 1 p.up (MBS6 St.1 p.up) OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 14166 Measurement box sensor 6 Stage MeasurementBox 2 p.up (MBS6 St.2 p.up) OUT ON * OFF * LED BO SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 General Interrogation LED Data Unit * Relay ON * OFF Function Key OUT Binary Input MeasurementBox Trip (Fault) Log On/Off RTD 2 Temperature stage 2 picked up (RTD 2 St.2 p.up) Event Log ON/OFF 14123 IEC 60870-5-103 Information Number Configurable in Matrix Type Log Buffers Chatter Suppression Type of Informatio n LED Function Marked in Oscill. Record Description Ground Fault Log ON/OFF No. 355 Appendix A.8 Information List 14172 RTD 7 Temperature stage 1 picked up (RTD 7 St.1 p.up) MeasurementBox OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 14173 RTD 7 Temperature stage 2 picked up (RTD 7 St.2 p.up) MeasurementBox OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 14174 MBS7 Fail (shorted/broken wire) (MBS7 Fail) MeasurementBox OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 14175 Measurement box sensor 7 Stage MeasurementBox 1 p.up (MBS7 St.1 p.up) OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 14176 Measurement box sensor 7 Stage MeasurementBox 2 p.up (MBS7 St.2 p.up) OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 14181 Fail: RTD 8 (broken wire/shorted) MeasurementBox (Fail: RTD 8) OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 14182 RTD 8 Temperature stage 1 picked up (RTD 8 St.1 p.up) MeasurementBox OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 14183 RTD 8 Temperature stage 2 picked up (RTD 8 St.2 p.up) MeasurementBox OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 14184 MBS8 Fail (shorted/broken wire) (MBS8 Fail) MeasurementBox OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 14185 Measurement box sensor 8 Stage MeasurementBox 1 p.up (MBS8 St.1 p.up) OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 14186 Measurement box sensor 8 Stage MeasurementBox 2 p.up (MBS8 St.2 p.up) OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 14191 Fail: RTD 9 (broken wire/shorted) MeasurementBox (Fail: RTD 9) OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 14192 RTD 9 Temperature stage 1 picked up (RTD 9 St.1 p.up) MeasurementBox OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 14193 RTD 9 Temperature stage 2 picked up (RTD 9 St.2 p.up) MeasurementBox OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 14194 MBS9 Fail (shorted/broken wire) (MBS9 Fail) MeasurementBox OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 14195 Measurement box sensor 9 Stage MeasurementBox 1 p.up (MBS9 St.1 p.up) OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 14196 Measurement box sensor 9 Stage MeasurementBox 2 p.up (MBS9 St.2 p.up) OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 14201 Fail: RTD10 (broken wire/shorted) (Fail: RTD10) MeasurementBox OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 14202 RTD10 Temperature stage 1 picked up (RTD10 St.1 p.up) MeasurementBox OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 14203 RTD10 Temperature stage 2 picked up (RTD10 St.2 p.up) MeasurementBox OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 14204 MBS10 Fail (shorted/broken wire) MeasurementBox (MBS10 Fail) OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 14205 Measurement box sensor 10 Stage 1 p.up (MBS10 St.1 p.up) MeasurementBox OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 14206 Measurement box sensor 10 Stage 2 p.up (MBS10 St.2 p.up) MeasurementBox OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 14211 Fail: RTD11 (broken wire/shorted) (Fail: RTD11) MeasurementBox OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 14212 RTD11 Temperature stage 1 picked up (RTD11 St.1 p.up) MeasurementBox OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 14213 RTD11 Temperature stage 2 picked up (RTD11 St.2 p.up) MeasurementBox OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 14214 MBS11 Fail (shorted/broken wire) MeasurementBox (MBS11 Fail) OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 356 General Interrogation BO Data Unit LED Relay * Function Key ON * OFF Binary Input OUT Trip (Fault) Log On/Off Fail: RTD 7 (broken wire/shorted) MeasurementBox (Fail: RTD 7) Event Log ON/OFF 14171 IEC 60870-5-103 Information Number Configurable in Matrix Type Log Buffers Chatter Suppression Type of Informatio n LED Function Marked in Oscill. Record Description Ground Fault Log ON/OFF No. SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Appendix A.8 Information List BO 14216 Measurement box sensor 11 Stage 2 p.up (MBS11 St.2 p.up) MeasurementBox OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 14221 Fail: RTD12 (broken wire/shorted) (Fail: RTD12) MeasurementBox OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 14222 RTD12 Temperature stage 1 picked up (RTD12 St.1 p.up) MeasurementBox OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 14223 RTD12 Temperature stage 2 picked up (RTD12 St.2 p.up) MeasurementBox OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 14224 MBS12 Fail (shorted/broken wire) MeasurementBox (MBS12 Fail) OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 14225 Measurement box sensor 12 Stage 1 p.up (MBS12 St.1 p.up) MeasurementBox OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 14226 Measurement box sensor 12 Stage 2 p.up (MBS12 St.2 p.up) MeasurementBox OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 14234 MBS13 Fail (shorted/broken wire) MeasurementBox (MBS13 Fail) OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 14235 Measurement box sensor 13 Stage 1 p.up (MBS13 St.1 p.up) MeasurementBox OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 14236 Measurement box sensor 13 Stage 2 p.up (MBS13 St.2 p.up) MeasurementBox OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 14244 MBS14 Fail (shorted/broken wire) MeasurementBox (MBS14 Fail) OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 14245 Measurement box sensor 14 Stage 1 p.up (MBS14 St.1 p.up) MeasurementBox OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 14246 Measurement box sensor 14 Stage 2 p.up (MBS14 St.2 p.up) MeasurementBox OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 14254 MBS15 Fail (shorted/broken wire) MeasurementBox (MBS15 Fail) OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 14255 Measurement box sensor 15 Stage 1 p.up (MBS15 St.1 p.up) MeasurementBox OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 14256 Measurement box sensor 15 Stage 2 p.up (MBS15 St.2 p.up) MeasurementBox OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 14264 MBS16 Fail (shorted/broken wire) MeasurementBox (MBS16 Fail) OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 14265 Measurement box sensor 16 Stage 1 p.up (MBS16 St.1 p.up) MeasurementBox OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 14266 Measurement box sensor 16 Stage 2 p.up (MBS16 St.2 p.up) MeasurementBox OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 17116 Failure Measurement box 1 (Fail- MeasurementBox ure MB1) OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 17117 Failure Measurement box 2 (Fail- MeasurementBox ure MB2) OUT ON * OFF * LED BO 30053 Fault recording is running (Fault rec. run.) Osc. Fault Rec. OUT * * LED BO 31000 Q0 operationcounter= (Q0 OpCnt=) Control Device VI * 31001 Q1 operationcounter= (Q1 OpCnt=) Control Device VI * 31002 Q2 operationcounter= (Q2 OpCnt=) Control Device VI * 31008 Q8 operationcounter= (Q8 OpCnt=) Control Device VI * 31009 Q9 operationcounter= (Q9 OpCnt=) Control Device VI * SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 * General Interrogation LED Data Unit * Relay ON * OFF Function Key OUT Binary Input MeasurementBox Trip (Fault) Log On/Off Measurement box sensor 11 Stage 1 p.up (MBS11 St.1 p.up) Event Log ON/OFF 14215 IEC 60870-5-103 Information Number Configurable in Matrix Type Log Buffers Chatter Suppression Type of Informatio n LED Function Marked in Oscill. Record Description Ground Fault Log ON/OFF No. 357 Appendix A.9 Group Alarms A.9 Group Alarms No. - 358 Description - Function No. - Description - SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Appendix A.10 Measured Values A.10 Measured Values Position CFC Control Display Default Display Configurable in Matrix Data Unit IEC 60870-5-103 Compatibility Function Information Number Description Type No. - Wp Forward (WpForward) Energy 133 51 No 205 - CFC CD DD - Wq Forward (WqForward) Energy 133 52 No 205 - CFC CD DD - Wp Reverse (WpReverse) Energy 133 53 No 205 - CFC CD DD - Wq Reverse (WqReverse) Energy 133 54 No 205 - CFC CD DD - Pulsed Energy Wp (active) (Wp(puls)) Energy 133 55 No 205 - CFC CD DD - Pulsed Energy Wq (reactive) (Wq(puls)) Energy 133 56 No 205 - CFC CD DD 151.0002 Voltage U (U) MU U_1 - - - - - CFC CD DD 151.0010 Current I (I) MU I_1 - - - - - CFC CD DD 151.0021 frequency (f) MU U_1 - - - - - CFC CD DD 151.0021 frequency (f) MU I_1 - - - - - CFC CD DD 151.0022 Voltage or Current Input U/I (Input U/I) MU U_1 - - - - - CFC CD DD 151.0023 Current Input I (MwCh_I) MU I_1 - - - - - 152.0002 1P1 Voltage U (1P1_U) MU1P_1 106 146 No 3 2 134 152 No 9 1 152.0002 1P2 Voltage U (1P2_U) MU1P_2 134 153 No 9 1 CFC CD DD 152.0002 1P3 Voltage U (1P3_U) MU1P_3 134 154 No 9 1 CFC CD DD 152.0010 1P1 Current I (1P1_I) MU1P_1 106 146 No 3 1 CFC CD DD 134 152 No 9 2 152.0010 1P2 Current I (1P2_I) MU1P_2 134 153 No 9 2 CFC CD DD 152.0010 1P3 Current I (1P3_I) MU1P_3 134 154 No 9 2 CFC CD DD 152.0015 1P1 Active Power P (1P1_P) MU1P_1 106 146 No 3 3 CFC CD DD 134 152 No 9 3 DD 152.0015 1P2 Active Power P (1P2_P) MU1P_2 134 153 No 9 3 CFC CD 152.0015 1P3 Active Power P (1P3_P) MU1P_3 134 154 No 9 3 CFC CD DD 152.0016 1P1 Reactive Power Q (1P1_Q) MU1P_1 106 146 No 3 4 CFC CD DD 134 152 No 9 4 152.0016 1P2 Reactive Power Q (1P2_Q) MU1P_2 134 153 No 9 4 CFC CD DD 152.0016 1P3 Reactive Power Q (1P3_Q) MU1P_3 134 154 No 9 4 CFC CD DD 152.0017 1P1 Apparent Power S (1P1_S) MU1P_1 134 152 No 9 5 CFC CD DD 152.0017 1P2 Apparent Power S (1P2_S) MU1P_2 134 153 No 9 5 CFC CD DD 152.0017 1P3 Apparent Power S (1P3_S) MU1P_3 134 154 No 9 5 CFC CD DD 152.0018 1P1 Phase Angle Phi (1P1_) MU1P_1 134 152 No 9 6 CFC CD DD 152.0018 1P2 Phase Angle Phi (1P2_) MU1P_2 134 153 No 9 6 CFC CD DD 152.0018 1P3 Phase Angle Phi (1P3_) MU1P_3 134 154 No 9 6 CFC CD DD 152.0019 1P1 Active Power Factor Cosine Phi (1P1_cos) MU1P_1 134 152 No 9 7 CFC CD DD 152.0019 1P2 Active Power Factor Cosine Phi (1P2_cos) MU1P_2 134 153 No 9 7 CFC CD DD 152.0019 1P3 Active Power Factor Cosine Phi (1P3_cos) MU1P_3 134 154 No 9 7 CFC CD DD 152.0020 1P1 Reactive Power Factor Sine Phi (1P1_sin) MU1P_1 134 152 No 9 8 CFC CD DD 152.0020 1P2 Reactive Power Factor Sine Phi (1P2_sin) MU1P_2 134 153 No 9 8 CFC CD DD 152.0020 1P3 Reactive Power Factor Sine Phi (1P3_sin) MU1P_3 134 154 No 9 8 CFC CD DD SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 359 Appendix A.10 Measured Values Position CFC Control Display Default Display Configurable in Matrix Data Unit IEC 60870-5-103 Compatibility Function Information Number Description Type No. 152.0021 1P1 Frequency of U (1P1_f) MU1P_1 134 152 No 9 9 CFC CD DD 152.0021 1P2 Frequency of U (1P2_f) MU1P_2 134 153 No 9 9 CFC CD DD 152.0021 1P3 Frequency of U (1P3_f) MU1P_3 134 154 No 9 9 CFC CD DD 152.0022 1P1 Voltage Input U (1P1Input_U) MU1P_1 - - - - - 152.0022 1P2 Voltage Input U (1P2Input_U) MU1P_2 - - - - - 152.0022 1P3 Voltage Input U (1P3Input_U) MU1P_3 - - - - - 152.0023 1P1 Current Input I (1P1Input_I) MU1P_1 - - - - - 152.0023 1P2 Current Input (1P2Input_I) MU1P_2 - - - - - 152.0023 1P3 Current Input I (1P3Input_I) MU1P_3 - - - - - 153.0003 3P1 Zero Sequence Voltage U0 (3P1_U0) MU3P_1 134 156 No 9 1 CFC CD DD 153.0004 3P1 Phase to Earth Voltage U1 (3P1_U1) MU3P_1 106 148 No 9 4 CFC CD DD 134 151 No 9 2 CFC CD DD CFC CD DD CFC CD DD CFC CD DD CFC CD DD 153.0005 153.0006 153.0007 153.0008 153.0009 3P1 Phase to Earth Voltage U2 (3P1_U2) 3P1 Phase to Earth Voltage U3 (3P1_U3) MU3P_1 MU3P_1 3P1 Phase to Phase Voltage U12 (3P1_U12) MU3P_1 3P1 Phase to Phase Voltage U23 (3P1_U23) MU3P_1 3P1 Phase to Phase Voltage U31 (3P1_U31) MU3P_1 134 156 No 9 2 106 148 No 9 5 134 151 No 9 3 134 156 No 9 3 106 148 No 9 6 134 151 No 9 4 134 156 No 9 4 134 151 No 9 5 134 156 No 9 5 134 151 No 9 6 134 156 No 9 6 134 151 No 9 7 134 156 No 9 7 153.0011 3P1 Zero Sequence Current I0 (3P1_I0) MU3P_1 134 156 No 9 8 CFC CD DD 153.0012 3P1 Phase Current I1 (3P1_I1) MU3P_1 106 148 No 9 1 CFC CD DD 134 151 No 9 9 134 156 No 9 9 106 148 No 9 2 CFC CD DD 134 151 No 9 10 CFC CD DD CFC CD DD CFC CD DD CFC CD DD 153.0013 153.0014 153.0015 153.0016 153.0017 3P1 Phase Current I2 (3P1_I2) 3P1 Phase Current I3 (3P1_I3) 3P1 Active Power Three Phase (3P1_P) 3P1 Reactive Power Three Phase (3P1_Q) 3P1 Apparent Power Three Phase (3P1_S) MU3P_1 MU3P_1 MU3P_1 MU3P_1 MU3P_1 134 156 No 9 10 106 148 No 9 3 134 151 No 9 11 134 156 No 9 11 106 148 No 9 7 134 151 No 9 12 134 156 No 9 12 106 148 No 9 8 134 151 No 9 13 134 156 No 9 13 134 151 No 9 14 134 156 No 9 14 153.0018 3P1 Phase Angle Three Phase (3P1_) MU3P_1 134 156 No 9 15 CFC CD DD 153.0019 3P1 Active Power Factor Three Phase (3P1_cos) MU3P_1 134 151 No 9 15 CFC CD DD 134 156 No 9 16 153.0020 3P1 Reactive Power Factor Three Phase (3P1_sin) MU3P_1 - - - - - CFC CD DD 360 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Appendix A.10 Measured Values Configurable in Matrix 9 No 9 16 Default Display No 151 Control Display 148 134 CFC 106 Position Data Unit MU3P_1 IEC 60870-5-103 Compatibility 3P1 Frequency (3P1_f) Function Information Number 153.0021 Description Type No. 9 CFC CD DD DD 153.0024 3P1 Voltage Input U1 (3P1InputU1) MU3P_1 - - - - - 153.0025 3P1 Voltage Input U2 (3P1InputU2) MU3P_1 - - - - - 153.0026 3P1 Voltage Input U3 (3P1InputU3) MU3P_1 - - - - - 153.0027 3P1 Current Input I1 (3P1InputI1) MU3P_1 - - - - - 153.0028 3P1 Current Input I2 (3P1InputI2) MU3P_1 - - - - - 153.0029 3P1 Current Input I3 (3P1InputI3) MU3P_1 - - - - - 153.0098 3P1 Zero Sequence Voltage 3U0 (3P1_3U0) MU3P_1 134 151 No 9 1 CFC CD 153.0099 3P1 Zero Sequence Current 3I0 (3P1_3I0) MU3P_1 134 151 No 9 8 CFC CD DD 154.0007 A1 Phase to Phase Voltage U12 (A1_U12) MUAron_1 134 155 No 9 1 CFC CD DD 154.0009 A1 Phase to Phase Voltage U13 (A1_U13) MUAron_1 134 155 No 9 2 CFC CD DD 154.0013 A1 Phase Current I2 (A1_I2) MUAron_1 134 155 No 9 3 CFC CD DD 154.0014 A1 Phase Current I3 (A1_I3) MUAron_1 134 155 No 9 4 CFC CD DD 154.0015 A1 Active Power P (A1_P) MUAron_1 134 155 No 9 5 CFC CD DD 154.0016 A1 Reactive Power Q (A1_Q) MUAron_1 134 155 No 9 6 CFC CD DD 154.0017 A1 Apparent Power S (A1_S) MUAron_1 134 155 No 9 7 CFC CD DD 154.0018 A1 Phase Angle Phi (A1_) MUAron_1 134 155 No 9 8 CFC CD DD 154.0019 A1 Active Power Factor Cosine Phi (A1_cos) MUAron_1 134 155 No 9 9 CFC CD DD 154.0020 A1 Reactive Power Factor Sine Phi (A1_sin) MUAron_1 134 155 No 9 10 CFC CD DD 154.0021 A1 Frequency (A1_f) MUAron_1 134 155 No 9 11 CFC CD DD 154.0024 A1 Voltage Input U1 (A1Input_U1) MUAron_1 - - - - - 154.0025 A1 Voltage Input U2 (A1Input_U2) MUAron_1 - - - - - 154.0027 A1 Current Input I1 (A1Input_I1) MUAron_1 - - - - - 154.0028 A1 Voltage Input I2 (A1Input_I2) MUAron_1 - - - - - 170.0024 Sync1, Voltage input U1 (Sy1 ChU1) SYNC function 1 - - - - - 170.0024 Sync2, Voltage input U1 (Sy2 ChU1) SYNC function 2 - - - - - 170.0024 Sync3, Voltage input U1 (Sy3 ChU1) SYNC function 3 - - - - - 170.0024 Sync4, Voltage input U1 (Sy4 ChU1) SYNC function 4 - - - - - 170.0024 Sync5, Voltage input U1 (Sy5 ChU1) SYNC function 5 - - - - - 170.0025 Sync1, Voltage input U2 (Sy1 ChU2) SYNC function 1 - - - - - 170.0025 Sync2, Voltage input U2 (Sy2 ChU2) SYNC function 2 - - - - - 170.0025 Sync3, Voltage input U2 (Sy3 ChU2) SYNC function 3 - - - - - 170.0025 Sync4, Voltage input U2 (Sy4 ChU2) SYNC function 4 - - - - - 170.0025 Sync5, Voltage input U2 (Sy5 ChU2) SYNC function 5 - - - - - 170.0025 Sync6, Voltage input U2 (Sy6 ChU2) SYNC function 6 - - - - - 170.0025 Sync7, Voltage input U2 (Sy7 ChU2) SYNC function 7 - - - - - 170.0025 Sync8, Voltage input U2 (Sy8 ChU2) SYNC function 8 - - - - - 170.0030 Sync6, Voltage input U1, 1.PE (Sy6 ChU11) SYNC function 6 - - - - - 170.0030 Sync7, Voltage input U1, 1.PE (Sy7 ChU11) SYNC function 7 - - - - - 170.0030 Sync8, Voltage input U1, 1.PE (Sy8 ChU11) SYNC function 8 - - - - - 170.0031 Sync6, Voltage input U1, 2.PE (Sy6 ChU12) SYNC function 6 - - - - - 170.0031 Sync7, Voltage input U1, 2.PE (Sy7 ChU12) SYNC function 7 - - - - - 170.0031 Sync8, Voltage input U1, 2.PE (Sy8 ChU12) SYNC function 8 - - - - - 170.0070 Sync. voltage U1 (Sync. U1) SYNC function 1 130 1 No 9 1 CFC CD DD 170.0070 Sync. voltage U1 (Sync. U1) SYNC function 2 130 2 No 9 1 CFC CD DD 170.0070 Sync. voltage U1 (Sync. U1) SYNC function 3 130 3 No 9 1 CFC CD DD SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 361 Appendix A.10 Measured Values Position CFC Control Display Default Display Configurable in Matrix Data Unit IEC 60870-5-103 Compatibility Function Information Number Description Type No. 170.0070 Sync. voltage U1 (Sync. U1) SYNC function 4 130 4 No 9 1 CFC CD DD 170.0070 Sync. voltage U1 (Sync. U1) SYNC function 5 130 5 No 9 1 CFC CD DD 170.0070 Sync. voltage U1 (Sync. U1) SYNC function 6 130 6 No 9 1 CFC CD DD 170.0070 Sync. voltage U1 (Sync. U1) SYNC function 7 130 7 No 9 1 CFC CD DD 170.0070 Sync. voltage U1 (Sync. U1) SYNC function 8 130 8 No 9 1 CFC CD DD 170.0071 Sync. voltage U2 (Sync. U2) SYNC function 1 130 1 No 9 3 CFC CD DD 170.0071 Sync. voltage U2 (Sync. U2) SYNC function 2 130 2 No 9 3 CFC CD DD 170.0071 Sync. voltage U2 (Sync. U2) SYNC function 3 130 3 No 9 3 CFC CD DD 170.0071 Sync. voltage U2 (Sync. U2) SYNC function 4 130 4 No 9 3 CFC CD DD 170.0071 Sync. voltage U2 (Sync. U2) SYNC function 5 130 5 No 9 3 CFC CD DD 170.0071 Sync. voltage U2 (Sync. U2) SYNC function 6 130 6 No 9 3 CFC CD DD 170.0071 Sync. voltage U2 (Sync. U2) SYNC function 7 130 7 No 9 3 CFC CD DD 170.0071 Sync. voltage U2 (Sync. U2) SYNC function 8 130 8 No 9 3 CFC CD DD 170.0072 Sync. voltage difference U1,U2 (Sync. Vdiff) SYNC function 1 130 1 No 9 2 CFC CD DD 170.0072 Sync. voltage difference U1,U2 (Sync. Vdiff) SYNC function 2 130 2 No 9 2 CFC CD DD 170.0072 Sync. voltage difference U1,U2 (Sync. Vdiff) SYNC function 3 130 3 No 9 2 CFC CD DD 170.0072 Sync. voltage difference U1,U2 (Sync. Vdiff) SYNC function 4 130 4 No 9 2 CFC CD DD 170.0072 Sync. voltage difference U1,U2 (Sync. Vdiff) SYNC function 5 130 5 No 9 2 CFC CD DD 170.0072 Sync. voltage difference U1,U2 (Sync. Vdiff) SYNC function 6 130 6 No 9 2 CFC CD DD 170.0072 Sync. voltage difference U1,U2 (Sync. Vdiff) SYNC function 7 130 7 No 9 2 CFC CD DD 170.0072 Sync. voltage difference U1,U2 (Sync. Vdiff) SYNC function 8 130 8 No 9 2 CFC CD DD 170.0073 Sync. angle between U1,U2 (Sync. ) SYNC function 1 130 1 No 9 6 CFC CD DD 170.0073 Sync. angle between U1,U2 (Sync. ) SYNC function 2 130 2 No 9 6 CFC CD DD 170.0073 Sync. angle between U1,U2 (Sync. ) SYNC function 3 130 3 No 9 6 CFC CD DD 170.0073 Sync. angle between U1,U2 (Sync. ) SYNC function 4 130 4 No 9 6 CFC CD DD 170.0073 Sync. angle between U1,U2 (Sync. ) SYNC function 5 130 5 No 9 6 CFC CD DD 170.0073 Sync. angle between U1,U2 (Sync. ) SYNC function 6 130 6 No 9 6 CFC CD DD 170.0073 Sync. angle between U1,U2 (Sync. ) SYNC function 7 130 7 No 9 6 CFC CD DD 170.0073 Sync. angle between U1,U2 (Sync. ) SYNC function 8 130 8 No 9 6 CFC CD DD 170.0074 Sync. frequency f1 (Sync. f1) SYNC function 1 130 1 No 9 4 CFC CD DD 170.0074 Sync. frequency f1 (Sync. f1) SYNC function 2 130 2 No 9 4 CFC CD DD 170.0074 Sync. frequency f1 (Sync. f1) SYNC function 3 130 3 No 9 4 CFC CD DD 170.0074 Sync. frequency f1 (Sync. f1) SYNC function 4 130 4 No 9 4 CFC CD DD 170.0074 Sync. frequency f1 (Sync. f1) SYNC function 5 130 5 No 9 4 CFC CD DD 170.0074 Sync. frequency f1 (Sync. f1) SYNC function 6 130 6 No 9 4 CFC CD DD 170.0074 Sync. frequency f1 (Sync. f1) SYNC function 7 130 7 No 9 4 CFC CD DD 170.0074 Sync. frequency f1 (Sync. f1) SYNC function 8 130 8 No 9 4 CFC CD DD 170.0075 Sync. frequency f2 (Sync. f2) SYNC function 1 130 1 No 9 7 CFC CD DD 170.0075 Sync. frequency f2 (Sync. f2) SYNC function 2 130 2 No 9 7 CFC CD DD 170.0075 Sync. frequency f2 (Sync. f2) SYNC function 3 130 3 No 9 7 CFC CD DD 170.0075 Sync. frequency f2 (Sync. f2) SYNC function 4 130 4 No 9 7 CFC CD DD 170.0075 Sync. frequency f2 (Sync. f2) SYNC function 5 130 5 No 9 7 CFC CD DD 170.0075 Sync. frequency f2 (Sync. f2) SYNC function 6 130 6 No 9 7 CFC CD DD 170.0075 Sync. frequency f2 (Sync. f2) SYNC function 7 130 7 No 9 7 CFC CD DD 170.0075 Sync. frequency f2 (Sync. f2) SYNC function 8 130 8 No 9 7 CFC CD DD 170.0076 Sync. frequency difference f1, f2 (Sync. fdiff) SYNC function 1 130 1 No 9 5 CFC CD DD 170.0076 Sync. frequency difference f1, f2 (Sync. fdiff) SYNC function 2 130 2 No 9 5 CFC CD DD 170.0076 Sync. frequency difference f1, f2 (Sync. fdiff) SYNC function 3 130 3 No 9 5 CFC CD DD 170.0076 Sync. frequency difference f1, f2 (Sync. fdiff) SYNC function 4 130 4 No 9 5 CFC CD DD 362 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Appendix A.10 Measured Values Position CFC Control Display Default Display Configurable in Matrix Data Unit IEC 60870-5-103 Compatibility Function Information Number Description Type No. 170.0076 Sync. frequency difference f1, f2 (Sync. fdiff) SYNC function 5 130 5 No 9 5 CFC CD DD 170.0076 Sync. frequency difference f1, f2 (Sync. fdiff) SYNC function 6 130 6 No 9 5 CFC CD DD 170.0076 Sync. frequency difference f1, f2 (Sync. fdiff) SYNC function 7 130 7 No 9 5 CFC CD DD 170.0076 Sync. frequency difference f1, f2 (Sync. fdiff) SYNC function 8 130 8 No 9 5 CFC CD DD 170.0088 Sync. df S (Sync. df S) SYNC function 1 - - - - - CFC CD DD 170.0088 Sync. df S (Sync. df S) SYNC function 2 - - - - - CFC CD DD 170.0088 Sync. df S (Sync. df S) SYNC function 3 - - - - - CFC CD DD 170.0088 Sync. df S (Sync. df S) SYNC function 4 - - - - - CFC CD DD 170.0088 Sync. df S (Sync. df S) SYNC function 5 - - - - - CFC CD DD 170.0088 Sync. df S (Sync. df S) SYNC function 6 - - - - - CFC CD DD 170.0088 Sync. df S (Sync. df S) SYNC function 7 - - - - - CFC CD DD 170.0088 Sync. df S (Sync. df S) SYNC function 8 - - - - - CFC CD DD 170.0089 Sync.ddfdt (Sync.ddfdt) SYNC function 1 - - - - - CFC CD DD 170.0089 Sync.ddfdt (Sync.ddfdt) SYNC function 2 - - - - - CFC CD DD 170.0089 Sync.ddfdt (Sync.ddfdt) SYNC function 3 - - - - - CFC CD DD 170.0089 Sync.ddfdt (Sync.ddfdt) SYNC function 4 - - - - - CFC CD DD 170.0089 Sync.ddfdt (Sync.ddfdt) SYNC function 5 - - - - - CFC CD DD 170.0089 Sync.ddfdt (Sync.ddfdt) SYNC function 6 - - - - - CFC CD DD 170.0089 Sync.ddfdt (Sync.ddfdt) SYNC function 7 - - - - - CFC CD DD 170.0089 Sync.ddfdt (Sync.ddfdt) SYNC function 8 - - - - - CFC CD DD 170.0090 Sync.ddfdtS (Sync.ddfdtS) SYNC function 1 - - - - - CFC CD DD 170.0090 Sync.ddfdtS (Sync.ddfdtS) SYNC function 2 - - - - - CFC CD DD 170.0090 Sync.ddfdtS (Sync.ddfdtS) SYNC function 3 - - - - - CFC CD DD 170.0090 Sync.ddfdtS (Sync.ddfdtS) SYNC function 4 - - - - - CFC CD DD 170.0090 Sync.ddfdtS (Sync.ddfdtS) SYNC function 5 - - - - - CFC CD DD 170.0090 Sync.ddfdtS (Sync.ddfdtS) SYNC function 6 - - - - - CFC CD DD 170.0090 Sync.ddfdtS (Sync.ddfdtS) SYNC function 7 - - - - - CFC CD DD 170.0090 Sync.ddfdtS (Sync.ddfdtS) SYNC function 8 - - - - - CFC CD DD 996 Transducer 1 (Td1=) Measurement 134 136 No 9 1 CFC CD DD 997 Transducer 2 (Td2=) Measurement 134 136 No 9 2 CFC CD DD 1068 Temperature of RTD 1 ( RTD 1 =) Meas. Thermal - - - - - CFC CD DD 1069 Temperature of RTD 2 ( RTD 2 =) Meas. Thermal - - - - - CFC CD DD 1070 Temperature of RTD 3 ( RTD 3 =) Meas. Thermal - - - - - CFC CD DD 1071 Temperature of RTD 4 ( RTD 4 =) Meas. Thermal - - - - - CFC CD DD 1072 Temperature of RTD 5 ( RTD 5 =) Meas. Thermal - - - - - CFC CD DD 1073 Temperature of RTD 6 ( RTD 6 =) Meas. Thermal - - - - - CFC CD DD 1074 Temperature of RTD 7 ( RTD 7 =) Meas. Thermal - - - - - CFC CD DD 1075 Temperature of RTD 8 ( RTD 8 =) Meas. Thermal - - - - - CFC CD DD 1076 Temperature of RTD 9 ( RTD 9 =) Meas. Thermal - - - - - CFC CD DD 1077 Temperature of RTD10 ( RTD10 =) Meas. Thermal - - - - - CFC CD DD 1078 Temperature of RTD11 ( RTD11 =) Meas. Thermal - - - - - CFC CD DD CFC CD DD 1079 Temperature of RTD12 ( RTD12 =) Meas. Thermal - - - - - 15100 Voltage Input U1 (Input U1) P.System Data 2 - - - - - 15101 Voltage Input U2 (Input U2) P.System Data 2 - - - - - 15102 Voltage Input U3 (Input U3) P.System Data 2 - - - - - 15110 Current Input I1 (Input I1) P.System Data 2 - - - - - 15111 Current Input I2 (Input I2) P.System Data 2 - - - - - 15112 Current Input I3 (Input I3) P.System Data 2 - - - - - SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 363 Appendix A.10 Measured Values Position CFC Control Display Default Display Configurable in Matrix Data Unit IEC 60870-5-103 Compatibility Function Information Number Description Type No. 17100 Measurement box meas. value sensor 1 (MBS1=) Meas. Thermal - - - - - CFC CD DD 17101 Measurement box meas. value sensor 2 (MBS2=) Meas. Thermal - - - - - CFC CD DD 17102 Measurement box meas. value sensor 3 (MBS3=) Meas. Thermal - - - - - CFC CD DD 17103 Measurement box meas. value sensor 4 (MBS4=) Meas. Thermal - - - - - CFC CD DD 17104 Measurement box meas. value sensor 5 (MBS5=) Meas. Thermal - - - - - CFC CD DD 17105 Measurement box meas. value sensor 6 (MBS6=) Meas. Thermal - - - - - CFC CD DD 17106 Measurement box meas. value sensor 7 (MBS7=) Meas. Thermal - - - - - CFC CD DD 17107 Measurement box meas. value sensor 8 (MBS8=) Meas. Thermal - - - - - CFC CD DD 17108 Measurement box meas. value sensor 9 (MBS9=) Meas. Thermal - - - - - CFC CD DD 17109 Measurement box meas. value sensor 10 (MBS10=) Meas. Thermal - - - - - CFC CD DD 17110 Measurement box meas. value sensor 11 (MBS11=) Meas. Thermal - - - - - CFC CD DD 17111 Measurement box meas. value sensor 12 (MBS12=) Meas. Thermal - - - - - CFC CD DD 17112 Measurement box meas. value sensor 13 (MBS13=) Meas. Thermal - - - - - CFC CD DD 17113 Measurement box meas. value sensor 14 (MBS14=) Meas. Thermal - - - - - CFC CD DD 17114 Measurement box meas. value sensor 15 (MBS15=) Meas. Thermal - - - - - CFC CD DD 17115 Measurement box meas. value sensor 16 (MBS16=) Meas. Thermal - - - - - CFC CD DD 364 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Literature /1/ SIPROTEC 4 System Description; E50417-H1176-C151-B1 /2/ SIPROTEC DIGSI, Start Up; E50417-G1176-C152-A5 /3/ DIGSI CFC, Manual; E50417-H1176-C098-A9 /4/ SIPROTEC SIGRA 4, Manual; E50417-H1176-C070-A4 /5/ PROFIBUS DP Communication profile (available on DIGSI CD and on the Internet); C53000-L1840- B001-03 /6/ PROFIBUS DP Bus mapping 6MD663 / 6MD664 (available on DIGSI CD and on the Internet); C53000- L1840-B011-03 /7/ SIPROTEC Ethernet module IEC 61850 with 100 Mbit electrical interface, C53000-B1174-C167-02 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 365 Literature 366 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Glossary Battery The buffer battery ensures that specified data areas, flags, timers and counters are retained retentively. Bay controllers Bay controllers are devices with control and monitoring functions without protective functions. Bit pattern indication Bit pattern indication is a processing function by means of which items of digital process information applying across several inputs can be detected together in parallel and processed further. The bit pattern length can be specified as 1, 2, 3 or 4 bytes. BP_xx Bit pattern indication (Bitstring Of x Bit), x designates the length in bits (8, 16, 24 or 32 bits). C_xx Command without feedback CF_xx Command with feedback CFC Continuous Function Chart. CFC is a graphical editor with which a program can be created and configured by using ready-made blocks. CFC blocks Blocks are parts of the user program delimited by their function, their structure or their purpose. Chatter blocking A rapidly intermittent input (for example, due to a relay contact fault) is switched off after a configurable monitoring time and can thus not generate any further signal changes. The function prevents overloading of the system when a fault arises. Combination devices Combination devices are bay devices with protection functions and a control display. SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 367 Glossary Combination matrix From DIGSI V4.6 onward, up to 32 compatible SIPROTEC 4 devices can communicate with one another in an Inter Relay Communication combination (IRC combination). Which device exchanges which information is defined with the help of the combination matrix. Communication branch A communications branch corresponds to the configuration of 1 to n users that communicate by means of a common bus. Communication reference CR The communication reference describes the type and version of a station in communication by PROFIBUS. Component view In addition to a topological view, SIMATIC Manager offers you a component view. The component view does not offer any overview of the hierarchy of a project. It does, however, provide an overview of all the SIPROTEC 4 devices within a project. COMTRADE Common Format for Transient Data Exchange, format for fault records. Container If an object can contain other objects, it is called a container. The object Folder is an example of such a container. Control display The display which is displayed on devices with a large (graphic) display after you have pressed the control key is called the control display. It contains the switchgear that can be controlled in the feeder with status display. It is used to perform switching operations. Defining this display is part of the configuration. Data pane The right-hand area of the project window displays the contents of the area selected in the navigation window, for example indications, measured values, etc. of the information lists or the function selection for the device configuration. DCF77 The extremely precise official time is determined in Germany by the "Physikalisch-Technische-Bundesanstalt PTB" in Braunschweig. The atomic clock station of the PTB transmits this time via the long-wave time-signal transmitter in Mainflingen near Frankfurt/Main. The emitted time signal can be received within a radius of approx. 1,500 km from Frankfurt/Main. Device container In the Component View, all SIPROTEC 4 devices are assigned to an object of type Device container. This object is a special object of DIGSI Manager. However, since there is no component view in DIGSI Manager, this object only becomes visible in conjunction with STEP 7. 368 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Glossary Double command Double commands are process outputs which indicate 4 process states at 2 outputs: 2 defined (for example ON/OFF) and 2 undefined states (for example intermediate positions) Double-point indication Double-point indications are items of process information which indicate 4 process states at 2 inputs: 2 defined (for example ON/OFF) and 2 undefined states (for example intermediate positions). DP Double-point indication DP_I Double point indication, intermediate position 00 Drag and drop Copying, moving and linking function, used at graphics user interfaces. Objects are selected with the mouse, held and moved from one data area to another. Earth The conductive earth whose electric potential can be set equal to zero at every point. In the area of earth electrodes the earth can have a potential deviating from zero. The term "Earth reference plane" is often used for this state. Earth (verb) This term means that a conductive part is connected via an earthing system to the earth. Earthing Earthing is the total of all means and measures used for earthing. Electromagnetic compatibility Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) is the ability of an electrical apparatus to function fault-free in a specified environment without influencing the environment unduly. EMC Electromagnetic compatibility ESD protection ESD protection is the total of all the means and measures used to protect electrostatic sensitive devices. ExBPxx External bit pattern indication via an ETHERNET connection, device-specific Bit pattern indication SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 369 Glossary ExC External command without feedback via an ETHERNET connection, device-specific ExCF External command with feedback via an ETHERNET connection, device-specific ExDP External double point indication via an ETHERNET connection, device-specific Double point indication ExDP_I External double point indication via an ETHERNET connection, intermediate position 00, device-specific Double point indication ExMV External metered value via an ETHERNET connection, device-specific ExSI External single point indication via an ETHERNET connection, device-specific Single point indication ExSI_F External single point indication via an ETHERNET connection, device-specific Transient information, Single point indication Field devices Generic term for all devices assigned to the field level: Protection devices, combination devices, bay controllers. Floating Without electrical connection to the Earth. FMS communication branch Within an FMS communication branch, the users communicate on the basis of the PROFIBUS FMS protocol via a PROFIBUS FMS network. Folder This object type is used to create the hierarchical structure of a project. General interrogation (GI) During the system start-up the state of all the process inputs, of the status and of the fault image is sampled. This information is used to update the system-end process image. The current process state can also be sampled after a data loss by means of a GI. 370 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Glossary GOOSE message GOOSE messages (Generic Object Oriented Substation Event) are data packets which are transferred eventcontrolled via the Ethernet communication system. They serve for direct information exchange among the relays. This mechanism implements cross-communication between bay units. GPS Global Positioning System. Satellites with atomic clocks on board orbit the earth twice a day on different paths in approx. 20,000 km. They transmit signals which also contain the GPS universal time. The GPS receiver determines its own position from the signals received. From its position it can derive the delay time of a satellite signal and thus correct the transmitted GPS universal time. Hierarchy level Within a structure with higher-level and lower-level objects a hierarchy level is a container of equivalent objects. HV field description The HV project description file contains details of fields which exist in a ModPara-project. The actual field information of each field is stored in a HV field description file. Within the HV project description file, each field is allocated such a HV field description file by a reference to the file name. HV project description All the data is exported once the configuration and parameterization of PCUs and sub-modules using ModPara has been completed. This data is split up into several files. One file contains details about the fundamental project structure. This also includes, for example, information detailing which fields exist in this project. This file is called a HV project description file. ID Internal double point indication Double point indication ID_S Internal double point indication, intermediate position 00 Double point indication IEC International Electrotechnical Commission, international standardisation body IEC address Within an IEC bus a unique IEC address has to be assigned to each SIPROTEC 4 device. A total of 254 IEC addresses are available for each IEC bus. IEC communication branch Within an IEC communication branch the users communicate on the basis of the IEC60-870-5-103 protocol via an IEC bus. SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 371 Glossary IEC61850 International communication standard for communication in substations. The objective of this standard is the interoperability of devices from different manufacturers on the station bus. An Ethernet network is used for data transfer. Initialization string An initialization string comprises a range of modem-specific commands. These are transmitted to the modem within the framework of modem initialization. The commands can, for example, force specific settings for the modem. Inter relay communication IRC combination IRC combination Inter Relay Communication, IRC, is used for directly exchanging process information between SIPROTEC 4 devices. You require an object of type IRC combination to configure an inter relay communication. Each user of the combination and all the necessary communication parameters are defined in this object. The type and scope of the information exchanged between the users is also stored in this object. IRIG-B Time signal code of the Inter-Range Instrumentation Group IS Internal single point indication Single point indication IS_F Internal indication transient Transient information, Single point indication ISO 9001 The ISO 9000 ff range of standards defines measures used to assure the quality of a product from the development stage to the manufacturing stage. LFO filter (Low Frequency Oscillation) filter for low-frequency oscillations Link address The link address gives the address of a V3/V2 device. List view The right window section of the project window displays the names and icons of objects which represent the contents of a container selected in the tree view. Because they are displayed in the form of a list, this area is called the list view. 372 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Glossary LV Limit value LVU Limit value, user-defined Master Masters may send data to other users and request data from other users. DIGSI operates as a master. Metered value Metered values are a processing function with which the total number of discrete similar events (counting pulses) is determined for a period, usually as an integrated value. In power supply companies the electrical work is usually recorded as a metered value (energy purchase/supply, energy transportation). MLFB MLFB is the abbreviation for "MaschinenLesbare FabrikateBezeichnung" (machine-readable product designation). This is the equivalent of an order number. The type and version of a SIPROTEC 4 device are coded in the order number. Modem connection This object type contains information on both partners of a modem connection, the local modem and the remote modem. Modem profile A modem profile consists of the name of the profile, a modem driver and may also comprise several initialization commands and a user address. You can create several modem profiles for one physical modem. To do so you need to link various initialization commands or user addresses to a modem driver and its properties and save them under different names. Modems Modem profiles for a modem connection are stored in this object type. MV Measured value MVMV Metered value which is formed from the measured value MVT Measured value with time MVU Measured value, user-defined SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 373 Glossary Navigation pane The left pane of the project window displays the names and symbols of all containers of a project in the form of a folder tree. Object Each element of a project structure is called an object in DIGSI. Object properties Each object has properties. These might be general properties that are common to several objects. An object can also have specific properties. Off-line In offline mode a connection to a SIPROTEC 4 device is not required. You work with data which are stored in files. OI_F Output Indication Transient Transient information On-line When working in online mode, there is a physical connection to a SIPROTEC 4 device. This connection can be implemented as a direct connection, as a modem connection or as a PROFIBUS FMS connection. OUT Output indication Parameter set The parameter set is the set of all parameters that can be set for a SIPROTEC 4 device. Phone book User addresses for a modem connection are saved in this object type. PMV Pulse metered value Process bus Devices with a process bus interface allow direct communication with SICAM HV modules. The process bus interface is equipped with an Ethernet module. PROFIBUS PROcess FIeld BUS, the German process and field bus standard, as specified in the standard EN 50170, Volume 2, PROFIBUS. It defines the functional, electrical, and mechanical properties for a bit-serial field bus. 374 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Glossary PROFIBUS address Within a PROFIBUS network a unique PROFIBUS address has to be assigned to each SIPROTEC 4 device. A total of 254 PROFIBUS addresses are available for each PROFIBUS network. Project Content-wise, a project is the image of a real power supply system. Graphically, a project is represented as a number of objects which are integrated in a hierarchical structure. Physically, a project consists of a number of directories and files containing project data. Protection devices All devices with a protective function and no control display. Reorganizing Frequent addition and deletion of objects results in memory areas that can no longer be used. By reorganizing projects, you can release these memory areas again. However, a cleanup also reassigns the VD addresses. The consequence is that all SIPROTEC 4 devices have to be reinitialized. RIO file Relay data Interchange format by Omicron. RSxxx-interface Serial interfaces RS232, RS422/485 SCADA Interface Rear serial interface on the devices for connecting to a control system via IEC or PROFIBUS. Service port Rear serial interface on the devices for connecting DIGSI (for example, via modem). Setting parameters General term for all adjustments made to the device. Parameterization jobs are executed by means of DIGSI or, in some cases, directly on the device. SI Single point indication SI_F Single point indication transient Transient information, Single point indication SICAM WinCC The SICAM WinCC operator control and monitoring system displays the state of your network graphically, visualizes alarms, interrupts and indications, archives the network data, offers the possibility of intervening manually in the process and manages the system rights of the individual employee. SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 375 Glossary SICAM PAS (Power Automation System) Substation control system: The range of possible configurations spans from integrated standalone systems (SICAM PAS and M&C with SICAM PAS CC on one computer) to separate hardware for SICAM PAS and SICAM PAS CC to distributed systems with multiple SICAM Station Units. The software is a modular system with basic and optional packages. SICAM PAS is a purely distributed system: the process interface is implemented by the use of bay units / remote terminal units. SICAM Station Unit The SICAM Station Unit with its special hardware (no fan, no rotating parts) and its Windows XP Embedded operating system is the basis for SICAM PAS. Single command Single commands are process outputs which indicate 2 process states (for example, ON/OFF) at one output. Single point indication Single indications are items of process information which indicate 2 process states (for example, ON/OFF) at one output. SIPROTEC The registered trademark SIPROTEC is used for devices implemented on system base V4. SIPROTEC 4 device This object type represents a real SIPROTEC 4 device with all the setting values and process data it contains. SIPROTEC 4 variant This object type represents a variant of an object of type SIPROTEC 4 device. The device data of this variant may well differ from the device data of the original object. However, all variants derived from the original object have the same VD address as the original object. For this reason they always correspond to the same real SIPROTEC 4 device as the original object. Objects of type SIPROTEC 4 variant have a variety of uses, such as documenting different operating states when entering parameter settings of a SIPROTEC 4 device. Slave A slave may only exchange data with a master after being prompted to do so by the master. SIPROTEC 4 devices operate as slaves. Time stamp Time stamp is the assignment of the real time to a process event. Topological view DIGSI Manager always displays a project in the topological view. This shows the hierarchical structure of a project with all available objects. Transformer Tap Indication Transformer tap indication is a processing function on the DI by means of which the tap of the transformer tap changer can be detected together in parallel and processed further. 376 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Glossary Transient information A transient information is a brief transient single-point indication at which only the coming of the process signal is detected and processed immediately. Tree view The left pane of the project window displays the names and symbols of all containers of a project in the form of a folder tree. This area is called the tree view. TxTap Transformer Tap Indication User address A user address comprises the name of the user, the national code, the area code and the user-specific phone number. Users From DIGSI V4.6 onward , up to 32 compatible SIPROTEC 4 devices can communicate with one another in an Inter Relay Communication combination. The individual participating devices are called users. VD A VD (Virtual Device) includes all communication objects and their properties and states that are used by a communication user through services. A VD can be a physical device, a module of a device or a software module. VD address The VD address is assigned automatically by DIGSI Manager. It exists only once in the entire project and thus serves to identify unambiguously a real SIPROTEC 4 device. The VD address assigned by DIGSI Manager must be transferred to the SIPROTEC 4 device in order to allow communication with DIGSI Device Editor. VFD A VFD (Virtual Field Device) includes all communication objects and their properties and states that are used by a communication user through services. VI VI stands for Value Indication. SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 377 Glossary 378 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Index A Adaptive Dead Time 274 Adaptive Dead Time (ADT) 140 Additional functions 277 Alternating voltage 252 Analog inputs 250 Angle adjustment 82 Assignment of the D-sub socket 232 Auto-reclosure Multiple 131 Automatic Reclosure 274 Automatic reclosure Automatic Reclosure Function 122, 122 Auxiliary Contacts of the CB 105 Auxiliary voltage 211, 252 B Bay interlocking 96 Binary input Switching threshold 211 Binary inputs 219, 252 Binary outputs 252 Busbar Tripping 244 C Cabinet mounting 227 cable shield 232 CFC 22 Chatter ON 30 Check: command job 41 Check: Switching states of binary inputs and outputs 240 Check: User-defined functions 246 Circuit breaker Fault 112 Position detection 151 Position logic 151 Circuit breaker closing time 82 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection 102 End Fault Protection 272 Pole Discrepancy Supervision 272 Circuit breaker failure protection 116 Circuit breaker monitoring 272 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Initiation conditions 272 Circuit breaker not operational 118 Circuit-breaker failure protection Times 272 Climatic stress 260 Clock synchronisation 31 Clock Time Synchronisation 277 Command acknowledgement 42 Command processing 38 Command types 40 Commissioning aids 277 Connecting external instrument transformers 196 Connector Checks 235 Construction designs 261 CPU Jumper settings 216 Current flow monitoring 104 Current inputs 17, 250 D D-sub socket 232 De-interlockings 101 Dead Bus 83 Dead bus connection 69 Dead Line 83 Dead Line Check 140, 274 Dead line connection 69 Delay times single stage/two stage breaker failure protection 110 Deployment Conditions 260 Device assembly 225 Dimensions: Cabinet flush mounting 278 Dimensions: D-subminiature Connector of Dongle Cable 281 Dimensions: Detached Operator Panel 280 Dimensions: Panel flush mounting 278 Dimensions: Surface mounting housing with detached operation panel 279 Dimensions: Surface mounting housing without operation panel 279 Direct voltage 252 Disassembly of the device 212 Display lighting 29, 33 379 Index Dongle cable 229 Double operation blocking 100 E Electrical Tests 257 EMC 232 EMC Tests for Interference Emission (Type Test) 258 EMC Tests for Interference Immunity (Type Tests) 257 EN100-module Interface Selection 195 End Fault Protection 113 End fault protection 119 Ethernet EN 100 232 External instrument transformers 276 External minute pulse 31 Inter-device communication 18 Inter-device communication interface 254 Inter-relay communication 224 Interfaces D-sub socket 232 Replacement modules 223 serial 211, 223 Interlocking checks 22 Interruption in communication 36 IRC Combination user 167 combination user 163 Failure monitoring 164 Routing rules 170 Isolation Test 257 J F Fault Recording 35 Feedback monitoring 43 Feeder voltage 70 Final preparation of the device 247 Flash-Over Protection 114 Forced 3-pole Trip 139 Frequency difference 84 Frequency working range 84 Function blocks 265 Function logic 150 Functional scope 26 G Jumpers 211, 211, 211, 211, 211, 216, 217, 219, 223 K Keyswitch 22 L Limit measured values 45 Limit range behaviour 251, 251, 251, 251, 251 Limits for CFC Blocks 268 Limits for User-defined Functions 268 Line energization recognition 150 Live status contact 216 Lower voltage limit Vmin 83 GOOSE 181 M H Humidity 260 Hysteresis 84 I IDC combination 164 Immunity 232 Initiation breaker failure protection 106 Input/output modules Jumper positions 219, 221 Inter Relay Communication 159 Inter relay communication 23 Inter relay communication with IEC61850 181 380 Measured value processing 22 Measured values Limit measured value 45 Operational measured values 45 User-defined 45 Measured values derived 45 Measurement monophase 55 three-phase 56 Measurement Box 196 Measurement inputs 17 Measuring transducer 17, 26, 63 Measuring transducer inputs 250 Measuring transducer packets 60 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 Index Mechanical Tests 259 Metered values Measured value / metered value 63 Precision 60 Module arrangement 6MD663 214 Module arrangement 6MD664 214 Module arrangement of 6MD662 213 Monitoring functions 23 N Nominal transformer current 54, 55, 56, 58 Nominal transformer voltage 53, 55, 56, 58 O Open pole detector 153 Operating metered values 60 Operational measured values 45, 270, 276 Operator Interface 253 Ordering Information 284 Oscillographic Recording for Test 245 Output relays binary outputs 253 P Password 26 Phase segregated initiation of the breaker failure protection 108 Pickup logic for the entire device 155 Pole Discrepancy Supervision 114 Pole discrepancy supervision 119 Power metering 60 Power supply 252 PROFIBUS 211, 223, 224, 232 PROFIBUS DP 20 Pulse metered value 61 R Rack mounting 227 Rated system frequency 28 Reclose Cycle 143 Reclosure Cycle 141, 142 Reduced Dead Time 140, 274 Reference voltage 70 Reference voltages 68 Regulations 257 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011 S Secondary rated transformer voltage V1 82 Secondary rated transformer voltage V2 83 Sequence in the command path 40 Service interface 212 Service/ Modem Interface 254 Set points 22 Single-stage breaker failure protection 118 Standard interlocking 95 Start Test Measurement Recording 245 Subnetworks 19, 84 Summertime 32 Switch delay time 84 Switchgear interlocking 73, 92 Switching authority 22, 26, 98 Switching device control 262 Switching direction check 100 Switching mode 22, 26, 99 Switching sequence 72 Switching sequences 22 Synchrocheck 19, 72 Synchronisation 17 Synchronisation check Duration 83 Synchronization 21, 26 Check 73, 79 Conditions 68 Input indications 79 Measured values 82 Measuring 74 Selection of SYNC function group 72 Start conditions 73 synchronization Delay time 70 Function group 71 Output indications 80 synchronization synchronization comparison 70 System interface 212, 255 T Temperatures 260 Terminating resistors 211, 223, 224 Test mode 31, 238 Test: Circuit Breaker Failure Protection 243 Test: System interface 238 Test: Trip/close of configured resurces 246 Threshold switch 66, 67 Threshold value 83 Time synchronisation 23 Time Synchronisation Interface 256 Time synchronization interface 233 381 Index Time Tagging 277 Transfer trip to the remote end circuit breaker 112 Transformer class 273 Transmission block 238 Transmission thresholds 66 Trip command duration 158 Tripping logic of the entire device 156 Two-stage breaker failure protection 117 U Upper voltage limit Vmax 83 V Vibration and Shock Stress during Stationary Use 259 Vibration and Shock Stress during Transport 259 Voltage application 70, 72 Voltage difference 84 Voltage inputs 17 Voltage supervision 154 W Web Monitor 202 382 SIPROTEC, 6MD66x, Manual C53000-G1876-C102-7, Release date 08.2011